inventorydocshare01.docshare.tips/files/29761/297618648.pdf| toc | 9parent lot reservations for...

InventorySYSPRO 6.1 SP1

Published: June 2012

SYSPRO AuthoringCopyright © 2012 Syspro LtdAll rights reservedNo part of this document may be copied, photocopied, or reproduced in any form or by anymeans without permission in writing from Syspro Ltd. SYSPRO is a trademark of Syspro Ltd. Allother trademarks, service marks, products or services are trademarks or registered trademarksof their respective holders.Syspro Ltd reserves the right to alter the contents of this document without prior notice. Whileevery effort is made to ensure that the contents of this document are correct, no liabilitywhatsoever will be accepted for any errors or omissions.This document is a copyright work and is protected by local copyright, civil and criminal lawand international treaty. This document further contains secret, confidential and proprietaryinformation belonging to Syspro Ltd. It is disclosed solely for the purposes of it being used inthe context of the licensed use of the Syspro Ltd computer software products to which it relates.Such copyright works and information may not be published, disseminated, broadcast, copiedor used for any other purpose. This document and all portions thereof included, but withoutlimitation, copyright, trade secret and other intellectual property rights subsisting therein andrelating thereto, are and shall at all times remain the sole property of Syspro Ltd.

| TOC | 3

ContentsSetup............................................................................................................................... 12

Inventory Setup................................................................................................................................. 12General................................................................................................................................... 12Options....................................................................................................................................24History..................................................................................................................................... 34Periods.................................................................................................................................... 38User Defined...........................................................................................................................40Documents.............................................................................................................................. 40Current Month.........................................................................................................................42Depletion................................................................................................................................. 42Browse.................................................................................................................................... 44Numbering...............................................................................................................................46Configurator............................................................................................................................ 50

Actual Costing Conversion Review...................................................................................................51Serials..................................................................................................................................... 52Lots......................................................................................................................................... 52Processing Sequence.............................................................................................................52

Stock Code Maintenance.................................................................................................................. 54Stock Code Maintenance....................................................................................................... 54Stock Code Details.................................................................................................................58Replenishment........................................................................................................................ 68Production Details...................................................................................................................75Sales Details...........................................................................................................................79Tracking.................................................................................................................................. 87Other....................................................................................................................................... 92Additional Fields..................................................................................................................... 93

Stock Codes...................................................................................................................................... 94Stock Codes........................................................................................................................... 94Stock Codes Listview............................................................................................................. 98

Warehouses for Stock Code...........................................................................................................101Warehouses for Stock Code................................................................................................ 101

Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code.......................................................................................103Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code............................................................................ 104Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code............................................................................ 104

Maintain Hold Status.......................................................................................................................117Maintain Hold Status............................................................................................................ 117

Copy Stock Code............................................................................................................................ 118Copy Stock Code................................................................................................................. 118Copy Stock Code................................................................................................................. 120

Warehouse Maintenance.................................................................................................................121Warehouse Maintenance......................................................................................................121

Copy Stock Codes to New Wh.......................................................................................................131Copy Stock Codes to New Warehouses............................................................................. 131Copy Options........................................................................................................................ 132Validate Report..................................................................................................................... 135

Buyers Maintenance........................................................................................................................135Buyers Maintenance............................................................................................................. 135Buyer Code Maintenance.....................................................................................................135

Inventory Planner Maintenance...................................................................................................... 136Inventory Planner Maintenance............................................................................................136

Unit of Measure Maintenance.........................................................................................................137

| TOC | 4

Unit of Measure Maintenance.............................................................................................. 137Unit of Measure Maintenance.............................................................................................. 138

Alternate Stock Codes.................................................................................................................... 139Alternate Stock Codes..........................................................................................................139Alternate Stock Codes Maintenance....................................................................................140

Alternate Suppliers.......................................................................................................................... 142Alternate Suppliers............................................................................................................... 142Alternate Supplier Maintenance........................................................................................... 143

Approved Manufacturer Maintenance............................................................................................. 144Approved Manufacturer Maintenance.................................................................................. 144Example................................................................................................................................ 145

Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance....................................................................... 145Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance.............................................................146Approved Manuf. Part Number Maintenance.......................................................................146

Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance............................................................................ 148Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance..................................................................148

Stock Code Price Maintenance...................................................................................................... 149Stock Code Price Maintenance............................................................................................150

Pricing for a Price Code................................................................................................................. 151Price Code Price Maintenance.............................................................................................151

Stock Code Quantity Discounts...................................................................................................... 152Inventory Quantity Discounts............................................................................................... 152

Foreign Price Codes....................................................................................................................... 154Foreign Currency Price Codes.............................................................................................154

Foreign Purchase Prices.................................................................................................................154Foreign Prices.......................................................................................................................155Foreign Price Maintenance.................................................................................................. 155

Inventory Sales Quantity History.....................................................................................................155Inventory Initial Sales Quantity History................................................................................ 155Inventory Sales Quantity History Take-on........................................................................... 156

Inventory Initial Aged Valuation...................................................................................................... 157Inventory Initial Aged Valuation............................................................................................157Aged Valuation Take-on.......................................................................................................157Updating of Aged Valuation Buckets................................................................................... 158

Inventory Document Format............................................................................................................160Inventory Document Format.................................................................................................160Format Options..................................................................................................................... 165Preferences...........................................................................................................................166Heading Section................................................................................................................... 170Detail Section........................................................................................................................170Total Section.........................................................................................................................173Serial Number Tracking Section.......................................................................................... 173MS Word Options.................................................................................................................174

Inventory Label Format................................................................................................................... 174Inventory Label Format........................................................................................................ 174Label Preferences.................................................................................................................175Label Detail Section............................................................................................................. 176Price Section.........................................................................................................................178

Inventory Stock Take Ticket Format...............................................................................................179Inventory Stock Take Ticket Format.................................................................................... 180Ticket Preferences................................................................................................................181Ticket Detail Section.............................................................................................................182

Transaction Processing.............................................................................................. 185Inventory Movements...................................................................................................................... 185

Inventory Movements........................................................................................................... 185Preferences...........................................................................................................................189

| TOC | 5

Transaction Date.................................................................................................................. 192Receipts................................................................................................................................ 192Adjustments.......................................................................................................................... 198Cost Changes....................................................................................................................... 201Cost Modifications................................................................................................................ 203Transfers OUT...................................................................................................................... 204Transfers IN.......................................................................................................................... 208Transfers IN (GIT)................................................................................................................ 210Immediate Transfers.............................................................................................................218No Destination Transfers......................................................................................................221Physical Counts.................................................................................................................... 223Bin Transfers........................................................................................................................ 224Expense Issues.................................................................................................................... 226Backflushing..........................................................................................................................229Stock Information..................................................................................................................237Recap Totals.........................................................................................................................238List of Journals..................................................................................................................... 239Journal Entries......................................................................................................................239Cost Multiplier Calculations.................................................................................................. 241

Actual Cost Allocation..................................................................................................................... 241Actual Cost Allocation.......................................................................................................... 241Actual Costing Allocation Details......................................................................................... 242

Serial Entry for Receipts.................................................................................................................243Serial Number Capture.........................................................................................................243Manual Serials Capture........................................................................................................243Batch Serials Capture.......................................................................................................... 246Effect of Serial Numbers on Transactions........................................................................... 247

Inventory Document Print................................................................................................................250Inventory Document Print.....................................................................................................250Report Options......................................................................................................................251Inventory Print Totals........................................................................................................... 253Inventory On-line Document.................................................................................................254

Price-Cost Percentage Change...................................................................................................... 256Price/Cost Percentage Change............................................................................................256Price/Cost Percentage Change Criteria............................................................................... 256Price/Cost Percentage Change Review...............................................................................260

Minimum Quantity Calculation........................................................................................................ 260Minimum Quantity Calculation..............................................................................................260Information............................................................................................................................ 261Report................................................................................................................................... 262Calculation Formula..............................................................................................................262

Stock Take System......................................................................................................263Stock Take System......................................................................................................................... 263Stock Take Query........................................................................................................................... 263

Stock Take Query.................................................................................................................263Warehouse Details............................................................................................................... 264Stock Codes......................................................................................................................... 264

Stock Take Selection...................................................................................................................... 266Stock Take Selection............................................................................................................266Stock Take Selection............................................................................................................267Selected Stock Codes Report..............................................................................................269

Stock Take Update..........................................................................................................................269Stock Take Update...............................................................................................................269Stock Take Update Quantities and Costs............................................................................270Selected Stock Codes Report..............................................................................................271

Inventory Stock Take Tickets..........................................................................................................271

| TOC | 6

Report Options......................................................................................................................271Stock Take Forms...........................................................................................................................272

Report Options......................................................................................................................272Output Options......................................................................................................................274

Inventory Stock Take Capture........................................................................................................ 274Stock Take Capture..............................................................................................................274Stock Take Quantity Capture by Stock Code......................................................................277Stock Take Quantity Capture by Ticket............................................................................... 284Stock Take Quantity Capture by Bin................................................................................... 287

Stock Codes in Stock Take............................................................................................................ 292Stock Codes in Stock Take for Warehouse.........................................................................292

Ticket Numbers for Warehouse...................................................................................................... 293Ticket Numbers for Warehouse........................................................................................... 293

Stock Take Import...........................................................................................................................293Stock Take Import................................................................................................................ 293Stock Take Import Selection................................................................................................ 294Stock Take Import Report.................................................................................................... 296Stock Take Import Report - HTML...................................................................................... 296File Layout............................................................................................................................ 296

Stock Take by Ticket...................................................................................................................... 299Report Options......................................................................................................................299Output Options......................................................................................................................301Report Details....................................................................................................................... 301

Inventory Stock Take Report By Stock Code.................................................................................301Report Options......................................................................................................................301Output Options......................................................................................................................302Report Details....................................................................................................................... 302

Stock Take Uncaptured Stock Quantities.......................................................................................303Report Options......................................................................................................................303Output Options......................................................................................................................304

Inventory Stock Take Variance Report...........................................................................................304Report Options......................................................................................................................304Output Options......................................................................................................................307Report Details....................................................................................................................... 307

Stock Take Confirmation.................................................................................................................307Stock Take Confirmation...................................................................................................... 308Confirmation Options............................................................................................................ 309Stock take Confirmation Error Report..................................................................................311Stock Take Confirmation Report..........................................................................................311

Stock Take Cancellation................................................................................................................. 312Stock Take Cancellation.......................................................................................................312Warehouse Information........................................................................................................ 312

Serial Tracking System............................................................................................... 313Serial Tracking System................................................................................................................... 313Serial Number Header Maintenance...............................................................................................313

Serial Number Header Maintenance....................................................................................313Serial Number Take-On.................................................................................................................. 314

Serial Number Take-on........................................................................................................ 314Take-on Header....................................................................................................................315Take-on Transaction.............................................................................................................316

Transaction Posting.........................................................................................................................317Serial Tracking Transaction Posting.................................................................................... 317Transaction Details............................................................................................................... 320Serial Details.........................................................................................................................321

Serial File Purge............................................................................................................................. 323Serial File Purge...................................................................................................................323

| TOC | 7

Information............................................................................................................................ 324Report................................................................................................................................... 325

Serial Number Maintenance............................................................................................................325Serial Numbers..................................................................................................................... 326

Browse on Serial Number Transactions......................................................................................... 329Transactions for Serial Number........................................................................................... 330

Component to Parent Serial Tracking Query..................................................................................331Component to Parent Serial Tracking Query.......................................................................331Component to Parent Details...............................................................................................331Component to Parent Serial Information..............................................................................331

Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock Code...................................................................................332Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock Code........................................................................ 332

Component to Parent Tracking Query............................................................................................334Component to Parent Tracking Query................................................................................. 334Serial Tracking......................................................................................................................335Lot Tracking.......................................................................................................................... 336

Serial File Balance Report.............................................................................................................. 337Report Options......................................................................................................................337Output Options......................................................................................................................338

Serial Tracking Report.................................................................................................................... 338Report Options......................................................................................................................338Additional Options.................................................................................................................340Service Options.................................................................................................................... 341Transaction Options..............................................................................................................342Output Options......................................................................................................................343

GL Integration.............................................................................................................. 344Inventory GL Integration..................................................................................................................344

Inventory GL Integration Update..........................................................................................344Information............................................................................................................................ 345Report................................................................................................................................... 346

Inventory Journals........................................................................................................................... 346Inventory Journals................................................................................................................ 346

Inventory Journal Report.................................................................................................................348Report Options......................................................................................................................348Output Options......................................................................................................................350Report Details....................................................................................................................... 350

Inventory GL Distribution.................................................................................................................351Report Options......................................................................................................................351Output Options......................................................................................................................353Report Details....................................................................................................................... 354

Period End Processing............................................................................................... 355Inventory Period End.......................................................................................................................355

Inventory Period End............................................................................................................355Information............................................................................................................................ 356Report................................................................................................................................... 362Warehouse Balance Report................................................................................................. 362Inventory Balance Report.....................................................................................................363GIT Balance Report..............................................................................................................363Period End Reporting........................................................................................................... 363Balance................................................................................................................................. 363Month End............................................................................................................................ 365Year End...............................................................................................................................366Purge.....................................................................................................................................366

Queries.......................................................................................................................... 369Inventory Query............................................................................................................................... 369

| TOC | 8

Inventory Query.................................................................................................................... 369Stock Code Details...............................................................................................................375Distribution............................................................................................................................ 376Production............................................................................................................................. 377Warehouse Values............................................................................................................... 378Warehouse History............................................................................................................... 383Movements............................................................................................................................385Notes.....................................................................................................................................388User Defined.........................................................................................................................388Custom Form........................................................................................................................ 389

Goods in Inspection for Stock Code...............................................................................................389Goods in Inspection for Stock Code....................................................................................389Inspection Transactions for GRN......................................................................................... 391Hold.......................................................................................................................................392

Allocations for Stock Code..............................................................................................................392Allocations for Stock Code...................................................................................................392

RMA for Stock Code.......................................................................................................................394RMA for Stock Code............................................................................................................ 394

Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code..................................................................................... 395Blanket Purchase Orders for Stock Code............................................................................395

Requisition Query for Stock Code.................................................................................................. 396Requisitions...........................................................................................................................397

Requisition Query Details................................................................................................................400Requisition Query Details.....................................................................................................400Details................................................................................................................................... 400Routings................................................................................................................................ 401

GL Commitment Status Query........................................................................................................401Commitment Values............................................................................................................. 401

Notation List.....................................................................................................................................402Notation List..........................................................................................................................402

Sales Orders for Stock Code..........................................................................................................403Sales Orders for Stock Code...............................................................................................403Sales Orders.........................................................................................................................405Sales Order Selection.......................................................................................................... 407

Purchase Orders for Stock Code....................................................................................................408Purchase Orders for Stock Code.........................................................................................408

Browse on ECC Rev/Rel................................................................................................................ 412Revision/Release for Stock Code........................................................................................ 413

P/O Browse on Order Lines History............................................................................................... 414Detailed History for Purchase Order....................................................................................414

Work in Progress for Stock Code...................................................................................................414Work in Progress for Stock Code........................................................................................ 415

Inventory Movements for Stock Code............................................................................................ 417Inventory Movements for Stock Code..................................................................................417Movements for Stock Code..................................................................................................419

Quotation Query by Stock Code.....................................................................................................421Quotation Query by Stock Code..........................................................................................422

ECC Revision/Releases.................................................................................................................. 422Revision/Release for Stock Code........................................................................................ 422

ECC Stock Quantities..................................................................................................................... 423Stock Information for Rev/Rel.............................................................................................. 423Stock Information for Rev/Rel.............................................................................................. 423

Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code....................................................................................424Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code......................................................................... 424

Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code........................................................................................ 425Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code............................................................................. 425

| TOC | 9

Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code Listview............................................................... 426Inventory Journal Zoom.................................................................................................................. 427

Zoom on Inventory Journal.................................................................................................. 427Inventory Journal Zoom.................................................................................................................. 427

Inventory Journal Summary Details..................................................................................... 428Inventory Journal Summary Entries..................................................................................... 428

Browse on Operations.....................................................................................................................429Stock Code for Operations Browse..................................................................................... 429Stock Code Details...............................................................................................................429Stock Code Information........................................................................................................430Operations.............................................................................................................................430

Customer Price Query.....................................................................................................................431Customer Price Query..........................................................................................................431Best Price Details.................................................................................................................434Stock Code Details...............................................................................................................436Last Price Paid..................................................................................................................... 438Price Category/Code Table.................................................................................................. 438Inventory Prices.................................................................................................................... 439Customer Contracts..............................................................................................................439Order Discounts....................................................................................................................439Product Class Discounts...................................................................................................... 439Service Charges................................................................................................................... 440Trade Promotions................................................................................................................. 440

Inventory at a Glance..................................................................................................................... 441Inventory at a Glance...........................................................................................................442Valuation Criteria.................................................................................................................. 442Inventory Valuation At A Glance..........................................................................................444

Browses........................................................................................................................ 445Inventory Warehouses.....................................................................................................................445

Warehouse Maintenance......................................................................................................445Suppliers for Stock Code................................................................................................................ 447

Suppliers for Stock Code..................................................................................................... 447Approved Manufacturers................................................................................................................. 448

Approved Manufacturers...................................................................................................... 448Approved Manufacturers Parts....................................................................................................... 449

Approved Manufacturer's Part Numbers.............................................................................. 449Cost Unit of Measure......................................................................................................................451

Inventory Cost Unit of Measure........................................................................................... 451Pricing for a Stock Code................................................................................................................ 453

Pricing for Stock Code......................................................................................................... 453Browse on GIT References............................................................................................................ 454

Goods in Transit References............................................................................................... 454Goods in Transit Selection...................................................................................................456

Reports..........................................................................................................................458SRS Output Options........................................................................................................................458

Output Options......................................................................................................................458Inventory Valuation..........................................................................................................................465

Report Options......................................................................................................................465Additional Options.................................................................................................................469Output Options......................................................................................................................470Report Details....................................................................................................................... 470

Inventory Aged Valuation................................................................................................................ 471Report Options......................................................................................................................471Other Options....................................................................................................................... 473

Inventory Movement Report............................................................................................................474Report Options......................................................................................................................475

| TOC | 10

Movement Options................................................................................................................477Other Options....................................................................................................................... 478Output Options......................................................................................................................479Report Details....................................................................................................................... 479

Kardex Report................................................................................................................................. 479Report Options......................................................................................................................480Other Options....................................................................................................................... 485Kardex Report Calculation................................................................................................... 486

Inventory Price List..........................................................................................................................487Report Options......................................................................................................................487Output Options......................................................................................................................488

Price History Report........................................................................................................................489Report Options......................................................................................................................489Output Options......................................................................................................................490Report Details....................................................................................................................... 490

ABC Analysis...................................................................................................................................490Report Options......................................................................................................................491Output Options......................................................................................................................492Report Details....................................................................................................................... 492Classifications....................................................................................................................... 492

Warehouse Activity..........................................................................................................................492Report Options......................................................................................................................493Report Filters........................................................................................................................ 495Output Options......................................................................................................................496

Stock Take Exception..................................................................................................................... 496Report Options......................................................................................................................497Output Options......................................................................................................................499

Warehouse Exception..................................................................................................................... 499Report Options......................................................................................................................499Report Filters........................................................................................................................ 502Output Options......................................................................................................................503Report Details....................................................................................................................... 503

Superseded Clearing Stock............................................................................................................ 503Report Options......................................................................................................................503Output Options......................................................................................................................506

Purchasing Work Sheet.................................................................................................................. 506Report Options......................................................................................................................506Criteria...................................................................................................................................508Output Options......................................................................................................................510Report Details....................................................................................................................... 510

Inventory Goods in Inspection........................................................................................................ 510Report Options......................................................................................................................510Output Options......................................................................................................................512Report Details....................................................................................................................... 512

Goods in Inspection Offsite.............................................................................................................512Report Options......................................................................................................................512Output Options......................................................................................................................514

Inventory Amendment Journal........................................................................................................ 514Report Options......................................................................................................................514Output Options......................................................................................................................514

List of Buyers.................................................................................................................................. 514Report Options......................................................................................................................515Output Options......................................................................................................................515

List of Inventory Costs Um............................................................................................................. 516List of Inventory Cost Units of Measure.............................................................................. 516Output Options......................................................................................................................516

| TOC | 11

Inventory Notations..........................................................................................................................516Report Options......................................................................................................................516Output Options......................................................................................................................518

List of Planners............................................................................................................................... 518Report Options......................................................................................................................518Output Options......................................................................................................................519

List of Warehouses......................................................................................................................... 519Report Options......................................................................................................................519Output Options......................................................................................................................520

Inventory Label Print....................................................................................................................... 520Report Options......................................................................................................................520Other Options....................................................................................................................... 522

| Setup | 12

Copyright © 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

Setup

Inventory SetupYou use the Inventory Setup program to define the setup options of your Inventory module.

The Inventory Setup program comprises the following tabs:

• General• Options• History• Periods• User Defined• Documents• Current Month• Depletion• Browse• Numbering• Configurator

General

Field Values DescriptionFIFO valuation

FIFO valuation Select this to value your inventory on a First-In-First-Out basis.

Note:• Implications of selecting this option are that stock

on hand cannot be allowed to go negative in anywarehouse. However, items defined as Floorstock(Stock Code Maintenance) and stocked in theFloorstock warehouse (WIP Setup) can have anegative balance (see WIP Issue Floor StockAllocations).

In addition, inventory costs cannot be held in a unitof measure other than stocked.

• If you selected the option: Costing per warehouse,and the costing method for any warehouse is setto FIFO (Inventory Warehouses), then FIFOvaluation is automatically enabled and cannot bedeselected.

• When you select Actual costing, this option isautomatically selected, because Actual costing usesthe FIFO valuation architecture to track and processcosts.

Multiple bins Multiple bins can be enabled for all warehouses or for selectedwarehouses only.

Refer to Multiple bins for additional information.

| Setup | 13


Field Values DescriptionMultiple bins Select this if you require a specific bin to be entered when you

receive items into stock, issue items from stock, transfer itemsbetween warehouses and capture stock take information.

When you select this option, all warehouses are set to requiringmultiple bins. A single bin is created for each stock code/warehouse combination with the entire quantity on hand forthe stock code/warehouse against it. If a bin location has beendefined against the stock code's warehouse, then this binlocation is used to generate the default bin, otherwise, thewarehouse code becomes the bin location.

Once you have enabled multiple bins for the company, youcan optionally disable bins for specific warehouses, using theWarehouses function below. However, this function is availableonly after you save your settings and reload the InventorySetup program.

The following points should be noted if you change this optionafter the system is up-and-running, particularly if sales ordersor lot numbers already exist on file:

• When switching multiple bins on, the Purge and Archiveprogram is automatically run to ensure that the defaultbin created is inserted into existing lot records and theirassociated transactions against your traceable or ECCcontrolled stock items.

You should run the Balance function of the Order Purgeprogram to ensure there are no quantities in ship without binallocations.

• If you activate this option at any time after the system hasbeen running without it, you must run the Balance functionof the Inventory Period End program, to transfer thequantity on hand to the default bin created.

• When switching multiple bins off for all warehouses, thesystem automatically performs the processes required toroll the bins (i.e. transfer the quantity on hand to the defaultbins).

All bins are deleted against the stock code/warehousecombination and all sales order bin allocations are deleted.The quantities on hand for stock items in the warehouseare transferred to the default bin. The default bin locationis generated from the warehouse code if no default binis setup against the stock code/warehouse combination(Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code).

The Purge and Archiveprogram is automatically run toensure that the bins are cleared from existing lot recordsand their associated transactions.

You can run the Balance function of the Inventory PeriodEnd program and the Balance function of the Order Purgeprogram, although this is not a requirement.

Warehouses Select this to apply multiple bins selectively by warehouse.

| Setup | 14


Field Values DescriptionThe Inventory Warehouses program is loaded automatically,enabling you to toggle the Multiple bins in use option foreach warehouse. This facility is only available from within theInventory Setup program.

Note:• The Warehouses function is available only after you

have enabled multiple bins, saved your settings andreloaded the Inventory Setup program.

• When activating (or deactivating) multiple bins for awarehouse, a number of processes are performedto ensure data consistency (see WarehouseMaintenance).

Amendmentjournals required

Yes Select this to retain details of any changes and deletions ofitems within the Stock Code Maintenance, Cost Implosionand Lead Time Calculation programs.

No Select this if you do not want to monitor information that haschanged for stock items held on file.

Yes, with additions Select this to retain details of any changes and deletions ofitems as well as any stock items that were added to the file.

Note:You can print details of additions, changes anddeletions using the Inventory Amendment Journalprogram.

Rounding of WIPallocs to stockcode's max no ofdecimals

This is used when the number of decimals assigned to thestock item differs from the number of decimals specified at theQuantity per field for the same item.

5-up, 4-down Select this to round up decimal places of .5 or larger, and toround down decimal places of .4 or less.

Round up Select this to round up decimals. This option is appropriate onlywhere the full 3 decimal places is not held against the stockitem on the product master file.

Round down Select this to round down decimal places. This option isappropriate only where the full 3 decimal places is not heldagainst the stock item on the product master file. In this case,you are advised to select the Round up option, as values lessthan 0.5 will be rounded down to zero.

Percentagebreaks for ABCanalysis

| Setup | 15


Field Values DescriptionA/B percentagebreak

You use this field to indicate the cut-off percentage for A andB items for classifying on the ABC Analysis, based on theannual usage value of items (i.e. the total cost of each itemsold or issued over the past year).

This defaults to 80.

B/C percentagebreak

You use this field to indicate the cut-off percentage for B andC items for classifying on the ABC Analysis, based on theannual usage value of items (i.e. the total cost of each itemsold or issued over the past year).

This defaults to 95.

Acceptablecost variancepercentage

You use this field to indicate the percentage by which:

• the cost of an item received into stock is allowed to differfrom the cost of the item held on file. Receipts includereceipts from Work in Progress and from Purchase orders.

• a cost change to an item is allowed to differ from the cost ofthe item held on file (Inventory Movements).

A warning is displayed if this percentage is exceeded. You can,however, define a password which has to be entered when thevariance is exceeded. See Inventory override on inventory costvariance (Password Setup).

Note:• The warning does not apply to receipts if your

costing method is set to Standard costing, as itemsare receipted at standard cost and therefore novariance occurs.

• The warning only applies to cost changes made toindividual items and not to bulk cost changes (e.g.Price-Cost Percentage Change and TransferBOM Costs to Wh Costs).

Reject importreceipts if costvariance exceeded

Select this if you want to reject imported job and purchaseorder receipts if they exceed the acceptable cost variancepercentage defined.

If you do not select this option then no check is performed toensure that the receipt cost does not exceed the acceptablecost variance percentage when importing job and purchaseorder receipts.

Note:This check is performed at the time of actuallyprocessing the import and not at the time of validatingthe import file.

Costing method The costing method you select determines the manner in whichyour inventory is valued.

A single costing method can be applied to all warehouseswithin a company (costing at company level). Alternatively,various costing methods can be used within the company, by

| Setup | 16


Field Values Descriptionassigning a costing method to a specific warehouse (costing atwarehouse level).

Note:Once defined, changing costing methods must beconsidered in detail before proceeding with the change.

Refer to Costing for additional information on inventory costingmethods.

Costing perwarehouse

Select this to apply costing methods selectively by warehouse.

You would typically use this option in cases where high value,low usage items are stored in a separate warehouse andrequire a different method of costing (e.g. FIFO) for accuracy.Alternatively, you may manufacture and distribute a productand want to apply Standard costing to your Work in Progressand Average costing to your distribution warehouse. This isonly relevant in locations where mixing costing methods is anacceptable practice.

When you select this option, each warehouse is set to requiringthe costing method you select on this tab page. Once you haveenabled costing per warehouse, you can optionally change thecosting method for specific warehouses, using the Warehousesfunction. However, this function is available only after you saveyour settings and reload the Inventory Setup program.

If you do not select this option, then the costing methodselected here is used for all warehouses.

Warehouses Select this to apply the costing method you require to eachwarehouse.

The Inventory Warehouses program is loaded automatically,enabling you to select the Costing method to use for eachwarehouse. This facility is only available when the InventoryWarehouses program is called from the Inventory Setupprogram.

Note:• The Warehouses function is available only after you

have enabled the Costing per warehouse option,saved your settings and reloaded the InventorySetup program. However, stock for items definedas Floorstock (Stock Code Maintenance) andstocked in the Floorstock warehouse (WIP Setup)will always be allowed to go negative, regardless ofFIFO costing or your warehouse settings.

• When activating (or deactivating) costing for awarehouse, a number of processes are performedto ensure data consistency.

Apply warehouseBOM costs

Select this to use the BOM costs held against the warehousefor costing purposes for all stock items held in that warehouse.

| Setup | 17


Field Values DescriptionWhen you select this option, you use the Costing function ofthe Warehouses for Stock Code program to define the BOMcosts to use for each warehouse.

If you do not select this option, then the BOM costs heldagainst each individual stock item are used for costingpurposes (Stock Code Maintenance).

In addition, if you do not select this option, then you willbe unable to process the cost implosion by warehouse(Component Where-used).

Note:You should use the Cost Implosion program to roll-upcosts before selecting this option.

Average Select this to average out the unit cost of an item that isreceived into stock. This is calculated as the average betweenthe new cost of the item and the existing cost of the item heldon file.

The average cost is calculated at the time the transaction isprocessed. When a receipt is processed into a prior period, theaverage cost is not recalculated.

Note:If you want to switch from FIFO costing to Averagecosting, then you must run the Balance function of theInventory Period End program and select the option:Recalculate current cost from FIFO bucketsbeforechanging to average costing.

If you do not recalculate the current cost from FIFObuckets before changing to average costing, thenthere will be a difference between the Inventoryvaluation and the General Ledger. You will need topost manual journals to correct these discrepancies.

Standard Select this to define a cost for each item and thereafter onlyupdate this cost using the Cost Changes function of theInventory Movements program or using the Transfer BOMCosts to Wh Costs program.

You typically select this option in a manufacturing environmentand when the costs of your items are relatively stable (i.e. notsubject to constant change).

Last cost Select this if you want to value your inventory according to thelast cost that was entered for an item when it was received intostock.

FIFO Select this if you want all stock receipts to create a new FIFObucket and all issues/sales to be made from the oldest bucketheld on file.

You can only select this option if you selected the option: FIFOvaluation.

| Setup | 18


Field Values DescriptionNote:• Implications of selecting this option are that stock

on hand cannot be allowed to go negative in anywarehouse. However, Floorstock items (StockCode Maintenance) stocked in the Floorstockwarehouse (WIP Setup) can have a negativebalance (see WIP Issue Floor Stock Allocations).


LIFO Select this if you want all stock receipts to create a new LIFObucket and all issues/sales to be made from the newest bucketheld on file.

Note:You cannot select this costing method if:

• Costing per warehouse is selected.• FIFO valuation is selected.• Actual costing is selected.

Do not calculateaverage cost onnegative receipt

Select this if you do not want the average cost of a stock itemto be recalculated when you post a negative receipt using theInventory Movements, Purchase Order Receipts or JobReceipts programs.

If you do not select this option, then the average cost for astock item is recalculated only if the negative receipt doesnot cause the quantity on hand for the stock item to becomenegative.

Note:Any variance between the current average cost andthe new cost entered is posted to the W/h varianceaccount configured against the warehouse (InventoryWarehouses).

This option only applies if the costing method is defined asAverage at company level or against a specific warehouse. Theoption is therefore only available if the Costing method is set toAverage, or if Costing per warehouse is selected.

Actual costing Actual cost tracking (also known as item or batch specificcosting) can be set for lot traceable and/or batch serializeditems.

Note:• Actual Costing overrides any other costing method

defined, either by company or by warehouse. Whenselected, Actual costing applies to all lot and/orbatch serialized items in Inventory.

• Irrespective of your company costing methodand whether FIFO valuation is in place for allwarehouses, all actual costing items are processedusing FIFO costing at the detail level.

| Setup | 19


Field Values Description• Actual costing is only applied to new transactions

processed from the time you select this option.Existing transactions are not changed.

Therefore, if you have stock on hand for an existingstock code/warehouse combination, you willbe prompted to manually allocate these to costbuckets.

Actual costing uses the FIFO valuation architecture to trackand process costs, so when you select to use actual costing,the FIFO valuation option is automatically selected if it is notalready selected.

In addition, if you are currently not using FIFO costing atcompany level and Costing by warehouse is selected, then thefollowing message is displayed:

"When the current costing method is not FIFO then the actualcost bucket cost should be derived from:

• Lot transaction value• Current inventory cost

This enables you to indicate whether the costs for the actualcosting buckets must be derived from the lot/serial transactionvalue or the Inventory warehouse value. If a variance existsbetween the actual cost value and the warehouse value, avariance journal is created with transaction type "t".

Note:• Existing warehouses which use FIFO costing

will base the actual cost buckets on the lot/serialtransaction value.

• If you are currently using FIFO costing at companylevel and Costing by warehouse is not selected,then this message is not displayed. The actualcost buckets are based on the lot/serial transactionvalues.

With actual costing, processing of the buckets is at stock code,warehouse and lot/serial level as opposed to only stock code/warehouse level. Buckets retain the original receipt quantitiesto allow for accurate reversal of transactions when required.

You can indicate the number of days for which you want toretain history of these buckets on the History tab of this setupprogram.

When actual costing is selected, the system creates FIFObuckets for each lot and/or batch serial number.

Actual costing is applied in every program in Inventory, Salesand Work in Progress that depletes or adds to a FIFO bucket.

Actual costing is not applied to manuals serials.

None Select this if you do not want to enable actual costing.

Lot traceable Select this to use actual costing for all lot traceable items.

| Setup | 20


Field Values DescriptionThis option is only available if the Lot Traceability module isinstalled.

Note:• Costing by lot is only possible when manual lot

numbering is used (Lot Traceability Setup).

With Automatic lot numbering, you cannot processtwo receipts into the same lot.

• The FIFO buckets table is used to retain the ‘history’of costs for affected items. This caters for thesituation where you receipt quantities for the samelot from the supplier, but at different prices (due tocommodity price fluctuations).

When you select this option, the system performs the followingconversion procedure (see Actual Costing ConversionReview):

• Value the stock on hand for the item at the current valuationmethod.

• Remove the existing FIFO buckets.• Per lot on the lot detail table:

• Create a FIFO bucket for each positive Receipt, andTransfer In on the lot transaction table, recording thecost from the transaction and the receipt date.

• Process each negative transaction, running through theFIFO buckets for that lot, until the transaction quantity isused up, updating the issue date.

• At the same time, other positive transactions areprocessed, based on the issue date.

• FIFO journals are written for tracking purposes.• Once all transactions are processed, a list of all the lots that

have been processed and the FIFO buckets / costs createdis displayed in the Actual Costing Conversion Reviewprogram. You can redistribute these if required.

• The final process of the conversion is to check the valuationof each lot again and, if different from the initial value, topost a variance.

• The lot number is recorded in the Inventory Journal Detailtable and the Inventory Movements table for trackingpurposes.

Batch serial Select this to apply actual costing to batch serialised items.

Note:The following pre-requisites apply to setting actualcosting for batch serials:

• If against any serialized stock item you selected:Record serial numbers - During order entry (StockCode Maintenance - Tracking tab), then you needto change these to Record serial numbers - Duringreceipt.

| Setup | 21


Field Values DescriptionWith actual costing, serials must be captured at timeof receipt.

• The option: Serial tracking system required must beselected (Options tab).

• If you are currently using serials, then beforeselecting this option, you need to run the Serial FileBalance Report and ensure that all batch serialsare in balance.

When you select this option, the system performs the followingconversion procedure (see Actual Costing ConversionReview):

• Value the stock on hand for the item at the current valuationmethod

• Remove the existing FIFO buckets• Per batch serial on file:

• Create a FIFO bucket for each positive Receipt, andTransfer In on the serial transaction table, recording thecost from the transaction and the receipt date.

• Process each negative transaction, running through theFIFO buckets for that serial, until the transaction quantityis used up, updating the issue date.

• At the same time, other positive transactions areprocessed, based on the issue date.

• FIFO journals are written for tracking purposes.• Once all transactions are processed, a list of all the

batch serials that have been processed and the FIFObuckets / costs created is displayed in the Actual CostingConversion Review program. You can redistribute these ifrequired.

• The final process of the conversion is to check the valuationof each serial again and, if different from the initial value, topost a variance.

• The serial number is recorded in the Inventory JournalDetail table and the Inventory Movements for trackingpurposes.

Note:• Actual costing does not apply to manual serials.

Auto depletion ofcost buckets

Select this to automatically deplete lots and/or serials whenprocessing multiple issues for the same lot/serial. The bucketsare depleted in bucket sequence.

If you do not select this option and more than one FIFO bucketexists for the specific lot or serial, then you are prompted forthe bucket(s) from which to issue the quantity (see ActualCost Allocation).

Note:• This option only applies to issues in Work in

Progress and Inventory.

| Setup | 22


Field Values Description• Cost buckets used in Sales Orders are always auto-

depleted at the time the invoice or dispatch note isgenerated. A credit note attached to an invoice ora reversal of a dispatch note will automatically findthe buckets used for the original transaction andreverse those.

• Actual cost buckets are also automatically autodepleted when processing a Transfer out of awarehouse (especially since you can process a bulktransfer out with apportionment from a Supply ChainTransfer (SCT)).

• This option is ignored when processing negativeallocations in Work in progress. A negativeallocation mimics a receipt and therefore a newactual cost bucket is always created.

Record inventorymovements byserial or lot

Select this to be able to view details of actual costs used inInventory movements and on lot or serial transactions.

If you do not select this option, then the unit cost displayed isthe warehouse cost based on the costing method applied tothat warehouse (Warehouse Maintenance).

In addition, if you select this option together with actual costingfor batch serials, then movement records are created perserial. If this option is not selected, then a movement record iscreate for the transaction.

Stock on handallowed to gonegative

Note:• Traceable, serialized, and ECC-controlled items will

not be allowed to go negative, regardless of yourwarehouse settings.

• Floorstock items stocked in the Floorstockwarehouse (WIP Setup) and Returnable items(Stock Code Maintenance) will always be allowedto go negative, regardless of your warehousesettings.

• If you select to apply automatic depletion andmultiple bins are in use, then the system will onlydeplete available stock even if stock is allowed togo negative, unless the option Negative on hand –deplete remainder from default bin (Depletion tab)is selected and the conditions governing this optionare met.

• If any warehouse is set to FIFO costing and/or youselected FIFO valuation required, then you will beunable to allow stock on hand to go negative in anywarehouse.

Yes Select this to allow stock on hand to go negative at companylevel.

If you select this option together with the option: Back orders- Automatic (Sales Order Setup - General 3 tab), then items

| Setup | 23


Field Values Descriptionyou place on backorder are automatically moved to ship by theSales Order Entry program.

No Select this if stock is not allowed to go negative.

Dependent on w/hlist

Select this to indicate a specific list of warehouses in whichstock is allowed (or not allowed) to go negative.

List You use this function to indicate a specific list of warehouses inwhich stock is allowed (or not allowed) to go negative.

Dependent on w/hrange

Select this to indicate a range of warehouses in which stock isallowed (or not allowed) to go negative.

Range You use this function to indicate a range of warehouses inwhich stock is allowed (or not allowed) to go negative.

Dependent onwarehouse

Select this to display an additional warehouse option thatallows you to indicate whether negative stock is allowed for thewarehouse.

Note:Selecting this option does not activate negative stockfor the warehouse, it merely displays an additionalwarehouse option that allows you to specify whethernegative stock is allowed for the warehouse.

You must select the Warehouse function and maintaindetails against a warehouse for this option to takeeffect.

Warehouse You use this function to maintain specific warehouses for whichyou want to allow stock to go negative.

Goods in Transit

Use Full goods inTransit transfersfacility

Select this if you want to be able to monitor inter-warehousetransfers generated from the Inventory Movements program,as well as supply chain transfers generated from the SalesOrder Entry program.

You will need to select this option if you want to performRequisition Issues and/or Transfers (Purchase Orders Setup -Requisition tab).

Note:• Any stock transfers that are still in process should

be completed before you enable/disable thisfeature.

If the program detects that warehouse transfers arecurrently in progress, a window is displayed with theoption to either run the Warehouse Exception or torun the GIT Conversion Program program.

| Setup | 24


Field Values Description• Running the Warehouse Exception will

highlight where there are unfinished transfersthat need to be addressed.

• Running the GIT Conversion Program programwill convert existing warehouse transfers toGoods in Transit transfers.

• A Conversion function is displayed if you save yourselection to use the full goods in transit transfersfacility, but have not yet addressed the issue ofstock transfers currently in process.

Use sales orderdescription forstock itemsoriginating fromSCT

Select this to allow the description of an item that is in transit(or which has been transferred) to be obtained from theoriginating Supply Chain Transfer. This is typically useful forcustomers who regularly change the description of items beingtransferred through the Supply Chain Transfer process, andneed to see this description at all times.

When this option is enabled, any use of the stock description isobtained by tracing the appropriate information in the relevantsales order reprint file (the transfer can originate from a salesorder or a dispatch) and using that description if found. If thereprint has not been retained, then the inventory description isused.

Save Select this to save the selections you made on all the tabpages and to exit the program.

Print Select this to print a report of your Inventory module setupoptions.

It is advisable to keep this report for disaster recoverypurposes.

Cancel Select this to exit the program without saving any changes youmade.

Help Select this to view the latest online Help documentation for thisprogram.

Options

Field Values DescriptionMiscellaneousoptions

Aged inventoryvaluation required

Select this if you want to print an Inventory Initial AgedValuation report of stock quantities over the last five years.

Update last cost ifstandard costing inuse

Select this if you want the last cost entered for a receipt to beheld separately from the standard inventory cost.

Note:

| Setup | 25


Field Values DescriptionThis option only applies if the costing method is definedas Standard at company level or against a specificwarehouse (Inventory Warehouses). The option istherefore only available if the Costing method is set toStandard, or if Costing per warehouse is selected.

Include non-merchandise costsin last cost

Select this if you want to add the calculated cost multipliervalue to the receipt cost of an item when using the InventoryMovements program to process a Receipt or a GIT TransferIn.

GIT Transfers only apply if you selected the option: Use Fullgoods in Transit transfers facility (General tab).

If you do not select this option, then the cost multiplier definedagainst the item (Warehouses for Stock Code) is ignored andits value is not reflected in the Last cost of the item.

Note:If you select this option, then you must also select theoption: Apply cost multiplier when processing receiptsto include the cost multiplier in the last cost of the item.

Serial trackingsystem required

Select this if you want to record serial number informationwhen processing transactions for serialized stock items.

Same serial to beused for multiplestock codes

Select this if you want to allow the same serial numbers to beused for different stock codes when accepting items into stock.

If you select this option, then when you receipt a batchserialized item, you can enter a serial number that alreadyexists against another stock code. If the option Multiple batchserial receipts allowed is not selected, then the existing serialnumber must be stocked in the warehouse in which you areprocessing the current receipt. If the option Multiple batch serialreceipts allowed is selected, then the existing serial numbercan be applied even if it is not currently stocked in the currentwarehouse. If the stock code is a manual serialized item thenyou can enter a serial number that exists against anothermanual serialized stock code regardless of the warehousein which it is stocked. If this option is not selected, then youcannot enter a serial number that already exists againstanother stock code regardless of whether the stock code ismanual or batch serialized or irrespective of your selection atthe option: Multiple batch serial receipts allowed.

If this option is not selected then you will not be able to receiptreserved serials into an alternate stock code from inspection(see WIP Inspection Maintenance).

Note:You must not select this option if you require yourstock items to be assigned unique serial numbers atcompany level.

| Setup | 26


Field Values DescriptionThis option is only enabled if you selected the option: Serialtracking system required.

Retain all serialinformation afternegative receipt

Select this if you want to retain the history of header andtransaction details for manual serial numbers against whicha negative receipt has been processed. A negative receiptis typically processed when reversing a receipt that wasprocessed against the incorrect serial number.

If you do not select this option, then serial history is removed ifthe only other transaction for the serial was a receipt. (i.e. thesystem assumes you are reversing a receipt done against anincorrect serial number).

Note:If you select this option, then you will be unable to re-use the serial number for the same stock item.

This option is only enabled if you selected the option: Serialtracking system required.

Apply costmultiplier whenprocessingreceipts

Select this if, when processing a receipt, you want to be able tospecify a portion of the transaction value that comprises non-merchandise costs and to store these values in nominatedledger accounts.

This option enables you to maintain accurate inventory costsper warehouse for merchandise received into stock.

Note:You must select this option if:

• you intend using the full Goods in Transit transfersfacility and you want to apply a cost multiplier foritems which are transfer supplied.

• you selected the option: Include non-merchandisecosts in last cost to include the cost multiplier valuein the last cost of an item

Supplier/stockcode interchangesystem required

Select this if you want to be able to alternate between enteringa SYSPRO stock code or the supplier's catalogue numberduring Purchase Order Entry.

If you select this option, and you purchase a non-stocked itemfrom a supplier, the system automatically creates an entry inthe supplier/stock code interchange file (Supplier/Stock CodeDetails).

Multiple batchserial receiptsallowed

If you select this option, then a batch serial number that existsagainst a stock code in one warehouse can be receiptedagainst the same stock code in another warehouse.

If this option is not selected then a batch serial can only existin one warehouse and subsequent receipts against the serialnumber must occur in the warehouse in which it is stocked.

| Setup | 27


Field Values DescriptionAllow blank listprice codes

Select this if you do not require a List price code to be assignedto a stocked item.

Note:If you are retaining a history of price changes (seeHistory tab) then capturing a stock item withoutassociating it to a price code will result in no pricehistory being created for that item.

Validate productclasses

Select this if you want to validate the product classes that youassign to stock items using the Stock Code Maintenanceprogram. The product classes are validated against theSALPDS/SalProductClassDes file/table (see ProductClasses).

This option is ignored by the Sales Order Import and EDISales Order Lines programs as a valid product class must bedefined against each line. Lines with invalid product classesare ignored by the export/import processes.

Allow backflush ofbought out items

Select this to indicate that you want to be able to backflush abought out item and issue any attached materials and labor.

A bought out item typically refers to an item that you purchase.However, sometimes these items can be made-in so quicklythat there is no need to set up a job.

Alternatively, some companies initially purchase items butare responsible for warranty and service jobs on the item(e.g. appliances). These companies typically want to issuecomponents and labor for the service without the overhead ofmaintaining a full manufacturing system.

Recordmovements for bintransfers

Select this if you want to include bin transfers when retainingtransaction movements processed for a stock item.

You indicate whether you want to retain movements for a stockitem within the Stock Code Maintenance program (StockCode Details).

If you do not select this option, then the bin transfer transactioncan be printed on the Inventory Journal Report, but nomovement is created.

This option is only enabled if you selected the option: Multiplebins (Options tab).

Allow creationof bins whenprocessinginventorytransactions

Select this if you want enable the automatic creation of newbins (i.e. without using the Inventory Bin Maintenanceprogram) when a non-existent bin is supplied against atransaction.

Note:Bins are not automatically created when processingnegative inventory transactions (e.g. a negativeReceipt).

| Setup | 28


Field Values DescriptionIf you do not select this option, then operators can onlyenter existing bins when processing the following types oftransactions:

• Bin transfers• Receipts (with single and multiple bin entry) from the

Inventory, Purchase Order and Work in Progress modules• Expense issues• Normal warehouse transfers (Out)• Immediate transfers• Stock take imports• Stock take capture• Backflushing• Adjustments• Job issues, when issuing a negative allocation

This option is only enabled if you selected the option: Multiplebins (Options tab).

If you do not select this option, then you will be unable tomaintain (add, change, delete) bins by:

• Selecting the Multiple Bins option from the Query menu ofthe Inventory Query program.

• Selecting the Show option from the Multiple bins field in theInventory Query program.

This setup option does not apply to running the Inventory BinMaintenance program standalone.

Apply operatoraccess controlto destinationwarehouse ontransfers OUT

Select this if you want to restrict access to the destinationwarehouse when performing a warehouse transfer out usingthe Inventory Movements program, or when processing asupply chain transfer using the Sales Order Entry program.

If you select this option then the system checks the warehousesecurity access settings and prevents the operator fromprocessing supply chain transfers if that operator has beendenied access to the target warehouse (Operators - Accesstab).

Similarly, the operator is prevented from processing awarehouse transfer out if access is denied to the destinationwarehouse.

Inventory cost tobe held in a unitof measure otherthan stocked

Select this to enable inventory costs to be held in a unit ofmeasure other than the stocking unit of measure. You definethe applicable cost unit of measure when adding stock itemsusing the Stock Code Maintenance program.

Note:You cannot select this option if FIFO Valuation isselected or if your costing method is set to FIFO orLIFO (General tab).

| Setup | 29


Field Values DescriptionNegative quantityon hand to beincluded inInventory Valuation

Select this if you want inventory valuations to include negativevalues owing to a negative on hand quantity. This will decreasethe total value of stock.

Request ledgercodes for inventorytransactions

Select this if you want the ledger code to be requested andused as the distribution entry when processing inventorytransactions.

Define Options You use this function to selectively indicate the inventorytransactions for which you want the ledger code to berequested (see Ledger Code Options).

Disallow singlewarehouseselection duringperiod end

Select this if you require all warehouses to be processed whenrunning the Balance or Month end functions of the InventoryPeriod End program (i.e. you will be unable to select a specificwarehouse to process).

Note:In order to finalize an Inventory month end andincrement the current month number, all warehousesmust be selected for processing.

Set up stock codedeletion options

Select this if you want to define conditions under which a stockcode can be deleted.

Typically, if you do not define stock code deletion options here,then you will be unable to delete a stock code if ANY of thefollowing conditions apply:

• operations are held against the stock item• the stock item is a parent part in a bill of materials structure• the stock item is a component part in a bill of materials

structure• there are outstanding purchase orders for the stock item• there are outstanding sales orders for the stock item• there is an on hand quantity of the stock item in any

warehouse• movements exist for the item in the current or two prior

periods• warehouse records exist for the item• the stock item is defined as traceable• a stock take is in progress affecting any warehouse to which

the stock item has been assigned• the stock item is attached to a customer/stock code cross

reference• the stock item is attached to a supplier/stock code cross

reference

However, you can use this option to selectively overrideconditions under which a stock item can be deleted. Theseconditions can be set using the Delete Stock Code Optionsfunction.

| Setup | 30


Field Values DescriptionDefine DeleteOptions

This function enables you to define the conditions underwhich a stock code may be deleted (see Delete Stock CodeOptions).

FIFO/LIFOoptions

Print FIFO journals Select this if you want to print FIFO journals.

If you do not select this option, then the journals are stillcreated, but they are not printed. This does not prevent FIFOjournals from being displayed in the Journal Entries listview ofthe Inventory Movements program.

n the Inventory Movements program, there is no facility tosuppress FIFO journals from the Journal entries listview

Note:You can only select this option if FIFO Valuation isrequired, without FIFO costing.

Balance lots frommost recent FIFObucket

Select this if you require adjustments to lots to be madefrom the most recent FIFO bucket when running the Balancefunction of the Inventory Period End program.

Note:You can select this option only if you indicated thatFIFO valuation is required (General tab).

Use zero costbucket for returns

Select this option if you want to be able to process a zero costtransaction when returning stock to a FIFO/LIFO bucket thathas a zero unit cost. The returned quantity is added to theFIFO/LIFO bucket, but the unit cost of the bucket remainsunaffected.

If you do not select this option, then the return of stock to aFIFO/LIFO bucket with a zero cost will create a new FIFO/LIFObucket with the returned quantity at the current warehousecost.

Stock returns are typically made via a sales order credit note oran inventory transaction such as a negative issue or a positiveadjustment.

The Stock Take Confirmation program updates FIFO/LIFObuckets according to your selection at this option.

Note:You can enable this option only if you indicated thatFIFO costing or LIFO costing is required (General tab).

Recalculatecurrent cost fromFIFO buckets

Note:You can enable these options only if you indicated thatFIFO costing is required (General tab).

| Setup | 31


Field Values DescriptionDuring period endbalance function

Select this to enable the equivalent option within the Balancefunction of the Inventory Period End program.

If you select this option during the Balance function, the totalvalue of the FIFO buckets and the total quantity is accumulatedand used to calculate the new current cost of the item.

When changing w/h costing methodfrom FIFO

This option applies when the costing method of a warehouse ischanged from FIFO to any other method.

Select this if you want to re-calculate the current warehousecost for each item with a non-zero quantity on hand, based onthe FIFO buckets. The value of each FIFO bucket is calculatedand accumulated into a FIFO total value. This is then dividedby the warehouse stock on hand to get the new current cost forthe warehouse.

If you do not select this option, then the current warehouse costis not updated.

Stock takevariance

Percentage Select this for the detection and subsequent reporting onvariances during a stock take to be based on the percentageentered at the Maximum permitted stock take variance fieldbelow.

Variance Select this for the detection and subsequent reporting onvariances during a stock take to be based on the fixed quantityentered at the Maximum permitted stock take variance fieldbelow.

Maximumpermitted

You use this field to indicate the cut-off percentage (or quantity)according to which variances detected during a stock take canbe reported on using the Inventory Stock Take VarianceReport report and queried using the Stock Take Queryprogram.

The Inventory Stock Take Variance Report report can beused to print items only where the captured quantity differsfrom the original quantity on hand by the percentage or quantityvariance specified here. You can also select to display theseitems in the Stock Take Query program.

Note:If you enter zero in this field, then no variance checkingis performed (i.e. zero does not mean no variance isacceptable).

Therefore, variances are only calculated if this field isnon-zero.

For example: If you enter zero in this field, then whenyou run the Inventory Stock Take Variance Reportreport and select: Only print exception lines, no detailsare printed as the exception check is not performed.

| Setup | 32


Field Values DescriptionSimilarly, if you enter zero in this field, then when youselect to display only exceptions in the Stock TakeQuery program, no stock items are displayed in thelistview.

Unit of measure

Default You use this field to indicate the default unit of measure appliedwhen capturing stock items (i.e. Stocking, alternate and other).

Ledger Code OptionsYou use the Define Options function to selectively indicate the inventory transactions for which you wantthe ledger code to be requested.

This function is enabled when you select the option: Request ledger codes for inventory transactions.

Field Values DescriptionRequest ledgercode for

Receipts Select this if you want a ledger code to be requested whenprocessing an inventory receipt transaction.

Note:This excludes purchase order receipts which aredefined separately. (See Purchase order receiptsoptions below).

Adjustments Select this if you want a ledger code to be requested whenprocessing an inventory adjustment transaction.

Issues Select this if you want a ledger code to be requested whenprocessing an inventory issue transaction or an issuefrom stores requisitions (Requisition Stores Issues andTransfers).

Cost modifications Select this if you want a ledger code to be requested whenprocessing an inventory cost modification transaction.

Cost changes Select this if you want a ledger code to be requested whenprocessing an inventory cost change transaction.

Physical Select this if you want a ledger code to be requested whenprocessing an inventory physical transaction.

Stock transfers Select this if you want a ledger code to be requested whenprocessing an inventory stock transfer transaction.

Purchase orderreceipts

Select this option if you want to define the ledger code optionsfor purchase order receipts.

When you select this option, the following options are enabled:

• Debits (Non stocked)• Credits

| Setup | 33


Field Values Description• Non merchandise

Debits (Nonstocked)

Select this if you want be able to change the default ledgercode (typically an expense account), when processing thereceipt of a non stocked item (see Purchase Order Receiptand Purchase Order Inspection).

Credits Select this if you want to be able to change the default ledgercode (typically the GRN suspense account), when processingthe receipt of a stocked item or accepting an item frominspection into stock (see Purchase Order Receipt andPurchase Order Inspection).

Non merchandise Select this if you want to be able to change the default ledgercode when processing a non merchandise receipt (Non-Merchandise Distribution)

Allow change ofledger code inbackflushing

Select this if you want to be able to override the default WIPcontrol account when processing a backflushing transaction.

Close Select this to accept your selections and to return to theprevious screen. You must select the Save function to saveyour selections.

Delete Stock Code OptionsYou use the Define Delete Options function to define the conditions under which a stock code may bedeleted.

This function is enabled when you select the option: Set up stock code deletion options.

Field Values DescriptionDelete stock code

Used in aconfiguration

Select this if the Product Configurator module is installed andyou want to be able to delete a stock code that has been usedin a product configuration.

Customer/stockcode crossreference

Select this if the Accounts Receivable module is installed andyou want to be able to delete a stock code against which thereexists a customer/stock code cross reference.

Supplier/stockcode crossreference

Select this if the Accounts payable module is installed, thesupplier/stock code interchange system is set to required(Inventory Setup - Options tab), and you want to be able todelete a stock code against which a supplier/stock code crossreference exists.

ECC drawingregister

Select this if Engineering Change Control is installed and youwant to be able to delete a stock code against which a validdrawing number exists.

| Setup | 34


Field Values DescriptionPart of a billof landed costtracking

Select this if you want to be able to delete a stock code againstwhich there exists a bill of landed costs.

Temporary stockcode has salesorder details and/or purchase orderdetails

Select this if you want to be able to delete temporary stockcodes that are associated with sales and/or purchase ordersproviding that there are no quantities outstanding.

On partial or fullhold

Select this if you want to be able to delete a stock code that ison hold.

Close Select this to accept your selections and to return to theprevious screen. You must select the Save function to saveyour selections.

History

Field Values DescriptionSales historyqty's to include

Sales Select this if you want sales history quantities to include thevalue of stock that has been sold, but not the value of stockthat has been issued.

Issues Select this if you want sales history quantities to include thevalue of stock that has been issued, but not the value of stockthat has been sold.

Sales and Issues Select this if you want sales history quantities to include boththe value of stock that has been sold and the value of stockthat has been issued.

Number ofmonths to retain

Inventory Journals You use this field to indicate the number of months for whichyou want to retain your Inventory journals.

This determines the number of months for which you canreprint the Inventory Journal Report and the Inventory GLDistribution reports.

These journals are deleted when next you run the Purgefunction of the Inventory Period End program, if they havebeen held on file for at least the number of months enteredhere and they meet all the criteria for deletion (see Purge).

The minimum number of months for which you can retaininformation is one month. Enter 99 to retain these journalsindefinitely.

If the Inventory module is linked to the general Ledger(General Ledger Integration), then you need to retain

| Setup | 35


Field Values Descriptioninventory journals for as long as you want to be able to zoomon them from the General Ledger.

Documents You use this field to indicate the number of months for whichyou want to retain inventory documents.

Printed inventory documents are deleted when you run thePurge function of the Inventory Period End program, if theyhave been held on file for at least the number of monthsentered here.

Inventory documents include: inventory receipts, issues,transfers out and purchase order receipts.

Enter 99 to retain these documents indefinitely.

Note:The default number of months to retain document printtransactions is set to zero (0). Unless this is changed,all document print information is deleted when thePurge function of the Inventory Period End program isrun.

Number of G/Lperiods to retain

Goods in Transitentries

You use this field to indicate the number of General Ledgerperiods for which you want to retain completed goods in transitdetail lines.

Completed goods in transit detail lines are deleted when yourun the Purge function of the Inventory Period End programif they have been held on file for more than the number ofperiods entered here.

The minimum number of periods for which you can retain thisinformation is three (3) months. Enter 99 to retain these entriesindefinitely.

Note:This option is only enabled if you selected the option:Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (Generaltab).

Purge movementrecords

Note:In a SQL environment, movement records are purgedfaster if you select the By date option here.

By date Select this to define the maximum number of days thatmovements must be retained for each stock code/warehousecombination.

By number Select this to define the maximum number of movements to beretained for each stock code/warehouse combination.

Maximum age ofrecords to maintain

You use this field to indicate either the maximum number ofmovement records you want to retain for each stock code/

| Setup | 36


Field Values Descriptionwarehouse combination, or the maximum number of days thatmovements must be retained for each stock code/warehousecombination.

If you selected to purge movement records By date, then thetransaction date against each movement is compared to thecompany date at the time you run the Purge function of theInventory Period End program. If the age difference betweenthese two dates is greater than the Maximum age of records tomaintain, then the movement record is deleted.

If you selected to purge movement records By number, thenat the time you run the Purge function of the Inventory PeriodEnd program, the number of movement records is counted foreach stock code/warehouse combination. If this count exceedsthe maximum number of records you are retaining, then theexcess records are deleted, starting from the oldest record.

Note:An entry of 99999 indicates that movement recordsmust be retained indefinitely. An entry of (0) zeroindicates that all movement records must be deletedwhen next you run the Purge function of the InventoryPeriod End program.

Stock balances

Retain last 12months’ openingstock balances

You must select this option if:

• you want to be able to print a Kardex Report as the reportrequires opening balances for each warehouse and stockcode.

• you want to print Inventory Valuation report for previousmonth 1 and 2. The Month end option of the InventoryPeriod End program updates the month end balancesagainst all warehouses for each stock code.

• you want to be able to post Adjustments, Bin Transfers andExpense Issues transactions to a previous posting month(Inventory Movements).

Price changehistory

Retain history ofprice changes

Select this if you want to retain a history of all changes made tothe price or the price basis of an item. This information can beprinted using the Price History Report program.

Note:If you are allowing blank price list codes (see Optionstab) then capturing a stock item without associating it toa price code will result in no price history being createdfor that item.

No of days toretain price history

You use this field to indicate the number of days or monthsfor which you want to retain a history of changes made to theselling price or to the price basis of an item.

| Setup | 37


Field Values DescriptionNote:If you select the option: History retention isexpressed in months then the number entered here istaken to represent months and not days.

Price history data is deleted by the Purge function oftheInventory Period End program when the number of daysor months that you are retaining this information is exceeded.

Enter 999 to retain this information indefinitely. Enter (0) zeroif you want to delete all price history records dated prior to thedate on which you run the Purge function of the InventoryPeriod End program.

History retentionis expressed inmonths

Select this to take the values entered at the No of days toretain price history and the No of days to retain bucketswith zero quantity to represent months and not days.

FIFO Buckets

No of days toretain buckets withzero quantity

This enables you to indicate the number of days or monthsfor which you want to retain FIFO buckets that have a zeroquantity. This enables you to reduce the number of entriesretained.

Note:If you select the option: History retention isexpressed in months then the number entered here istaken to represent months and not days.

Retaining buckets for a period of time makes reversals back tospecific buckets easier.

This option applies regardless of whether actual costing is inuse.

Enter 9999 to retain this information indefinitely.

FIFO buckets are deleted when you run the Purge function ofthe Inventory Period End program if:

• they have a zero quantity

and• the number of days or months between the current

company date and the bucket's last issue date is greaterthan the days or months specified here.

Prior Year EndDates

Select this to specify the last five year end dates for theInventory module.

Prior Year End DatesYou use the Prior Year End Dates function to specify the last five year end dates for the Inventory module.

Field Values DescriptionYear prior This column displays the prior year number.

| Setup | 38


Field Values DescriptionYear end date This column displays the year end date defined for the relative

prior year.

Define Year EndDates

Select this to define the year end date for the currentlyhighlighted prior year.

OK Select this to accept the information you entered and to returnto the previous screen. You must select the Save function tosave your selections.

Cancel Select this to ignore any information you entered and to returnto the previous screen.

Change Prior Year EndYou use the Define Year End Dates function to define the year end date for the currently highlighted prioryear.

Field Values DescriptionYear end date You use this field to enter the year end date for the selected

prior year.

OK Select this to accept the date you entered and to return to theprevious screen.

Cancel Select this to ignore the date you entered and to return to theprevious screen.

Periods

Field Values DescriptionCurrent year

Change Current Select this to maintain the period end dates for the currentyear, and control how information is posted to the Inventorymodule.

The control of information posted is achieved by defining theaccess status (i.e. Open or closed) for the current and previoustwo periods. A status of open allows postings to be made to theperiod, while a status of closed prevents further postings frombeing made to the period.

Note:Postings cannot be made to a future period, regardlessof whether the period is open or closed.

Period This column displays the period to which the end date andstatus relate for the current year.

End date This column displays the period end dates defined for eachperiod in the current year.

Status This column indicates whether or not posting can currently bemade to the period.

| Setup | 39


Field Values DescriptionA status of open allows postings to be made to the period,while a status of closed prevents further postings from beingmade to the period.

Previous year

Change Previous Select this to maintain the period end date and access statusfor the selected period for the previous year.

Period This column displays the periods for the previous year.

End date This column displays the period end dates defined for eachperiod for the previous year.

Status This column indicates whether or not posting can currently bemade to the period.

Current month This indicates the period your Inventory module is currently in.

Current YearYou use the Change Current function to define the period end dates for the current year.

Field Values DescriptionPeriod end date You use this field to indicate the period end date for the

selected period.

Period is

Open Select this to allow postings to be made to the period.

Note:Within a sub-ledger only the current and previous twoperiods can be defined as open.

Closed Select this to prevent further postings from being made to theperiod.

Note:If you generally post only to the current month, thenyou may find it useful to select the option: Closeprevious month automatically (Company Setup -Options tab).

This enables you to close a sub-ledger's monthautomatically once you have completed the month endfunction within the relevant module.

OK Select this to set the end date and status for the selectedperiod and to return to the previous screen.


Previous YearYou use the Change Previous function to define the period end dates for the previous year.

| Setup | 40


Field Values DescriptionPeriod end date You use this field to indicate the period end date for the

selected period.

Period is

Open Select this to allow postings to be made to the period.

Note:You can only define the current and previous twoperiods as open.

Closed Select this to prevent further postings from being made to theperiod.

OK Select this to set the end date and status for the selectedperiod and to return to the previous screen.


User Defined

Field Values DescriptionDesc for fieldsagainst stockcodes

The wording you assign to these fields is the wording displayedin entry/display forms.

Field 1-5 You use these fields to specify your own descriptions foradditional stock code fields that can be configured within theStock Codes program.

These fields can be used to store any extra information yourequire for the stock item.

Descriptions forfields againstwarehouses

Field 1-3 You use these fields to specify your own descriptions foradditional warehouse fields that can be configured whenusing the Warehouses for Stock Code program to maintainwarehouse details for stock items.

These fields can be used to store any extra warehouseinformation you require for the stock item.

Descriptions foralternate keys

Alternate key 1-2 You use these fields to specify your own descriptions foralternate keys.

These fields can be used to change the sequence in which youwant to browse on stock codes.

Documents

| Setup | 41


Field Values DescriptionDocumentselections

Note:On the History tab, you can define the number ofmonths for which you want to retain these documentsbefore they are deleted by the Purge function of theInventory Period End program.

Receipts

No document Select this if you do not need to print receipt documents.

Batch only Select this to enable the printing of receipt documents in batchmode only.

Online and batch Select this to enable the printing of receipt documents onlineand in batch mode.

Issues

No document Select this if you do not need to print issue documents.

Batch only Select this to enable the printing of issue documents in batchmode only.

Online and batch Select this to enable the printing of issue documents online andin batch mode.

Transfers out

No document Select this if you do not need to print transfers out documents.

Batch only Select this to enable the printing of transfers out documents inbatch mode only.

Online and batch Select this to enable the printing of transfers out documentsonline and in batch mode.

P/O receipts Select this to enable the printing of Purchase Order receiptdocuments and receipts in from LCT.

No document Select this if you do not need to print purchase order receiptdocuments.

Batch only Select this to enable the printing of purchase order receiptdocuments in batch mode only.

Online and batch Select this to enable the printing of purchase order receiptdocuments online and in batch mode.

Note:If you select this option and you are using multiple bins,then you can only capture a single bin per receipt in thePurchase Order Receipts program.

Inspections

| Setup | 42


Field Values DescriptionNo document Select this if you do not need to print inspection documents.

Batch only Select this to enable the printing of inspection documents inbatch mode only.

Online and batch Select this to enable the printing of inspection documentsonline and in batch mode.

Inventorydocumentreceipts

Include inspectionitems in inventorydocument receipts

Select this if you want to print inspection items on-line whenreceipting an item into stock.

Stationeryalignments

Default numberof decimals inalignments

You use this field to indicate the maximum number of decimalsthat must be printed when aligning your pre-printed stationery.

Current Month

Field Values DescriptionYear selection This indicates the calendar year in which your current financial

year ends.

You can change this only if no active data is held within eitherthe inventory journal file or the inventory FIFO file.

Month selection This indicates the month in which your company is running, inrelation to the start of your financial year. You can change thisonly if no active data is held within either the inventory journalfile or the inventory FIFO file.

Number ofmonths per year

This indicates the number of accounting periods per year asdefined at company level (Company Setup).

Depletion

Field Values DescriptionApply automaticdepletion in

Note:For traceable items which do not allow issues frommultiple lots:

• the Job Issues program searches for the first lotthat can fully satisfy the requirement, failing whichthe kit quantity is reduced to the quantity that can bemanufactured using the lot with the highest quantity.

If accepted, the quantity to manufacture on the jobheader is reduced to this figure.

| Setup | 43


Field Values Description• the Sales Order Entry program searches for the

first lot that can fully satisfy the requirement, failingwhich the entire ship quantity is placed on backorder.

Kit issues Select this to deplete lots and bins automatically whenprocessing a Kit issue (Job Issues). Stock is issued from theoldest, smallest lots and/or bins first.

Automatic depletion can be applied to Specific issues byselecting the Preference: Auto deplete lots and bins (JobIssues)

Sales orders Select this to deplete lots and bins automatically in Sales Orderentry, Return Merchandise, Dispatch Notes and Back OrderRelease. Stock is issued from the oldest, smallest lots and/orbins first.

When you select this option, the Point of Sale option below isautomatically selected.

Point of Sale Select this to deplete lots and bins automatically Point of Saleentry. Stock is issued from the oldest, smallest lots and/or binsfirst.

Negative on hand -deplete remainderfrom default bin

Select this if you want the quantity for which there is insufficientstock available to be depleted from the default bin for itemsshipped in Sales Orders and items kit issued in Work inProgress.

This only applies if:

• the item is not defined as serialized, lot traceable or ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance)

and• the default bin exists for the stock item and stock is

available in one of the bins against the stock item• a non-blank default bin exists for the warehouse from which

the stock is to be issued

In addition, all of the following options must be enabled:

• Multiple bins (General tab)• Automatic depletion (Depletion tab)• Stock on hand allowed to go negative (General tab)

Stock is first depleted from the bins with available stock and theremainder is then depleted from the default bin. This can causethe a negative on hand quantity in the default bin.

You would typically select this option if you enabled negativeinventory and want to use automatic depletion to release orissue items (regardless of their stock level) for which you donot require a movement record through the system.

| Setup | 44


Field Values DescriptionAutomaticdepletion of lotsby

Receipt date Select this to deplete lots according to the earliest date that alot was received into stock.

Expiry date Select this to deplete lots according to the earliest lot expirydate.

Browse

Field Values DescriptionMultiple binbrowse defaultsequence

Bin Select this to default to browsing on multiple bins in bin numbersequence.

Receipt date Select this to default to browsing on multiple bins according tothe date on which items were received into the bin.

Stock codebrowse options

Display price andquantities

Select this if you want to display prices and quantities whenbrowsing on stock codes.

Filter stock codebased on operatoraccess list

Select this to restrict the viewing of stock items to thosewarehouses that the operator has been authorized to access.Against the operator, you must select the Filter in reports andbrowses warehouse option and define a list of warehouses towhich access is either allowed or disallowed.

This option applies only to the stock code browse, and is usedto reduce the number of stock codes shown. It does not applyto the "Find" (Stock Codes) which checks operator accesseither on the warehouse to use, or on the single warehouse ifnecessary. It does not prevent the stock code being "found",simply the display of the warehouse information.

Note:Selecting this option may adversely affect theperformance of SYSPRO when browsing on stockitems.

Defaultwarehouse fordisplaying qty's

Standard Select this to use the default warehouse defined against theoperator to display quantities when browsing on stock items.

| Setup | 45


Field Values DescriptionIf this is blank, then the program uses the default warehousedefined against the company. If this is blank, then the programuses the warehouse defined at the Warehouse to use fieldagainst the stock item.

Operator default Select this to use the warehouse defined against the operator(Operators) to display quantities when browsing on stockitems.

Company default Select this to use the warehouse defined against the company(Company Setup) to display quantities when browsing onstock items.

Warehouse to use Select this to use the warehouse defined at the Warehouseto use field against the stock item to display quantities whenbrowsing on stock items.

Distributionwarehouse to use

Select this to use the warehouse defined at the Distributionwarehouse to use field against the stock item to displayquantities when browsing on stock items.

Default ATPpresentation

Regular Select this to display the quantity available in each period,taking into account supply and demand.

Cumulative Select this to add each period's regular ATP figure to the nextperiod and display a cumulative figure.

Inventory Query

Show warehousevalues for multiplecompanies

Select this if you want to be able to view Warehouse Valuesand Warehouse History for multiple companies in theInventory Query program.

When you select this option, the Multiple Company Valuesoption is enabled in the Inventory Query program.

You use the Define List of Companies option to indicate thecompanies for which you want to view these values.

Note:This option will only work when the database format isthe same for all companies (i.e. all C-ISAM or all SQL).

Define List ofCompanies

Select this to indicate the companies for which you want toview Warehouse Values and Warehouse History values in theInventory Query program.

Company List SelectionThis screen is displayed when you select the Define List of Companies to indicate the companies for whichyou want to view Warehouse Values and Warehouse History values in the Inventory Query program.

| Setup | 46


Field Values DescriptionFile Select this to exit the program.

Accept and Close Select this to save your selections and to return to the previousscreen.

Cancel AnyChanges

Select this to ignore any changes you made and to return tothe previous screen.

Accept and Close Select this to save your selections and to return to the previousscreen.

Cancel Select this to ignore any changes you made and to return tothe previous screen.

AvailableCompanies

This listview displays the companies currently available forselection.

Assign Selected Select this to assign the company(ies) currently highlighted inthis listview to the Selected Companies listview.

You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys together with your mousepointer to individually highlight the companies you want toassign.

Assign All Select this to assign all companies displayed in this listview tothe Selected Companies listview.

SelectedCompanies

This listview displays the companies for which you want toview Warehouse Values and Warehouse History values in theInventory Query program.

Remove Selected Select this to remove the company(ies) currently highlighted inthis listview from your list of companies for which you want toview Warehouse Values and Warehouse History values in theInventory Query program.

You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys together with your mousepointer to individually highlight items you want to remove.

Remove All Select this to remove all items in this listview from your list ofcompanies for which you want to view Warehouse Values andWarehouse History values in the Inventory Query program.

Numbering

Field Values DescriptionDocumentnumbering

Next stock receiptdocument

You use this field to indicate the number that will be assignedto the next document printed to record the receipt into stock ofan item using the Inventory Movements program.

Note:This number is assigned only if the option to generatethe next document number is enabled for your Stockreceipts document format.

| Setup | 47


Field Values DescriptionNext issuedocument

You use this field to indicate the number that will be assignedto the next document printed to record the issue of items formiscellaneous purposes using the Inventory Movementsprogram.

Note:This number is assigned only if the option to generatethe next document number is enabled for your Issuedocument format.

Next transfer outdocument

You use this field to indicate the number that will be assignedto the next document printed to record the transfer of itemsbetween warehouses using the Inventory Movementsprogram.

Note:This number is assigned only if the option to generatethe next document number is enabled for your transferout document format.

Inspectionprint documentnumbering

Next inspectionprint document

This indicates the reference number that will be used for thenext inspection document to be printed.

This number is automatically updated by the system eachtime you print a new inspection document using the PurchaseOrder Inspection program.

Next rejection printdocument

This indicates the reference number that will be used for thenext rejection note document to be printed.

This number is automatically updated by the system each timeyou print a new rejection note document using the PurchaseOrder Inspection program.

Next scrappedprint document

This indicates the reference number that will be used for thenext scrap note document to be printed.

This number is automatically updated by the system each timeyou print a new scrap note document using the PurchaseOrder Inspection program.

Goods in TransitReference

Manual Select this to enter a GIT Reference number manuallywhenever you process an inter-warehouse or supply chaintransfer of goods.

Company Select this to assign the next GIT Reference numberautomatically, according to your entry at the Next referencefield.

| Setup | 48


Field Values DescriptionNote:You can select this option only if the key type ofthe GIT Reference field is configured to be numeric(Company Setup).

Next reference You use this field to indicate the GIT Reference number thatwill be used when next you process an inter-warehouse orsupply chain transfer of goods.

This number is incremented by one (1) each time you processa transfer of stock into transit.

Note:You can enter a reference here only if you indicatedthat the system must generate the next number atcompany level (i.e. If you selected the By companyoption at the Goods in Transit Reference field).

By warehouse Select this to assign the next GIT Reference numberautomatically, according to the numbering method definedagainst the source warehouse (Inventory Warehouses).

Note:You can select this option only if the key type ofthe GIT Reference field is configured to be numeric(Company Setup).

By warehouse -with prefix

Select this to assign the next GIT Reference automatically,according to the numbering method defined against the sourcewarehouse, together with a two character prefix (InventoryWarehouses).

Note:You can select this option only if the key type of theGIT Reference field is configured to be alphanumeric(Company Setup).

Manual serialnumber tracking

Tracking of manual serial numbers enables you to createsequential ranges of manual serial numbers.

The serial number can be created according to the Prefix andNext suffix defined either against the company or against eachindividual serialized stock item.

For example:

You define the Prefix as A1 and the Next suffix as 001.

You create a range of three manual serial numbers. The serialnumbers are generated as: A1001, A1002, A1003. The nextrange of manual serials numbers created will begin with A1004.

These options are only enabled if:

• The option: Serial tracking system required (InventorySetup - Options tab) is selected.

| Setup | 49


Field Values Description• The Key type for Serial number is set to Alphanumeric

(Company Setup - Key Types tab).

None Select this if you do not want to keep track of the range ofmanual serial numbers generated in the system.

By stock code Select this to keep track of manual serial number ranges atstock code level.

If you select this option, then you define the prefix andnext suffix against each individual stock item (Stock CodeMaintenance - Tracking).

You would select this option if you wanted the system to keeptrack of the last serial number range created for a specific stockcode. This would enable you to create ranges of manual serialnumbers that are sequential for a specific stock item.

By company Select this to keep track of manual serial number ranges atcompany level.

You would select this option if you wanted to create ranges ofmanual serial numbers that are sequential within the company.These number ranges can be assigned to various stock codes.

When you take on serials and do not change the prefix fromthe default company prefix, then the last suffix used + 1 isstored so that the next manual serial entered defaults to thatsuffix. If you change the sequential suffix numbering of serials,then the system updates the suffix accordingly. This applies inall programs which enable you to take on manual serials.

Manual serial number ranges are created according to theprefix and next suffix defined against the company.

Note:Up to 15 characters may be used for either the prefix orthe next suffix, but the combination of prefix and suffixcannot exceed 20 characters (i.e. the serial numbercannot exceed 20 characters).

Prefix You use this field to enter the character(s) that must form thestart of the serial number when you add a range of manualserial numbers within this company.

Next suffix You use this field to enter the number to append to the prefix.The combination of prefix and suffix forms the serial number.

The system automatically increments the Next suffix for eachnew serial number created in the range providing the numberwas created using the prefix.

The number of numeric characters entered for the suffix mustcater for the total quantity of serial numbers you want to addusing the defined prefix. For example: A suffix of 1 characterwill allow 9 serials to be added for the prefix you defined.

| Setup | 50


Field Values DescriptionStock codenumberingmethod

These options enable you to indicate how the Stock code mustbe allocated to new stock items added using the Stock CodeMaintenance program.

Manual Select this if you want to manually allocate a unique stock codeto identify a new stock item added.

Automatic Select this if you want the system to assign the next stock codeautomatically when you use the Stock Code Maintenanceprogram to add a new stock item.

The stock code is assigned based on the entry in the Nextstock code field below.

Note:You can only assign stock codes automatically if theStock code Key type is set to Numeric (CompanySetup - Key type tab).

Scripted Select this if you want the system to assign the next stock codeautomatically when you add a new stock item, based on a userdefined script.

You can use the VBScript Editor, accessed from the StockCode Maintenance program, to build a unique stock code foreach new stock item added.

The scripted stock code can be built up using values from otherentered fields. For example, using characters from the stockitem short description together with the supplier code.

Next stock code You use this field to indicate the next stock code number thatmust be allocated to the Stock code field when next you add astock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program.

This number is incremented automatically by the system eachtime you add a new stock item.

You can only access this field when your Stock codenumbering method is set to Automatic.

Configurator

Field Values DescriptionPrice options

Do not promptfrom price

Select this if you do not want to be prompted for the price of acomponent when adding a sales order for configuration.

Note:You will be prompted to specify a price only if you arerequired to indicate a quantity.

Accept zero price Select this if you do not want to be prompted for the price ofa component when adding a sales order for configuration,regardless of whether a price is held against the component.

| Setup | 51


Field Values DescriptionNote:You will be prompted to specify a price only if you arerequired to indicate a quantity.

Sales orderswith selectioncriteria generatedparents

Create job forexisting parent

Select this if you want to be able to create a job and add asales order line for a generated parent part which alreadyexists as a stocked item. Selecting this option will only beeffective if you are generating parent codes according toselection criteria.

Note:The generated parent must be a made in stocked itemand a bill of material for route 0 must be held on file forthe existing parent.

Override existingparent descriptionwith generateddescription

Select this for the generated parent part in Sales Orders andWork In Progress to use the parent description entered withinProduct Configurator instead of the parent description from theinventory master file.

Note:If you enable the option: Update stock descriptionsfrom inventory master file (WIP Period End or OrderPurge) then the descriptions entered are overwritten bythe descriptions from the inventory master file.

Do not updatewarehouse cost forexisting parent

Select this to prevent warehouse costs from being updatedwhen configuring a product from within sales orders, for anexisting parent that does not have a bill of material and thequantity on hand is zero.

Costs to use forbought out itemswhen creating aBOM

This option enables you to define which costs to use for boughtout items at the time of creating a Bill of Material from withinProduct Configurator.

Inventory Select this to use the inventory cost for bought out itemswhen rolling up the single level costs towards the new parentcreated.

BOM Select this to use the Bill of Material costs for bought out itemswhen rolling up the single level costs towards the new parentcreated.

Actual Costing Conversion ReviewYou use the Actual Costing Conversion Review program to review and optionally re-distribute thequantities in the FIFO buckets displayed.

| Setup | 52


This program is automatically loaded when you select the Actual costing > Lot traceable or Actual costing >Batch serial options in the Inventory Setup program.

Actual costing uses the FIFO valuation architecture to track and process costs. The purpose of thisprogram is to create entries in the FIFO table that relate back to the lots and/or serials.

SerialsThe following panes are displayed in the Actual Costing Conversion Review program if you selectedActual costing > Batch serial.

• Stock CodesThis pane displays the batch serials for stock codes/warehouses in a treeview structure.

The Adjustment column indicates whether an adjustment record was created by the Actual CostingConversion Review program. Adjustments are created where an imbalance occurred between theserial quantity on hand and the serial transaction quantities.

When you highlight a serial, the cost bucket information is displayed in the Actual Cost Buckets pane• Adjustments

This pane displays details of the adjustment records created where an imbalance occurred between theserial quantity on hand and the serial transaction quantities.

• Actual Cost BucketsThis pane displays the actual cost buckets created by the Actual Costing Conversion Reviewprogram, based on the serial transaction records.

If more than one bucket exists for a serial then you can move existing quantities from one bucket toanother and save these changes. Note that the bucket quantities must still equal the quantity on handagainst the serial. If they do not, then you will be unable to save your changes.

LotsThe following panes are displayed in the Actual Costing Conversion Review program if you selectedActual costing > Lot traceable.

• Stock CodesThis pane displays the lots for stock codes/warehouses in a treeview structure.

The Adjustment column indicates whether an adjustment record was created by the Actual CostingConversion Review program. Adjustments are created where an imbalance occurred between the lotquantity on hand and the lot transaction quantities.

When you highlight a lot, the cost bucket information is displayed in the Actual Cost Buckets pane• Adjustments

This pane displays details of the adjustment records created where an imbalance occurred between thelot quantity on hand and the lot transaction quantities.

• Actual Cost BucketsThis pane displays the actual cost buckets created by the Actual Costing Conversion Reviewprogram, based on the lot transaction records.

If more than one bucket exists for a lot, then you can move existing quantities from one bucket toanother and save these changes. Note that the bucket quantities must still equal the quantity on handagainst the lot. If they do not, then you will be unable to save your changes.

Processing SequenceThe processing phases performed by the Actual Costing Conversion Review program are as follows:

| Setup | 53


• Run an Inventory valuation on the item, storing the total value.• Process stock items as follows:

• Create FIFO buckets according to the lot transaction file for Lot traceable items.

This applies if you selected the Actual costing > Lot traceable option (Inventory Setup).• Create FIFO buckets according to the serial transaction file for Batch serialised items only.

This applies if you selected the Actual costing > Batch serial option (Inventory Setup).• Process all Engineering Change Control (ECC) items, excluding batch serialized items if Actual

costing is enabled for batch serials.

All existing FIFO buckets are updated with the revision and/or release of all existing ECC controlleditems.

• Remove all existing Goods in Transit FIFO buckets and Transfer FIFO buckets at stock code level.• Remove any existing FIFO buckets against the stock item.• Create new FIFO buckets as follows:

• For each lot, batch serial and revision/release for ECC items where the item is not lot traceable (i.e.dummy lots exist):

• Create a FIFO bucket for each positive Receipt, and Transfer In on the lot transaction table,recording the cost from the transaction and the receipt date.

• Update the transaction with the new cost and bucket fields.• Create FIFO journals for tracking purposes.

• Process the transactions again, for the following transaction types: I - Issues, S - Sales, A - Adjustments(including physical adjustments), T - transfers, R - Receipts, D - Dispatch notes, starting at the oldesttransaction and netting the buckets off with the transactions.

At this point, the issue date is updated.

It is important to note the following:

• A bucket will not go negative.

If the issue quantity is greater than the quantity against the bucket, then the quantity in the bucketis subtracted from the issue quantity and then set to zero. This routine is repeated until the issuequantity is zero.

• The new cost and bucket fields on the transaction are updated.

Note:If the transaction spans more than one bucket, then the average cost of the buckets used isthe cost updated against the transaction record.

For transactions which cause the bucket quantities to increase, the FIFO bucket issue date must beequal to or greater than the Lot/Serial transaction date.

FIFO journals are created for tracking purposes.• Create Adjustment records (if required) after creating the buckets based on the lot/serial transactions.

Variance journals are created if the transaction records do not balance with the lot/serial quantity onhand. The variance journal type is "t" and the reference is “ActualCst”.

• Once all buckets are processed, you can review these buckets and move quantities between bucketsfor a single lot/serial as required. The quantities must balance back to the Lot/Serial quantity on hand.FIFO journals are created for tracking purposes.

| Setup | 54


Stock Code MaintenanceYou use the Stock Code Maintenance program to define the characteristics of stock items that yourcompany uses or sells. The stock code is the key to the inventory master file and can be defined asalphanumeric or numeric (Company Setup).

The Stock Codes listview displays details of stock items currently defined.

Stock Code Maintenance

Field Values DescriptionFile

Save Select this to save the details you entered or changed.

The date on which a new stock code is added and the date onwhich a stock code is attached to a warehouse can be viewedusing the Inventory Query program.

This option is only enabled after the information in at least onefield is changed.

Save and Close Select this to save the details you entered or changed and toreturn to the previous screen.


This option is only enabled after the information in at least onefield is changed.

Close Select this to return to the previous screen.

Note:If you do not select the Save or Save and Closeoptions before selecting this option, then any changesmade to the stock item's details is lost.

Edit

New Select this to add a new stock item.

Delete Select this to delete the currently displayed stock item.

Options

Preferences Select this to assign preferences that you want to apply toall new stock codes added to the system. These include thetake-on of warehouses, pricing, foreign purchase prices, salesquantity history and aged valuation detail

Defaults

Use Product ClassDefaults

Select this to use the default entries defined against theproduct class when adding a stock item.

If you do not select this option then the entries defined usingthe Maintain Global Defaults option are used when adding astock item.

| Setup | 55


Field Values DescriptionChange ProductClass

Select this to select a different default product class to usewhen adding stock items. This option is only enabled when youselected the option Use Product Class Defaults.

Maintain ProductClass Defaults

You use product class defaults to assign default entries tofields according to the product class to which the stock itembelongs. When capturing a stock item that belongs to a specificproduct class, you can then elect to use the default entries thatyou assigned to the product class.

Maintain GlobalDefaults

Select this to assign entries to fields that you want to use bydefault whenever you capture a stock item.

WarehouseDefaults

Select this to use the Warehouses for Stock Code program todefine the default entries required for warehouses to which youare adding the stock item.

This option is only enabled when you selected either theMaintain Global Defaults or Maintain Product Class Defaultsoption from the Defaults menu. If you selected to maintainproduct class defaults, then you must enter a product classbefore you can define the warehouse defaults.

New Select this icon to add a new stock item.

Delete Select this icon to delete the currently displayed stock item.

Save Select this icon to save the details you entered or changed.


This icon is only enabled after the information in at least onefield is changed.

Stock code You use this field to indicate the code of the item you want toadd or maintain.

The stock code uniquely identifies the item.

If you are adding a new stock code, then the code cannotalready exist as a non-stocked code (Non-StockedMaintenance).

Note:This field is only enabled when adding a new stockitem if your Stock code numbering method is set toManual (Inventory Setup - Numbering tab).

The maximum number of characters you can use forthe stock code depends on the key type you selectedfor Stock codes (Company Setup - Key Type tab).

If you defined the Stock code key type as Numeric,then you can enter up to 15 numeric characters in thisfield.

If you defined the Stock code key type asAlphanumeric, then you can enter up to 30 charactersin this field.

| Setup | 56


Field Values DescriptionYou can use the stock code as a selection criterion for variousInventory, Sales Orders, Purchase Orders, RequirementsPlanning and Sales Analysis reports.

This field is disabled when you are defining global defaults.

Product class This field is displayed when you select to maintain productclass defaults. You use this field to enter the product class forwhich you want to maintain the default entries. When addinga stock item that belongs to a specific product class, you canelect to use the default entries that you assigned to the productclass.

Play Select this to use the Multimedia program to view multimediaobjects defined against the item.

Edit Select this to use the Multimedia program to define multimediaobjects against the item.

Notes Select this to view and maintain various text notations againstthe stock item. A tick alongside any of the notations indicatesthat text has been assigned to the item.

Notations are stored in the Inventory Narrations Detail file(INVNAD - CISAM/InvNarrations - SQL) and can be includedon a report defined using the Create Report program.

The text is determined by the narration class as follows:

• T - Technical spec• S - S/order additional text• P - P/order additional text• W - Job narrations• I - Inspection text• D - Dangerous goods handling

Note:You can prevent the unauthorized editing of thesenotational fields using the Fields function located onthe Security tab of the Operators program.

• Notation List

Select this to use the Notation List program to selectivelyprint stock code notes assigned to the stock

TechnicalSpecification

Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technicalinformation text that can be printed on the GRN document,inspection document and factory documentation.

Sales Order AddText

Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technicalinformation text that can be retrieved onto a sales order andprinted on sales order documents.

P/Order Add Text Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technicalinformation text that can be retrieved into a purchase order andprinted on purchase order documents.

| Setup | 57


Field Values DescriptionJob Narrations Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technical

information text that can be printed on factory documentationand viewed using the WIP Query program.

Inspection Text Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technicalinformation text that can be printed on the GRN document,inspection document and factory documentation.

Dangerous GoodsHandling

Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technicalinformation text that can be retrieved into a sales order/purchase order and printed on sales order/purchase orderdocuments. In addition, you can be notified during Sales OrderEntry when dangerous goods text is held against a stock itembeing processed.

PreferencesThis screen is displayed when you select the Preferences option from the options menu.

The options enable you to indicate preferences to apply at the time of adding new stock items to thesystem. These include the take on of warehouses, pricing, foreign purchase prices, sales quantity historyand aged valuation details.

For each preference selected, the appropriate program is loaded when you select the Save option to savethe details for the new stock item. You then have the option of entering the details at this point or later ifrequired. If you do not select a preference, you can still use the appropriate program to enter the requireddetails later.

Field Values DescriptionTake onwarehouseswhen addingstock codes

Select this to use the Warehouses for Stock Code program todefine the warehouse details for the new item.

Take on pricingwhen addingstock codes

Select this to use the Pricing for a Stock Code program todefine the coded prices and quantity discount breaks for thenew item.

Take on foreignpurchase priceswhen addingstock codes

Select this to use the Foreign Purchase Prices program toassign foreign prices for the new item.

Take on salesquantity historywhen addingstock codes

Select this to use the Inventory Sales Quantity Historyprogram to capture details of quantities sold for the stock itemover the last 12 months, as well as additional sales historyinformation.

Take on agedvaluation whenadding stockcodes

Select this to use the Inventory Initial Aged Valuationprogram to take on the stock item's year end quantity on handfor the last five years.

Save Select this to save your selections against your operator code.

Close Select this to save your selections for the current run of theprogram only.

| Setup | 58


Use Product Class DefaultsThis screen is displayed when you select the Use Product Class Defaults or the Change Product Classoption from the Defaults menu.

Field Values DescriptionOK Select this to accept the product class selected.

Product class You use this field to indicate the product class from which touse the default entries when adding a stock item.

Default productclass information

Product class This indicates the product class code you selected to use

Description This indicates the description defined against the product classcode selected.

Long description This indicates the long description defined against the productclass code selected.

Stock Code DetailsIf you change the unit of measure for a stock item and you have Bills of Material, you can use the BOMUpdate Unit of Measure program to change the unit of measure for the item against all your bills.

Field Values DescriptionStock codeinformation

Stock code This indicates the code of the stock item you are currentlyadding or maintaining.

Stock code(scripted)

This field is only enabled if you indicated that the Stock codenumbering method is Scripted (Inventory Setup).

You use the VBScript Editor to build a unique stock code foreach new stock item added. The scripted stock code can bebuilt up using values from other entered fields, to update theStockCodeDetails.CodeObject.StockCodescripted field.

Description You use this field to enter the description of the stock item.

This describes the stock code and is displayed throughout thesystem whenever the stock code is entered. You can use it toverify that the correct item has been entered.

Long description You use this field to enter the long description of the stock item.

This is an additional description assigned to a stock code whichis viewable from within the Inventory Query program andwhich can be printed on reports and inventory documents.

Warehouse to use This indicates the warehouse that must be used to extractthe quantities of stock required by the Bill of Materials modulewhen performing functions such as a cost implosion andcreating material allocations.

| Setup | 59


Field Values DescriptionThis is also the default warehouse used for the parent whenadding a job and is used to calculated the new landed cost ofan item.

The Purchase Order module does not use the Warehouse touse as the default warehouse when adding a purchase order.

You will only be able to enter a warehouse to which you haveaccess (Operators - Access tab).

Note:• If you are using the full Goods in Transit transfers

facility then the warehouse to use defaults to beingthe top level warehouse for the item.

• You will be unable to specify a warehouse to use if itis supplied by another warehouse.

Warehouse to usedescription

This indicates the description defined against the warehouse touse you selected.

Drawing number This field is for documentary purposes and is printed on reportsand factory documentation.

This field is only enabled if the ECC (Engineering ChangeControl) module is installed.

Part category Note:It is important that the correct part category is assignedto a stock item as it has different implications whenused with other modules.

B - Bought out This indicates that the item is purchased from an externalsupplier.

You can use the Structures and Routings program to definea structure and routing against a bought out item and thencreate a job for the item. This feature is available in case youneed to make the item internally from time to time. However,while you can create a job for a bought out item, it is nottreated as a made-in item anywhere else in the system (suchas cost implosion, MRP, Advanced Trial Kitting, etc). Thedecision on how to define an item which is both bought out andmade-in therefore depends on how you want the costing andMRP for the item to work. An alternative is to create two stockcodes for the item and define one as made-in and the other asbought out.

M - Made in This indicates that the item is manufactured internally.

S - Subcontracted This indicates that the item is a made-in part that has beenassigned at least one subcontract operation.

A subcontract item is treated in the same manner as a made-inpart in SYSPRO. This part category was introduced before thefunctionality was added to Material Requirements Planning toraise suggested requisitions for subcontract operations, but it isnow only used for reporting purposes.

| Setup | 60


Field Values DescriptionG - Phantom part This indicates that the item is a parent part in a bill of material,

but will typically not be booked into stock for issuing purposes.

It can be used as a grouping mechanism to reflect the wayin which a product is built, as well as to facilitate the use ofcommon bills of material for engineering and manufacturing.

It is used for sub assemblies that are typically non-stocked,and permits MRP logic to drive requirements straight throughthe phantom item to its components. However, the MRPsystem usually retains its ability to net against any occasionalinventories of the item (e.g. if you add an allocation to aphantom manually and then run a Requirements Calculation,existing stock of the phantom will be netted off and a jobsuggested for the net requirement).

P - Planning bill This indicates that the item is an artificial part used to assistin forecasting. It cannot be stocked, sold, or bought out and isused merely to allow the forecasting of a family of products asan entity.

This allows you to generate gross requirements into theMPS or MRP (see the Requirements Planning module)independently for each member of the family.

K - Kit part This indicates that the stock code represents one itemmade up from a group of items which together comprise onemanufactured inventory item.

If selected here, then at the Kit type field in the Sales Detailspane, you can only select the Kit type and Sub type options.

C - Co-product This indicates that the stock item is a product which ismanufactured together with another item or items. Themanufacturing process of the item can take place togetheror sequentially. Products are usually manufactured togetherbecause of product and/or process similarities. Co-productsmake a material contribution to the market value of the outputsof a manufacturing process.

A co-product can be manufactured by itself as any other made-in item, or it can be attached to a Notional part in a Bill ofMaterials Structure and Routing (see BOM Co-products). Onlyitems defined as co-products can be attached to notional parts.

Co-products are planned for in requirements planning.

Currently, a co-product cannot be defined as ECC controlled(Tracking tab). In addition, you will be unable to define activitybased costing for a co-product (Element Structures).

Note:When manufacturing co-products, you will be unableto link a sales order directly to a job nor can you link asub-job with multiple outputs to a master job.

| Setup | 61


Field Values DescriptionY - By-product This indicates that the stock item is an incidental or residual

item produced as part of the manufacturing process of theparent item.

A by-product may be recycled, sold as is or used for otherpurposes. You use the Structures and Routings program toadd a by-product to a bill of materials as a negative materialallocation.

A by-product is regarded as recoverable scrap in SYSPRO.Irrecoverable scrap is not and should not be treated as a byproduct, but as scrap.

Currently, by-product items are used for reporting purposesonly.

You can use the Structures and Routings program to definea structure and routing against a by-product, although awarning message is displayed when you select to do so.

By-products are not planned for in requirements planning.

When you define an item as a by-product, the Batching rule(Replenishment tab) is set to P - Suppress MRP ordering andcannot be changed.

You include the cost of a by-product in the parent's bill ofmaterials by running the Cost Implosion program.

N - Notional part This indicates that the stock code is a notional part, whichexists in name only. This item is not recognized as physicalstock and can therefore not be bought or sold or have anyinventory movements associated with it.

A notional part is used as a link between the Bill of MaterialsStructure and Routing information and the physical co-productsbeing manufactured (i.e. it is an imaginary part that attachesa bill of materials structure and routing to multiple end-items(co-products). It can only be defined as a parent part in a Bill ofMaterials and not as a component.

A notional part cannot be a sub-job.

Currently, a notional item cannot be defined as ECC controlled(Tracking tab) or as an MPS item (Production tab). In addition,you will be unable to define activity based costing for a notionalitem (Element Structures).

This option is only enabled if the Bill of Materials module isinstalled.

Note:You can only define a stock item as a notional partwhen adding the item (i.e. you cannot for examplechange an existing item with a part category of Made-into a part category of Notional part).

| Setup | 62


Field Values DescriptionProduct class This indicates the category to which the item is assigned. It is

used for reporting purposes (Sales Analysis) and as a methodof defining your integration to the General Ledger module.

You must enter a valid product class if you selected the option:Validate product class (Inventory Setup - Options tab). Whenyou enter a valid product class, the description for the productclass is displayed. If you did not select to validate productclasses, then, although a product class must be assigned to astock item, your entry is validated only at the time of generatinga sales order (see Sales Order Entry).

You will be unable to access this field if you selected theoption: Use Product Class Defaults (Defaults function). Theproduct class you entered on the Use Product Class Defaultsscreen is automatically entered in this field. To change thedefault product class, you select the Change Product Classoption from the Defaults function.

Product classdescription

This indicates the description for the product class youselected.

Stocking unitmetrics

Stocking unit ofmeasure

This indicates the unit of measure in which the stock item isheld on file. A stocking unit of measure entry must be assignedto a stock item.

If you selected the setup option: Unit of measure conversionfactors are theoretical (Sales Order Setup - Tax/Um tab),then you enter the theoretical unit of measure in this field. Forexample, if you sell boxes of fruit that you stock in kilograms,but sell by the box. If there are theoretically 10kg in one box,then kilograms is the theoretical unit of measure because onlyat the time of selling the fruit do you know the exact number ofkilograms sold.

Mass per stockingunit

This indicates the weight of a single unit of the stock item inthe stocking unit of measure. It is used for reporting purposes(Inventory and Sales Analysis) and can be printed on inventoryand sales documents.

If the option: EC VAT system required is selected (TaxOptions - General tab), then the mass per stocking unit isrequired for the Supplementary Declarations.

When creating a parent item from Product Configurator (seeProduct Configurator Wizard), the mass of the item is thesum of the masses of the components used to create theparent item.

Volume perstocking unit

This indicates the volume of a single unit of the stock item inthe stocking unit of measure. It is used for reporting and querypurposes. In addition, the stock unit volume, the order linevolume and total volume can be printed on delivery notes andinvoices.

| Setup | 63


Field Values DescriptionWhen creating a parent item from Product Configurator (seeProduct Configurator Wizard), the volume of the item is thesum of the volumes of the components used to create theparent item.

Specific gravity This indicates the value that must be used to convert volumemeasurements to weight measurements (e.g. conversionbetween kilograms and liters, or vice versa).

This field is used if you indicated that the stock item is requiredin a batch bill of materials.

Alternate unit ofmeasure

If you want to be able to hold inventory costs in a unit ofmeasure other than the stocking unit of measure, you needto select the option: Inventory cost to be held in a unit ofmeasure other than stocked (Inventory Setup - Optionstab).

Alternate uom unit This indicates the description for the alternative unit of measurefor the sale or purchase quantity of an item and the pricing.

Alternate uomfactor

The conversion factor enables you to convert the Alternate unitof measure into the Stocking unit of measure.

Note:When you change a conversion factor, any outstandingsales or purchase orders processed using the alternateunit of measure are not changed. These orders are stillrecorded at the factor applicable at the time the orderwas created. Outstanding sales and purchase ordersmust therefore be manually changed as required.

The field is used by the Sales Order module if you haveindicated that the unit of measure must be requested for orderquantities (Sales Order Setup).

In addition, it is used by the Purchase Order module if youhave indicated that the Alternate unit of measure must be usedfor order quantities (Purchase Orders Setup).

For example: if your item is stocked as each and sold orordered in dozens, then you would set up the conversion asfollows:

Table 1: Alternate unit of measure table

Stocking unit of measure EA

Alternate unit of measure DOZ

Conversion factor 12

Conversion method Multiply

This is the equivalent of saying: one dozen is equal to 12 each.

If you selected the setup option: Unit of measure conversionfactors are theoretical (Sales Order Setup - Tax/Um tab),then you enter the absolute unit of measure in this field. For

| Setup | 64


Field Values Descriptionexample, you sell boxes of fruit that you stock in kilograms,but sell by the box. The box is the absolute unit of measure. Ifthere are theoretically 10kg in one box, then kilograms is thetheoretical unit of measure.

Alternate uommethod

You use this field to indicate whether the Stocking unit ofmeasure must be multiplied or divided to give the alternate unitof measure.

Alternate uomconversion

This displays the result of converting from the stocking unit ofmeasure to the alternate unit of measure or vice versa. Youcan select the Test option from the Alternate uom unit field toview the same results in a separate screen.

Other unit ofmeasure

If you want to be able to hold inventory costs in a unit ofmeasure other than the stocking unit of measure, you needto select the option: Inventory cost to be held in a unit ofmeasure other than stocked (Inventory Setup - Optionstab).

Other uom unit This indicates the description for the other unit of measure forthe sales ordering quantity of an item and the pricing.

Other uom factor A conversion factor enables you to convert the Other unit ofmeasure into the Stocking unit of measure.

Note:When you change a conversion factor, any outstandingsales orders processed using the other unit of measureare not changed. These orders are still recorded at thefactor applicable at the time the order was created.Outstanding sales orders must therefore be manuallychanged as required.

The field is used by the Sales Order module if you haveindicated that the unit of measure must be requested for orderquantities (Sales Order Setup).

For example: If your item is stocked as Each and sold inDozens or Boxes (5 per box), then you would set up theconversion as follows:

Table 2: Other unit of measure table

Stocking unit of measure EA

Alternate unit of measure DOZ

Conversion factor 12


Other unit of measure BOX

Conversion factor 5


This is the equivalent of saying: one box is equal to 5 each.

| Setup | 65


Field Values DescriptionOther uom method You use this field to indicate whether the Stocking unit of

measure must be multiplied or divided to give the Other unit ofmeasure.

Other uomconversion

This displays the result of converting from the Stocking unit ofmeasure to the Other unit of measure or vice versa. You canselect the Test option from the Other uom unit field to view thesame results in a separate screen.

Manufacturingunit of measure

Defining a manufacturing unit of measure enables you to view,and report on, the unit of measure you entered to manufacturethe item.

This provides you with an additional unit of measure over andabove the stocking, alternate and other units of measure.

You can only define manufacturing units of measure if youselected the setup option: Use manufacturing u/m (WIP Setup- General 2 tab).

Note:• A manufacturing unit of measure cannot be defined

for parent or component stock items with thefollowing Part categories:

• Planning bill• Kit part• Phantom part• Notional part

• Irrespective of whether you define a manufacturingunit of measure, transactions for lots, bins andserials are always done in the stocking unit ofmeasure.

Manufacturing uomunit

You use this field to indicate the description for themanufacturing unit of measure.

Manufacturing uomfactor

A conversion factor enables you to convert the Manufacturingunit of measure into the Stocking unit of measure.

Manufacturing uommethod

You use this field to indicate whether the Stocking unitof measure must be multiplied or divided to give theManufacturing unit of measure.

Manufacturing uomconversion

This displays the result of converting from the Stocking unit ofmeasure to the Manufacturing unit of measure or vice versa.You can select the Test option from the Manufacturinguom unitfield to view the same results in a separate screen.

Other options

Cost unit ofmeasure

This indicates the unit of measure to be used for the inventorycost of the item. You define cost units of measure using theUnit of Measure Maintenance program.

Note:• A cost unit of measure can be assigned to the item

only if you indicated that your inventory costs must

| Setup | 66


Field Values Descriptionbe held in a unit of measure other than stocked(Inventory Setup - Options tab).

• The cost unit of measure can only be defined whenadding a stock code and you will be unable tochange the cost unit of measure once the stock itemhas been created.

• You will be unable to save the details for the stockcode if the cost unit of measure is not defined ordoes not exist.

Maximum numberof decimals

This indicates the number of decimals to which you want tostore and print stock quantities. You can specify a maximum of3 decimals.

Stock code related quantities are displayed in listviews to thenumber of decimals you define here, providing you select thesetup option: Edit quantities using decimals associated withitem (Company Setup - Options tab).

Unit quantityprocessing

Select Yes if you want quantities of a specific stock code to behandled and displayed as units of the stocking and alternateunit of measure, rather than as units and decimal places.

For example: If an item is stocked in cases with an alternateunit of measure of 12 bottles per case, then a quantity of 2.5 ispresented as 2/06, or entered as two fields - one for 2 and onefor 6 (i.e. no decimal places are allowed on either the stockingor alternate unit of measure).

When entering this type of stock code during Sales OrderEntry, the system requests the entry of quantities in twoseparate fields - the primary quantity is always in the stockingunit of measure, followed by the equivalent alternate unit ofmeasure where decimal places would previously have beenentered.

The same procedure applies to Stock Takes, InventoryMovements, Purchase Orders and Dispatch Notes. It is notpossible to enter a job for anything other than units of thestocking quantity.

Note:• The alternate unit of measure must be less than the

stocking unit of measure.• No decimal places can be used in either the

stocking or the alternate units of measure.• Pricing of the sales order line is always in terms of

the stocking unit of measure.

Alternate key 1 This indicates additional information assigned to the stock itemwhich can be used as selection criteria when browsing on stockcodes.

It can also be used to change the sequence in which items aredisplayed when browsing on stock codes.

| Setup | 67


Field Values DescriptionThe wording displayed for this field can be changed to suit yourown requirements (Inventory Setup).

Alternate key 2 This indicates additional information assigned to the stock itemwhich can be used as selection criteria when browsing on stockcodes.


The wording displayed for this field can be changed to suit yourown requirements (Inventory Setup).

Retain stockmovements

Select Yes if you want to store on file all transactionmovements processed against the stock item.

If you selected the option: Record movements for bin transfers(Inventory Setup - Options tab), then details of bin transferswithin the same warehouse are retained.

A listing of stock movements can be printed using theInventory Movement Report and Kardex Report programs.

Stock code status This enables you to define the status of the stock item.

Normal Select this to indicates that the stock code is a normal stockitem.

Temporary Select this if you require the stock item to be deletedautomatically when you run the purge routine within theInventory Period End program (providing the item meets allthe requirements for the deletion of a stock code - see thePurge).

Note:Serialized or traceable items cannot be defined astemporary items.

Clear Select this to indicate that the stock item must be sold orcleared as a matter of urgency.

This option can also be used by the Superseded ClearingStock report as a criterion according to which stock items areselected for printing.

When you select this option, the Batching rule for the stockitem is set to P -Suppress MRP ordering ( Replenishmentpane).

Stock code on holdstatus

This indicates the on hold status for the stock item.

This is maintained using the Maintain Hold Status program.

You can access the Maintain Hold Status program bybrowsing on the Stock code field and then selecting the OnHold Status option from the Edit menu of the Stock Codesprogram displayed.

Additional items

| Setup | 68


Field Values DescriptionWarehouses Select this to assign the stock item to a warehouse and to

define the warehouse information for the highlighted stock itemusing the Warehouses for Stock Code program.

Pricing Select this to define the pricing information for the highlightedstock item using the Pricing for a Stock Code program.

Foreign purchaseprices

Select this to define the foreign purchase pricing information forthe highlighted stock item using the Foreign Purchase Pricesprogram.

Alternate stockcodes

Select this to define the alternate stock code information forthe highlighted stock item using the Alternate Stock Codesprogram.

Alternate suppliers Select this to define the alternate supplier information for thehighlighted stock item using the Alternate Suppliers program.

Replenishment

Field Values DescriptionPurchasing

Supplier You use this field to indicates the code of the primary supplierfrom whom you usually purchase this stock item.

This field is not mandatory.

The supplier code is validated only if the Accounts Payable orPurchase Order modules is installed.

Supplier name This indicates the name of the selected supplier.

Buyer You use this field to buyer code of the person responsible forpurchasing the stock item.

It is used as a selection criterion for stock codes printed onvarious Requirements Planning reports.

Buyer name This indicates the name of the selected buyer.

Tariff code This is used in the Landed Cost Tracking system to determinethe duty rate applicable to an imported item.

The tariff code is also used in the EC VAT system and is animportant data field on the Supplementary Declarations report.This number identifies the goods that are the subject of adispatch or arrival and is the basis for most of the statisticalinformation used by government departments, the EuropeanCommission, United Nation's agencies and businessesthemselves.

Tariff codedescription

This indicates the description for the selected tariff code (seeTariff Code Maintenance).

Supplementaryunits

Select to indicate that supplementary units are required for thetariff code.

| Setup | 69


Field Values DescriptionA number of tariff codes require the declaration of asupplementary unit, for example the number of pieces, litresor cubic metres. Generally, a supplementary unit is requiredwhen it is a more appropriate measure of particular goods thanthe net mass and allows a greater degree of comparison andanalysis.

When adding a sales order line for a stock item that requiressupplementary units, the supplementary unit code is passedto the order line from the stock code. A factor can then beadded for calculating the supplementary unit quantity. Wheninvoicing, the supplementary unit information is saved andmade available for printing on the EC Sales reports.

When receipting a purchase order, the supplementary unitinformation is requested, saved and made available for printingon the PO EC Declaration of Arrivals report.

Supplementarycode

You use this field to indicate the supplementary code to use forthe stock item.

This field may be left blank, but if entered must be a validsupplementary code (see Intrastat Supplementary Units).

This field is only available if you selected the Supplementaryunits option.

Supplementarycode description

This indicates the description defined against thesupplementary code selected (see Supplementary CodeMaintenance).

Landed costtracking required

Select this to indicate that the stock item is required in theLanded Cost Tracking system.

Note:You can only select this for bought-out items.

Lead time (days) This indicates the number of days in which to either buy out ormanufacture the stock item.

For bought out items, you enter the number of days it takesyour supplier to deliver the item to you from the date you placethe order. The lead time for bought out items must be manuallybuffered for non-working days. For example, if your suppliertakes 3 days from date of order to deliver the item to you, thisrepresents 3 working days. You will therefore need to buffer thelead time to account for weekends.

For made in items, you use the Lead Time Calculationprogram to calculate and update the lead time. The Lead TimeCalculation program calculates a ratio of working to non-working days and applies this when calculating the lead timefor an item. This means that you do not need to buffer thelead time for made in items if you are using the Lead TimeCalculation program to update this field.

The lead time is used in the calculation performed by theMinimum Quantity Calculation program to establish

| Setup | 70


Field Values Descriptionthe minimum quantity required for each stock code andwarehouse. It is also used in the Requirements Planning andBill of Materials modules.

Refer to Lead time for additional information on lead time.

Replenishmentdetails

Dock to stock(days)

This indicates the number of days that a bought out or made instock item must be in stock prior to usage. This enables you tocalculate an earlier due date for jobs or purchase orders and,from these, an earlier start date.

Non-working days per the factory calendar are taken intoaccount when the delivery date is calculated to add to the shipdate.

Batching rule The batching rule (or buying rule) is used by the RequirementsPlanning module to indicate how you want to address quantityshortages encountered for the stock item.

Although a buying rule is applied to bought-out itemsand a batch rule is applied to made-in items, the term isinterchangeable within the Requirements Planning systembecause the buying or batch rules can apply to either bought-out or made-in items.

The buying rule defined against each stock item is used tomodify the actual shortage quantity in order to calculate anorder quantity.

Note:SYSPRO does not allow any order policy to exceed theMaximum quantity defined (Warehouse Maintenancefor Stock Code).

The reason is that you may, for example, be orderingfrozen fish. The Maximum quantity is set to fill up yourfreezer. If the system allowed you to order over thismaximum quantity, the additional quantity would not fitin the freezer and would rot.

Batching rules are applied to MPS items when producing theMaster Production Schedule and to non-MPS items whenrunning the Requirements Calculation program.

Note:• SYSPRO reserves buying rules from A to Q. Any

buying rule entered beyond this range is treated asif it was buying rule A.

• Buying rules are NOT applied to MPS items if youhave enabled the option: Include build schedule inrequirements calculation (Requirements PlanningSetup).

• The fixed time period in a time-phased batching ruleis ignored by the Master Production Schedule and

| Setup | 71


Field Values DescriptionMPS Review programs because they use variabletime period lengths.

The fixed time portion of the batching rule is appliedonly in the Requirements Calculation.

An MPS item with a buying rule of C is treated as ifthe rule was A. Buying rules K, L, M, and N revert torules B, F, G, and H respectively.

A - Lot for lot Select this to indicate that the order quantity is the shortagequantity.

All sub jobs are automatically created as lot for lot.

You would typically select this batching rule whenimplementing MRP (Material Requirements Planning) inSYSPRO for the first time. The reason is that this rule simplygenerates planned supply (jobs, purchase order requisitionsand purchase orders) for the actual net shortage in demandfor each period. Once you have familiarised yourself withSYSPRO's Material Requirements Planning module, you canimplement the other batching rules as required.

B - Multiples ofEBQ

To calculate the order quantity, the shortage quantity isrounded up to the next multiple of the economic batch quantity.

For example: If the EBQ is 10 and the shortage is 32, then theorder quantity will be 40.

C - Fixed timeperiod

When a shortage is encountered, the order quantity iscalculated by adding all the shortages in the fixed time periodahead.

For example: If the shortage is 32 today and 14 tomorrow, andthe fixed time period is 1 day (1 future working day) then theorder quantity will be 46 (32 + 14).

D - Order tomaximum ifshortage

When a shortage is encountered, the order quantity iscalculated to increase the stock holding up to the maximumdefined against the warehouse.

For example: If the shortage is 32 and the maximum quantityis 100, then the order quantity will be 132 (32 + 100). Thisis because the shortage of 32 must be filled, plus 100 arerequired to bring the stock holding up to its maximum of 100.

E - Order to max ifless than min

As soon as the result field (during netting-off) falls below theminimum quantity, an order quantity is calculated to ordersufficient to increase the quantity available up to the maximumquantity.

For example: If the minimum quantity is 50 and the maximumquantity is 200 and the result field is 12, then the order quantitywill be 188 (200 - 12).

When you select this option, the MPS Review and MasterProduction Schedule programs use the minimum andmaximum quantities defined against the warehouse to

| Setup | 72


Field Values Descriptioncalculate the suggestions made. Safety stock is not taken intoaccount.

F - Multiples of pan This rule is identical to rule B, except that the pan quantity isused instead of the economic batch quantity.

To calculate the order quantity, the shortage quantity isrounded up to the next multiple of the pan size.

For example: If the Pan size 10 and the shortage is 32, thenthe order quantity will be 40.

G - Multiple EBQlots

If a shortage occurs, then multiple orders should be created tosatisfy the shortage, each the size of the EBQ.

For example: If the EBQ is 10 and the shortage is 32, then 4orders (each having an order quantity of 10) are suggested.

H - Multiple panlots

This rule is identical to rule G, except that the pan quantity isused instead of the economic batch quantity.

If a shortage occurs, then multiple orders should be created tosatisfy the shortage, each the size of the Pan.

For example: If the Pan size is 10 and the shortage is 32, then4 orders (each having an order quantity of 10) are suggested.

I - Minimum ofEBQ

If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is the quantity requiredto meet the shortage, unless this is less than the EBQ (in whichcase the EBQ is used).

For example: If the EBQ is 10 and the shortage is 8, then theorder quantity is 10 (the 8 required to meet the shortage is lessthan the EBQ, so the EBQ is used). However, if the shortage is32 and the EBQ is 10 then the order quantity is 32.

J - Minimum of pan This rule is identical to rule I, except that the pan quantity isused instead of the economic batch quantity.

If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is the quantity requiredto meet the shortage, unless this is less than the Pan size (inwhich case the Pan size is used).

For example: If the Pan size is 10 and the shortage is 8, thenthe order quantity is 10 (the 8 required to meet the shortageis less than the Pan size, so the Pan size is used). However,if the shortage is 32 and the Pan size is 10 then the orderquantity is 32.

K - Multiples ofEBQ (fixed time)

This rule is a combination of rules B and C.

The order quantity is calculated by adding all the shortages inthe fixed time period ahead.

Once this total shortage quantity has been calculated, thenthis is rounded up to the next multiple of the economic batchquantity.

| Setup | 73


Field Values DescriptionL - Multiples of pan(fixed time)

This rule is a combination of rules F and C.

This rule is identical to rule K, except that the pan quantity isused instead of the economic batch quantity.


Once this total shortage quantity has been calculated, then thisis rounded up to the next multiple of the pan size.

M - Multiple EBQlots (fixed time)

This rule is a combination of rules G and C.


Once this total shortage quantity has been calculated, thenmultiple orders (each the size of the EBQ) are suggested.

N - Multiple panlots (fixed time)

This rule is a combination of rules H and C.

This rule is identical to rule M, except that the pan quantity isused instead of the economic batch quantity.


Once this total shortage quantity has been calculated, thenmultiple orders (each the size of the pan) are suggested.

O - Min of EBQ,thereafter multiplesof pan

If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is at least the EBQ.However, if the EBQ is insufficient to satisfy the shortage, thenthe remaining shortage is rounded up to the next multiple of thepan quantity.

For example: If the EBQ is 10 and the pan quantity is 5,a shortage of 3 would cause an order quantity of 10 (theshortage is less than the EBQ). A shortage of 23 would causean order quantity of 25.

P - Suppress MRPordering

Demand generated for this item will not result in any suggestedpurchase orders, unless you have indicated that batching rulesmust be overridden (Requirements Planning Setup).

This is the default batching rule for an item defined as a By-product (Descriptive tab), and cannot be changed.

In addition, when you set the Stock code status to Clear (StockCode Details pane), the batching rule for that stock code is setto P - Suppress MRP ordering. This cannot be changed untilthe Stock code status is changed.

Q - Applywarehouse orderpolicy

Select this if you want to define the batching rules againstthe individual warehouses in which the item is stocked (seeWarehouses for Stock Code). This enables you to definedifferent batching rules for each warehouse in which the item isstocked.

Economic batchquantity

The economic batch quantity is used to determine the costingof a bill of materials. It is also used within the Requirements

| Setup | 74


Field Values DescriptionPlanning module together with batching rules B, G, I, K, M andO.

Note:The economic batch quantity is used instead of the Pansize, depending on your selection at the Manufacturingbasis field for the item.

If progressive scrap is in use then the Economic BatchQuantity must be defined as the net EBQ. Progressivescrap works backwards taking into account the scrap ateach operation to calculate the starting quantity.

Pan size This can be likened to a container size. Within the Bill ofMaterials module you can indicate whether the elapsed timeagainst work centers or cost centers is based on the pan sizeor the economic batch quantity.

Note:This is used instead of the economic batch quantity,depending on your selection at the Manufacturing basisfield for the item.

Fixed time period(days)

This indicates the number of working days that represents afixed time period.

For example: A fixed time period of 1 day indicates that if ashortage is encountered, that the total shortage for today andthe next working day is used as if the shortage falls today.

The entry made here is used for all time-based buying rules(i.e. C, K, L, M and N) within the Requirements Planningmodule.

Date ofsupersession

This indicates the date on which the stock item should nolonger be sold.

It is used by the Superseded Clearing Stock report as acriterion according to which stock items are selected forprinting.

Quantity cyclecount

You use this field to indicate the number of times that you wantto count the stock item during the year.

When you use the Stock Take Selection program to selectstock items for a stock take, you can indicate that you onlywant to include items with a specific quantity cycle count in astock take.

It can also be used as a selection criterion for reportingpurposes.

ABC analysisrequired

Select Yes to indicate that you want to include the stock item inthe calculations performed by the ABC Analysis program.

The ABC Analysis program is used to print a list of stock itemsin descending order of usage value, based on the cost value ofstock used (issued and/or sold) over the last 12 months.

| Setup | 75


Field Values DescriptionThe report indicates which are your most used and least useditems, enabling you to determine what quantities of selectedstock items should be included in your inventory.

Production Details

Field Values DescriptionMasterproductionschedule

MPS item This indicates that the stock item is used in the MasterProduction Schedule system.

A Notional part (Descriptive tab) cannot be defined as an MPSitem.

Non-MPS item This indicates that the item is a normal stock code that isincluded in the Requirements Calculation program.

Statistical item This indicates that the item is always in stock and its lead timeis ignored when calculating the cumulative lead time and/ormanufacturing lead time of its parent.

Gross requirementrule

This is used by the Master Production Schedule (RequirementsPlanning) to indicate how you want to calculate the demandfor a component prior to the netting off of on hand inventoryand scheduled receipts. It is used to calculate the projectedavailable stock and the suggested build schedule.

C - Cumulativehighest offorecasts & s/orders

Select this if you want to use the forecasts or sales orders(whichever is the cumulative highest figure) as the grossrequirement. This is calculated as the cumulative highest figureless the cumulative gross requirement of the previous period.

I - Forecasts only Select this if you want to use only forecasts as the grossrequirement.

H - Highest offorecasts & salesorders

Select this if you want to use either forecasts or sales orders(whichever is the highest figure) as the gross requirement.

S - Sales ordersonly

Select this if you want to use only sales orders as the grossrequirement.

A - Sum offorecasts & salesorders

Select this if you want to use both the forecasts and salesorders as the gross requirement.

Percent yield This indicates what percentage of the item is lost in themanufacturing process so that a shortfall in actual productiondoes not cause an unexpected inability to meet demand ontime.

For example: If a quantity of 10 is required to be manufacturedfor an item with a yield percentage of 50, then you must

| Setup | 76


Field Values Descriptionschedule 20 in order to meet the demand of 10. This fieldapplies only to MPS items.

Manufacturingoptions

Manufacturingquantity basis

This indicates the basis of the elapsed time calculated againstwork centers or cost centers.

Economic batchquantity

Select this to use the economic batch quantity as themanufacturing quantity basis.

Pan size Select this to use the pan size as the manufacturing quantitybasis.

Floorstock This indicates whether the Stock item relates to an inexpensiveproduction part held in the factory from which productionworkers can draw without requisitions.

Floorstock items must be stocked in the warehouse defined asthe floorstock warehouse (WIP Setup).

Floorstock item Floorstock item indicates that the Stock item can be issuedautomatically to a job upon confirmation of the job. It isincluded in the costing process.

Note:• The warehouse quantity is reduced when a

floorstock item is issued and a journal is created.• A serialized or traceable item cannot be defined as

being a Floorstock item.

Irrespective of your selection at the setup option: Stock onhand allowed to go negative (Inventory Setup - Generaltab), items defined as Floorstock which are stocked in thefloorstock warehouse (WIP Setup) will always be allowed to gonegative at the time of confirming a job (Job Issues) or whenBackflushing (Inventory Movements), regardless of yourwarehouse settings. For other types of transactions, floorstockitems are treated in the same manner as any other stock item.Therefore if stock on hand is not allowed to go negative andthere is insufficient stock, you will be unable to process thosetransactions.

Bulk issue item Bulk issue item indicates that the Stock item can be issuedautomatically as a material allocation to a job without affectingthe on hand quantity of the item. The item is included as acomponent in the costing process.

A serialized or traceable item cannot be defined as being aBulk issue item.

You would typically define an item that is considered a'consumable' as a bulk issue item. This enables you to includethis consumable in the cost of a job without forcing you to keepaccurate inventory of the item.

| Setup | 77


Field Values DescriptionNo direct debit and credit journal entries are posted for BulkIssue items. The reason for this is that there is no quantitymoved out of the warehouse to the job.

However, any cost associated with a bulk issue item is includedin the cost of the parent in the BOM (it is calculated and rolledup to the parent's material cost) and, by extension, when a jobis created it is part of the expected cost of materials.

To ensure that costs exist to be cleared at job closure, thevalue of materials issued to the job is updated with the cost ofthe bulk issue and an entry is made in the job postings record.

The updating of the cost is what creates the variance at thepoint of closing the job.

Typically because bulk issue items are of little or no value,this is cleared with automatic variance clearing when thejob is completed. The automatic variance follows the rulesyou indicated in WIP for clearing variances (WIP Setup -General 1 tab). If the cost remaining on the job is within theseboundaries then it will be automatically cleared (i.e. the WIPControl account will be credited and the WIP Variance accountdebited). If the value of the variance exceeds the rules thenthis variance must be cleared using the WIP Job Closureprogram).

The assumption on bulk issue items is that they should only beused for consumables. If quantities and values are required tobe tracked, then you need to define the item as floorstock.

Note:When you confirm a job, bulk issue items specifiedagainst the Bill of Materials are issued to the jobautomatically. If you want to delete the job, you willneed to reverse the bulk issue allocation before doingso, even though no journals were created. A job cannotbe deleted until all the allocations are reversed.

The warehouse quantity is not reduced when a bulkissue item is issued and no journal is created.

Once a job is confirmed, then any additional issue orreversal of a bulk issue item affects the stock on hand(i.e. the bulk issue item is treated as any other stockitem).

Neither Select this if the item is neither a floorstock or bulk issue item.

Include inrelationshipvalidation

Select this if the stock item is included in the processingperformed by the Relationship Validation program (Bill ofMaterials).

Soft phantom This is not used in the current version of the program.

In a future release of the software, when you select thisoption and the item is attached to a Bill of Materials as acomponent, it will act similarly to a phantom part (i.e. the itemitself is not attached to the job as a material allocation, but itexplodes through and brings its components in as allocations).

| Setup | 78


Field Values DescriptionHowever, you will be able to create a job for the item, stock itand sell it.

Batch bill ofmaterial

Select this if a parent part has components by percentageinstead of quantity (i.e. the wet weight percentage of the parentmust be used instead of the quantity per for the components).The specific gravity of the parent and component part(s) mustbe specified.

Note:• No check is performed on the stocking units of

measure of the parents and components. This couldresult in inaccurate results if these measures arenot compatible. For example: If the parent partis stocked in liters and one of the components isstocked in tons, the wet weight percentage ratiocould be incorrect.

• Batch bill percentages are only retained on the Billof Materials and are a tool to aid the calculation ofa physical quantity per in a BOM. When you createa job, these figures are not pulled through ontothe job. Therefore, if you have a stock code thatis defined as a batch bill with the percentage wetweight defined against the material requirements,when you print Factory Documentation (FactoryDocumentation), the percentages are not printed.

Manufacture leadtime

This indicates the number of days it takes to manufacturea made in stock item, assuming that all the raw materialsare available (i.e. it is the longest cumulative manufacturingtime, established from the sum of the elapsed time and inter-operation movement time for all levels of the bill of materials).

For make to order items, the manufacturing lead time is thetotal time between the release of an order to the productionprocess and shipment to the customer. For make to stockitems, it is the length of time between the release of an order tothe production process and receipt into inventory.

For made in items, you use the Lead Time Calculationprogram to calculate and update the lead time. The Lead TimeCalculation program calculates a ratio of working to non-working days and applies this when calculating the lead timefor an item. This means that you do not need to buffer thelead time for made in items if you are using the Lead TimeCalculation program to update this field.

Refer to Lead time for additional information on lead time.

Planner This indicates the person in a company responsible forplanning the manufacture of made-in stock items.

You can use the planner as a selection criterion in variousRequirements Planning reports. For example: If you havea number of planners within a planning department (each

| Setup | 79


Field Values Descriptionresponsible for a different product line) you can generatereports selectively by planner.

Planner name This indicates the name of the selected planner.

Resource This indicates the parent of a resource structure of criticalresources for the stock code. It is the default resourceparent which can be changed within the Build ScheduleMaintenance program.

This resource parent is applied only to new build schedules.Existing build schedules must be maintained to reflect theresource parent.

The resource code is used by the Resource Planning systemand is validated only if the Requirements Planning module isinstalled.

Resourcedescription

This indicates the description for the resource code selected.

WIP ledger controlaccount

This indicates the default account to which you want to post thevalue of work in progress when a job is created for this stockitem.

If not defined against the stock item, then the Work in ProgressG/L control account (General Ledger Integration) is used asthe default instead. However, at the time of creating the job(Job Maintenance) the ledger code entered at the WIP ledgercode field overrides these defaults.

This field is validated if Inventory is linked to General Ledger.

WIP ledger controldescription

This indicates the description for the WIP ledger code selected.

Default jobclassification

This indicates the default job classification assigned to the job.

Job classifications enable you to group your jobs according tosimilar characteristics. In addition, you can optionally specifythat job numbering must take place according to the jobclassification (WIP Setup).

You can also configure security access settings by jobclassification, to restrict the unauthorized processing of jobsand allocations (i.e. viewing, adding, changing, importing,canceling and posting). This is achieved using the Operatorsprogram.

Default jobclassificationdescription

This indicates the description for the job classification codeselected.

Sales Details

Field Values DescriptionPricing

| Setup | 80


Field Values DescriptionPricing category The entry against this field is only used with Extended pricing.

It is used to establish the price or discount code (depending onthe pricing method) to be applied to the stock code by findingthe corresponding entry in the customer's price category/codetable.

For example:

When define a pricing category of E against a stock code, thenthe price or discount code entered against E on the customer'sprice category/code table is the price or discount code thatis applied when selling items with that pricing category to thecustomer.

Pricing method Refer to Pricing and Discounts for additional information.

Coded This indicates that the price code retrieved against thecustomer (from either the auto price code or the price category/code table depending on whether simple or extended pricingis in force) must be used to determine the price of the stockeditem from the Price Code Table.

Customers, who have multiple prices against their stockeditems and therefore make use of Price Lists, use this method.Typically, the prices differ because of the differing costsinvolved in the delivery of the stock (e.g. transport methods,special packing / treatment options etc.) or customers arecategorized differently (e.g. wholesale, retail).

A discount at line level per customer can also be entered whenprocessing the sales order.

Discounted This indicates that the code retrieved against the customer(from either the auto price code or the price category/codetable depending on whether simple or extended pricing is inforce) must be used to determine the discount(s) to apply to thestock code's list price, cost price or another price code.

Up to three discounts may be chained.

Customers, who have certain stock items that attract differentdiscounts, rather than specific prices, use this method. It isoften used in an environment where there are frequent pricesfluctuations and it is easier to change the price once and let thevarious discount options apply.

If the discount is based on the cost of the stock item, then it isadded to the cost. In effect the item is therefore being sold on aCost plus basis.

Quantitydiscounted

This indicates that the quantity ordered determines the priceretrieved.

Only if the order quantity exceeds all the quantity breaks doesthe system revert to determining the price based on the pricingmethod in force for the company (i.e. simple or extended -Sales Order Setup Pricing tab).

| Setup | 81


Field Values DescriptionCustomers who sell stock in large volumes and who offer"more for less" buying opportunities use this method.

A discount at line level per customer can also be entered whenprocessing the sales order.

List price This indicates the list price for the item. Discounts for the stockcode can be based on this price during Sales Order Entryprocessing.

Note:The full stop and exclamation mark characters (. !)cannot be used as these are reserved for manual andcontract pricing.

List price basis This indicates the unit of measure on which the first sellingprice of the stock item is based.

Commission code This indicates the percentage of commission you want to applyagainst a sale of the stock item, if the commission is based onthe price for the stock item (Sales Order Setup).

An entry of 0 indicates that you do not want commission to becalculated.

Currency

List price code This indicates the standard price code for the stock itemon which discounts can be based during Sales Order Entryprocessing.

This field can be blank if you selected the option to allow blanklist price codes (Inventory Setup).

Note:The List price code basis applies the discountpercentage to the list price held against the stockitem only if the stock code Pricing method is set toDiscounted.

Minimum % abovecost

This indicates a minimum percentage by which the price ofstocked order lines must exceed the cost of the item. If this isdefined as zero against the stock item, then the minimum pricepercentage above cost defined within the Sales Order Setupprogram is used.

The minimum % above cost defined against the item is usedonly if you indicated that the stock code margin (instead of thecompany margin) must be used (Sales Order Setup).

You can indicate whether the margin check is based on thegross or net value (Sales Order Setup) and you can overridethis margin if you have indicated that this override is allowed(Sales Order Setup).

Tax codes

| Setup | 82


Field Values DescriptionKit type This indicates whether the stock code is used in a single level

bill of materials.

None This indicates that the stock item is not to be treated as a kittype.

Finished type This indicates that the stock item is a finished part.

The cost, price and quantity is determined by the finished part,while components are treated as comment lines.

Kit type This indicates that first level components from the bill ofmaterial are automatically received into stock when this stockitem is received into stock.

The cost, price and quantity is determined by the componentsand the finished part is treated as a comment line. The parentpart, however, determines the order and ship quantities of thecomponents by multiplying the parent quantity by the quantityper defined in the structure.

Sales analysis information is maintained on the componentstock codes.

Sub type Select this if the parent stock code must be treated as a normalstocked line to determine the price of the kit. The componentparts are treated as normal stocked lines to determine the costand quantity of items pulled from inventory (i.e. the price isdetermined by the finished part and the cost and quantity isdetermined by the components).

Sales analysis information is maintained for the parent stockcode.

Tax code This indicates the tax percentage applicable to the stock itemby assigning it a tax code.

This is the default tax code used for sales orders, purchaseorders and requisitions created for the item.

Tax codes are maintained using the Tax Codes program.

If the customer is defined as taxable, then the rate for the taxcode entered in this field is applied by the Sales Order Entryprogram when the item is sold to that customer. Conversely, ifthe customer is defined as non-taxable (Customers), then thistax code is ignored and the customer is not charged tax on theitem.

Note:If you do not assign default tax codes to a stock item,then the system assumes that the item is exempt fromtax.

In addition, if you select the Tax by geographic areaoption (Tax Options) the system disregards the taxcode assigned to the geographic area when calculatingtax for that item on a sales order.

| Setup | 83


Field Values DescriptionTax codedescription

This indicates the description for the tax code selected. This isdisplayed for information purposes.

Tax code rate This indicates the rate defined against the tax code selected(see Tax Codes). This is displayed for information purposes.

Other tax code This indicates an alternative tax code for the stock item whichis used only if the stock item is sold to a customer againstwhom you indicated that the Other tax code must be used(Customers).

This enables you to define different rates of tax for this itemand then apply these rates to different customers when usingthe Sales Order Entry program. You need to select the option:Other tax code against those customers for whom you want toapply the Other tax code rate (Customers).

For example:

Tax code A is defined as 14% inclusive and is used to sell thestock item.

Tax code C is defined as 14% exclusive and is used forpurchasing stock item.

Assume that only selected customers purchase the item withinclusive tax.

• Against the customer, select Other tax code at the Taxexemption selection field (Customers - General Detailspane).

• Against the stock item enter Tax code C in the Tax codefield and Tax code A in the Other tax code field (StockCode Maintenance).

When processing sales orders for the item:

• orders for customer accounts linked to Other tax code, thedefault tax code for the orders will be Tax code A - 14%inclusive

• orders for customer accounts linked to the default Tax codefor the orders will be Tax code C - 14% exclusive

When processing requisitions and purchase orders for the item,the default tax code or all suppliers will be Tax code C - 14%exclusive.

Other tax code rate This indicates the rate defined against the other tax codeselected (see Tax Codes). This is displayed for informationpurposes.

Other tax codedescription

This indicates the description for the other tax code selected.This is displayed for information purposes.

Sales options

Demand timefence

This indicates the number of days from the time an order isplaced until it can be fulfilled.

This is used in the calculations performed by the MasterProduction Schedule.

| Setup | 84


Field Values DescriptionIt is ignored if an entry of 0 is assigned to the field, or you havenot indicated that the stock code is a make-to-order item.

Country of origin If EC VAT is installed (Tax Options, then the country of originis required for the Supplementary Declarations.

This field is validated if the EC VAT system is installed.

Country of origindescription

This indicates the description for the country of origin selected.

Distributionwarehouse

This is used by the Post to a Sales Order business object(used to import orders into SYSPRO) as a possible source ofsupply if no warehouse is specified against individual stocklines, or on the order header.

If blank, then the warehouse specified at the Warehouse to usefield is used as the default.

You can also indicate that this warehouse must be used at thedefault warehouse for displaying quantities when browsing onstock items (Inventory Setup).

Distributionwarehousedescription

This indicates the description for the distribution warehouseselected.

Make to order item Select this if the stock item must be manufactured only if asales order for the item has been placed.

If you do not select this option, then the item is manufacturedaccording to the gross requirements rule, regardless of whethera sales order exists.

Note:This option is applied in Master Production Scheduling.

In Master Production Scheduling, when an item isMake to order the demand time fence is set to 999,which means that it will only apply sales orders.

This option is ignored by the RequirementsCalculation program.

Returnable item Select this to define the item as returnable.

Note:Stock for returnable items sold as part of a Sales OrderService Charge will always be allowed to go negative,irrespective of your selection at the setup option: Stockon hand allowed to go negative (Inventory Setup -General tab), and irrespective of your costing method.If the returnable item is not sold as part of a SalesOrder Service Charge (i.e. it is sold or issued in its ownright) and stock on hand is not allowed to go negative,then stock must be available.

A returnable item is usually sold together with a stock item,but is returnable (e.g. a re-usable container, crate or pallet). A

| Setup | 85


Field Values Descriptiondeposit may have been paid on the returnable item and it maybe returned for credit.

The warehouse quantity is reduced when a returnable item issold and a journal is created.

If you selected the setup option: Multiple bins (InventorySetup - General tab), then stock of a returnable item isalways depleted from the bin which has the same name asthe warehouse. Stock must manually be transferred into thisbin. The warehouse from which returnable items are depletedis defined against the Returnable item setup options (SalesOrder Setup - General 1 tab).

If you select this option, then the Maximum number of decimalsfor the returnable item (Stock Code Maintenance - Generaltab), must be set to zero.

In addition, a returnable item may not:

• Be lot traceable (Tracking tab)• Be serialized (Tracking tab)• Have a part category: K-Kit part (Descriptive tab)• Be ECC controlled (Tracking tab)• Be defined with unit quantity processing (General tab)

Sales weightanalysis

Fixed This indicates that the item has a fixed weight.

Random (pricingquantity)

This indicates that the item has a random weight and requiresa manually entered conversion factor to be specified duringSales Order Entry. This facility caters for items that are sold ina certain unit of measure, but where the weight of each itemsold differs from unit to unit.

Canadian GST These options are only available if your nationality code isdefined as CAN (System Setup) and you indicated that theCanadian GST system is required.

Note:If you do not assign default tax codes to a stock item,then the system assumes that the item is exempt fromtax.

In addition, if you select the Canadian GST requiredand Tax by geographic area options (Tax Options)the system disregards the tax code assigned to thegeographic area when calculating tax for that item on asales order.

GST code You use this field to indicate the GST code for the stock item.The percentage GST assigned to the stock item is based onthe GST code (Tax Codes).

GST codes are maintained using the Tax Codes program.

| Setup | 86


Field Values DescriptionGST code rate This indicates the rate defined against the GST code selected

(see Tax Codes). This is displayed for information purposes.

GST codedescription

This indicates the description for the GST code selected. Thisis displayed for information purposes.

GST included inprice

This option enables you to indicate whether or not thecalculated tax amount must be included in the price of the itemduring sales order processing.

Trade promotionpricing

Trade promotion prices can be applied to specific stock items,product classes, product groups or departments. This meansthat different prices can be defined for a single stock item. Theoptions on this tab enable you to select the trade promotionsprice that must apply to this specific stock item.

For example:

You used the Price Table program to define the following threetrade promotion price breaks for stock item A100:

1. for all stock items in product group Bicycles, the customerpays a price of 500 for buying a quantity of 10 or more ofthese items

2. for all stock items in product class BA, the customerreceives a 10% discount for buying a quantity of 5 or moreof these items

3. for stock item A100, the customer receives a 20% discountfor buying a mass of 50 or more of this item

Stock item A100 belongs to product group Bicycles and toproduct class BA, so all these prices apply to stock item A100.

You use the Price type and Price basis options against thestock item to select which price you want to apply for stock itemA100. Therefore, if you wanted to apply price break 1, then youselect Price type = Product group and Price basis = Quantity.Similarly, if you wanted to apply price break 2, then you selectPrice type = Stock code and Price basis = Mass.

Note:The price type and price basis for the stock item mustmatch the price type and price basis defined againstthe price break for the price to be applied when sellingthe item.

Product group You use this field to link the stock item to a specific productgroup. Product groups provide a facility to group items togetherin a more specific or general manner than product classes.Product groups are maintained using the Product Groupprogram.

Price type You use this field to indicate what you want to base tradepromotions price breaks on.

None Select this if you do not want to apply any trade promotionsprice breaks to the stock item.

| Setup | 87


Field Values DescriptionStock code Select this to apply the stock code price break to the stock

item.

Product class Select this to apply the price break defined for the productclass to the stock item.

Product group Select this to apply the price break defined for the productgroup to the stock item.

You use the Product group field above to define the stock itemas a member of a specific product group.

Department Select this to apply the price break defined for the departmentto the stock item.

Price basis You use this field to indicate the unit of measure on which theprice break is based.

None Select this to indicate that price breaks are not required.

Quantity Select this if the price break you want to apply is based on thequantity of the item sold.

Volume Select this if the price break you want to apply is based on thevolume of the item sold.

Mass Select this if the price break you want to apply is based on themass of the item sold.

Tracking

Field Values DescriptionSerial tracking

Serial trackingmethod

None Select this if you do not require serial tracking for this stockitem.

Manual serial Select this to define the stock code as manual serialized,where each serial number represents an individual item.

Batch serial Select this to define the stock code as batch serialized, wherea group of items can have the same serial number.

Note:Serialized and traceable items cannot be defined aseither a Floorstock items or a Bulk issue items.

Record serialnumbers

This option enables you to indicate when you want to captureserial numbers.

During receipt Select this to capture serial numbers at the time of receiptinga serialized item into stock. Serial numbers for traceable itemsare recorded only at the time of processing a receipt.

| Setup | 88


Field Values DescriptionYou must select this option when using Actual costing for Batchserials (Inventory Setup). For actual costing, serials must becaptured at time of receipt.

During order entry Select this to capture serial numbers at the time of placing asales order for a serialized item.

The point at which the serial number is requested when youprocess a sales order depends on your selection at the option:Capture serial numbers for orders (Sales Order Setup -Details tab).

Note:• This option is not available for serialized items that

are also traceable.• This option is not available when using actual

costing for batch serials (Inventory Setup). Foractual costing, serials must be captured at time ofreceipt.

• If capturing serial numbers at the time of placing anorder, then the following should be noted:

• any program that normally requests serialnumbers (except order entry) ignores the factthat the item is serialized and does not requestserial numbers to be entered.

• when selling the item in order entry, the enteredserial number does not have to exist, and itis added to the serial master file as if you hadprocessed a normal receipt. However, if youprocess a credit note for the item, the enteredserial number must be held on file.

• the warehouse's stock on hand will probably notbalance to the total serials on hand. Additionally,the Serial File Balance Report program willnot indicate an imbalance between the stock onhand and the serial quantities on hand for thoseitems where serial numbers are being recordedduring order entry.

Lot traceabilitycontrol

Lot traceability This option enables you to indicate whether the item is lottraceable.

Non traceable This indicates that the stock item is neither traceable norrequires inspection before being receipted into inventory.

You cannot change a previously traceable item to be non-traceable if there is existing quantity on hand for the item in anywarehouse.

Traceable Select this to indicate that the item is traceable and optionallyrequires an inspection phase when processing a purchase

| Setup | 89


Field Values Descriptionorder receipt for the item and before receipting a made-in iteminto inventory.

A traceable item cannot be defined as a Kit type K or S.

When you select this option, you can specify whether the itemmust be inspected before being receipted into stock.

Danger:• Do not select this option unless you have the Lot

Traceability module installed.

• Once an item is set to be traceable, you will beunable to unset this option if lot information existsagainst the item (i.e. once any movement has beenprocessed against the item). Lot information cannotbe deleted, only archived using the Purge andArchive program.

Business rules dictate that lot traceable itemsmust remain in the system indefinitely. If an itemis defined as traceable and one or more lots existagainst the item, then it can never be deleted,irrespective of whether these lots are archived. Ifyou do not want any transactions processed for theitem, then you can place the item on full hold.

You can only set a stock item to be traceable if:

• the quantity on hand is zero in all warehouses• the quantity allocated to sales orders is zero in all

warehouses• there are no outstanding sales orders for the item• there are no outstanding purchase orders for the item• there are no outstanding requisitions for the item• there are no outstanding SCTs (Supply Chain Transfer) for

the item• there are no outstanding jobs for the item• there are no outstanding quantities for the item in WIP

Inspection

Inspection required Select this to indicate that an inspection phase is requiredwhen processing a purchase order receipt for a bought out itemand before receipting a made-in item into inventory.

Note:Before setting a previously non-traceable item to betraceable, ensure that the existing quantity on handfor the item is reduced to zero in all warehouses (seeReduce existing quantity on hand to zero in allwarehouses).

If you select this option, then you also need to selectthe setup option: Work in Progress inspection required(WIP Setup - General 1 tab) if you want to inspect amade-in item before receipting it into inventory.

| Setup | 90


Field Values DescriptionTraceable These options are only enabled if you selected the option:Lot

traceability - Traceable.

With inspection Select this if all receipts for the item must go through aninspection phase before being receipted into stock using thePurchase Order Receipts/Purchase Order Inspection orJob Receipts programs.

This option is selected by default.

Without inspection Select this if you want to bypass the inspection phase for thisitem and receipt the item directly into stock when using thePurchase Order Receipts or Job Receipts programs.

Sample quantity Select this if you want only a sample quantity of the item tobe inspected and the balance receipted directly into stockwhen using the Purchase Order Receipts or Job Receiptsprograms.

Allow issues frommultiple lots

Select this if you want to be able to issue this stock item frommore than one lot during sales order entry and issues to jobs.

Lot shelf life (days) This indicates the number of days before the expiry of atraceable item and is used when performing a Two-stageReceipt of the item into stock.

Engineeringchange control

ECC controlled Select Yes to indicate that the stock item is regulated by theEngineering Change Control system.

Configuring a stock item to be engineering change controlledmeans that any changes to that item within a bill of materialscan only be made by means of an engineering change order.

You will be unable to set a stock item which is in transitbetween warehouses or which is currently part of a stock taketo be ECC controlled.

Engineering change control tracking information (revisions/releases) for an item is only retained from the time the item isset to be ECC controlled.

You can use the Set ECC Control for Stock Code program toset multiple stock items to be ECC controlled.

Responsible ECCuser

This indicates the engineering user assigned to the stock item.This enables you to notify the appropriate person(s) of changesto the status of stock codes under their control.

If this field is left blank, then the default ECC user configuredwithin the Bill of Materials Setup program is used.

Revision You use this field to indicate the current revision for the stockitem. The revision is used to indicate design changes made tothe stock item.

| Setup | 91


Field Values DescriptionNote:You can only access this field if the item is not ECCcontrolled or you are adding a new item which must beECC controlled.

Once defined, the revision for an ECC controlled itemcan only be changed using the Engineering ChangeControl module.

You will be unable to access this field if engineeringchanges are being controlled at stock code level (Billof Materials Setup).

Release You use this field to indicate the current release for the stockitem. The release is used to indicate minor design changes tothe stock item.

Note:You can only access this field if the item is not ECCcontrolled or you are adding a new item which must beECC controlled.

Once defined, the release for an ECC controlled itemcan only be changed using the Engineering ChangeControl module.

You will be unable to access this field if engineeringchanges are being controlled at stock code level or atrevision level (Bill of Materials Setup).

Manual serialnumbers

These options are only available if:

• The Serial tracking method is set to Manual.• You have selected Manual serial number tracking to be By

stock code (Inventory Setup - Numbering tab).

Tracking of manual serial numbers at stock code level enablesyou to create sequential ranges of manual serial numbers foreach serialized stock item.

Ranges of serial numbers are created according to the Prefixand Next suffix defined against each individual serialized stockitem.

For example:

You define the Prefix as 22 and the Next suffix as 001.

You create a range of three manual serial numbers. The serialnumbers are generated as: 22001, 22002, 22003. The nextrange of manual serials numbers created would begin with22004.

Note:• Up to 15 characters may be used for either the

prefix or the next suffix, but the combination of prefixand suffix cannot exceed 20 characters (i.e. theserial number cannot exceed 20 characters).

| Setup | 92


Field Values Description• Defining a prefix and suffix does not prevent you

from creating serial numbers with a different format.

Manual serialprefix

You use this field to enter the character(s) that must form thestart of manual serial numbers generated for this stock item.

Manual serial nextsuffix

You use this field to enter the number added after the prefix,to form the next serial number in a range of manual serialnumbers for this stock item.

The system updates the Next suffix whenever a new serialnumber is created using the prefix.

Note:The number of numeric characters entered for thesuffix must cater for the total quantity of serial numbersyou want to add using the defined prefix. For example:A suffix of 1 character will allow 9 serials to be addedfor the prefix you defined.

Other

Field Values DescriptionCosting If you selected the option:Apply warehouse BOM costs

(Inventory Setup - General tab), then the BOM cost fields aredisabled. You enter the BOM costs against the warehouseusing the Costing function of the Warehouses for Stock Codeprogram.

BOM operationscost

This indicates the total cost of all operations for items includedin the stock item's structure.

This is updated for all parent parts by the Bill of MaterialsCost Implosion program, unless you selected the option:Manualcost.

BOM material cost This indicates the total cost of all materials for items included inthe stock item's structure.


BOM fixedoverhead

This indicates the total cost of all fixed overheads for itemsincluded in the stock item's structure.


BOM variableoverhead

This indicates the total cost of all variable overheads for itemsincluded in the stock item's structure.


| Setup | 93


Field Values DescriptionBOM subcontractcost

This indicates the total cost of all subcontract operations foritems included in the stock item's structure.


This field is only enabled if you selected the setup option:Split subcontract operation costs from material costs (Bill ofMaterials Setup - General tab).

Activity basedcosting required

Select this if you want to more accurately accumulate overheadcosts to specific products by applying these costs at the pointsof transition in the procurement, manufacturing and sales cycle.

You will be unable to select this option for items with a Partcategory of Co-product or Notional part (Descriptive tab).

Note:You must indicate that the activity based costingsystem is required (Bill of Materials Setup) before youcan enable this against a stock item.

Refer to Activity Based Costing for additional information onactivity based costing.

Manual cost Select this if you do not want the Cost Implosion program toupdate the BOM costs defined against this stock item.

If you select this option, you will need to update the costsmanually as required.

This option is only enabled if you have NOT selected theoption: Apply warehouse BOM costs (Inventory Setup -General tab).

User defined

User defined 1-5 You use these fields to indicates extra information you want toassign to the item.

You can specify your own wording for these fields using theInventory Setup program.

Additional FieldsThis pane can be used to add any additional fields you want to display on the Stock Code Maintenancescreen. An example could be custom fields you defined (see Custom Form Design).

Note:If you defined custom fields for stock items in a prior version of the software, then when upgradingto SYSPRO 6.0 Issue 10 SP2, you need to manually add these fields to the Stock CodeMaintenance screen (typically in this pane).

Field Values DescriptionCustominformation

This field is defined by default, as a pane cannot be createdwithout any fields.

| Setup | 94


Field Values DescriptionOnce you have added at least one other field, you can deletethis Custom information field from the pane.

Stock CodesYou use the Stock Codes program to view details of stock items currently defined.

Stock items are maintained using the Stock Code Maintenance program.

Stock CodesThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:


Select Select this to use the entry currently highlighted in the listviewin the corresponding field of another program.

Start At Select this to navigate to a specific entry in the listview.

Find Select this to use the Generic Find program to locate itemsaccording to extensive search criteria.

Play Select this to use the Multimedia program to view anymultimedia objects assigned to the entry currently highlightedin the listview.

Bitmaps Select this to use the Multimedia program to allocate a bitmapto the stock item currently highlighted in the listview.

Exit Select this to exit the program.

Edit

Add You use this option to add a new stock item.

You will be unable to access this option if you have beendenied access to the activity: Inventory add stock code(Operators - Security tab).

Change You use this option to change the information for the currentlyhighlighted stock item.

You will be unable to access this option if you have beendenied access to the activity: Inventory change stock code(Operators - Security tab).

Delete You use this option to delete the currently highlighted stockitem.

You will be unable to access this option if you have beendenied access to the activity: Inventory delete stock code(Operators - Security tab).

If you delete a stock item, then all movement recordsassociated with the item are removed. If you delete awarehouse in which an item is stocked, then all movementrecords for the warehouse are removed.

| Setup | 95


Field Values DescriptionIf you have not defined stock code deletion options (InventorySetup - Options tab), you will be unable to delete a stock codeif ANY of the following conditions apply:

• operations are held against the stock item• the stock item is a parent part in a bill of materials structure• the stock item is a component part in a bill of materials

structure• there are outstanding jobs for the stock item• there are outstanding purchase orders for the stock item• there are outstanding sales orders for the stock item• there is an on hand quantity of the stock item in any

warehouse• movements exist for the item in the current or two prior

periods• warehouse records exist for the item• the stock item is defined as traceable

Note:Business rules dictate that lot traceable items mustremain in the system indefinitely.

If an item is defined as traceable and one or morelots exist against the item, it can never be deleted,irrespective of whether these lots are archived. Ifyou do not want any transactions processed for theitem, then you can place the item on full hold.

• a stock take is in progress affecting any warehouse to whichthe stock item has been assigned

• the stock item is attached to a customer/stock code crossreference

• the stock item is attached to a supplier/stock code crossreference

• the stock item is a Notional part with a structure/routing orco-products attached to it (BOM Co-products)

If you have defined the options against which a stock code maybe deleted, (Inventory Setup - Options tab), then some of theabove checks can be bypassed and the codes deleted.

Copy Select this to use the Copy Stock Code program to create acopy of the currently highlighted stock item.

You will be unable to access this option if you have beendenied access to the activity: Inventory add stock code(Operators - Security tab).

Warehouses You use this option to assign the stock item to a warehouseand to define the warehouse information for the highlightedstock item using the Warehouses for Stock Code program.

Pricing You use this option to define the pricing information for thehighlighted stock item using the Pricing for a Stock Codeprogram.

| Setup | 96


Field Values DescriptionForeign PurchasePrices

You use this option to define the foreign purchase pricinginformation for the highlighted stock item using the ForeignPurchase Prices program.

Alternate StockCodes

You use this option to define the alternate stock codeinformation for the highlighted stock item using the AlternateStock Codes program.

Alternate Supplier You use this option to define the alternate supplier informationfor the highlighted stock item using the Alternate Suppliersprogram.

On Hold Status You use this option to use the Maintain Hold Status programto define the on hold status for the highlighted stock item.

You will be unable to access this option if you have beendenied access to the activity: Inventory stock Code on Hold(Operators - Security tab).

Functions

Query You use this option to use the Inventory Query program toview detailed information for the highlighted stock item.

Ignore AltSequence forWarehouse

Select this to always display the information in stock codesequence when accessing the Stock Codes program fora specific warehouse from within another program. Whenthis option is selected, your selection at the Sequence menuis ignored when browsing on stock codes for a specificwarehouse from within another program.

You typically select this preference when you have a largenumber of stock items, as it will speed up browsing on theseitems (for a specific warehouse) from other programs.

When you browse on stock codes for all warehouses (e.g.from Inventory Query, the information is displayed in thesequence last selected at the Sequence menu of the StockCodes program.

This option does not affect your selection at the Sequencemenu when browsing from within the Stock Codes program.

Options

Confirm Deletions Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirm thedeletion of a stock item when you select to delete it. If you donot select this option, then the stock code is deleted withoutwarning, providing the pre-requisites for deleting it are met.

Include

Only Specific W/house's Stock

You use this option to select a specific warehouse for whichyou want to list the stock items in the listview.

ChangeWarehouse

You use this option to change the warehouse for which youwant to display the stock items in the listview.

This option is only enabled if you selected to view stock itemsfor a specific warehouse.

| Setup | 97


Field Values DescriptionSpecific Supplier'sStock

You use this option to select a specific supplier for whom youwant to list the stock items in the listview.

This option is only available if you selected to sequence thestock codes in the listview by supplier.

Change Supplier You use this option to change the supplier for whom you wantto display the stock items in the listview.

This option is only enabled if you selected to view stock itemsfor a specific supplier.

Price and WhInformation

Although this option is selected by default, you can deselect itif you do not want to display pricing and warehouse informationfor the selected stock item.

You would typically deselect this option if you have a largenumber of stock items. By not including the pricing andwarehouse information (which comes from separate files/tables), the system is able to display the stock code informationmore quickly in the listview.

This option is only enabled if you selected the setup option:Display price and quantities (Inventory Setup - Browse tab).

On Partial HoldStatus

Select this to include items which are on full hold in the listview.

On Full HoldStatus

Select this to include items which are on partial hold in thelistview.

Sequence This option enables you define the sequence in which the stockitems are displayed in the listview. The following sequencescan be selected:

• Stock Code• Description• Long Description• Alternate Key 1• Alternate Key 2• Supplier• Product Class

Note:When you select a sequence other than StockCode and you browse on stock codes for a specificwarehouse from within another program, the systemmay take some time to display the information.

You can use the option: Ignore Alt Sequence forWarehouse from the Functions menu to always displaythe details in stock code sequence when browsing onstock codes for a specific warehouse from anotherprogram.


| Setup | 98


Field Values DescriptionStart at Your entry here indicates the point from which you want to start

viewing stock codes in the listview.

You can enter either the Stock code, Description, Longdescription, Alternate key 1, Alternate key 2, Supplier orProduct class depending on your selection at the Sequencemenu.


Stock Codes ListviewWhen you select the Stock Codes program, the currently defined stock codes are displayed in a listview.

The following information is included in this listview:

Note:Not all information is displayed by default. You use the Field Chooser option to add columns to thelistview (see Listviews).

• Stock code

This indicates the code of the stock item.• Description

This describes the stock code and is displayed throughout the system whenever the stock code isentered. You can use it to verify that the correct item has been entered.

• Long description

This is an additional description assigned to a stock code which is viewable from within the InventoryQuery program and which can be printed on reports and inventory documents.

• Alternate key 1

This indicates additional information assigned to the stock item which can be used as selection criteriawhen browsing on stock codes.

It can also be used to change the sequence in which items are displayed when browsing on stockcodes.

The wording displayed for this field can be changed to suit your own requirements (Inventory Setup).• Alternate key 2

This indicates additional information assigned to the stock item which can be used as selection criteriawhen browsing on stock codes.

It can also be used to change the sequence in which items are displayed when browsing on stockcodes.

The wording displayed for this field can be changed to suit your own requirements (Inventory Setup).• Stocking unit of measure

This indicates the unit of measure in which the stock item is held on file.• Alternate unit of measure

This indicates an alternative unit of measure for the sale or purchase quantity of an item and the pricing.• Other unit of measure

This indicates an additional unit of measure for the sales ordering quantity of an item and the pricing.• Mass

| Setup | 99


This indicates the weight of a single unit of the stock item in the stocking unit of measure.• Volume

This indicates the volume of a single unit of the stock item in the stocking unit of measure• Supplier

This indicates the primary supplier from whom you usually purchase this stock item.• Product class

This indicates the category to which the item is assigned. It is used for reporting purposes (SalesAnalysis) and as a method of defining your integration to the General Ledger module.

• Kit type

This indicates whether the stock code is used in a single level bill of materials.• Buyer

This indicates the person responsible for purchasing the stock item.• Planner

This indicates the person in a company responsible for planning the manufacture of made-in stockitems.

• Lead time

This indicates the number of days in which to either buy out or manufacture the stock item.• Part category

This indicates the type of the stock item.• Warehouse to use

This indicates the warehouse that must be used to extract the quantities of stock required by the Bill ofMaterials module when performing functions such as a cost implosion and creating material allocations.

This is also the default warehouse used for the parent when adding a job and is used to calculated thenew landed cost of an item.

• Batching rule

This indicates the batching rule defined against the stock item. The batching rule (or buying rule) isused by the Requirements Planning module to indicate how you want to address quantity shortagesencountered for the stock item.

• EBQ

This indicates the Economic Batch Quantity for the stock item.• Pan

This indicates the pan size of the stock item.

This can be likened to a container size. Within the Bill of Materials module you can indicate whetherthe elapsed time against work centers or cost centers is based on the pan size or the economic batchquantity.

• User defined 1 - 5

This indicates extra information that you have assigned to the item.

You can specify your own wording for these fields using the Inventory Setup program.• Drawing number

This field is for documentary purposes and is printed on reports and factory documentation.

This field is only relevant if the ECC (Engineering Change Control) module is installed.• Quantity on hand

This indicates the quantity of the item physically in the warehouse(s). This includes quantities on hold.• Quantity allocated to sales orders

| Setup | 100


This indicates the quantity of the item allocated to sales orders (quantity on back order + sales ordership quantity). These quantities exclude unallocated scheduled order back order and ship quantities.

• Available quantity

This indicates the quantity available of the stock item.

This is the quantity on hand less the quantity allocated to sales orders for the item in the selectedwarehouse. The quantity allocated to sales orders is the order quantity and includes quantities onbackorder.

Note:The quantity available includes stock on hold, stock in expired lots, stock locked by EngineeringChange Orders and stock in bins that are on hold. The reason is that the quantity on hand (usedin the calculation) is the quantity physically in the warehouse and includes quantities on hold.

• Quantity on order

This indicates the quantity of outstanding purchase orders, made-in jobs and supply chain transfers forthe item.

• Back order quantity

This indicates the quantity on back order (sales order back order quantity). This quantity excludesunallocated scheduled order back order quantities.

• Quantity in transit

This indicates the In transit quantity for the item (outstanding non-immediate warehouse transfersshown against the target warehouse).

• WIP allocations

This indicates the quantity allocated to Work in Progress (outstanding materials to be issued to jobs).This includes allocations to both confirmed and unconfirmed jobs.

• Quantity in inspection

This indicates the quantity of the item which is in inspection (quantity of purchased items awaitinginspection, i.e. receipted into inspection but not receipted into stock).

• Minimum quantity

This indicates the minimum quantity of the item required to be stocked in this warehouse at any point intime.

A quantity of zero indicates that the minimum quantity is undefined.• Maximum quantity

This indicates the maximum quantity of the item required to be stocked in this warehouse at any point intime.

A quantity of zero indicates that the maximum is undefined.• Cost

This indicates the unit cost of the item.• Default bin

This indicates the default bin location for the item within the warehouse. Refer to Multiple bins foradditional information.

• User defined 1 - 3

This indicates extra information that you have assigned to the warehouse.

You can specify your own wording for these fields using the Inventory Setup program.• List price

This indicates the list price for the item.• List pricing uom

| Setup | 101


This indicates the unit of measure for the list price.• ECC controlled

This indicates whether the stock item is regulated by the Engineering Change Control system.• Revision

This indicates the revision of the stock if the item is ECC controlled.• Release

This indicates the release of the stock if the item is ECC controlled.• ECC user

This indicates the engineering user assigned to the stock item. It only applies if the item is ECCcontrolled.

• Stock code status

This indicates the current status of the stock item.

Temp indicates that this is a temporary item which will be deleted the next time the Purge function ofthe Inventory Period End program is run.

Clear indicates that the stock item must be sold or cleared as a matter of urgency.

If this column is blank then it indicates that this is a normal stock item.

Warehouses for Stock CodeYou use the Warehouses for Stock Code program to view details of the warehouses in which a selectedstock item is currently stocked.

You use the Inventory Warehouses program to define and maintain warehouses.

You access the Warehouses for Stock Code program by selecting the Warehouses option from the Editmenu of the Stock Codes program.

Stock codes are assigned to warehouses using the Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code program.

Warehouses for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:





Edit

Add Select this to use the Warehouse Maintenance for StockCode program to assign a new warehouse to the stock code

Change Select this to use the Warehouse Maintenance for StockCode program to maintain the entry currently highlighted in thelistview.

Delete Select this to delete the entry currently highlighted in thelistview.

| Setup | 102


Field Values DescriptionOptions

Confirm Deletions Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirmthe deletion of a warehouse link when you select to delete it.If you do not select this option, then the link is deleted withoutwarning.

StartThese options are displayed when you select the Start At option from the File menu.

Field Values DescriptionStart atwarehouse

You use this field to enter the warehouse to which you want tonavigate in the listview.

OK Select this to navigate to the entry you made in the previousfield.

Cancel Select this to return to the listview without navigating to adifferent entry.

ListviewWhen you select the Warehouses for Stock Code program, the warehouses in which the selected stockitem is currently stocked are displayed in a listview.


• W/h

This indicates the warehouse code.• Description

This indicates the description of the warehouse.• On hand

This indicates the quantity of the stock item which is physically in the warehouse.• Available

This indicates the quantity of the stock item on hand in this warehouse less the quantity allocated tosales orders.

• Back order

This indicates the sales order back order quantity for the stock item in this warehouse. This quantityexcludes unallocated scheduled order back order quantities.

• On order

This indicates the quantity of outstanding purchase orders, made-in jobs and supply chain transfers forthe stock item in this warehouse.

• WIP allocations

This indicates the quantity of outstanding materials to be issued to jobs. This includes allocations toboth confirmed and unconfirmed jobs.

• Bin

This indicates the bin location for the item within the warehouse.

The bin location defaults to the warehouse code. It is displayed if you selected the option: Multiple binsin use against the warehouse (Inventory Warehouses).

| Setup | 103


This is also the location from which stock is issued during the Backflushing function of the InventoryMovements program.

Refer to Multiple bins for additional information.• Safety stock

This indicates the safety stock level for the item in this warehouse.

Safety stock is the quantity of stock kept in the warehouse to protect against fluctuations in demand orsupply.

A quantity of zero indicates that the safety stock level is undefined.• Minimum quantity

This indicates the minimum quantity of the item required to be stocked in this warehouse at any point intime.

A quantity of zero indicates that the minimum quantity is undefined.• Maximum quantity

This indicates the maximum quantity of the item required to be stocked in this warehouse at any point intime.

A quantity of zero indicates that the maximum is undefined.• Order policy

This indicates the order policy defined for the stock item in this warehouse.• Major order multiple

This indicates the major order multiple for the order policy for the item in this warehouse.• Minor order multiple

This indicates the minor order multiple for the order policy for the item in this warehouse.• Min order quantity

This indicates the minimum order quantity for the order policy for the item in this warehouse.• Max order quantity

This indicates the maximum order quantity for the order policy for the item in this warehouse.• Fixed time period

This indicates the fixed time period for the order policy for the item in this warehouse.

Warehouse Maintenance for Stock CodeYou use the Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code program to assign a stock item to a warehouseand to define the warehouse information for a stock item. Before you can process transactions for stockitems, they must be assigned to (i.e. stocked in) at least one warehouse.

Note:When you add a stock code to a warehouse, the cost entered is saved against the current periodand prior periods. This ensures that when a transaction is processed for a previous period, the costof the transaction is not zero.

However, if an operator adds the warehouse from within a posting program, then only the currentperiod is updated with the cost entered.

You use the Inventory Warehouses program to define and maintain warehouses.

The Warehouses for Stock Code listview displays details of warehouses in which the selected stock itemis currently stocked.

| Setup | 104


Warehouse Maintenance for Stock CodeThis screen is displayed when you select theAdd or Change option from the Edit menu of the Warehousesfor Stock Code program.





Edit

New Select this to indicate a new stock code to which you want toassign a warehouse.

Delete Select this to remove the stock item from the warehousecurrently displayed (i.e. remove the stock code to warehouselink).

New Select this icon to indicate a new stock code to which you wantto assign a warehouse.

Delete Select this icon to remove the stock item from the warehousecurrently displayed (i.e. remove the stock code to warehouselink).


Stock code You use this field to indicate the stock item you want to link to awarehouse or to several warehouses.

Warehouse You use this field to enter the warehouse to which you wantto link the stock item. This is the warehouse in which the itemmust be stocked.

Add MultipleWarehouses

Select this to assign the stock item to multiple warehouses withthe same information against the item in each warehouse.

This means you only enter the data for the item once and thisdata is then transferred to each warehouse into which you addthe item. For example, if you set the cost of the item to 1000and add the item to four warehouses, then the cost of the itemis 1000 in all four warehouses.

If you want to define different data (for example a differentcost or different policy details) for the item in the differentwarehouses, then you need to add the item to each warehouseindividually (i.e. do not use this function).

If you select this option, then you use the Warehouse list >Click to add a list option to indicate the warehouses you wantto add to the stock item.

Warehouse Maintenance for Stock CodeIf you want to assign a stock item to more than one warehouse, you can use the Add Multiple Warehousesoption.

| Setup | 105


Field Values DescriptionStock code This indicates the code of the stock item you selected to link to

the warehouse(s).

Stock codedescription

This indicates the description of the stock code you selected tolink to the warehouse(s).

Warehouse You use this field to enter the warehouse to which you wantto link the stock item. This is the warehouse in which the itemmust be stocked.

Warehousedescription

This indicates the description of the warehouse you selected tolink to the stock item.

Warehouse list This option is only enabled when you select the option: AddMultiple Warehouses.

Click to add a list Select this to indicate a list of warehouses to which the stockcode must be linked (see Warehouse List Selection).

Cost multiplier This indicates what portion of the transaction value of the stockitem comprises non-merchandise costs (e.g. freight, duty, tax,etc.).

The cost multiplier is used within the Inventory Movementsprogram when processing a receipt, but only if you haveindicated that you want to apply a cost multiplier whenprocessing receipts (Inventory Setup).

If you selected the option: Include non-merchandise costsin last cost (Inventory Setup - Options tab), then the Lastcost of the item is calculated as the Receipt cost plus thecalculated cost multiplier value. If the option: Include non-merchandise costs in last cost (Inventory Setup - Optionstab), is not selected, then the Last cost is the Receipt costentered when processing the receipt using the InventoryMovements program.

Cost This indicates the cost of one unit of the stock item in theselected warehouse.

Where applicable, it includes additional charges such asfreight, customs duty, packaging, etc, and any purchase pricevariances.

Once you have entered and saved the Unit cost for a stockitem, you will be unable to change it using the Warehouses forStock Code program.

The cost entered here is saved against the current periodand prior periods. This ensures that when a transaction isprocessed for a previous period, the cost of the transaction isnot zero.

Note:If an operator adds the warehouse from a postingprogram, then only the current period is updated withthe cost entered.

If your costing method is set to Standard (Inventory Setup- General tab or Inventory Warehouses if you are using

| Setup | 106


Field Values Descriptioncosting per warehouse), then you need to use the InventoryMovements or Transfer BOM Costs to Wh Costs programto change the unit cost. If your costing method is not set toStandard, then the unit cost is adjusted automatically by themovements that affect the unit cost (for example when usingPurchase Order Receipts). Irrespective of your costingmethod, the unit cost of an item can be changed using the CostChange function of the Inventory Movements program.

Note:You can suppress the display of stock item costs (i.e.normally visible in the Cost column of the listview pane)selectively by operator. To achieve this, you must denyoperators access to the Show costs in Stock codemaintenanceFields.

Be careful that you do not deny an operator access tothe viewing of costs in stock code maintenance, whileallowing the same operator the facility to maintain stockcodes. In this scenario, the operator will still be able toview details of BOM costs held against the item.

Minimum quantity This indicates the minimum quantity of the item required to bestocked in the warehouse at any point in time. It is used as astock control feature, and you can report on items where theon hand quantity is less than this figure using the WarehouseException program. This field is updated by the calculationperformed by the Minimum Quantity Calculation program.

Maximumquantity

This indicates the maximum quantity of the item required to bestocked in the warehouse at any point in time.

It is used as a stock control feature, and you can report onitems where the on hand quantity exceeds this figure using theWarehouse Exception program (providing that the entry madehere is non-zero).

It is also using together with batching rule D (i.e. order tomaximum quantity) within the Requirements Planning module.

Note:SYSPRO does not allow any order policy (Stock CodeMaintenance - Batching rules) to exceed the Maximumquantity defined.

Safety stock level This stock control feature highlights instances where stock fallsbelow a prescribed level and is used within the RequirementsPlanning module.

The safety stock level is usually set to be above the minimumstock level. It is the quantity of stock kept in the warehouse toprotect against fluctuations in demand or supply.

You can report on items where the on hand quantity falls belowthis figure, using the Warehouse Exception program.

Re-order quantity This indicates when you should place an order for more of aparticular stock item.

| Setup | 107


Field Values DescriptionIf you are using costing by warehouse (Inventory Setup) andare retaining the BOM Costs by warehouse then the Re-orderquantity is used as the EBQ (Economic Batch Quantity) in allcalculations.

The re-order quantity is printed on the Purchasing Work Sheetreport.

Pallet quantity This indicates a default quantity of the stock item that isrequired to be held in each bin, and is used when processing apurchase order receipt.

Default binlocation

This indicates the specific location of the stock item in aparticular warehouse.

The bin location defaults to the warehouse code and an entrymust be made if you selected the option: Multiple bins in useagainst the warehouse (Inventory Warehouses).

This is also the location from which stock is issued during theBackflushing function of the Inventory Movements program.

Refer to Multiple bins for additional information.

User defined 1-3 This indicates extra information you want to store against thewarehouse.

Note:You can specify your own wording for these fields(Inventory Setup).

Order policydetails

These options enable you to indicate the batching rules yourequire for the stock item in this warehouse.

The batching rule (or buying rule) is used by the RequirementsPlanning module to indicate how you want to address quantityshortages encountered for the stock item. Although a buyingrule is applied to bought-out items and a batch rule is appliedto made-in items, the term is interchangeable within theRequirements Planning system because the buying or batchrules can apply to either bought-out or made-in items.

These options are only enabled if you selected the Batchingrule: Q - Apply warehouse order policy for the item (StockCode Maintenance).

Order policy The order policy you select depends on the equivalent batchingrule you require. See Batching Rules and Order PolicyEquivalents.

Note:If you selected the setup option: Consolidate selectedwarehouses (Requirements Planning Setup -Warehouses tab), then the order policy defined againstthe warehouse to use (Stock Code Maintenance) isapplied.

The following order policies can be selected:

| Setup | 108


Field Values Description• C - Cover shortages• S - Order to max if shortage• M - Order to max if less than minimum• P - Suppress MRP ordering

Major ordermultiple

If this field is set to anything other than zero, then the orderquantity will be calculated as a multiple of the entered value.

Minor ordermultiple

If this field is set to anything other than zero, then the orderquantity will be calculated as a multiple of the entered value.

Minimum orderquantity

If this field is set to anything other than zero, then theorder quantity will be at least the entered value even if therequirement is for less.

Maximum orderquantity

If this field is set to anything other than zero, then the orderquantity will not exceed the entered value. If the requirementis greater than the entered value, then multiple orders will berequired.

Fixed time period This indicates the number of working days that represents afixed time period.


All order policies take the entry in this field into account. Ifyou enter one or zero in this field, then orders are raised onthe date required. Any value greater than zero will causerequirements planning to apply the time period to schedulingdemand and raising suggestions.

Transfer supplieddetails

These options enable you to assign defaults that you want touse when transferring this stock item from a source warehouseto this warehouse.

Note:You will be unable to configure transfer supply detailsif the warehouse being maintained for the stock itemis also the designated Warehouse to use for the stockitem.

The reason for this is that requirements planningassumes that the item is either going to bemanufactured or purchased for this warehouse andthen distributed through the supply chain. Therefore,if it is set up correctly (with this being the supplywarehouse) you should not encounter supply loopswhich would cause an error in planning.

You can manually transfer to the Warehouse touse either as an SCT or GIT, using the InventoryMovements, Sales Order Entry or Back OrderReview programs.

Transfer supplieditem

This indicates whether the stock item for this warehouse canbe supplied by another warehouse.

| Setup | 109


Field Values DescriptionYou must select this option if you want to be able to createsupply chain transfer orders for this warehouse/stock codecombination using the Back Order Review program.

This option must also be selected if you want the RequirementsPlanning system to take account of supply chain transferorders.

Source warehouse You use this field to indicate the supplying warehouse fromwhich stock will be transferred to replenish the warehouse youare maintaining for the stock item.

Lead time (days) You use this field to indicate the number of days it takes tomove the stock item from the source warehouse to the targetwarehouse.

It is used to calculate the expected delivery date.

Note:• If this field is left blank, then the program uses

the entry defined in the Warehouse Move Matrixprogram. If the entry in the matrix is blank, then thisfield defaults to zero (0).

• Within MRP, the lead time entered here is addedto the dock to stock days and the entry defined atthe Number of days after stock arrives that it can beused field (Requirements Planning Setup).

Dock to stock(days)

You use this field to indicate the number of days a stock itemis required to be in stock at the source warehouse prior totransfer.

Note:Within MRP, the dock to stock days entered here isadded to the lead time and the entry defined at theNumber of days after stock arrives that it can be usedfield (Requirements Planning Setup).

Use warehousebuying rule

Select this to indicate that the buying rule specified againstthe warehouse must be used by the Requirements Planningsystem to calculate order quantities in the event of a stockshortage.

Note:If you select to use the warehouse buying rule, then theRe-order quantity assigned to the warehouse is usedinstead of the Economic Batch Quantity and the Palletquantity is used instead of the pan size.

Replenishmentrule

This field is enabled only if you selected the option: Usewarehouse buying rule.

The buying rule selected here is used by the RequirementsPlanning system and indicates how you want to addressquantity shortages encountered for the stock item.

| Setup | 110


Field Values DescriptionFixed time period(days)

This field is enabled only if you selected the option: Usewarehouse buying rule.

It indicates the number of working days that represents a fixedtime period.

For example: A fixed time period of 1 day indicates that if ashortage is encountered, that the total shortage for today andthe next working day is used as if the shortage falls today.


Transfer costmultiplier

Your entry here is used to calculate the additional non-merchandise costs that you want to add to the cost oftransferring goods (e.g. Freight and handling charges).

Note:Your entry made here is only applied if you selectedto apply a cost multiplier when processing receipts(Inventory Setup).

Ledger code This indicates the ledger account to which you want to disbursethe non-merchandise value arising from the transfer of goods.

BOM costing You use these fields to indicate the BOM costs to use for allitems in the currently selected warehouse.

If you do not select the option: Manual cost, then these BOMcosts are updated for all parent parts by the Bill of MaterialsCost Implosion program.

These options are only enabled if you selected the option:Apply warehouse BOM costs (Inventory Setup - General tab).

BOM operationscost

This indicates the total cost of all operations for each itemincluded in this warehouse.

BOM material cost This indicates the total cost of all materials for each itemincluded in this warehouse.

BOM fixedoverhead

This indicates the total cost of all fixed overheads for each itemincluded in this warehouse.

BOM variableoverhead

This indicates the total cost of all variable overheads for eachitem included in this warehouse.

BOM subcontractcost

This indicates the total cost of all subcontract operations foreach item included in this warehouse.

This field is only enabled if you selected the setup option:Split subcontract operation costs from material costs (Bill ofMaterials Setup - General tab).

Manual cost Select this if you do not want the Cost Implosion program toupdate the BOM costs defined against the warehouse.

| Setup | 111


Field Values DescriptionIf you select this option, you will need to update the costsmanually as required.

Warehouse List SelectionThis screen is displayed when you select the Warehouse list > Click to add a list option to assign the stockitem to multiple warehouses with the same information against the item in each warehouse.


Accept and Close Select this to assign the warehouses in the SelectedWarehouses list to the stock code and to return to the previousscreen.

Cancel AnyChanges

Select this to ignore any selections you made and to return tothe previous screen.

If you made any changes, then you are prompted to save thesebefore returning to the previous screen.

Accept and Close Select this to assign the warehouses in the SelectedWarehouses list to the stock code and to return to the previousscreen.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen.

If you made any changes, then you are prompted to save thesebefore returning to the previous screen.

AvailableWarehouses

This listview displays the warehouses currently defined inSYSPRO to which the selected stock code can be assigned.

Assign Selected Select this to assign the warehouses highlighted in theAvailable Warehouses listview to the Selected Warehouseslist. These are the warehouses you want to assign to the stockcode.

You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys together with your mousepointer to individually highlight the warehouses you want toassign to the stock code.

Assign All Select this to assign all the warehouses in the AvailableWarehouses list to the stock code. All the warehouses inthe Available Warehouses list are added to the SelectedWarehouses list.

SelectedWarehouses

This listview displays the warehouses to which you selected toassign the stock code.

Remove Selected Select this to remove the currently highlighted warehouse(s)from the Selected Warehouses listview. The warehouses whichare removed will not be linked to the stock code.

You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys together with your mousepointer to individually highlight the warehouses you want toremove from the Selected Warehouses list.

Remove All Select this to remove all the warehouse(s) from the SelectedWarehouses list.

| Setup | 112


Batching Rules and Order Policy EquivalentsIf you selected the Batching rule: Q - Apply warehouse order policy for the item (Stock CodeMaintenance), then you use the Order Policy Details options against the warehouse to define the batchingrule for the item.

For each batching rule you can define against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance), an equivalentrule can be defined against the warehouse for the stock item using the order policies.

This is illustrated in the tables below:

Batching Rule: A - Lot for lot The order quantity is the shortage quantity.

Order policy C - Cover shortage

Major order multiple 0

Minor order multiple 0

Minimum order quantity 0

Maximum order quantity 0

Fixed time period Set to 1

Batching Rule: B - Multiples of EBQ To calculate the order quantity, the shortagequantity is rounded up to the next multiple of theeconomic batch quantity.


Major order multiple Set this to the same as the EBQ against the stockitem (Stock Code Maintenance)

Minor order multiple Set this to the same as the EBQ against the stockitem (Stock Code Maintenance)




Batching Rule: C - Fixed Time Period When a shortage is encountered, the order quantityis calculated by adding all the shortages in the fixedtime period ahead.






Fixed time period Set to 1 and 99 depending on the time period yourequire.

Batching Rule: D - Order to Maximum ifShortage

When a shortage is encountered, the order quantityis calculated to increase the stock holding up to themaximum defined against the warehouse.

Order policy S - Order to max if shortage


| Setup | 113






Batching Rule: E - Order to Maximum if LessThan Minimum

As soon as the result field (during netting-off) fallsbelow the minimum quantity, an order quantityis calculated to order sufficient to increase thequantity available up to the maximum quantity.

Order policy M - Order to max if less than minimum






Batching Rule: F - Multiples of Pan To calculate the order quantity, the shortagequantity is rounded up to the next multiple of thepan size.


Major order multiple Set this to the same as the Pan size against thestock item (Stock Code Maintenance)

Minor order multiple Set this to the same as the Pan size against thestock item (Stock Code Maintenance)




Batching Rule: G - Multiple EBQ Lots If a shortage occurs, then multiple orders should becreated to satisfy the shortage, each the size of theEBQ.


Major order multiple Set to 0

Minor order multiple Set to 0

Minimum order quantity Set this to the same as the EBQ against the stockitem (Stock Code Maintenance)

Maximum order quantity Set this to the same as the EBQ against the stockitem (Stock Code Maintenance)


Batching Rule: H - Multiple Pan Lots If a shortage occurs, then multiple orders should becreated to satisfy the shortage, each the size of thePan.


| Setup | 114




Minimum order quantity Set this to the same as the Pan size against thestock item (Stock Code Maintenance)

Maximum order quantity Set this to the same as the Pan size against thestock item (Stock Code Maintenance)


Batching Rule: I - Minimum of EBQ If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is thequantity required to meet the shortage, unless thisis less than the EBQ (in which case the EBQ isused).





Maximum order quantity Set to 0

Fixed time period Set to between 1 and 99 depending on the timeperiod you require.

Batching Rule: J - Minimum of Pan If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is thequantity required to meet the shortage, unless thisis less than the Pan size (in which case the Pansize is used).







Batching Rule: K - Multiples of EBQ (fixed timeperiod)

This rule is a combination of rules B and C.

The order quantity is calculated by adding all theshortages in the fixed time period ahead.

Once this total shortage quantity has beencalculated, then this is rounded up to the nextmultiple of the economic batch quantity.


Major order multiple Set this to the same as the EBQ against the stockitem (Stock Code Maintenance)

| Setup | 115


Minor order multiple Set this to the same as the EBQ against the stockitem (Stock Code Maintenance)




Batching Rule: L - Multiples of Pan (fixed timeperiod)

This rule is a combination of rules F and C.

This rule is identical to rule K, except that the panquantity is used instead of the economic batchquantity.


Once this total shortage quantity has beencalculated, then this is rounded up to the nextmultiple of the pan size.







Batching Rule: M - Multiple EBQ Lots (fixed timeperiod)

This rule is a combination of rules G and C.


Once this total shortage quantity has beencalculated, then multiple orders (each the size ofthe EBQ) are suggested.





Maximum order quantity Set this to the same as the EBQ against the stockitem (Stock Code Maintenance)


Batching Rule: N - Multiple Pan Lots (fixed timeperiod)

This rule is a combination of rules H and C.

| Setup | 116


This rule is identical to rule M, except that the panquantity is used instead of the economic batchquantity.


Once this total shortage quantity has beencalculated, then multiple orders (each the size ofthe pan) are suggested.





Maximum order quantity Set this to the same as the Pan size against thestock item (Stock Code Maintenance)


Batching Rule: O - Minimum of EBQ, thereaftermultiples of pan

If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is at leastthe EBQ. However, if the EBQ is insufficient tosatisfy the shortage, then the remaining shortage isrounded up to the next multiple of the pan quantity.







Batching Rule: P - Suppress MRP ordering Demand generated for this item will not result inany suggested purchase orders, unless you haveindicated that batching rules must be overridden(Requirements Planning Setup).

Order policy P - Suppress MRP Ordering

Major order multiple Not applicable

Minor order multiple Not applicable

Minimum order quantity Not applicable

Maximum order quantity Not applicable

Fixed time period Not applicable

| Setup | 117


Maintain Hold StatusYou use the Maintain Hold Status program to maintain the hold status of a stock item.

This program can be accessed by selecting the On Hold Status option from the Edit menu of the StockCodes program.

Placing a stock code on hold enables you to limit what transactions can be processed against it (i.e.prevent it from being bought, sold, or manufactured). Placing a stock code on hold does not prevent youfrom using the Forecast Maintenance program to enter forecasts for the item, or from using the BuildSchedule Maintenance program to create build schedules for the item.

You will be unable to change the hold status of a stock item if you have been denied access to the activity:Inventory stock Code on Hold (Operators - Security tab).

Maintain Hold Status

Field Values DescriptionSave Select this to save the details you entered or changed.


Maintain HoldStatus

Status

Hold status

Partial hold Select this if you want to allow any transaction type to beprocessed against the item using the Inventory Movementsprogram. You are notified that a partial hold exists for the item,but you can optionally elect to continue with the transaction.

You will be unable to place any quantity of the item intobackorder using the Sales Order Entry program. However, if abackorder quantity already exists for the item (before the itemwas placed on partial hold), then you will still be able to shipthe entire quantity, providing you have available stock.

You will be unable to place new purchase orders for the item.In addition, if the item exists against an existing purchase order(before the item was placed on partial hold), you will be unableto change the quantity for the item on that purchase order.

You will be unable to place new purchase order requisition forthe item.

You can receipt the item using the Purchase Order Receiptsprogram providing you use the Receive Quantity option and notthe Receipt All option.

You would typically place an item on partial hold if you are inthe process of discontinuing the item, but you want to be ableto sell or otherwise dispose of the quantity you currently havein stock.

Full hold Select this to prevent transactions being processed against theitem with the following exceptions:

| Setup | 118


Field Values Description• The Stock Take Confirmation program ignores the hold

status of a stock item.

This means that stock items on hold are included in a stockcode selection (see Stock Take Selection) and a stocktake confirmation (see Stock Take Confirmation).

• If the item is in Ship on a sales order at the time of puttingthe item on hold, it can still be invoiced.

• Items on full hold are included in the RequirementsCalculation and in the pegging information, but you cannotraise purchase orders or create jobs.

• Forecasts can still be entered for the item, using theForecast Maintenance program.

• Build schedules can still be created for the item using theBuild Schedule Maintenance program.

Release hold Select this to release a hold that has been placed on a stockitem.

Reason code You use this field to assign a code that depicts the reason forplacing a hold on the item.

Although entry at this field is optional, if a reason code isspecified, then it must currently be defined (see ReasonCodes).

Reason codedescription

This indicates the description defined against the selectedreason code.

Copy Stock CodeYou use the Copy Stock Code program to create a copy of an existing stock item.

This program can be accessed by selecting the Copy option from the Edit menu of the Stock Codesprogram.

Copy Stock Code


Close Select this to exit the program.

Options

Confirm Copy Select this if you want to be prompted by the system before thecopy process is performed.

Preferences Select this to indicate specific information you want to includewhen copying a stock item.

Save Select this to create the copy of the stock code.

If you selected the Confirm Copy option from the Optionsmenu, then you are prompted to confirm the copy operation.

| Setup | 119


Field Values DescriptionCopy from stockcode

You use this field to indicate the code of the stock item fromwhich you want to copy the information to create the new item.

All Inventory Master Information is copied. You can use thePreferences options to specify the additional information youwant to copy.

If you accessed the Copy Stock Code program from withinthe Stock Codes program, then this defaults to the stock itemhighlighted in the listview at the time you selected the Copyoption. You can, however, enter a different code if required.

Stock Code Copy PreferencesYou use the Preferences option from the Options menu to indicate specific information you want to includewhen copying a stock item.

Field Values DescriptionCopy warehouses(quantitieszeroized)

Select this to copy warehouse records, but with quantities setto zero.

The copy stock code function only creates the dummy binrequired in a company that uses multiple bins, Copying of awarehouse does not imply the copying of a bin.

Note:If you copy warehouses that contain transfer supplydetails and you are using the Full goods in transittransfers facility (Inventory Setup - General tab), thenyou must run the GIT Supply Warehouse Validationprogram to ensure that the Requirements Calculationprogram recognises the new stock code as transfer-supplied.

Retain warehousehistory

Select this to copy the opening costs for the past 12 monthsand the quantity sold from last month back 12 months.

All quantity on hand balances are set to zero for the new stockcode.

Retain last 12months' closingbalances

Select this if you want to copy details held against thewarehouse, including history information for the warehouse.This includes:

• the opening costs for the past 12 months• the quantity sold from last month back for 12 months• the quantity sold from last month back for 12 months• aged inventory balances for the current year and 5 previous

years

Note:Selecting this option will result in the InventoryValuation, Kardex and Aged Inventory Valuationreports reflecting inaccurate figures for the copied stockcodes (i.e. Quantities and values are reported against

| Setup | 120


Field Values Descriptionthe original and copied stock codes, thereby inflatingthe stock values).

Copy priceentries

Select this if you want to copy all price codes that wereassigned to the original stock code.

Copy alternatestock codes/Suppliers

Select this if you want to copy any alternate stock codes and/orsuppliers that were assigned to the original stock code.

Copy customforms

Select this if you want to copy custom form information definedagainst the original stock code to the new stock code.

Custom forms are maintained using the Custom Form Designprogram.

Copy notes You use this to indicate which notations held against theoriginal stock code you want to copy. This includes:

• Technical specifications• Sales order additional text• Purchase order additional text• Job narrations• Inspection text• Dangerous goods handling text

Select All Select this to set all preferences to selected.

Deselect All Select this to set all preferences to deselected.

Save Select this to save the preferences against you operator code.

Close Select this to save the preferences for the current run of theprogram only.

Copy Stock Code

Field Values DescriptionCopy from This indicates information defined against the stock item

from which you are creating the copy and is displayed forinformation purposes.

Copy from stockcode

This indicates the code of the stock item from which you arecreating the new item.

Copy fromdescription

This indicates the description of the stock item from which youare creating the new item.

Copy from longdescription

This indicates the long description of the stock item from whichyou are creating the new item.

Copy to

Copy to stock code You use this field to enter the code of the new stock item youare creating.

New description You use this field to enter the description for the new stockitem.

| Setup | 121


Field Values DescriptionThis describes the stock code and is displayed throughout thesystem whenever the stock code is entered. You can use it toverify that the correct item has been entered.

New longdescription

You use this field to enter the long description for the new stockitem.

This is an additional description assigned to a stock code whichis viewable from within the Inventory Query program andwhich can be printed on reports and inventory documents.

New alternate key1

You use this field to enter the first alternate key for the newstock item.

This indicates additional information assigned to the stock itemwhich can be used as selection criteria when browsing on stockcodes.



New alternate key2

You use this field to enter the second alternate key for the newstock item.

This indicates additional information assigned to the stock itemwhich can be used as selection criteria when browsing on stockcodes.



Warehouse MaintenanceYou use the Warehouse Maintenance program to maintain the warehouses required for your stock items.

Once the warehouses are defined, you use the Warehouses for Stock Code program to link stock itemsto these warehouses.

The Inventory Warehouses program lists the warehouses currently defined.

Warehouse Maintenance


Save Select this to save the details you entered for the warehouse.

Save and Close Select this to save the details you entered for the warehouseand to return to the Inventory Warehouses listview.

Close Select this to return to the Inventory Warehouses listview.

| Setup | 122


Field Values DescriptionEdit

New Select this to add a new warehouse.

Delete Select this to delete the warehouse entered in the Warehousefield.

If you selected the option: Confirm Deletions, then you areprompted to confirm the deletion of the selected warehouse.

The warehouse can only be deleted if no balances oroutstanding transactions exist against the warehouse.

New Select this icon to add a new warehouse.

Delete Select this icon to delete the warehouse entered in theWarehouse field.



Save Select this icon to save the details you entered for thewarehouse.

Warehouse You use this field to enter the code of the warehouse you wantto add or maintain. This is a two character alphanumeric fieldthat you can link to your stock items using the Stock CodeMaintenance program.

It can represent an actual warehouse containing your inventoryitems (i.e. a physical warehouse) or it can represent a groupingof your inventory according to specific characteristics of theitem (i.e. a logical warehouse).

For example: You may want to split your inventory rawmaterials and finished goods into different logical warehouseseven though they are located in the same physical warehouse.

Note:• You can set up a default warehouse for all

transactions at company level (Company Setup- General tab). You can, however, override thissetting at the time of processing information at mostWarehouse fields.

• You will be unable to add a warehouse code of** as this is reserved for use within the system torepresent a non-stocked

Warehouse Maintenance

Field Values DescriptionWarehouse This indicates the code of the warehouse you are currently

maintaining.

| Setup | 123


Field Values DescriptionDescription This is used to describe the warehouse and is displayed

throughout the system whenever the warehouse code isentered.

You can use it to verify that the correct warehouse has beenentered.

Next stock taketicket number

This is used by the system to generate the next number thatwill be printed on tickets/labels for this warehouse when nextyou perform a stock take.

Nationality You use this field to indicate the nationality code for the countryin which the warehouse is located.

This field is only enabled if you selected the option: EC VATsystem required (Tax Options - General tab).

The nationality code entered here is used as:

• the default Country of Origin code when a Sales Order isinvoiced (Sales Analysis Intrastat Transactions - MaintainIntrastat Dispatches)

• the default nationality code when using the Sales OrderEntry program to process a Supply Chain Transfer

• the default Arrival Nationality when a Purchase Orderis receipted (P/O Intrastat Transactions - PO IntrastatTransactions)

Nationalities are maintained using the Nationalities program.

Negative stockallowed

This indicates whether stock in the warehouse is allowed to gonegative.

Note:The field is displayed only if you selected Dependenton warehouse at the Stock on hand allowed to gonegative option (Inventory Setup - General tab).

Multiple bins inuse

This field is automatically enabled when you select the setupoption: Multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).

When this option is selected, a specific bin has to be enteredwhen you receive items into stock, issue items from stock ortransfer items between warehouses.

When you deselect this option against a warehouse, thebins against each stock item stocked in the warehouse aredeleted and replaced by a single default bin with the entirequantity on hand for the stock code/warehouse against it. Thedefault bin location is generated from the warehouse code,if no default bin is setup against the stock code/warehousecombination (Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code).Any bins allocated to sales order lines are replaced with anallocation for the newly created bin. The bin associated withexisting lot records (and their transactions) against traceableand ECC controlled items is replaced with the newly createdbin. All transactions are then be processed against the newly

| Setup | 124


Field Values Descriptioncreated bin. The operator will not be required to supply binswhen processing transactions.

When you select this option against a warehouse, no otheraction is required, as the default bin will already be definedagainst lots and sales order ship quantities.

Note:• This option is only enabled when the Inventory

Warehouses program is accessed by selecting theWarehouses function from the Inventory Setupprogram.

Refer to Multiple bins for additional information on multiplebins in SYSPRO.

Costing level This option only applies if you selected the option: Costing perwarehouse (Inventory Setup) as you can then define differentcosting methods for individual warehouses.

In addition, this option is only enabled when you accessthe Warehouse Maintenance program by selecting theWarehouses option from the Inventory Setup program.

Company Select this if you want to use the costing method definedagainst the company (Inventory Setup) for this warehouse(i.e. you do not want to define a costing method which isdifferent from the company costing method for this warehouse).

When you select this option, the Costing method field below isdisabled.

Warehouse Select this to use the costing method defined against thewarehouse (Warehouse Maintenance) for this warehouse.

When you select this option, the Costing method field below isenabled for you to define the costing method to use.

Costing method You use this to select the costing method you require for thiswarehouse.

You can only access this option if you set the Costing levelabove to Warehouse.

The costing method you select determines the manner in whichyour inventory is valued for this warehouse.

By default, the costing method is set to that defined against thecompany (Inventory Setup - General tab).

Note:• This field is only enabled if you selected the option:

Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup - Generaltab).

• This field is only enabled when the InventoryWarehouses program is run by selecting theWarehouses function from the Inventory Setupprogram.

| Setup | 125


Field Values Description• LIFO costing can only be applied across all

warehouses for a company and not at individualwarehouse level.

Average Select this to average out the unit cost of an item that isreceived into this warehouse. This is calculated as the averagebetween the new cost of the item and the existing cost of theitem held on file.

Standard Select this for costs to be updated in this warehouse onlywhen the Cost Changes function is used from the InventoryMovements program.

Last cost Select this if you want to value inventory in this warehouseaccording to the last cost that was entered for an item when itwas received into this warehouse.

The Last cost is updated by the following programs:

• Transfer BOM Costs to Wh Costs if:

• standard costing is being used• the item is made-in• the new calculated cost differs from the current cost

• Inventory Movements - All cost transactions irrespective ofcosting method and part type

• Purchase Order Receipts, Purchase Order Inspection,Job Receipts and Shipment Receipt (Legacy) if:• standard costing is being used• the option: Update last cost if standard cost in use is

selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab)• Price-Cost Percentage Change - All cost change

transactions

FIFO Select this if you want all stock receipts to create a new FIFObucket and all issues/sales to be made from the oldest bucketheld on file for items held in this warehouse.

You can only select this option if you selected the option: FIFOvaluation (Inventory Setup - General tab).

Note:• Implications of selecting this option are that stock

on hand cannot be allowed to go negative in anywarehouse. However, items defined as Floorstock(Stock Code Maintenance) can have a negativebalance (see WIP Issue Floor Stock Allocations).


Cost implosion,suggested jobs

Componentwarehouse to use

This indicates the warehouse from which material allocationsmust be allocated to suggested jobs created by theRequirements Calculation program.

| Setup | 126


Field Values DescriptionIf you selected the option: Consolidate selected warehouses(Requirements Planning Setup), then this warehouse is usedby the consolidation routine in the Requirements Calculationprogram. If this is blank, then MRP cannot raise suggestedsupply.

In addition, you can set this to be the default warehouse fromwhich material allocations must be allocated when creating ajob (Job Entry - Preferences).

If this is not specified, then material allocations are allocatedfrom the warehouse to use assigned to the component.

Note:You can access this field only if you are using Costingby warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab)and either the Bill of Materials or the RequirementsPlanning module is installed.

Routing This indicates the routing that must be used for materials andoperations which are assigned to suggested jobs that use thiswarehouse.

In addition, you can set this to be the default route to use formaterials and operation assigned when creating a job (JobEntry - Preferences).

Suggested jobs are created by the Requirements Calculationprogram.

Note:You can access this field only if the Bill of Materialsand Requirements Planning modules are installed andif you selected the option: Alternate routings required(Bill of Materials Setup - General tab).

Include warehousein requirementsplanningcalculation

Select this to include the warehouse in the calculationsperformed by the Requirements Calculation program.

Note:This option is displayed only if you selected Bywarehouse at the option: Warehouse selection(Requirements Planning Setup - Warehouses tab).

G/L accounts

Warehouse control This is the control account for all inventory transactionsprocessed against the warehouse.

Note:Your entry is validated only if the Inventory moduleis integrated to General Ledger in summary or detail(General Ledger Integration - General Ledger tab).

Warehousevariance

This is the ledger account to which all variances are postedarising from rounding errors when processing receipts intostock.

| Setup | 127


Field Values DescriptionNote:Your entry is validated only if the Inventory moduleis integrated to General Ledger in summary or detail(General Ledger Integration - General Ledger tab).

GRN suspense This is the ledger account to which all receipts of stockeditems are posted for the purpose of Accounts Payable invoicematching and checking.

For non-stocked receipts, the GRN suspense account definedin the Purchase Orders Setup program is used.

Note:• You can access this field only if you indicated that

the GRN suspense system is required (PurchaseOrders Setup - GRN tab).

• Your entry is validated only if the Inventory moduleis integrated to General Ledger in summary or detail(General Ledger Integration - General Ledgertab).

Goods in transitcontrol

This is the control account to which postings are made forall goods in transit transactions that are processed for thiswarehouse.

If no entry is assigned to the warehouse, then the Goods inTransit control account defined at company level, is used(General Ledger Integration - Inventory tab).

Note:Your entry is validated only if the Inventory moduleis integrated to General Ledger in summary or detail(General Ledger Integration - General Ledger tab).

Dispatched but notinvoiced

This is the clearing account that is used when dispatchingitems from the warehouse using the Dispatch Note system.

This account is debited at the time of creating and printing thedispatch note (i.e. Stock on hand is reduced for each item onthe dispatch note, even though an invoice has not yet beenproduced). This account is credited when the dispatch note isinvoiced against the customer. This account is also creditedwhen a dispatch note is cancelled or an adjustment made thatdecreases the value of the dispatch note (e.g. the quantity isdecreased).

Note:Dispatches involving non-stocked items use theaccount defined at company level (General LedgerIntegration).

WIP inspection This indicates the account to which the WIP value of goodsreceived into inspection for this warehouse must be posted.

You can only access this field if you enabled the option: Workin Progress inspection required (WIP Setup - General 1 tab).

| Setup | 128


Field Values DescriptionIf you leave this field blank then the account configured atcompany level is used (General Ledger Integration - W.I.P.tab).

Note:You will be unable to receive items from inspectioninto stock using the WIP Inspection Maintenanceprogram if you have not defined a WIP inspectionaccount in this field or against the company (GeneralLedger Integration) and you did not select the setupoption: Request ledger code for inventory transactions(Inventory Setup).

Work in progress This indicates the default account to which the value of work inprogress is posted when a job is created.

This account is only used if a work in progress account is notdefined against the Stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).

If you leave this field blank (and a work in progress accountis not defined against the Stock item), then the accountconfigured at company level is used (General LedgerIntegration - W.I.P. tab).

WIP variance This indicates the account to which postings are made duringthe Backflushing function of the Inventory Movementsprogram if there is a variance between the entered cost of themanufactured item and the cost of the item's material and laborallocations calculated by the system.

If you leave this field blank then the account configured atcompany level is used (General Ledger Integration - W.I.P.tab).

Automaticallycleared variances

This indicates the default General Ledger account to whichwork in progress variances (falling below your specified value)are posted automatically when receiving a finished part intostock from a completed job.

This applies only if standard costing is in use.

If you leave this field blank then the account configuredat company level is used as the default (General LedgerIntegration - W.I.P. tab).

The General Ledger cleared variances account to use whenreceipting items in from inspection can be defined using thePreferences option of the WIP Inspection Maintenanceprogram.

Delivery address

Delivery addressline 1-5

You use these fields to assign up to five lines of deliveryaddress information for the warehouse.

This address can be printed on inventory documents.

| Setup | 129


Field Values DescriptionDelivery addresspostal/zip code

You use this field to indicate the postal zip code for the deliveryaddress.

Delivery route You use this field to enter a default delivery route code to usefor Supply Chain Transfer deliveries to this warehouse.

Delivery route codes are maintained using the DeliveryRoutes program.

This field is only enabled if you selected the option: Loadplanning required (Sales Order Setup - Load Planning tab).

Delivery distance/sequence

You use this field to enter a default delivery distance orsequence number to use for Supply Chain Transfer deliveriesto this warehouse.

For example, you may want to assign this delivery warehouseas the first one to which deliveries must be made on thedelivery route specified in the previous field, in which case youenter 1 in the sequence field. Alternatively, you may enter thedistance of the target warehouse delivery location from thesource warehouse as the sequence. If you specify this distanceagainst all the warehouse addresses on this route, then youcan sequence the loads on the route based on the deliverydistance from the source to the target warehouses.

This field is only enabled if you selected the option: Loadplanning required (Sales Order Setup - Load Planning tab).

Supply chaintransferdocuments

Fax SCTdocuments

Select this if you want to be able to fax transfer documentationwhen ending the supply chain transfer order.

SCT fax number This indicates the default fax number that must be used whenyou end the supply chain transfer order and fax the transferdocument.

SCT contact name This indicates the contact person who must receive the transferdocument that is faxed when you end the supply chain transferorder.

SCT defaultdocument format

You use this field to define a default document format to use forSupply Chain Transfer documents.

The Sales Order Entry program uses this default formatdefined against the source warehouse if the option: Use sourcebranch for numbering SCT documents is selected (SalesOrder Setup - Numbering tab). In all other cases, the SalesOrder Entry program uses this default format defined againstthe target warehouse when generating the SCT document.

Warehousemanagement

Warehouse undercontrol of WMS

| Setup | 130


Define Numbering

Field Values DescriptionGoods in Transit

Goods in TransitBranch

This indicates the branch that must be used for the warehousewhen processing a supply chain transfer order (SCT).

A supply chain transfer order is captured using the SalesOrder Entry program. It enables you to raise an order againsta warehouse designated as a source warehouse for the supplyof a particular Stock item.

The branch assigned to the warehouse is used to validate theproduct class assigned to the Stock item.

If the A/R branch is not defined against both the source andtarget warehouses, then the error message: "Branch to beused for SCT is invalid" is displayed when you attempt toprocess a SCT using the Sales Order Entry program.

Goods in TransitGeographic area

This indicates the regional location of the warehouse.

The geographic area is used when processing a supply chaintransfer order using the Sales Order Entry program.

GIT Referencenumber

GIT Referencenumber

This indicates the first two characters that you want to appearin front of the goods in transit reference number generated forthis warehouse.

Note:You can only access this field if you selected theoption: By warehouse - with prefix (Inventory Setup -Numbering tab).

GIT Next referencenumber

This indicates the goods in transit reference number that willbe used when next you process an inter-warehouse or supplychain transfer of goods. This number is incremented by one (1)each time you process a transfer of Stock into transit.

Note:You can only access this field if you selected theoption: By warehouse - with prefix (Inventory Setup -Numbering tab).

Purchase orders

Purchase orderprefix

This indicates the single character that you want to appearin front of the next purchase order number generated for thiswarehouse.

Note:You can only access this field if you selected Bywarehouse with prefix at the option: Purchase order

| Setup | 131


Field Values Descriptionnumbering method (Purchase Orders Setup -Numbering tab).

Next purchaseorder number

This indicates the next order number that will be used whencapturing a purchase order.

Note:You can only access this field if you selected Bywarehouse at the option: Purchase order numberingmethod (Purchase Orders Setup - Numbering tab).

Goods ReceivedNote

GRN Prefix This indicates the two characters that you want to appearin front of the Goods Received Note number that is nextgenerated for this warehouse when processing a purchaseorder receipt.

Note:You can only access this field if you selected Bywarehouse with prefix at the option: GRN Numbering(Purchase Orders Setup - Numbering tab).

Next GRN number This indicates the Goods Received Note number that will nextbe used when processing a purchase order receipt.

Note:You can only access this field if you selected Bywarehouse at the option: GRN Numbering (PurchaseOrders Setup - Numbering tab).

Copy Stock Codes to New WhYou use the Copy Stock Codes to New Wh program to create warehouse records for a selective range ofstock items.

Although the Warehouses for Stock Code program allows you to assign a stock item to multiplewarehouses, this can only be performed for one stock item at a time. The Copy Stock Codes to New Whprogram allows you to perform a similar function but for a range of stock items (including a list of items).

You would typically use the Copy Stock Codes to New Wh program if you added a new warehouse andnow want to copy all or some of your existing stock codes into the new warehouse.

Copy Stock Codes to New Warehouses

Field Values DescriptionStart Copy Select this function to copy the stock codes according to your

selections.

The following source warehouse details are copied to the newwarehouse:

• Cost multiplier• Unit cost

| Setup | 132


Field Values Description• Minimum quantity• Maximum quantity• Safety stock level• Re-order quantity• Pallet quantity• Bin location• User defined 1-3

Validate Select this to validate your selections before copying stockcodes. Any exceptions detected are displayed in the ValidateReport output pane.

You use the After processing completed options to print oremail this information.

Print Select this to print the information currently displayed in theValidate Report output pane.

Save FormValues

Select this to save the options you selected using Designmode.

This option is only enabled when you access the programin design mode from the SYSPRO Menu System or theAutomation Design programs.

See Design Mode.

Copy Options

Field Values DescriptionCopy fromwarehousedetails

From warehouse You use this field to indicate the source warehouse from whichyou want to copy stock items (i.e. the warehouse in which thestock codes already exist).

From warehousedescription

This indicates the description of the warehouse selected.

Copy towarehouse

Copy towarehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) to which youwant to copy the selected stock codes.

Stock codes

Stock codeselection

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) you want to copyto the selected warehouse(s).

Product classes

Product classselection

This enables you to indicate that only stock codes matching aspecific product class must be selected for copying.

| Setup | 133


Field Values DescriptionDefault bin

Default binselection

Use newwarehouse

Select this to use the target warehouse code as the entry at theBin field.

Copy existingdefault bin

Select this if you want to use the bin location currently assignedto the stock item from the source warehouse as the defaultentry at the Bin field.

Create new defaultbin

Select this if you want to specify a new bin location for thestock codes in the target warehouse.

Bin You use this field to indicate the bin location that you want toassign to all the stock codes created in the new warehouse.

Print options

Print optionsselections

Exceptions only Select this if you only want to print a list of stock codes thatwere not copied (e.g. a duplicate key message indicates thatthe stock code already exists against the new warehouse).

Created recordsonly

Select this if you only want to print a list of stock codes thatwere copied.

Created recordsand exceptions

Select this if you want to print a list of stock codes that werecopied as well as those that were not copied.

After processingcomplete

These options relate to the information displayed in theValidate Report output pane.

Refer to After Processing Completed.

Selection Filtering OptionsThe following options enable you to specify which items from a selection you want to include:

Note:Not all of these options may be available for each selection.

Field Values DescriptionAll Select this to include all the items from the selection.

Range Select this to indicate a range of items from the selection toinclude.

You indicate this range using the From and To fields.

Single Select this to indicate a single item from the selection toinclude.

Where no field is displayed in which to enter the single item,you use the From field to indicate the item.

List Select this to indicate a list of items from the selection toinclude.

| Setup | 134


Field Values DescriptionYou use the Define list option to indicate the list of items toinclude in the selection (refer to the List Selection sectionbelow).

From You use this field to enter the first item in the range of theselected item to include.

If you indicated that you want to include only a single itemfrom the selection, then you use this field to enter that item.This applies where no field is displayed in which to specify thesingle item.

To You use this field to enter the last item in the range of theselected item to include.

This field is only enabled if you selected the Range option.

List SelectionThis screen is displayed when you select the Define list option to include a list of items in a selection.


Accept and Close Select this to accept the list of items in the Selected listview ofitems and to return to the previous screen.

Cancel AnyChanges

Select this to ignore any changes you made and to return tothe previous screen.

Accept and Close Select this to accept the list of items in the Selected listview ofitems and to return to the previous screen.


Available(listview)

This listview displays the items currently defined which can beselected for inclusion in the list.

Assign Selected Select this to assign the items currently highlighted in theAvailable listview to the list of items you want to include in thelist (the Selected listview).

You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys together with your mousepointer to individually highlight the items you want to assign.

Assign All Select this to assign all items currently displayed in theAvailable listview to the Selected listview.

Selected(listview)

This listview displays the items currently selected for inclusionin the list.

Remove Selected Select this to remove the currently highlighted item(s) from yourlist of items in the Selected listview.

You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys together with your mousepointer to individually highlight the items you want to remove.

Remove All Select this to remove all items from the list (i.e. from theSelected listview).

| Setup | 135


Validate ReportThe information in this pane is displayed when you select the Validate option, providing you did not selectthe option: After processing completed > Close this application.

You use the After processing completed options to print or email this information.

Buyers MaintenanceYou use the Buyers Maintenance program to create and maintain Inventory buyers.

A buyer indicates the person in a company who is responsible for purchasing stock items. Buyers areassigned to stock items within the Inventory module.

Buyers can be used as a selection criterion to generate reports in the Requirements Planning module.For example: If you have a number of buyers within a buying department (each responsible for a differentproduct line) you can generate reports selectively by buyer.

You can generate a report of all your buyers using the List of Buyers program.

The Buyers listview displays details of Inventory buyers currently defined.

Buyers MaintenanceThis screen is displayed when you select the Add or Change option from the Edit menu of the Buyersprogram.





Edit

New Select this to add a new Inventory buyer code.

Delete Select this to delete the buyer code currently displayed.

New Select this icon to add a new Inventory buyer code.

Delete Select this icon to delete the buyer code currently displayed.


Buyer code You use this field to indicate the code of the buyer you want toadd or maintain. This code uniquely identifies the buyer.

Play Select this to use the Multimedia program to view multimediaobjects defined against the buyer code.

Edit Select this to use the Multimedia program to define multimediaobjects against the buyer code.

Buyer Code Maintenance

| Setup | 136


Field Values DescriptionBuyer This indicates the code of the buyer you are currently adding or

maintaining.

Name This indicates the descriptive name you want to assign to thebuyer. This is typically the buyer's name.

Email address This indicates the address of the buyer to which you want tosend e-mail notifications.

Inventory Planner MaintenanceYou use the Inventory Planner Maintenance program to create and maintain the planners that you canassign to selected stock items within the Inventory module.

A Planner indicates the person in a company responsible for planning the manufacture of made-in stockitems. Planners are assigned to stock items within the Inventory module.

Planners can be used as a selection criterion in various Requirements Planning reports. For example: Ifyou have a number of planners within a planning department (each responsible for a different product line)you can generate reports selectively by planner.

You can generate a report of all your planners using the List of Planners program.

You use the Planners program to view detail of planners currently defined.

Inventory Planner Maintenance



Save and Close Select this to save the details you entered or changed and toreturn to the listview.

Close Select this to return to the listview.

Edit

New Select this to add a new planner.

Delete Select this to delete the currently displayed planner.

New Select this icon to add a new planner.

Delete Select this icon to delete the currently displayed planner.

Planner You use this field to enter the code of the planner you want toadd or maintain.

This code uniquely identifies the planner.

Play Select this to use the Multimedia program to view multimediaobjects defined against the planner.

Edit Select this to use the Multimedia program to define multimediaobjects against the planner.

Inventory PlannerMaintenance

| Setup | 137


Field Values DescriptionPlanner This indicates the code of the planner currently being

maintained.

Name You use this field to enter the descriptive name you want toassign to the planner.

E-mail address You use this field to enter the address of the planner to whichyou want to send e-mail notifications.

Unit of Measure MaintenanceYou use the Unit of Measure Maintenance program to define conversion factors for stocked items wherethe unit of measure in which the item is stocked is not the same as the unit of measure in which the item iscosted.

This is particularly useful for large merchandise quantities, where each individual item has a low costfactor. For example: If your stocking unit of measure for pencils is each (EA) and the cost per EA is 0.01,you can apply a costing unit of measure of 10.00 per thousand (THO).

The Cost Unit of Measure listview displays details of unit of measure conversion factors currently defined.

Unit of Measure MaintenanceThis screen is displayed when you select to add or change an Inventory cost unit of measure.

Danger:Changing the cost unit of measure affects your Inventory valuation for those units of measuredefined against stock items.

The Inventory Valuation report uses the cost defined against each stock item in each warehouseand converts this cost using the current cost and the current value of the factor. Therefore changingonly the factor affects the report, but not the General Ledger (no journal entries are created).

For example, assume you have the following:

Stock item A111 with Cost unit of measure defined as Box

One Box = 100 Each.

One Box costs 200.00

You have 100 Each on hand.

The Inventory Valuation report calculates this as: 100 Each / 100 per Box = 1 Box

1 Box at 200.00 per box = 200.00 (so value of inventory is 200.00)

You now change the Rate for Box to be: 1 Box = 90 Each

The Inventory Valuation report calculates this as: 100 Each / 90 per Box = 1.11 Boxes

Assuming the current cost (i.e. 200.00) also applies to the new factor:

1.11 Boxes at 200.00 per box = 1.11 * 200.00 = 222.00 (so value of inventory is now 222.00).

No General Ledger journal is created for the difference between the initial valuation of 200.00 andthe new valuation of 222.00. This means that the Inventory Valuation report will not balance toyour General Ledger control account for stock item A111.

Before changing the cost unit of measure:• Identify each stock item which uses that cost unit of measure.• For all items identified, identify those with a non zero stock on hand.

| Setup | 138


• Check the current cost and determine whether that cost is also appropriate to the new factor.• If the current cost must still be applied to the new factor, then:

1. Use the Inventory Movements program to adjust the stock on hand to zero for all the itemsyou identified.

This creates an adjustment journal for the General Ledger.2. Use the Cost Unit of Measure program to change the cost unit of measure RATE as

required.3. Use the Inventory Movements program to adjust the stock back into the warehouse(s).

• If the current cost no longer applies to the new factor, then:

1. Use the Inventory Movements program to adjust the stock on hand to zero for all the itemsyou identified.

This creates an adjustment journal for the General Ledger.2. Use the Cost Unit of Measure program to change the cost unit of measure RATE as

required.3. Use the Cost Change option of the Inventory Movements program to change the current

cost of the items.4. Use the Inventory Movements program to adjust the stock back into the warehouse(s).

This creates an adjustment journal for the General Ledger.





Edit

New Select this to add a new unit of measure conversion factor.

Delete Select this to delete the unit of measure conversion factorcurrently displayed.

New Select this icon to add a new unit of measure conversion factor.

Delete Select this icon to delete unit of measure conversion factorcurrently displayed.


Stock uom You use this field to indicate the unit of measure in which theitem is stocked.

Cost uom You use this field to indicate the unit of measure in which theitem is costed.

Unit of Measure Maintenance

Field Values DescriptionStock uom This indicates the stocking unit of measure you selected.

Cost uom This indicates the cost unit of measure you selected.

| Setup | 139


Field Values DescriptionConversion factor A conversion factor must be entered to indicate the relationship

between the cost unit of measure and the stocking unit ofmeasure.

Uom method

Multiply Select this to multiply the cost unit of measure by the factorentered at the Rate field. This converts the stocking unit ofmeasure to the cost unit of measure.

Divide Select this to divide the cost unit of measure by the factorentered at theRate field. This converts the costing unit ofmeasure to the stocking unit of measure.

Rate You use this field to indicate the rate that must applied to thecost and stocking units of measure.

Uom conversion This displays the conversion from one unit of the stocking unitof measure converted to the costing unit measure according tothe entries you made.

Alternate Stock CodesYou use the Alternate Stock Codes program to create a link between stock codes whereby one item canbe used as a substitute for another when a shortage of the primary stock item occurs.

Although you can create a link to an alternate stock item that does not exist, you will need to use the StockCode Maintenance program to create the alternate item before it can be used in the system.

Alternate Stock Codes




Edit

New Select this to add a new alternate stock code.

Save Select this to save any changes you made.


Functions

Select Warehouse By default, the warehouse for the alternate stock code is notdisplayed in the listview, as the alternate code may be stockedin various warehouses.

You use this option to select the warehouse(s) for which youwant to display the warehouse code, quantity available andquantity on hand for the alternate stock code.

| Setup | 140


Field Values DescriptionThe warehouse selection does not filter the alternate stockcodes.

See Select Warehouse.

Select Select this icon to use the entry currently highlighted in thelistview in the corresponding field of another program.

New Select this icon to add a new alternate stock code.

Delete Select this icon to delete the entry currently highlighted in thelistview.

Save Select this icon to save any changes you made.

Stock code You use this field to indicate the primary stock item for whichyou want to assign a substitute.

Select WarehouseThis screen is displayed when you select the Select Warehouse option from the Functions menu.

Field Values DescriptionWarehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse for which you wantto display the warehouse code, quantity available and quantityon hand for the alternate stock code.

All Select this to display the information for all warehouses.

Single Select this to display the information for a single warehouse.

Warehouse You use this field to indicate the single warehouse for whichyou want to display the information.

OK Select this to accept your selections and to return to thelistview.

If you selected to view information for a single warehouse, thenthe warehouse code you selected is displayed in the listview,together with the quantity available and quantity on hand forthe alternate stock code in that warehouse. These details areonly displayed if the alternate stock code is stocked in theselected warehouse.

Cancel Select this to ignore any selections you made and to return tothe listview.

Alternate Stock Codes MaintenanceWhen you select the Alternate Stock Codes program, the currently defined alternate stock codes aredisplayed in a listview.

You can print or query alternate stock codes in the following programs:

• Trial Kitting (prints alternate stock codes for component shortage lines)• Superseded Clearing Stock (prints the first five alternate stock codes)• Inventory Label Format (print positions can be defined for the first five alternate stock codes)• Purchasing Work Sheet (prints the first four alternate stock codes)

| Setup | 141


• Inventory Query (view alternate stock codes. Quantities can only be viewed if you specify a singlewarehouse - see Select Warehouse)

• Sales Order Entry (view the alternate stock codes for the item)

Field Value Description

Alternate stock code You use this field to assign analternate stock code for theprimary stock code entered at thestart of the program.

Note:• If you enter a stock

code that does notexist on file, you aregiven the opportunityto 'add' this code.However, this merelycreates a link betweenthis 'new code' andthe Stock code forwhich you are addingalternate codes.It does not createthe actual alternatestock code. Thelistview displaysthis 'new code' witha description of'Non stocked' andwithout a warehouseallocation. You mustuse the Stock CodeMaintenance programto create the 'newcode' as a legitimatestock item and linkit to at least onewarehouse beforeyou can use it in thesystem (e.g. in SalesOrder Entry).

Once you have addedthe 'new code' asa legitimate stockitem and linked it toa warehouse, youcan use the SelectWarehouse optionfrom the Functionsmenu to select awarehouse in whichthe alternate item isstocked. The listviewthen displays theWarehouse, Quantity

| Setup | 142


on hand and Quantityavailable of thealternate item in theselected warehouse.

Description This indicates the descriptionassigned to the alternate stockcode.

Long description This indicates the long descriptionassigned to the alternate stockcode.

Warehouse This indicates the warehouse forthe alternate stock code. This isonly displayed if you selected toview a single warehouse (seeSelect Warehouse).

Quantity on hand This indicates the quantity of thealternate stock code which is onhand in the warehouse. This isonly displayed if you selected toview a single warehouse (seeSelect Warehouse).

Quantity available This indicates the quantity of thealternate stock code which isavailable in the warehouse. Thisis only displayed if you selectedto view a single warehouse (seeSelect Warehouse).

Alternate SuppliersYou use the Alternate Suppliers program to assign alternate suppliers to selected stock items.

Alternate Suppliers




Edit

New Select this to add a new alternate supplier.


Delete Select this to the delete the entry currently highlighted in thelistview.


| Setup | 143


Field Values DescriptionAdd Select this icon to add a new alternate supplier.

Delete Select this icon to the delete the entry currently highlighted inthe listview.


Stock code You use this field to indicate the stock item for which you wantto assign alternate suppliers.

This stock code cannot be defined as a Notional part (StockCode Maintenance - Descriptive tab).

Alternate Supplier MaintenanceWhen you select the Alternate Suppliers program, the currently defined alternate supplies for the stockitem are displayed in a listview.

Field Values DescriptionAlternate supplier You use this field to assign an alternate supplier to the stock

code entered at the start of the program.

Note:• A message is displayed if you enter an alternate

supplier who is not held on the supplier master file.If you elect to add the alternate supplier to the list,you will have to take on the supplier details beforeusing it as a substitute.

• You can query alternate supplier information usingthe Inventory Query program and the PurchaseOrder Requisition System. In addition, you can printthe first three alternate suppliers on the PurchasingWork Sheet report.

Name This indicates the name of the supplier.

Currency This indicates the currency defined against the alternatesupplier (see AP Supplier Maintenance).

Last price This indicates the price last paid for a purchase from thesupplier.

Price uom This indicates the unit of measure for the price.

Quantity This indicates the quantity last purchased from the supplier.

Receipt date This indicates the last date on which a receipt was processedfor the supplier.

Catalog This indicates the supplier's catalog number.

Primary supplier This indicates the primary supplier for the stock item (StockCode Maintenance).

| Setup | 144


Approved Manufacturer MaintenanceYou use the Approved Manufacturer Maintenance program to maintain the approved manufacturersfrom whom your company obtains parts.

Once you have defined your approved manufacturers, you use the Approved Manufacturers Partsprogram to define the manufacturers' part numbers and to link these part numbers to your SYSPRO stockcodes.

From the Approved Manufacturers Parts program, you use the Suppliers for Stock Code program toenter the approved SYSPRO suppliers of these parts.

You would typically use these programs if you source parts from numerous manufacturers, and need tospecify from which manufacturer you sourced a specific part or you want to link a specific supplier with apreferred manufacturer (see Example).

The Approved Manufacturers listview displays the approved manufacturers currently defined.

Approved Manufacturer MaintenanceThis screen is displayed when you select to add or change an approved manufacturer from the listview ofthe Approved Manufacturers program.


Save Select this to save the information you entered.

Save and Close Select this to save the information you entered and to return tothe previous screen.


Edit

New Select this to add a new manufacturer.

Delete Select this to delete the manufacturer currently displayed.

New Select this icon to add a new manufacturer.

Delete Select this to delete the currently displayed manufacturer.

Save Select this to save the details you entered for the manufacturer.

ApprovedManufacturer

You use this field to enter a code for a new manufacturer or toindicate the code of the manufacturer you want to maintain.

Edit Select this to use the Multimedia program to maintainmultimedia objects for the manufacturer.

Play Select this to view multimedia objects attached to themanufacturer.

ApprovedManufacturerMaintenance

Manufacturer This indicates the code of the manufacturer you are currentlymaintaining.

Manufacturername

You use this field to enter the name of the manufacturer youwant to link to this manufacturer's code.

| Setup | 145


Field Values DescriptionManufacturerinformation

Notes You use this option to use the Text Editor program to enterup to six lines of free format notes for the manufacturer. This isoptional.

Note:If you enter more than six lines of notes, then theadditional lines are ignored by the system.

ExampleFollowing is an example of the use of the Approved Manufacturers facility:

When you purchase 5 foot fluorescent light bulbs / tubes, you only buy specific brands because you havehad some bad experiences.

Create a stock code for the 5' fluorescent tube. In this example, the SYSPRO part number is "FluorTube5".

Use the Approved Manufacturer Maintenance program define the manufacturers (i.e. not suppliers, theoriginal manufacturers) who manufacture the fluorescent tube makes you are willing to purchase. In thisexample, the approved manufacturers are Osram, Philips and General Electric.

Use the Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance program to add a relationship between yourstock code, the original manufacturer, and the original manufacturer's part/model number. In this example,against stock code "FluorTube5" there are three entries:

• one entry for the Osram model which is 17-889-12• one entry for the Philips model number which is A30278• one entry for the General Electric model number which is B17-777.

You can also enter supplier codes against these entries. From the Approved Manufacturer Part NumberMaintenance program, you use the Suppliers for Stock Code program to enter the approved SYSPROsuppliers of these parts. In this example, supplier code 0000001 was defined against both the GeneralElectric B17-777 part and the Philips A30278 part. The Osram part is not available from this supplier.

When you add a purchase order against supplier 000001, you can either specify the stock code as"FluorTube5", or browse on the Approved Manufacturers parts list and select the relevant manufacturer'spart number. If you specify the stock code FluorTube5 in the stock code field, the relevant manufacturers'part numbers are stored on the line. Depending on how you defined your purchase order document format,the manufacturer's part number section either prints all the different manufacturers and their part numbersthat you will accept for FluorTube5, or only those that the selected supplier supplies.

Approved Manufacturer Part Number MaintenanceYou use the Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance program to define details of approvedmanufacturers' part numbers and to link these part numbers to your SYSPRO stock codes.

Before using the Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance program, you need to use theApproved Manufacturer Maintenance program to add the details of your manufacturers.

Once you have linked the manufacturer's part numbers to SYSPRO stock codes, you use the Suppliersfor Stock Code program to enter the approved SYSPRO suppliers of these parts.

The Approved Manufacturers Parts listview displays details of manufacturers' parts currently defined.

| Setup | 146


Approved Manufacturer Part Number MaintenanceThis screen is displayed when you select the Add or Change option from the Edit menu of the ApprovedManufacturers Parts program.

The options enable you to add details of manufacturer's part numbers and to link the part numbers toSYSPRO stock codes.

Note:One SYSPRO stock code can be linked to multiple manufacturer's part numbers. Onemanufacturer's part number can be linked to multiple SYSPRO stock codes.





Edit

New Select this to add a new manufacturer's part.

Delete Select this to delete the currently displayed manufacturer'spart.

New Select this icon to add a manufacturer's part number and link itto a SYSPRO stock code.

Delete Select this icon to delete the currently displayed manufacturer'spart.


Note:Once you have saved the manufacturer/part numbercombination, neither the manufacturer nor thepart number can be changed. This is because themanufacturer and part number are part of the key forthe table/file and thus cannot be changed. You willneed to remove the item and then re-enter it with thecorrect manufacturer and part number.

Stock code You use this field enter a valid SYSPRO stock code. This is thestock code you want to link to the approved manufacturer's partnumber.

Approved Manuf. Part Number Maintenance

Field Values DescriptionStock code This field displays the stock code you are maintaining.


This field displays the description of the stock code you aremaintaining.

Stock code longdescription

This field displays the long description of the stock code youare maintaining.

| Setup | 147


Field Values DescriptionManufacturer You use this field to enter the approved manufacturer of the

part number you want to link to the SYSPRO stock code.

Note:Once the manufacturer/part number combination issaved, you will be unable to change it.

Manufacturername

This indicates the name of the approved manufacturer.

Manufacturer partnumber

You use this field to enter the manufacturer's part number forwhich you want to add the details and link to the SYSPROstock code.

Note:Once the manufacturer/part number combination issaved, you will be unable to change it.

Revision number You use this field to indicate the current revision of thismanufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock code combination.

Note:This is documentary only. No validation is performed.

Preferred Note:This is documentary only. No validation is performed.

Yes Select this if the current manufacturer part number/SYSPROstock code link is the preferred combination for purchasingpurposes.

No Select this if the current manufacturer part number/SYSPROstock code link is not the preferred combination for purchasingpurposes.

Status Note:This is documentary only. No validation is performed.

Active Select this if the current manufacturer part number/SYSPROstock code link is active for purchasing purposes.

Inactive Select this if the current manufacturer part number/SYSPROstock code link is not active for purchasing purposes.

Effective date You use this field to enter the date from which the currentmanufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock code link can beused for purchasing purposes.

Note:This is documentary only. No validation is performed.

Manufacturersuppliers

Select this to use the Suppliers for Stock Code programto link one or more approved SYSPRO supplier to the partnumber/stock code combination.

| Setup | 148


Field Values DescriptionPart numberinformation

Notes You use this option to use the Text Editor program to enterup to six lines of free format notes for the manufacturer's partnumber. This is optional.


Approved Manufacturer's Supplier MaintenanceYou use the Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance program to link approved SYSPROsuppliers to the part numbers of approved manufacturers.

Before you use the Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance program, you need to have usedApproved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance program to have entered details of approvedmanufacturers' part numbers and linked these part numbers to your SYSPRO stock codes.

The Suppliers for Stock Code listview displays details of suppliers currently linked to manufacturers' partnumbers.

Approved Manufacturer's Supplier MaintenanceYou use this screen to link approved SYSPRO suppliers to the part number highlighted in the listview ofthe Approved Manufacturers Parts program.





Edit

New Select this to add a new supplier for the manufacturer's part.

Delete Select this to delete the link between the supplier currentlydisplayed and the part number.

New Select this to add a new supplier for the manufacturer's part.

Delete Select this to delete the link between the supplier currentlydisplayed and the part number.

Delete Select this icon to delete the link between the supplier currentlydisplayed and the part number.


Stock code This indicates the SYSPRO stock code that is linked to themanufacturer's part number.

You use the Approved Manufacturer Part NumberMaintenance program to define details of approved

| Setup | 149


Field Values Descriptionmanufacturers' part numbers and to link these part numbers toyour SYSPRO stock codes.

ApprovedManuf. SupplierMaintenance

Stock code This indicates the SYSPRO stock code to which you want tolink the supplier.

Manufacturer This indicates the manufacturer of the part number linked to theSYSPRO stock code.

Manufacturer partnumber

This indicates the manufacturer's part number.

Supplier You use this field to enter the supplier code you want to link tothe manufacturer's part number. This must be a valid SYSPROsupplier.

Supplier name This field displays the name for the supplier code entered in theprevious field.

Preferred Note:This option is currently documentary only. No validationis performed. Its purpose will be activated in a laterversion of the program.

Yes Select this to indicate that the current manufacturer partnumber?SYSPRO supplier link is the preferred combination forpurchasing purposes.

No Select this to indicate that the current manufacturer partnumber/SYSPRO supplier link is not the preferred combinationfor purchasing purposes.

Supplierinformation

Notes You use this option to use the Text Editor program to enter upto six lines of free format notes for the supplier. This is optional.


Stock Code Price MaintenanceYou use the Stock Code Price Maintenance program to maintain coded prices and quantity discountbreaks against selected stock items.

The Pricing for a Stock Code listview displays details of coded prices and quantity discount breaksassigned to stock items.

| Setup | 150


Stock Code Price MaintenanceThis screen is displayed when you select the Add or Change option from the Edit menu of the Pricing fora Stock Code program.





Edit

New Select this to add a new price.

Delete Select this to delete the currently displayed price.

Functions

Quantity Discounts Select this to use the Stock Code Quantity Discountsprogram to assign price codes to selected stock items basedon the sale of specific quantities of that item.

New Select this icon to add a new price.

Delete Select this icon to delete the currently displayed price.


Stock code You use this field to enter the code of the stock item againstwhich you want to maintain coded prices and quantity discountbreaks.

Price code You use this field to indicate the price code you want tomaintain.

Although you will be unable to delete the list price code for astock item, you can change the designated list price code usingthe Stock Code Maintenance program.

Note:You will be unable to assign either a full stop orexclamation mark (. or !) as price code entries. Thereason for this is that both characters have specificapplications within the system (i.e. the full stop isreserved for manual price entry and the exclamationmark is reserved for contract price entry).

Price Maintenance

Field Values DescriptionPriceMaintenance

Stock code This indicates the stock item for which you are maintaining thecoded prices and quantity discount breaks.

Price code This indicates the price code you are currently maintaining.

| Setup | 151


Field Values DescriptionPrice You use this field to indicate the selling price you want to

associate with the price code.

This selling price can be selected during processing in theSales Order Entry program providing that you have configureda pricing method of Coded or Quantity discounted for the stockitem. The pricing method to use for the company is defined onthe Pricing tab of the Sales Order Setup program.

The entry in brackets alongside the Price field indicates thecurrency that you have assigned to the entered price code.

Basis You use this field to indicate the unit of measure on which theprice is based.

This can be the stocking, alternate, or other unit of measuredefined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).

It defaults to the stocking unit of measure.

Stocking u/m Select this to base the price on the stocking unit of measuredefined against the stock item.

Alternate u/m Select this to base the price on the alternate unit of measuredefined against the stock item.

Other u/m Select this to base the price on the other unit of measuredefined against the stock item.

Pricing u/m This indicates the unit of measure for the price basis selectedabove.

Commissioncode

You use this field to indicate the commission code that youwant to assign to the price code. An entry of 0 indicates thatyou do not require a commission percentage to be assigned tothe price code.

If this field is left blank, then the default commission codedefined in Sales Order Setup - Commission tab is used as thedefault commission code by the Sales Order Entry program.

Pricing for a Price CodeYou use the Pricing for a Price Code program to maintain the selling price assigned either to a specificprice code or to the list price held against a specific stock code.

Price Code Price Maintenance




Function

| Setup | 152


Field Values DescriptionSpecific Code Select this to change the Selling price associated with the Price

code assigned to a stock code.

Stock Code ListPrice

Select this to change the Selling price associated with the Listprice of a stock item.

Save Select this icon to save the information you entered.

Price code You use this field to indicate the price code you want tomaintain.

This field is only enabled when you select the Specific Codeoption at the Function field.

Stock code You use this field to enter the code of the stock item for whichyou want to change the price.

Pricing for a Price Code

Field Values DescriptionStock code This indicates the code of the stock item for which you are

maintaining the price.

Description This indicates the description assigned to the stock code(Stock Code Maintenance).

Long description This indicates the long description assigned to the stock code.

Currency This indicates the currency for the price code.

Price You use this field to indicate the new Selling price required.

Stock Code Quantity DiscountsYou use the Stock Code Quantity Discounts program to assign price codes to selected stock itemsbased on the sale of specific quantities of that item.

The quantity discount breaks assigned to a stock item here are applied during processing in the SalesOrder Entry program providing that you have configured a pricing method of Quantity discounted for thestock item.

Price codes for Quantity discount breaks are associated with a currency, enabling you to associate thequantity discount with a price code in the customer's own currency.

The Stock Code Quantity Discounts program can also be accessed by selecting the Quantity Discountsoption from the Function menu of the Pricing for a Stock Code program.

Inventory Quantity DiscountsThe following options can be selected from the menu:


Delete Select this to delete the currently displayed price code.


Exit Select this to return to the previous screen.

| Setup | 153


Field Values DescriptionNew Select this icon to add a new quantity discount price to a price

code.

Delete Select this icon to delete the currently displayed price code.

Save Select this icon to save the information you entered.

Close Select this icon to return to the previous screen.

Stock code You use this field to indicate the code of the stock item forwhich you want to define quantity discount pricing.

Qty DiscountsMaintenance

Qty Discounts Maintenance

Field Values DescriptionCurrency You use this field to define the currency applicable to the price.

You can only use a foreign currency with a foreign currencyprice code.

This field is only enabled if you selected the option: Foreigncurrency sales required (Accounts Receivable Setup -General tab).

Quantity You use this field to indicate the quantity of items that you wantto link to a specific price code.

These quantity breaks are applied if the stock code has apricing method of Quantity discounted.

Example: If you enter a Price code A for a quantity of 10 andPrice code B for a quantity of 50, it means that Price code Aapplies to quantities from 1-10 and Price code B applies toquantities of 11-50. There is no price code specified for 51 ormore items, which means that the system determines the pricecode according to the Pricing method.

Price code You use this field to indicate the price code that must be usedwhen a specific quantity of the item is sold.

If you entered a foreign currency in the Currency field, thenyou must enter a foreign currency price code on this field (seePricing for a Stock Code).

Note:You will be unable to assign either a full stop orexclamation mark (. or !) as price code entries. Thereason for this is that both characters have specificapplications within the system (i.e. the full stop isreserved for manual price entry and the exclamationmark is reserved for contract price entry).

Price This field displays the price applicable to the price code.

| Setup | 154


Foreign Price CodesYou use the Foreign Price Codes program to assign a foreign currency to selected price codes.

Foreign Currency Price Codes



Save and Close Select this to save your changes and then exit the program


New Select this icon to assign a foreign currency to a price code.

Delete Select this icon to delete the entry currently highlighted in thelistview.

Save and Close Select this icon to save your changes and then exit theprogram.

Cancel Select this icon to exit the program. Any information you havenot saved is lost.

ForeignPrice CodeMaintenance

Price code This indicates the price code to which you are assigning theforeign currency.

Currency You use this field to indicate the currency that you want toassociate with the price code.

Description This indicates the description for the currency code selected(Currencies).

Foreign Currency Price Codes ListviewWhen you access the Foreign Price Codes program, a listview displays the foreign price codes currentlydefined.


• Price code• Currency

This indicates the currency for the price code.• Description

This indicates the description defined against the currency.

Foreign Purchase PricesYou use the Foreign Purchase Prices program to assign foreign prices to selected stock items. Theseforeign prices can be assigned to detail lines processed within the Purchase Order Entry program.

| Setup | 155


Foreign PricesThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:




Edit

New Select this to add a new foreign price for the stock item.

Save Select this to save the changes you made.


Select Select this icon to use the entry currently highlighted in thelistview in the corresponding field of another program.

Add Select this icon to add a new foreign price for the stock item.

Delete Select this icon to the delete the entry currently highlighted inthe listview.

Save Select this to save the changes you made.

Stock code You use this field to indicate the stock item for which you wantto assign a foreign purchase price.

This stock code cannot be defined as a Notional part (StockCode Maintenance - Descriptive tab).

Foreign Price Maintenance

Field Values DescriptionCurrency You use this field to indicate the currency in which you want to

assign the purchase price.

Description This indicates the description defined against the currencycode.

Purchase price You use this field to indicate the purchase price of the item inthe currency specified.

Inventory Sales Quantity HistoryYou use the Inventory Sales Quantity History program to capture details of quantities sold for a stockitem over the last 12 months, as well as additional sales history information.

You would normally use this program when converting from a manual inventory system to a computerizedone where you need to take on sales information for your existing stock items.

Inventory Initial Sales Quantity History

| Setup | 156


Field Values DescriptionStock code You use this field to enter the code of the stock item for which

you want to maintain sales quantity history.

Quantity HistoryTake-on

Select this to capture the sales quantity history for the selectedstock item.


Inventory Sales Quantity History Take-on

Field Values DescriptionStock code This indicates the stock item for which you want to capture

sales quantity history.

Warehouse This indicates the warehouse for which you want to capturesales history for the selected stock item.

History from lastmonth back 12months

Month 1 - 12 You use these fields to indicate the quantities of the stock itemsold in each of the last 12 months.

Sales History Select this to capture additional sales information for the stockcode. This information is maintained automatically by thesystem.

Save Select this function to save your entries.

The system will check that the maximum number of decimalsallowed for the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance) is notexceeded. You can either re-enter the quantity or allow theprogram to truncate your entry to the permitted number ofdecimals.

Close

Sales HistoryThis screen is displayed when you select the Sales History function.

Field Values DescriptionDate of last sale You use the field to indicate the date on which the item was

last sold.

Date of lastpurchase

You use this field to indicate the date on which the item waslast purchased.

Year-to-dateusage value

You use this field to indicate the annual usage value of thestock item.

Note:For a new warehouse (where the stock item has beenon file for some time) your entry here should reflectthe value of the stock item according to the number ofmonths the stock code has been on file.

| Setup | 157


Field Values DescriptionThis information is used by the ABC Analysis programto classify a stock item according to its annual usagevalue.

Year-to-datesales value

You use this field to indicate the annual sales value of the stockitem.

Previous yearsales value

You use this field to indicate the sales value of the stock itemfor the previous year.

OK Select this to accept your entries.


Inventory Initial Aged ValuationYou use the Inventory Initial Aged Valuation program to take on a stock item's year end quantity onhand for the last five years.

This facility is useful when you carry a limited stock of spare parts for componentized items that may havea long life (e.g. spares for motor vehicles, aircraft, etc.) and you need to provide for the depreciation ofthese items annually.

You would normally use this program at the time of implementation, or when first selecting the option:Aged inventory valuation (Inventory Setup) to enter previous years' results. Thereafter, the systemautomatically maintains this information for you.

Note:• You will be unable to access this program if you have not selected the option: Aged inventory

valuation (Inventory Setup).• You will be unable to access this program if the Prior Year End Dates have not been defined

(Inventory Setup).

Refer to Updating of Aged Valuation Buckets for information on how aged valuation buckets areupdated.

Inventory Initial Aged Valuation

Field Values DescriptionStock code You use this field to indicate the item for which you want to

take on valuation details.

Aged ValuationTake-on

Select this to take on the stock item's year end quantity onhand.


Aged Valuation Take-onThis screen is displayed when you select the Aged Valuation Take-on function.

Field Values DescriptionStock code This indicates the item for which you are maintaining the take

on valuation details.

| Setup | 158


Field Values DescriptionWarehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse for which you want

to take on valuation details.

Quantity on hand This indicates the current quantity of the item in the selectedwarehouse.

Quantity forcurrent year

You use this field to indicate the quantity on hand for thecurrent year.

A negative quantity cannot be entered.

Quantity for yearending

You use these fields to indicate the quantity on hand for thestock item at year end for the previous 5 years.

A negative quantity cannot be entered.

Quantityoutstanding

This indicates the difference between the current warehousequantity on hand and the sum of the quantities on hand foreach of the six years.

Note:You will be unable to save your data if this field doesnot equal zero (i.e. the quantity on hand is equal to thesum of the six yearly buckets - current and five prioryears).

Save Select this to save the changes you made and to return to theprevious screen.

Close Select this to ignore any changes you made and to return tothe previous screen.

Updating of Aged Valuation BucketsAged valuation buckets are updated by the following processing functions:

Field ValuesSales order invoices This decrements the quantity in the oldest bucket

which contains a quantity. If there is insufficientquantity, the bucket is reduced to zero and the nextoldest bucket is reduced by the remainder (if thereis insufficient in this bucket then this is reduced tozero and the next oldest reduced by the remainder,etc). A negative invoice increments the quantity inthe oldest bucket which contains a quantity greaterthan zero.

Sales order credit notes This increments the quantity of the oldest bucketwhich contains a quantity. A negative credit notereduces the quantity in the oldest bucket whichcontains a quantity greater than zero. If there isinsufficient stock in this bucket, then the remainderis taken from the next oldest bucket.

Sales order debit notes This decrements the oldest bucket that contains aquantity (in the same way as an invoice). Negative

| Setup | 159


Field Valuesdebit notes increment the quantity in the oldestbucket that contains a quantity greater than zero.

Sales order IBTs This is treated in the same way as an invoice.A negative IBT is treated in the same way as anegative invoice.

Inventory receipts A positive receipt into stock increments the currentyear's bucket. A negative receipt into stock reducesthe current year's bucket. If there is insufficientstock in this bucket, then the remainder is takenfrom the next youngest bucket.

Inventory Adjustments A positive adjustment of stock increments thequantity in the current year's bucket. A negativeadjustment of stock decrements the quantity in theoldest bucket that contains a quantity greater thanzero.

Inventory issues A positive issue from stock decrements the quantityin the oldest bucket where the quantity is greaterthan zero. If this causes a shortage, then theremainder is taken from the next oldest bucket. Anegative inventory issue increments the quantity inthe oldest non-zero bucket.

Physical quantity adjustment An adjustment that causes the quantity on hand toincrease is treated in the same way as a positiveinventory adjustment. An adjustment causing thequantity on hand to decrease is treated in the sameway as a negative inventory adjustment.

Transfer from this warehouse This is treated in the same way as a positiveinventory issue.

Transfer to this warehouse This is treated in the same way as a positiveinventory receipt.

Purchase order receipt This is treated in the same way as an inventoryreceipt. A negative purchase order receipt is treatedin the same way as a negative inventory receipt.

Backflushing The finished item is treated as a receipt into stockand the components are treated as an issuefrom stock. If there is insufficient stock of thesecomponents to satisfy the demand, then the issuesof lower down components are treated as inventoryissues, and the receipts of these components aretreated as inventory receipts. When processing anegative Backflush, negative issues and negativereceipts occur.

Work in Progress Kit Issues This is treated in the same way as inventory issues.Negative issues are treated as negative inventoryissues.

Issues to Work in Progress This is treated in the same way as issues frominventory. Negative issues are treated in the sameway as negative issues from stock.

| Setup | 160


Field ValuesAccounts Receivable Invoices, credit notes and debit notes are treated

in the same way as if they had occurred in SalesOrders, if the option to update stock is selected.

Stock Take System When a stock take is confirmed and the quantitycounted is greater than the original quantity onhand, a positive inventory adjustment is performed.If the quantity counted is less than the originalquantity on hand then a negative adjustmentis performed. These are treated as inventoryadjustments.

Interface System Stock changes that occur at another branch, andare brought into this company using the Interfacesystem are treated as if they had been keyed intothis company normally.

Inventory Document FormatYou use the Inventory Document Format program to define the page layout for printing your Inventorydocuments for transactions that were created using the Inventory Movements program.

These documents can be used to travel with the inventory items, or for record-keeping to indicate whetheritems are outstanding.

Inventory Document Format

Field Values DescriptionDocument type This enables you to indicate the type of Inventory document for

which you want to configure the print settings.

If you want to copy a document type, then you enter thedocument type you want to create from the copy in this field(i.e. you enter the document type you want to copy to in thisfield).

Stock receipts Select this to define a document format for the receipt of stockitems.

Issues Select this to define a document format for issuing stock items.

Transfers out Select this to define a document format for use whentransferring stock items out of a warehouse (possibly toanother warehouse or branch).

If you selected to use the full Goods in Transit Transfers facility(Inventory Setup - General tab), then this document type isreferred to as the Goods in Transit Reference.


Select this to define a document format for purchase orderreceipts of stock items. This document type is also referredto as a GRN (Goods Received Note) in the Purchase Ordermodule.

Format This indicates the format assigned to the document type.

| Setup | 161


Field Values DescriptionYou can define up to 4 different formats (i.e. 1 to 4) for eachdocument type. This flexibility allows you to configure and printinventory documents according to your own requirements.

The formats defined here are only used for the types ofinventory documents you have specified you want to print(Inventory Setup - Document tab). The Inventory Setupprogram also enables you to indicate whether you want to printyour inventory documents in batch mode using the InventoryDocument Print program or on-line from the InventoryMovements program or both.

Description This enables you to enter a description for the document typeand format you selected.

Print method These options enable you to select the method by which youwant to print the Inventory document for the selected format.

Standarddocument

Select this if you want to print your Inventory document for thisformat using pre-printed stationery.

SRS document Select this if you want to print your Inventory document for thisformat using SRS Document Printing.

Word document Select this if you want to print your Inventory document for thisformat using MS Word.

Refer to Word printing for additional information about printingusing MS Word.

General

Format options These options enable you to indicate which section of thedocument you want to maintain. You select one of the optionsand then use the Change function to define the preferencesand page layouts for your document (see Format Options).

Note:The options available vary according to the type ofInventory document you select to configure as well asthe Print method you select.

Change You use this function to edit the preferences and print positionsfor the various Format options selected for each of theInventory document types (see Format Options).

Heading SectionMessages

You use this function to enter print positions for a Reprintmessage and a Continuation message on the Inventorydocument.

Each message can be 20 characters in length.

Detail SectionMessage

You use this function to enter print positions for a Rejectmessage and a Serial message on the Inventory document.


| Setup | 162


Field Values DescriptionYou can only access the Serial message field if you indicatedthat serial numbers must be printed (Preferences section).

Copy Select this to copy a document type to another format, or toanother document type.

Save Select this to save the details assigned to the document format.

Alignment Select this to print a document using test characters, Thisenables you to verify that the print positions and fields youdefined for the document are correctly aligned.

It is advisable to print the alignment to the printer on which youwill be printing your documents.

Print Select this to print the inventory document format you defined.


Delete Select this to delete the currently selected document type andformat.

Close Select this to exit the program without saving any changes youmade.

If you made changes to the format, then the program promptsyou to save or discard these changes.

Heading Section MessagesYou use the Heading Section Messages function to enter print positions for a reprint message and acontinuation message on the Inventory document.


Field Values DescriptionReprint message

Row You use this field to indicate the row number on which thereprint message must be printed.

Column You use this field to indicate the column number at which thereprint message must be printed.

Message You use this field to indicate the text you want to print for thereprint message.

Continuationmessage

Row You use this field to indicate the row number on which thecontinuation message must be printed.

Column You use this field to indicate the column number at which thecontinuation message must be printed.

Message You use this field to indicate the text you want to print for thecontinuation message.


| Setup | 163


Field Values DescriptionYou save the changes you made to the format at the time ofexiting the program.

Detail Section MessageYou use the Detail Section Message function to enter print positions for a reject message and a serialmessage on the Inventory document.


You can only access the Serial message field if you indicated that serial numbers must be printed(Preferences section).

Field Values DescriptionReject message

Row You use this field to indicate the row number on which thereject message must be printed.

Column You use this field to indicate the column number at which thereject message must be printed.

Message You use this field to indicate the text you want to print for thereject message.

Serial message

Row You use this field to indicate the row number on which theserial message must be printed.

Column You use this field to indicate the column number at which theserial message must be printed.

Message You use this field to indicate the text you want to print for theserial message.


You save the changes you made to the format at the time ofexiting the program.

CopyThe Copy function enables you to copy a document type to another format, or to another document type.

This is useful if you want to define multiple formats for the same document type, with minor differencesin each. Instead of having to re-define the entire document, you can copy the original document toanother format and then apply the required changes to the copied format. Similarly, if you have two similardocument types, you can define the document format for one document type and then copy this documentformat to the other document type. You can then amend the copied document as required.

Document types and formats can also be copied between companies (i.e. from one company to another).

Field Values DescriptionCompany This indicates the company in which you are currently working.

Copy fromdocument type

This indicates the document type you want to use to create thenew document.

| Setup | 164


Field Values DescriptionThe document type you select here is copied to the documenttype you indicated in the Document type field on the previousscreen.

Stock receipts Select this if you want to copy a stock receipt document formatto the new document.

Issues Select this if you want to copy an issues document format tothe new document.

Transfers out Select this if you want to copy a transfers out document formatto the new document.


Select this if you want to copy a purchase order receiptdocument format to the new document.

Format You use this to select the format of the document type youwant to copy. This is only relevant if you have more than oneformat for a single document type.

Change Company Select this if the format you want to copy from is in a differentcompany.

Copy fromcompany

You use this field to indicate a valid company from which youwant to copy a document format.

OK Select this to accept the company id you entered at theprevious prompt.

Cancel Select this to return to the Copy Format screen withoutchanging the company id.

OK Select this to copy the document format you selected to thenew document.

Note:This option does not save the format you copied. Tosave the new format, you must select Save from theInventory Document Format screen.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen without performingthe copy.

AlignmentYou use the Alignment function to print the selected inventory document using test characters to verify thatthe fields you have defined are correctly aligned on your stationery.

It is advisable to print the alignment to the printer on which you will be printing your documents.

Field Values DescriptionPrint testinventorydocumentalignment?

OK Select this to print the test format alignment for the document.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen without printing analignment.

| Setup | 165


Format OptionsThe Format options enable you to maintain each section of the document.

The following Format options are available for Inventory documents when the Print method is Standarddocument:

• Preferences (see Preferences)• Heading section (see Heading Section)• Detail section (see Detail Section)• Total section (see Total Section)

• SRS Options (see SRS Document Print Setup and SRS Document Template)

• MS Word Options (see MS Word Options)• Serial number tracking section (see Serial Number Tracking Section)

When you highlight a section for a Standard document format and select the Change function, the fields forwhich print positions can be defined are displayed.

The following options are used to indicate the print positions for these fields:

Field Values DescriptionClear Row/Column

You use this function to delete the row and column printpositions for the highlighted field.

When you select this function, the print positions for thehighlighted field are set to zero, which means the field is notprinted.

Text Fields The Text Fields function enables you to enter up to 8 lines oftext (30 characters per line) that you want to print at a specificposition on each document.

Change Select this to maintain the row and column print positions forthe highlighted field.

Close Select this to close the current window and return to theprevious window.


Text FieldsThe Text Fields function enables you to enter up to 8 lines of text (30 characters per line) that you want toprint at a specific position on each document.

Field Values DescriptionClear text You use this function to clear the text and print positions for the

highlighted text field.

Change This function enables you to maintain the highlighted text line.

Text This indicates the actual text that must be printed on thedocument.

Row This indicates the vertical position (i.e. Top to bottom) at whichyou want to print the text entered in the Text field.

The row specification for any field cannot exceed 65.

| Setup | 166


Field Values DescriptionColumn This indicates the horizontal position (i.e. Left to right) at which

you want to print the text entered in the Text field.

The column specification for any field cannot exceed 120.

OK Select this to accept the information you entered for the textfield.

Cancel Select this to ignore the information you entered for the textfield and to return to the previous screen.


PositionsYou use the Change function from within each section to maintain the row and column print positions forthe highlighted field in the section.

Field Values DescriptionPositions All measurements are based from the top left hand corner of

the page.

For some fields, only the Row or only the Column may beavailable for you to define.

To assist you in positioning the fields correctly, select the PrintMask for Document Alignment to print a grid of the requiredcolumns and lines. Ensure that the layout mask is output to theprinter on which you will be printing your documents.

Row This indicates the vertical position (i.e. Top to bottom) at whichyou want to print the highlighted field.


Column This indicates the horizontal position (i.e. Left to right) at whichyou want to print the highlighted field.


OK Select this to accept the print positions you entered.

Cancel Select this to ignore the print position you entered and to returnto the previous screen.

PreferencesYou use the Preferences function to define the default page layout for each of the available inventorydocuments.

Note:These preferences are defined separately for each document.

Field Values DescriptionTotal number oflines on a page

You use this field to indicate the number of lines you require onyour inventory document.

The entry made here cannot exceed 99 characters.

| Setup | 167


Field Values DescriptionFirst transactionline starts on line

You use this field to indicate the line number from thebeginning of the page at which the first transaction line must beprinted, within the block of detail line information.


Last transactionline ends on line

You use this field to indicate the line number at which the lasttransaction line must be printed.

This must be from the beginning of the page, within the block ofdetail line information.


Number ofspaces betweentransaction lines

You use this field to indicate the number of blank lines youwant to insert between transaction lines.

An entry of zero indicates no blank lines.

If the entry made at the Transaction line print block size fieldis greater than 1, then this option defines the number of blanklines between each transaction print block.

Transaction lineprint block size

You use this field to indicate the number of lines that arerequired to print all the information associated to onetransaction.

Maximum numberof text lines toprint

You use this field to indicate the maximum number of Technicalspecification, Inspection text or P/Order text lines that you wantto print.

Print date format You use this field to indicate the format in which you want toprint dates on your stationery.

This can be based on your system date format or a userdefined date format (i.e. Short date or long date).

These formats are defined within the System Setup program.

Print options

New page pertransaction

Select this if you want each transaction to be printed as aseparate document.

Note:This option only applies when you print documents inbatch mode. When you print documents online, theneach transaction is treated as a separate document,irrespective of your selection for this option.

If you do not select this option, then numerous transactions canbe printed on one document, according to the following rules:

• Stock receipts - each change of warehouse is a newdocument

• Issues - each change of warehouse is a new document• Transfers out - each change of destination warehouse is a

new document

| Setup | 168


Field Values Description• Purchase order receipts - each change of GRN number or

purchase order number is a new document

Print negativequantities

Select this if you want to be able to print negative quantities onthe document.

This option is not available for Transfers out documents.

Generate nextdocument number

Select this if you want the system to automatically allocate thenext available document number to the document when it isprinted for the first time.

Document numbers are assigned according to the nextdocument number defined against the Document numberingoption on the Numbering tab of the Inventory Setup program.

If you do not select this option, then document numbers are notassigned to your inventory documents.

This option is not available for Purchase order receiptdocuments. For these documents the GRN number is usedas the document number. If the GRN system is not required(Purchase Orders Setup - GRN Tab), then the purchase ordernumber is used as the document number.

Print serialnumbers

Select this if you want to print serial numbers on the document.

You can only access this option if the serial number trackingsystem is required (Inventory Setup - Options tab).

If you select this option, then you must select the SerialNumber Preferences function to define additional preferencesrelated to printing serial numbers.

Use 1000separator invalues and prices

Select this to apply the 1000 separator configured within theCompany Setup program (Options tab) to all numeric values.

Note:If you have not configured a 1000 separator atcompany level, then selecting this option has no effect.

Serial NumberPreferences

Select this to indicate your preferences for the printing serialnumbers on the document. You need to select the preference:Print serial numbers, in order to enable this function.

This is not available when your Print method is set to SRSdocument.


You use the Save function from the Inventory DocumentFormat screen to save these preferences against the documenttype and format.

Serial Number PreferencesYou use the Serial Number Preferences function to indicate your preferences for the printing serialnumbers on the document.

| Setup | 169


The Serial Number Preferences function is not available when your Print method is set to SRS document.To print serial numbers on the document using SRS printing, you need to define a sub-report within theSRS report (see SYSPRO Reporting Services).

Field Values DescriptionNew page perserial number

You use this field to indicate whether you want to print eachserial number on a new page.

The header information is repeated on each page, but thetotals are printed only on the last page.

Serial numbers do not form part of the transaction detail linesand therefore do not print within the transaction print block.

Note:You will be unable to access the Gap from one serial tonext and Number of serial numbers across page fieldsif you select the New page per serial number option.

Gap from oneserial to next

You use this field to indicate the number of characters betweenwhere the first character of the first serial number on the lineprints, and the first character of the second serial number onthe line prints.

For example, if your serial numbers are 10 characters long,then you need to set this field to at least 11 to get one spacebetween each serial number. If you want 2 spaces betweeneach serial number, then set this field to 12.

This option is only relevant if you selected to print more thanone serial number on a single line. (See: Number of serialnumbers across page option below).

Number of serialnumbers acrosspage

You use this field to indicate the number of serial numbers youwant to print on a single line.

If you set this to 1, then each serial number is printed on aseparate line. To save paper, you would most likely want toprint more than one serial number on a single line.

If you set this field to 2 or more, then you need to specify thegap you require between the serial numbers on the line (i.e.the spaces you require between each serial number). This gapis specified in the: Gap from one serial number to next fieldabove.

Note:If this field is set to zero, then serial numbers are notprinted on the document.


You select the Save function from the Inventory DocumentFormat screen to save these preferences against the documenttype and format.

| Setup | 170


Heading SectionIn this section, you define the row and column at which you want to print each of the heading fields on theinventory document.

The row refers to the vertical (top to bottom) position on the document, while the column refers to thehorizontal (left to right) position on the document.

FieldsThe table below indicates the fields that can be printed in the heading section. Not all fields are availablefor all document types (i.e. the fields that are available for printing depend on the document type selected).

Note:Fields that can be printed as barcodes are denoted with the words (with attribute). Refer toBarcode Printing.

Field Origin/Remarks

Document Document number. You use this if you selected thePreference: Generate next document number.

Document (with attribute)

System date document printed System date on which the document was printed.

System time document printed System time at which the document was printed.

Operator Operator who processed the transaction

Operator name OperatorsPage number Page number for document. This is useful if

single documents run to more than one page fortransactions.

Transaction warehouse From Inventory Movements, or Purchase OrderReceipts or Job Issues.

Transaction warehouse name Warehouse name for the transaction warehouseprinted in previous field.

Destination warehouse Inventory Movements.

Destination warehouse name Inventory WarehousesWarehouse delivery address line 1 - 5 Inventory WarehousesWarehouse delivery postal/zip code Inventory WarehousesWarehouse contact Inventory WarehousesWarehouse fax Inventory WarehousesGoods in transit reference Inventory MovementsSource warehouse Inventory MovementsSource warehouse name Inventory WarehousesInter warehouse lead time Warehouse Move MatrixExpected receipt date

Detail SectionYou use this function to define the row and column at which you want to print each of the detail fields onthe inventory document.

| Setup | 171






Stock code Stock code from Inventory Movements, orPurchase Order Receipts or Job Issues.

Stock code (with attribute) Stock code with attributes defined for this field. Youuse the Print Setup program to define attributesagainst specific fields.

Stock description Stock Code MaintenanceStock long description Stock Code MaintenancePurchase order description This prints the description for the item as it appears

on the purchase order detail line. You typicallyuse this field to print the item description if youtend to change the default item description whenprocessing purchase orders (Purchase OrderEntry).

Stocking unit of measure Stock Code MaintenanceProduct class Stock Code MaintenancePositive transaction quantity From Inventory Movements, or Purchase Order

Receipts or Job Issues.

Negative transaction quantity From Inventory Movements, or Purchase OrderReceipts or Job Issues.

Transaction value In local currency from Inventory Movements, orPurchase Order Receipts or Job Issues.

Transaction value (foreign) In foreign currency

Transaction unit cost In local currency. This is the cost that was used inthe warehouse (i.e. the current inventory cost in thewarehouse).

Transaction unit cost (foreign) In foreign currency. This is the cost that was used inthe warehouse (i.e. the current inventory cost in thewarehouse).

Purchase order price In local currency. This is the purchase order receiptunit cost.

Purchase order price (foreign) In foreign currency. This is the purchase orderreceipt unit cost.

Transaction mass From Inventory Movements, or Purchase OrderReceipts or Job Issues.

| Setup | 172



Transaction volume From Inventory Movements, or Purchase OrderReceipts or Job Issues.

Transaction date From Inventory Movements, or Purchase OrderReceipts or Job Issues.

Transfer from warehouse Inventory Movements - Goods in Transit Transfers

Transaction warehouse From Inventory Movements, or Purchase OrderReceipts or Job Issues

Transaction reference From Inventory Movements, or Purchase OrderReceipts or Job Issues

Journal number

Journal notation

Concession number

Ledger code

Bin location For Purchase Order Receipts, this prints the binentered in the Bin location field on the PurchaseOrder Receipt pane in Purchase Order Receiptsprogram.

Bin location (with attribute)

Lot

Lot (with attribute)

Start print line-Technical spec

Start print line-Inspection text

Start print line-P/order text

Start print line-P/order comment

Tariff code

Job Job reference

Job (with attribute) Job reference with attributes defined for thisfield. You use the Print Setup program to defineattributes against specific fields.

Reject code for (-ve) receipts Purchase Order ReceiptsPurchase order line number Purchase Order ReceiptsPurchase order due date Purchase Order Header MaintenancePurchase order line due date Purchase Order Header MaintenancePurchase order original quantity Purchase Order EntryP/O qty outstanding after receipt For Purchase order receipts

Merchandise value In local currency for Purchase order receipts

Merchandise value (foreign) In foreign currency for Purchase order receipts

Non-merchandise value In local currency for Purchase order receipts

Non-merchandise value (foreign) In foreign currency for Purchase order receipts

| Setup | 173



Requisition For Purchase order receipts

Requisition line For Purchase order receipts

Originator of requisition For Purchase order receipts

Dr ledger code (non-stk p/ord) For Purchase order receipts

GRN source code For Purchase order receipts

Supplier's delivery note For Purchase order receipts

Catalogue For Purchase order receipts

Total SectionYou use this function to define the row and column at which you want to print each of the total fields on theinventory document.




Total transaction quantity

Total transaction value In local currency

Total transaction value (foreign) In foreign currency

Total transaction mass

Total transaction volume

Total merchandise value In local currency for Purchase order receipts

Total merchandise value (foreign) In foreign currency for Purchase order receipts

Total non-merchandise value In local currency for Purchase order receipts

Total non-merch value (foreign) In foreign currency for Purchase order receipts

Serial Number Tracking SectionYou use this section to indicate the initial print positions for printing more than one serial number across apage.

This section is only available if all of the following apply:

• you are defining an SRS document or a Word document• you selected the Preference: Print serial numbers• you did not select the New page per serial option from the Serial Number Preferences screen.

The table below indicates the fields that can be printed in this section:


First position of serial number This indicates the column number in which to startprinting the first serial number.

| Setup | 174



First position of batch quantity This indicates the column number in which to startprinting the first batch quantity.

MS Word OptionsAs an alternative to printing your documents on pre-printed stationery, you can configure SYSPRO to allowyou to print your stationery documents using Microsoft Word.

Refer to Word printing for additional information about printing using MS Word.

Design TemplateYou use the Design Template function to open the applicable Word template and insert the fields that youwant to print on your stationery.

Refer to Design Template for additional information.

Inventory Label FormatYou use the Inventory Label Format program to define the page layout for printing your stock code labels.

A label format must be defined before you can use the Inventory Label Print program.

Inventory Label Format

Field Values DescriptionSave Select this to save the information you entered.

Change This function enables you to define and maintain thepreferences and print positions for your Inventory labels.

Alignment Select this to print a label using test characters to verify that thefields you defined are correctly aligned on your stationery.

Print Select this to print the stationery format information you definedand saved for the Inventory labels.


Copy Format Select this to copy an Inventory label format from anothercompany to your current company.

Cancel Select this to exit the program without saving any informationyou entered.

AlignmentYou use the Alignment function to print labels using test characters to verify that the fields you defined arecorrectly aligned on your stationery.

Two sets of labels are printed, enabling you to check whether the information on each label is alignedcorrectly not only on the first label, but also on the subsequent label.

Field Values DescriptionPrint test labelalignment?

| Setup | 175


Field Values DescriptionOK Select this to print the test format alignment.


Copy FormatThe Copy Format function enables you to copy a label format from another company to your currentcompany.

Field Values DescriptionCurrent company This indicates the company in which you are currently working.

This is the company to which the label format will be copied.

Copy fromcompany

You use this field to indicate a valid company from which youwant to copy an Inventory label format.

OK Select this to copy the Inventory label format from the companyyou selected to the current company.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen without copying aformat.

Label PreferencesThe following preferences can be selected when you use highlight the Label preferences line and selectthe Change function:

Field Values DescriptionTotal number oflines on label

You use this field to enter the number of lines you want to printon each label (i.e. The height of a label, including the verticalgap before the next label).

A maximum of 60 lines can be assigned to each label.

Gap from start ofone label to next

You use this field to indicate the number of columns betweenthe start of one label and the start of the next (i.e. The width ofone label, including the gap before the next label).

This gap cannot exceed 66 columns.

Number of labelsto view

You use this field to indicate the number of labels to be printedacross the page.

This must be in the range 1 to 99.

Number of labelsper stock code

You use this field to indicate how many labels you want to printfor a stock code.

You can override the entry made here at the time of printinglabels using the Inventory Label Print program.

Up to 9999 labels can be printed for each stock code.

Print date format This indicates the format in which you want to print dates onyour A/P labels.

| Setup | 176


Field Values DescriptionThe system defaults to using the date format configured forthe company (Company Setup), but you can select to use theShort date format or the Long date format.


Label Detail SectionThe following options are available when you use highlight the Label detail section line and select theChange function:

Within this section, you define the row and column at which you want to print each of the stock code fieldson the label. The row refers to the vertical (top to bottom) position on the label, while the column refers tothe horizontal (left to right) position on the label.




Text Fields The Text Fields function enables you to enter up to five lines oftext (15 characters per line) that you want to print at a specificposition on each supplier label.




Detail Section TextThis screen is displayed when you select the Text Fields function.

You can enter up to five lines of text (15 characters per line) that you want to print at a specific position oneach Inventory label.




Detail SectionText Entry

Text This indicates the actual text that must be printed on theInventory label.

Row This indicates the vertical position (i.e. top to bottom) at whichyou want to print the text entered in the Text field.


| Setup | 177


Field Values DescriptionColumn This indicates the horizontal position (i.e. Left to right) at which

you want to print the text entered in the Text field.


Print attribute The entry made here relates to the attribute that you haveassigned to your printer using the Attribute maintenancefunction (Print Setup).

This option is only available for those fields defined as "withattribute".

OK Select this to accept the information you entered for the textfield.



PositionsYou use the Change function from within the Label detail section to maintain the row and column printpositions for the highlighted field in this section.


the page.


To assist you in positioning the fields correctly, select the PrintMask for Document Alignment to print a grid of the requiredcolumns and lines. Ensure that the layout mask is output to theprinter on which you will be printing your documents.

Row This indicates the vertical position (i.e. Top to bottom) at whichyou want to print the highlighted field.






FieldsThe following table lists the fields you can print in the Label Detail section:

The majority of these fields are defined against each stock item - see Stock Code Maintenance.

| Setup | 178


Field Origin/Comment

Stock code

Stock description

Unit of measure This is the stocking unit of measure

Alternate unit of measure

Other unit of measure

Mass per unit

Supplier

Supplier's name

Product class

Sales tax code

List price code

List price

List price basis

ABC classification

ABC analysis required flag

Alternate stock codes 1-5

Long description

Alternate supplier 1-3

Label print date

Stock code (with attribute)

List price (excluding tax)

List price (including tax)

Tax amount

User defined fields 1-5

Alternate key 1

Alternate key 2

Tariff code

Buyer code

Drawing office no

Volume per unit

Warehouse

Bin location

Price SectionYou use the Price section to define the rows and columns at which you want to print up to four price codesand its associated prices on the label.

| Setup | 179


The row refers to the vertical (top to bottom) position on the label, while the column refers to the horizontal(left to right) position on the label.

Field Values DescriptionClear Price Entry You use this function to delete the row and column print

positions for the highlighted field.


Change This function enables you to define the print positions for thehighlighted field.

Price code to print You use this field to indicate the price code you want to print onthe label.

Price code These fields enable you to indicate the print positions for theprice code.

Row This indicates the vertical position (i.e. Top to bottom) at whichyou want to print the price code field.

The row specification for any field cannot exceed the number oflines defined for the label.

Column This indicates the horizontal position (i.e. Left to right) at whichyou want to print the price code field.


Price These fields enable you to indicate the print positions for theactual price.

Row This indicates the vertical position (i.e. Top to bottom) at whichyou want to print the price field.

The row specification for any field cannot exceed the number oflines defined for the label.

Column This indicates the horizontal position (i.e. Left to right) at whichyou want to print the price field.





Inventory Stock Take Ticket FormatYou use the Inventory Stock Take Ticket Format program to define the page layout for printing yourstock take tickets.

A ticket format must be defined before you can use the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program.

| Setup | 180


Inventory Stock Take Ticket Format

Field Values DescriptionSave Select this to save the information you entered.

Change This function enables you to define and maintain thepreferences and print positions for your Stock Take Tickets.

Alignment This enables you to print a ticket using test characters to verifythat the fields you have defined are correctly aligned on yourstationery.

Print Select this to print the stationery format information you definedand saved for the Stock Take Tickets.


Copy Format Select this to copy a Stock Take Ticket format from anothercompany to your current company.

Cancel Select this to exit the program without saving any informationyou entered.

If you have made any changes to the format, then the programprompts you to save or discard these changes.

AlignmentYou use the Alignment function to print one or more tickets using test characters to verify that the fields youhave defined are correctly aligned on your stationery.

Field Values DescriptionNumber of pagesto print

This enables you to indicate the number of test tickets to print.You can select up to 5 test tickets to print, one after the other.

This enables you to check whether the information on eachticket is aligned correctly not only on the first ticket, but also oneach subsequent ticket.

Print test formatalignment?

OK Select this to print the test format alignment according to yourselection at the previous field.


CopyThe Copy function enables you to copy a Stock Take Ticket format from another company to your currentcompany.

Field Values DescriptionCurrent company This indicates the company in which you are currently working.

This is the company to which the format will be copied.

Copy fromcompany

You use this field to indicate a valid company from which youwant to copy a Stock Take Ticket format.

| Setup | 181


Field Values DescriptionOK Select this to copy the Stock Take Ticket format from the

company you selected to the current company.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen without copying aformat.

Ticket PreferencesYou use the Preferences section to define the default page layout for your stock take tickets.

The following preferences can be selected when you use highlight the Ticket preferences line and selectthe Change function:

Field Values DescriptionTotal number oflines on a ticket

You use this field to enter the number of lines you want to printon each ticket (i.e. The height of a ticket, including the verticalgap before the next ticket).

A maximum of 66 lines can be assigned to each ticket.

Gap from start ofone ticket to next

You use this field to indicate the number of columns betweenthe start of one ticket and the start of the next (i.e. The width ofone ticket, including the gap before the next ticket).

This gap cannot exceed 66 columns.

Number of ticketsto view

You use this field to indicate the number of tickets to be printedacross the page.

This must be in the range 1 to 99.

Number of ticketsper bin

You use this field to indicate how many tickets you want to printfor each bin.

You can override the entry made here at the time of printingtickets using the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program.

Up to 9999 tickets can be printed for each bin.

Number of copiesof each ticket

You use this to define the number of tickets to print for eachstock code.

Print date format This indicates the format in which you want to print dates onyour Stock Take tickets.

The system defaults to using the date format configured forthe company (Company Setup), but you can select to use theShort date format or the Long date format.



| Setup | 182


Ticket Detail SectionYou use this section to define the row and column at which you want to print the required fields on yourStock Take tickets. The row refers to the vertical (top to bottom) position on the ticket, while the columnrefers to the horizontal (left to right) position on the ticket.

When you highlight the Detail section Format option and select the Change function, the fields for whichprint positions can be defined are displayed.

The following options can be used to define/maintain the print positions for these fields:




Text Fields The Text Fields function enables you to enter up to five lines oftext (15 characters per line) that you want to print at a specificposition on each stock take ticket.




Text FieldsThe Text Fields function enables you to enter up to five lines of text (15 characters per line) that you wantto print at a specific position on each stock take ticket.




Detail SectionText Entry

Text This indicates the actual text that must be printed on the StockTake ticket.

Row This indicates the vertical position (i.e. Top to bottom) at whichyou want to print the text entered in the Text field.

The row specification for any field cannot exceed 66. Inaddition, it cannot exceed the number of lines defined for theticket.

Column This indicates the horizontal position (i.e. Left to right) at whichyou want to print the text entered in the Text field.


| Setup | 183


Field Values DescriptionOK Select this to accept the information you entered for the text

field.



PositionsYou use the Change function from within the Detail Section to maintain the row and column print positionsfor the highlighted field in the section.


the page.


To assist you in positioning the fields correctly, select the PrintMask for Document Alignment to print a grid of the requiredcolumns and lines. Ensure that the layout mask is output to theprinter on which you will be printing your Stock Take tickets.

Row This indicates the vertical position (i.e. top to bottom) at whichyou want to print the highlighted field.




OK Select this to accept the print positions you entered. You savethe changes you made to the format at the time of exiting theprogram.


FieldsThe following table lists the fields you can print in the Ticket Detail section:



Stock code

Stock description

Warehouse

Warehouse description

| Setup | 184



Bin location

Product class

Unit of measure

Ticket number

System date

Unit cost

Stock code (2nd position)

Stock description (2nd position)

Ticket number (2nd position)

Stock code (with attribute)

Bin location (with attribute)

Copy number

| Transaction Processing | 185


Transaction Processing

Inventory MovementsYou use the Inventory Movements program to process transactions against your stock items.

These transactions (although unrelated to any sales transaction) do affect the movement of inventorythroughout the company. Sales-related transactions are processed using the Accounts Receivable andSales Order Processing modules.

If a General Ledger account used in this program requires General Ledger analysis (Ledger CodeMaintenance or General Ledger Structure Definition), then the GL Analysis program is displayed whenyou post the transaction, enabling you to enter the analysis details or to select to enter them later (seeGeneral Ledger Integration). General Ledger analysis entries are always distributed in the local currency,irrespective of the currency in which the original transaction is processed.

Inventory Movements



Options

Preferences Select this option to configure default settings that must beused when processing transactions.

Change Period Select this to use the Change Posting Period program toindicate the period to which you want to post the transactionsentered for the current run of the program.

You can post transactions to the Current month, Previousmonth 1 or Previous month 2 providing the access status forthe period is set to open and you selected the option: Stockbalances > Retain last 12 months’ opening stock balances(Inventory Setup - History tab).

Note:• You can only post Adjustments, Bin Transfers and

Expense Issues transactions to a previous postingmonth if you are retaining your last 12 months'opening balances (Inventory Setup - History tab).

Change Date You use this option to indicate the date for which you want toprocess the transactions for the current run of the program.

Note:This facility should be used with caution - seeTransaction Date.

New Select this to add a new transaction.

Transaction type You use this field to select the transaction you want to process.



Field Values DescriptionThis defaults to your selection at the preference: Defaulttransaction type (Preferences).

None of these options can be performed on a stock itemdefined as a Notional part (Stock Code Maintenance -Descriptive tab).

In line with generally accepted accounting principles, anytransaction that could affect the unit cost is only allowed in thecurrent period. Therefore, if you change the processing periodto a previous period using the Change Period option, then onlythe following options are available for posting into a previousperiod:

• Adjustments• Bin Transfers• Expense Issues

Only the transactions to which you have access are available(Operator Maintenance - Security > Activities > InventoryControl).

Receipts Select this option to record the receipt of items into stock fromyour suppliers, usually where a purchase order has not beenraised in advance.

This option is not available if you have been denied access tothe activity: Inventory stock receipts (Operators - Securitytab - Activities).

Adjustments Select this to adjust the on hand quantity of an item eitherpositively or negatively.

This option is not available if you have been denied accessto the activity: Inventory stock adjustments (Operators -Security tab - Activities).

Cost Changes Select this option to change the cost of a stock item.

This option is not available if you have been denied accessto the activity: Inventory stock cost changes (Operators -Security tab - Activities)

Cost Modifications Select this option to adjust the inventory cost of a specificquantity of stock items (e.g. to change the cost of a batchof items received into stock where the cost was incorrectlyentered).

This option is not available if you have been denied accessto the activity: Inventory cost modifications (Operators -Security tab - Activities).

This option is disabled if your company inventory costingmethod is set to FIFO or Standard, or you selected FIFOvaluation (Inventory Setup). If you selected Costing perwarehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab) and you havenot selected FIFO valuation, then the Cost Modificationsoption is enabled, but you will be unable to perform a cost



Field Values Descriptionmodification against a warehouse with a costing methoddefined as Standard (Inventory Warehouses).

Transfers OUT Select this if you want to transfer items out of a sourcewarehouse. These items remain in transit until you record thetransfer into the destination warehouse.

This option is not displayed if you have been denied access tothe activity: GIT transfers In/Out (Operators - Security tab).

Transfers IN Select this if you want to receive items in transit into thedestination warehouse.

This option is not displayed if you have been denied access tothe activity: GIT transfers In/Out (Operators - Security tab).

ImmediateTransfers

Select this if you want to transfer items out of the sourcewarehouse and into the destination warehouse in onetransaction.

You would use this option when the transportation timebetween the warehouses is short; the transfer has alreadybeen completed; or if the destination warehouse does not havethe facility to record the receipt of the transfer.

Note:• If multiple bins are installed (Inventory Setup) and

you are not using the full goods in transit transfersfacility (Inventory Setup), then you must use thisoption to transfer ECC items and/or traceable items.

• Immediate transfers ignore cost multipliers definedagainst the warehouse (see Warehouses for StockCode)

No DestinationTransfers

Select this if you want to transfer stock out of a warehouse,thereby decreasing the stock on hand in that warehouse,specifying a destination warehouse.

You should only use this when you need to write off stockbecause it was damaged whilst in transit. The transaction typeis TRF and the general ledger code defined for transfers atInventory level is used even if the option to select the ledgercode at transaction time is selected.

This transaction should not be required when using the fullgoods in Transit system, as that provides for this type offunctionality.

Physical Counts Select this option to change the quantity of stock on hand to acounted amount.

This option is not available if you have been denied access tothe activity: Inventory physical count (Operators - Securitytab - Activities).

Note:• You will be unable to select Physical Counts if the

following applies:



Field Values Description• multiple bins are in use in the selected

warehouse (Inventory Setup).• the item is traceable (Stock Code

Maintenance).• you selected Previous month 1 or Previous

month 2 from the Change Period menu.

Bin Transfers Select this option to record the transfer of items from one bin toanother.

This option is not available if you have been denied access tothe activity: Inventory bin transfers (Operators - Security tab- Activities).

Expense Issues Select this option to record the issue of items from inventory formiscellaneous purposes.

This option is not available if you have been denied access tothe activity: Inventory expense issues (Operators - Securitytab - Activities).

Backflushing Select this option to record the manufacture of items withoutusing a Work in Progress job.

This option is not available if you have been denied access tothe activity: Inventory backflushing (Operators - Security tab- Activities).

You will be unable to perform this option if the Inventory andWork in Progress modules are not in the same month and year.

A stock item defined as a Co-product (Stock CodeMaintenance - Descriptive tab) can only be backflushed on aroute on which it has its own structure (i.e. the co-product itemis not attached to a notional part).

Print journal Select this to print the Inventory journals created from theposted transactions during the current run of the program.

Once the journals are printed, the system returns you to themain SYSPRO menu.

Alternatively, you can use the Inventory Journal Reportprogram to print the inventory journals.

Post Select this to post the transaction.

Refer to Processing for processing details when using ActualCosting.

PostThis screen is displayed when you select the Post option.

Field Values DescriptionOK to posttransaction?



Field Values DescriptionOK Select this to post the transaction.

If you are processing a Transfer in and you changed thequantity for a serialized or a lot traceable item, then the GITLots and Serials Query/select program is displayed.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen without posting thetransaction.

PreferencesYou use the Preferences option from the Options menu to configure default settings that must be usedwhen processing transactions within the Inventory Movements program.

You can save these preferences against the operator or you can elect to apply them only for the currentrun of the program.

Field Values DescriptionDefaulttransaction type

You use this preference to indicate the default type oftransaction you want to process when processing inventorymovements.

The entry in the Transaction type field defaults to yourselection at this preference. If you do not have access toprocess the preferred transaction type (Operators), thenthe entry in the Transaction type field defaults to the firsttransaction type you are allowed to process.

Clear reference/notation aftereach transaction

Select this if you want to clear any entries made at theReference and Notation fields after each transaction is posted.If you do not select this option then your last entry made atthese fields is retained for the next transaction.

Clear serialnumber field afterentry

Select this if you want to clear the Serial number field of theSerial Entry for Receipts program after each entry whenentering serial numbers for a receipt. The field is cleared whenyou select the Add option.

If you do not select this option, then the previous serial numberyou entered remains displayed in the Serial number field of theSerial Entry for Receipts program.

You would typically select this option if you are using ascanning device to automatically record serial numbers.

Give warningwhen processinga kit receipt

Select this if you want to be warned whenever you process thereceipt of a kit item.

Give informationabout generatedlot

Select this if you want the system to display informationconcerning generated lots.

Warn iftransferring lotswith differentdates

Select this if you want to be able to process a bin transfertransaction when the same lot number is stored in two separatebins but the expiry date against the lot number is different ineach bin.



Field Values DescriptionThis preference is only enabled if the activity: Warn if lot hasdifferent dates is set to allowed against your operator code(Operators - Security tab - Activities).

Give warningabout blankconcessionnumber entered

Select this if you want the system to notify you whenever ablank concession number is assigned to a transaction.

Warn iftransferring binon hold

Select this if you want the system to display a warningmessage when processing a bin transfer, if the From bin or Tobin is on hold. You will be able to accept the warning messageand process the transaction.

If you do not select this preference, then you will be unable toprocess a bin transfer transaction if either the From bin or Tobin is on hold.

Prompt forposting

Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirmwhether you want to post transactions. If you do not select thisoption, then transactions are posted automatically when youselect the Post option.

Backflush level

All Select this if you want the system to default to issuingcomponents from all levels in the bill when using thebackflushing facility.

First Select this if you want to issue components from the first levelof a bill only, when using the backflushing facility.

Exclude comps/ops against abought out part

Select this if you want the system to default to ignoringcomponents and operations held against a bought out item.

Goods in Transittransfer in

You will be unable to access the Goods in Transit transfer infields if the full Goods in Transit transfers facility is not installed(Inventory Setup).

Automatically setline to complete

Select this if you want the Transfer complete option to beselected by default when you process a Transfer IN at thetarget warehouse.

Use defaultwarehouse binlocation

Select this if you want to default to using the bin locationheld against the warehouse assigned to the stock item whenprocessing a transfer in. If you do not select this option, thenyou must specify a bin location to use.

You can enter a different bin when processing the transfer intransaction.

Bin location to use You use this field to enter the default bin location to use ifyou did not select the preference: Use default warehousebin location. You can enter a different bin when processingtheTransfer IN transaction.

Create bin locationif not on file

Select this if you want the system to automatically create thebin location if it does not exist.



Field Values DescriptionNote:Your selection at the option: Allow creation of binswhen processing inventory transactions (InventorySetup) does not apply in this case.

Use stockdescription fromoriginating SCT

Select this if you want to display the stock description enteredwhen the SCT was created using the Sales Order Entryprogram and not the description defined against the stock item(Stock Code Maintenance) when receiving the in the transfer.

If you do not select this preference, then the descriptiondefined against the stock item is always displayed whenreceipting in the transfer, irrespective of whether a differentdescription was entered when using the Sales Order Entryprogram.

Update originatingorder with GITreceipt details

Select this if you want to automatically release a normal salesorder which was placed into back order when you process aGIT receipt.

This only applies if you created a SCT from a normal salesorder which was placed into backorder due to insufficient stock.

Goods in Transittransfer out

Print multiple linesper GIT document

Select this if you want to be able to print one transfers outdocument that contains multiple lines processed against a GITreference for the current run of the program. The documentis printed when you select the Last transfer before printingoption that is displayed when you select to post the transaction.

If you do not select this option, then a separate transfers outdocument is printed for each transaction processed against aGIT reference for the current run of the program.

Note:You will be unable to access the Goods in Transittransfer out fields if the full Goods in Transit transfersfacility is not installed (Inventory Setup)

This facility applies only if you have indicated that yourequire Transfers out documents to be printed on-line(Inventory Setup)

Give warning if lotis on hold

This preference is only enabled if the activity: GIT Transfer oflots on hold is enabled against your operator code.

Select this if you want to be able to allocate lots that are onhold when processing a GIT Transfer Out transaction.

Save Select this to save the preferences you selected against youroperator code.

The preferences are saved until next you change them.



Field Values DescriptionClose Select this to save the preferences you selected for the current

run of the program only.

Transaction DateYou use the Change Date option from the Options menu to set the date that must be used for thetransactions for the current run of the program.

Transaction DateThe transaction date defaults to the current system date, if you selected the option: Set accounting dateto system date (Operator Maintenance). The transaction date is used as the journal start date and theinventory movement date.

For example, if the transaction extends over two days (e.g. the processing of the transaction begins beforemidnight and ends after midnight) then the actual date of posting is used instead of the date on which theprogram was loaded. In this example, the date after midnight is used as the transaction date.

Note:We recommend that you exercise caution when setting the transaction date.

A number of programs provide the facility to change the date that must be used for the transaction.

If you change the transaction date manually, then the entered date is used regardless of the actualdate on which the transaction is posted.

Regardless of the date you enter, however, the transaction is posted to the General Ledger periodthat matches the period of the module at the time the transaction is posted (i.e. posting to theGeneral Ledger is period-driven, not date-driven).

Because reports are date-driven, changes to the transaction date can affect the information that isincluded in the report.

Inventory MovementsThis screen is displayed when you select the Change Date option from the Options menu.

Field Values DescriptionTransaction date

OK Select this to set the transaction date to the date you entered.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen without changingthe transaction date.

ReceiptsYou use the Receipts option to record the receipt of items into stock from your suppliers, usually where apurchase order has not been raised in advance.

If FIFO costing is required for the company or the warehouse into which the receipt is being processed(Inventory Setup), then processing a receipt automatically creates a new FIFO bucket.

Field Values DescriptionTransactiondetails

Warehouse This indicates the warehouse against which you want toprocess the transaction.



Field Values DescriptionNote:If you have configured a default warehouse atoperator or company level, then it is displayed hereautomatically. The operator default takes precedence.

Stock code This indicates the item against which you want to process thetransaction.

Description This indicates the description defined against the stock code(Stock Code Maintenance).

Long description This indicates the long description defined against the stockcode (Stock Code Maintenance). It enables you to verify thatyou entered the correct stock code.

Quantity This indicates the quantity of items that you are receiving intostock. You can specify a negative quantity (i.e. to indicate areversal of a previous receipt) providing there is enough onhand stock available.

If your Costing method is set to Average and you selected theoption: Do not calculate average cost on negative receipt(Inventory Setup - General tab), then the average cost of thestock item is not recalculated when you process a negativereceipt. In this case, the variance between the current averagecost and the cost entered is posted to the Warehouse varianceaccount defined against the warehouse to which the stock itembelongs (see Inventory Warehouses).

If your Costing method is set to FIFO and you selected theoption: Use zero cost bucket for returns (Inventory Setup -Options tab), and you are processing a negative receipt, then ifthe FIFO bucket selected by the program has a zero cost, thereturned quantity is added to the FIFO bucket but no changeis made to the unit cost of the bucket. If the option: Use zerocost bucket for returns is not selected, then a new FIFObucket is created with the returned quantity and the currentwarehouse cost.

If your Costing method is set to FIFO, then when you processa negative receipt and you do not enter a Unit Cost and whenprompted 'Do you want to adjust a specific Bin' you select'No', then the transaction value on the inventory document iscalculated as QTY * unit price from the First FIFO bin.

If you are using FIFO/LIFO costing and you enter a negativequantity, you are given the opportunity to process thetransaction into a specific FIFO/LIFO bucket (see AdjustSpecific Bucket).

Stocking uom This indicates the stocking unit of measure for the stock item.

Revision This field enables you to indicate the specific revision to use ofthe stock item.

You will be unable to change the revision of serialized ECCitems once you have allocated the serial numbers.



Field Values DescriptionThis field is only enabled if the stock item is defined as ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance).

Release This field enables you to indicate the specific release to use ofthe item.

You will be unable to change the release of serialized ECCitems once you have allocated the serial numbers.

This field is only enabled if the stock item is defined as ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance).

Receipt cost This indicates the cost associated with the receipt of the iteminto stock.

Cost uom This indicates the cost unit of measure for the receipt cost.

Cost basis This enables you to indicate the basis for the receipt cost.

Note:The receipt cost is always entered as a Unit cost whenreceipting an item into a warehouse that uses standardcosting.

Unit Select this to indicate that the receipt cost relates to a singleunit of the stock item.

Total Select this to indicate that the receipt cost relates to the totalvalue of items received into stock.

Bin location This indicates the bin location into which the items will bereceived.

You can enter a single bin or assign items to multiple binsusing the Multiple Bins option.

Note:• Items can be assigned to a maximum of 50 bins per

transaction.• You can only access the Bin location field if the

option: Multiple bins is selected (Inventory Setup)and multiple bins are used in the warehouseentered (Inventory Warehouses).

• If you indicated that you require on-line documents(Inventory Setup) then you can only enter a singlebin.

• For a positive receipt, you must specify the binlocation in which you are going to store the item.If the bin already exists, the receipt quantity isadded to the existing quantity in the bin. If thebin does not exist, it is automatically createdproviding the option: Allow creation of bins whenprocessing inventory transactions (InventorySetup - Options tab) is selected. If this option is notselected, you must either enter an existing bin oruse the Inventory Bin Maintenance program tocreate a new bin.



Field Values DescriptionFor a negative receipt, you can only select a singlebin. In addition, you must enter an existing bin asa bin is not automatically created irrespective ofyour selection at the option: Allow creation ofbins when processing inventory transactions(Inventory Setup - Options tab).

Multiple bins This option enables you to enter multiple bins against thereceipt.

You can only select this option if the option: Multiple binsin use (Inventory Warehouses) is selected against thewarehouse for which you are processing the transaction.

This option is not available when processing a negative receipt.For a negative receipt, you can only select a single bin.

Note:• A maximum of 50 multiple bin locations can be

entered per transaction.• This option is not available if you are printing

inventory documents online (Inventory Setup).

The reason is that in online document only a singleline is printed, but if you enter multiple bins, adocument record is created for each bin entered.If you therefore entered more than one bin, thedocument printed would be incorrect.

Lot This indicates the lot to which you want to assign the item.

You will be unable to receipt the item into an expired lot if theactivity: Allow receipts against expired lots is set to Deniedagainst your operator code (Operators - Security tab).

You can only access the Lot field if:

• The item is defined as traceable (Stock Code Maintenance- Tracking tab).

• You have not selected the option: Automatic lotnumbering (Lot Traceability Setup).

• You selected the option: Automatic lot numbering (LotTraceability Setup) and you are processing a negativereceipt.

Note:• If you selected the option: Lot number to be equal

to job number (Lot Traceability Setup) and jobnumbers are defined as numeric (Company Setup -Key Types tab), then the lot number you enter mustbe numeric.

• If you selected the option: Same lot to be usedon multiple stock codes (Lot TraceabilitySetup), then you can reuse the same lot number fordifferent stock codes when processing a receipt.



Field Values DescriptionConcession This indicates the concession number associated with the lot.

A concession number is typically required for traceable stockitems and indicates the customer's acceptance of an item thatdeviates from the original specification, but which is still fit forpurpose.

Note:If you need to record a concession number againsta lot, then ensure that you enter it during the receiptprocess as you will be unable to capture it later.

You can select the preference: Give warning aboutblank concession number entered to display awarning message when you do not enter a concessionnumber.

This field is disabled when processing a negative receipt.

Lot expiry date This indicates the expiry date of the lot.

This field is disabled when processing a negative receipt.

Serial numbers This option enables you to capture manual and batch serialnumbers for any serialized items being received into stockusing the Serial Entry for Receipts program.

Note:A maximum of 1000 serial numbers per receipt can bereceipted against a single stock code.

Use single ABCtype elements

Select this to include pre-production elements in the calculationof costs. These costs are added to the receipt cost entered.Only pre-production elements of cost defined with a calculationmethod of single are applied.

Note:You can select this option only if you have configuredyour Bill of Material options to include activity basedcosting.

Reference This enables you to enter a journal reference that is associatedwith the transaction and which is printed on the InventoryJournal Report.

Notation This enables you to enter a notation associated with thetransaction and which is printed on the Inventory JournalReport.

Non-merchandisedetails

These options enable you to distribute non-merchandise costsrelated to an inventory receipt.

This option is only enabled if:

• the option: Apply cost multiplier when processingreceipts is selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab)



Field Values Description• a cost multiplier greater then one is defined against the

warehouse for the stock item being receipted (Warehousesfor Stock Code)

• the option: Apply cost multiplier is selected (Receiptsscreen)

Apply costmultiplier

Select Yes if you want to apply a cost multiplier to thetransaction. This enables you to indicate what portion of thetransaction value comprises non-merchandise costs (e.g.freight, duty, tax, etc).

Note:• You can only select this option if you have

configured your Inventory Setup options to applya cost multiplier when processing receipts and ifa cost multiplier value greater than 1 has beenassigned to the stock item (Warehouses for StockCode).

• the Last cost of the item only includes the costmultiplier value if you selected the option: Includenon-merchandise costs in last cost (InventorySetup - General tab)

Refer to Cost Multiplier Calculations for additionalinformation.

Cost multiplier This defaults to the cost multiplier defined against thewarehouse for the stock item being receipted (Warehouses forStock Code), but can be changed.

This indicates what portion of the transaction value of the stockitem comprises non-merchandise costs (e.g. freight, duty, tax,etc.).


Enter non-merchandise cost

Select Yes if you want to enter the actual non-merchandisevalue, rather than using the value in the cost multiplier field.

Non-merchandisecost

You use this field to enter the actual non-merchandise amountto apply to the transaction.

This field is only enabled when you selected Yes at the Enternon-merchandise cost field.

Non-merchandisedistribution

Select this option to distribute the non-merchandise costto specific General Ledger codes (see Non-merchandiseDistribution).

G/L Details

Ledger code This indicates the ledger account that will be credited with thereceipt.

Note:



Field Values DescriptionYou can only access this field if Inventory is linkedto the General Ledger and you have configured yourInventory options to request the ledger code for thesetransactions (Ledger Code Options).

Ledger codedescription

This indicates the description defined against the ledger code.

Multiple BinsYou use the Multiple Bins option to distribute the receipt quantity to multiple bins within the warehouseselected.

You can only select the Multiple Bins option if:

• the option: Multiple bins in use (Inventory Warehouses) is selected against the warehouse for whichyou are processing the transaction

• you have not selected to print receipt documents online (Inventory Setup - Documents tab)• you are not processing a negative receipt• you are not printing inventory documents online (Inventory Setup). The reason is that in online

document only a single line is printed, but if you enter multiple bins, a document record is created foreach bin entered. If you therefore entered more than one bin, the document printed would be incorrect.

Note:A maximum of 50 multiple bin locations can be entered per transaction.

Field Values DescriptionDelete Select this to remove the highlighted entry from the list of bins

allocated.

Save and Close Select this to accept the information you entered and to returnto the previous screen.


ApplyUndistributed

Select this to apply the difference between the total receiptquantity and the total of the quantities already allocated to binsto the current bin.

Bin You use this field to enter the bin location to which you want toassign the item.

If the bin does not exist, it is automatically created providingyou are processing a positive receipt and the option: Allowcreation of bins when processing inventory transactions(Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected. If this option isnot selected, you must either enter an existing bin or use theInventory Bin Maintenance program to create a new bin. Binsare not automatically created for negative receipts.

Quantity You use this field to enter the quantity of the item you want toassign to the bin location.

AdjustmentsYou use the Adjustments option to adjust the on hand quantity of an item either positively or negatively.



A positive adjustment quantity increases the item's on hand quantity, while a negative adjustment amountdecreases the item's on hand quantity. This option does not affect the unit cost of the item.



Note:If you have configured a default warehouse atoperator or company level, then it is displayed hereautomatically. The operator default takes precedence.




Quantity This indicates the quantity of the stock item that you want toadjust. You can specify a negative quantity (i.e. to indicate areversal of a previous receipt) providing there is enough onhand stock available.


Stocking uom This indicates the stocking unit of measure for the stock item.







Bin location This indicates the bin location of the item for which you want toadjust quantities.

If you are processing a positive adjustment and the bin doesnot exist, it is automatically created providing the option: Allowcreation of bins when processing inventory transactions



Field Values Description(Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected. If this option isnot selected, you must either enter an existing bin or use theInventory Bin Maintenance program to create a new bin.

If you are processing a negative adjustment, you need to enteran existing bin, as the bin cannot be automatically created.

Note:• You can only access the Bin location field if the

warehouse is configured to use multiple bins(Inventory Warehouses).

Lot This indicates the lot number of the item for which you want toadjust quantities.

Note:You can only access the Lot field if the stock item isdefined as a traceable item (Stock Code Maintenance- Tracking tab).

If you selected the option: Same lot to be used on multiplestock codes (Lot Traceability Setup), then the same lotnumber could be allocated to different stock codes.

Serial Numbers This option enables you to capture manual and batch serialnumbers for any serialized items being received into stockusing the Serial Entry for Receipts program.

You can only adjust an existing serial number (i.e. you willbe unable to create a new serial to which to process anadjustment).

You can only process a positive adjustment against a Manualserialized item if a negative adjustment was previouslyprocessed for the item and the item has not yet been sold.

Note:A maximum of 1000 serial numbers per receipt can bereceipted against a single stock code.



G/L Details

Ledger code This indicates the ledger account to which the adjustmentamount must be posted. If you process a negative adjustment(reduce stock), then this account is debited. If you processa positive adjustment (increase stock) then this account iscredited.

Note:



Field Values DescriptionYou can only access this field if Inventory is linkedto the General Ledger and you have configured yourInventory options to request the ledger code for thesetransactions (Ledger Code Options).



Cost ChangesYou use the Cost Changes option to change the cost of a stock item.

If you selected the setup option: FIFO valuation (Inventory Setup - General tab), then when you selectthe Post option, you are prompted to update either the warehouse cost or a specific FIFO bucket with thenew cost (see FIFO Valuation).







New cost This indicates the new cost for the item based on either the unitcost or the total cost of items held on file.

Cost uom This indicates the costing unit of measure for the item.

Cost basis

Unit Select to indicate that the entered new cost is applicable toeach unit of the item held on hand.

For example: If you enter a new cost of 50, then the unit cost ofeach item on hand is set to 50.

Total Select to indicate that the entered new cost is applicable to thetotal number of items held on hand.

For example: If you enter a new cost of 50 then SYSPROdivides this amount by the quantity of the item on hand andupdates the unit cost of the item accordingly. Rounding errorsare indicated on the Inventory Journal Report.



Field Values DescriptionUpdate last costwith new cost

Select Yes this if you want to update the last cost with the newcost entered.



G/L Details

Ledger code This indicates the ledger account to which the adjustmentamount must be posted. If you reduce the cost value againstthe stock item, then this account is debited. If you increase thecost value against the stock item, then this account is credited.

Note:You can only access this field if Inventory is linkedto the General Ledger and you have configured yourInventory options to request the ledger code for thesetransactions (Ledger Code Options).



FIFO ValuationWhen you process a cost change for an item and you selected the setup option: FIFO valuation(Inventory Setup - General tab), then the following is displayed:

Field Values DescriptionDo you wish toadjust the cost ina specific bin?

This option enables you to update the warehouse cost or theFIFO bucket cost with the cost change.

Note:If you want to update the cost in both the warehouseand the FIFO bucket, then you need to process twotransactions and select Yes for one transaction and Nofor the other (duplicate) transaction.

Yes Select this to use the FIFO/LIFO Bins for Stock Codeprogram to update the cost of a specific FIFO bucket.

Note:The warehouse value is not affected by the value ofthe cost change. No inventory journal is created. AFIFO journal is created, but this does not affect yourinventory valuation or your General Ledger inventorycontrol accounts.

No Select this if you want to update the warehouse cost and notthe FIFO bucket with the cost change. An inventory journalis created for the transaction and your inventory valuation isaffected by the cost change.



Field Values DescriptionYou would select this option if, for example, you receiptedstock into a warehouse at the incorrect cost and now want toadjust the cost of that stock in that warehouse.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen without adjustingeither the warehouse cost or a FIFO bucket.

Cost ModificationsYou use the Cost Modifications option to adjust the inventory cost of a specific quantity of items (e.g.to change the cost of a batch of items received into stock where the cost was incorrectly entered). Thesystem applies the total change of the entered items to the quantity on hand.

You would normally use this option when you wanted to adjust the cost of a specific number of items thatwere received into stock.

Note:You will be unable to process cost modifications if your company inventory costing method is set toFIFO or Standard, or you selected FIFO valuation (Inventory Setup).

If you selected Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab) and you have notselected FIFO valuation, then the Cost Modifications option is enabled, but you will be unableto perform a cost modification against a warehouse with a costing method defined as Standard(Inventory Warehouses).







Quantity This indicates the specific quantity of items for which you wantto modify the costs.

Stocking uom This indicates the stocking unit of measure for the item.

Previous cost This indicates the current unit cost of the item.

Cost uom This indicates the cost unit of measure for the item.

New cost This indicates the new cost you want to assign to the quantityof the item specified.



Field Values DescriptionCost basis

Unit Select to indicate that the entered new cost is applicable toeach unit of the item held on hand.

For example: If you enter a new cost of 50, then the unit cost ofeach item on hand is set to 50.

Total Select to indicate that the entered new cost is applicable to thetotal number of items held on hand.

For example: If you enter a new cost of 50 then SYSPROdivides this amount by the quantity of the item on hand andupdates the unit cost of the item accordingly. Rounding errorsare indicated on the Inventory Journal Report.



G/L Details

Ledger code This indicates the ledger account to which the total value of thecost modification must be posted.




Transfers OUTYou use the Transfers OUT option to transfer a stock item out of a source warehouse.

Stock on hand is decreased at the source warehouse, while stock is placed in transit for the targetwarehouse.

The item remains in transit until you record the transfer into the destination warehouse using the TransfersIN option.

If you selected the option: Use full goods in transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup) then:

• a transfer OUT from a warehouse creates goods in transit records indicating that stock was transferredfrom the source warehouse to the target warehouse. These records include any lots, bins or serialsinvolved in the transfer.

• each goods in transit transfer is identified by a reference number which is generated according to yournumbering method specified within the Inventory Setup options.

• an operator preference allows you to print, on a single document, all goods in transit transfers OUTper reference number. The document is printed when you select the option indicating the last transferbefore printing.



• you can select to append lines to an existing GIT reference number provided that it is for the same runof the program (see Goods in Transit Reference).


Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse out of which theitem must be transferred.

If you have configured a default warehouse at operator level(Operators) or at company level (Company Setup), then itis displayed here automatically. The operator default takesprecedence.

Stock code You use this field to indicate the item you want to transfer.


Long description This indicates the long description defined against the stockcode.

Quantity You use this field to indicate the quantity of the stock item youwant to transfer out of the selected warehouse.

The number of decimals for the quantity is defined against thestock item (Stock Code Maintenance - General tab).

Stocking uom This indicates the stocking unit of measure defined against thestock code.

Revision This enables you to indicate the specific revision of the itemthat you want to transfer.

You will be unable to change the revision of a serialized ECCitem once you have allocated the serial numbers.

This field is only enabled for items defined as ECC controlled(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking tab).

Release This enables you to indicate the specific release of the itemthat you want to transfer.

You will be unable to change the release of a serialized ECCitem once you have allocated the serial numbers.


Bin location You use this field to indicate the bin location of the item beingtransferred.

You must indicate the bin location of the warehouse fromwhich stock is being transferred if that warehouse is defined ashaving multiple bins (Inventory Warehouses).

Note:You can only transfer items from one bin at a time.

For example: If you wanted to record the transfer of100 items from bin ABC in warehouse AA, to bins 123



Field Values Descriptionand 456 in warehouse BB, you would have to recordthe transfer as two transactions.

Lot You use this field to indicate the lot number of a traceable itembeing transferred.

Note:You will be unable to transfer traceable items using theOut (no destination) option.

If you selected the option: Same lot to be used on multiplestock codes (Lot Traceability Setup), then the same lotnumber could have been allocated to different stock codes.

To be able to allocate a lot that is on hold when processing aGIT Transfer OUT transaction, the following must apply:

• The activity: GIT transfer of lots on hold must be set toallowed against your operator code.

• You must select the preference: Give warning if lot is onhold.

Note:Lots on hold cannot be allocated if automaticdepletion is applied (Inventory Setup - Depletiontab).

The hold status of a lot that is transferred betweenwarehouses when you process a GIT Transfer Inis retained (i.e. if the lot Transferred In is On Holdin the source warehouse it is marked as On Hold inthe target warehouse).

New warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse into which the itemmust be transferred (i.e. the destination warehouse).

Serial numbers Select this to use the Serial Entry for Receipts program todefine the serial number(s) of the item you are transferring.

This option is only enabled when serial tracking is requiredfor the item you are transferring (Stock Code Maintenance -Tracking tab).

Reference This is the journal reference that is associated with thetransaction and which is printed on theInventory JournalReport.If you are using the full goods in transit system and you setGoods in transit reference to Manual (Inventory Setup -Numbering tab), then you are prompted to enter a referencewhen you save the transaction.

If the Goods in transit reference option is not set to Manual,then the system generates the reference number.

Notation You use this field to enter a journal notation that is associatedwith the transaction and which is printed on the InventoryJournal Report.



Field Values DescriptionGIT Query Select this to use the Browse on GIT References program to

view details held against goods in transit reference numbers.

This option is only available if you selected the setup option:Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup- General tab).

G/L Details

Ledger code This indicates the General Ledger account that will be debitedwith the transfer value for transfers out and credited with thetransfer value for transfers in.

This ledger account would typically be the clearing account forstock transfers.




Goods in Transit ReferenceIf you selected the option: Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup - General tab),then when you process more than one goods in transit Transfer OUT to the same warehouse during thesame run of the program, the following options are displayed when you select the Post option:

Field Values DescriptionAppend toexisting reference

Select this if you want to add the details of the current transferOut transaction to an existing goods in transit transfer outreference for the same warehouses.

If you do not select this option, then a new goods in transitreference is created for the current transfer out transaction.

Goods in transitreference

You use this field to enter a reference number for the goods intransit document for the current transaction.

This field is only enabled if you selected to number goods intransit references manually (Inventory Setup - Numberingtab).

Last transferbefore printing

This option is only enabled when you select the Preference:Print multiple lines per GIT document. The preferenceenables you to print one transfers out document that containsmultiple lines processed against a GIT reference for the currentrun of the program.

You select this option to indicate that the current transfer outtransaction is the last transaction you are processing for thewarehouse combination during the current run of the programand that you want to generate the transfer document.



Field Values DescriptionPrint multiplelines per GITdocument

Select this if you want to be able to print one transfers outdocument that contains multiple lines processed against a GITreference for the current run of the program. The documentis printed when you select the Last transfer before printingoption that is displayed when you select to post the transaction.

If you do not select this option, then a separate transfers outdocument is printed for each transaction processed against aGIT reference for the current run of the program.

Note:You will be unable to access the Goods in Transittransfer out fields if the full Goods in Transit transfersfacility is not installed (Inventory Setup).

This facility applies only if you have indicated that yourequire Transfers out documents to be printed on-line(Inventory Setup).

GIT Query You use this option to view details held against goods in transitreference numbers using the Browse on GIT Referencesprogram.

Post Select this to process the transaction and optionally print aninventory transfer document using the Inventory DocumentPrint program.


Transfers INYou use the Transfers IN option to record that items in transit are being received into the destinationwarehouse.

The Transfers IN facility varies depending on whether or not you are using the full good in transit facility(Inventory Setup - General tab).

The following fields are displayed in the Transfers IN pane if you have NOT selected the option: Use fullGoods in Transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup - General tab):


Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse into which the itemmust be transferred (i.e. the destination warehouse).


Stock code You use this field to indicate the item you want to transfer in.

The item must currently be in transit.




Field Values DescriptionLong description This indicates the long description defined against the stock

code.

Quantity You use this field to indicate the quantity of the stock item youwant to transfer into the selected warehouse.










You must indicate the bin location of the warehouse into whichstock is being transferred if that warehouse is defined ashaving multiple bins (Inventory Warehouses).

You will only be able to supply a bin that does not exist if theoption: Allow creation of bins when processing inventorytransactions is selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab) andthe transfer quantity is positive.

Note:You can only transfer items from one bin at a time. Forexample: If you wanted to record the transfer of 100items from bin ABC in warehouse AA, to bins 123 and456 in warehouse BB, you would have to record thetransfer as two transactions.



Note:The hold status of a lot that is transferred betweenwarehouses when you process a Transfer IN is



Field Values Descriptionretained (i.e. if the lot transferred out is On Hold inthe source warehouse it is marked as On Hold in thedestination warehouse.

Serial numbers Select this to use the Serial Entry for Receipts program todefine the serial number(s) of the item you are transferring in.

This option is only enabled when serial tracking is required forthe item you are transferring in (Stock Code Maintenance -Tracking tab).

Reference This indicates the journal reference that is associated withthe transaction and which is printed on theInventory JournalReport.


G/L details






Transfers IN (GIT)If you selected the option: Use full goods in transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup) then you need toselect the GIT transfers to process from a review of outstanding transfers.

The record of outstanding transfers controls the transfer in process.

You can select to receipt the total quantities transferred, or you can change the receipt quantity to effect apartial receipt.

For a partial receipt, the transfer line can be completed by updating the source warehouse with thedifference in stock quantity and posting an adjustment transaction, or by writing off the stock and postingan expense transaction.

If the target warehouse is defined as transfer supplied (Inventory Warehouses) then the systemestablishes whether any lead time and/or cost multiplier exists between the two warehouses. Leadtime and/or cost multiplier entries defined against a specific stock code/warehouse combination takeprecedence. If these entries are not defined at stock code level, then the program uses entries defined atwarehouse level (Warehouse Move Matrix). If entries are not located in the matrix then a lead time of zero(0) and a cost multiplier of one (1) is used.



Each goods in transit transfer is identified by a reference number which is generated according to yournumbering method specified within the Inventory Setup options.

If you selected the Preference: Update originating order with GIT receipt details and the stock item waslinked to a sales order using the Back Order Review program, then the backorder quantity is moved to theshipped quantity field on the sales order when the supply chain transfer is transferred in.

When you process a Transfer In for an SCT created in the Sales Order Entry program and you are usingthe EC VAT system (Tax Options), an EC VAT arrivals recorded if the source warehouse belongs to anEC VAT company (i.e. when an SCT transfer is transacted from an EC warehouse to a local warehousewithin the EU). Note that this only applies to SCTs and not to normal warehouse GITs in.

Normal Transfer journals are created.

Warehouse Transfers InThe following options enable you to select the transfer references you want to display in the review:

Field Values DescriptionStart Review Select this to review the selected transactions.


GIT transferselection

Warehouse This indicates the warehouse for which you want to review thetransfers in.


Transfer typeselection

Inventory Select this if you want to review warehouse transfers.

Supply chain Select this if you want to review supply chain transfers.

GIT references

GIT referenceselection

This enables you to indicate the goods in transit referencenumbers you want to include in the review.

Sourcewarehouses

Source warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the source warehouse(s) you wantto include in the review.

Stock codes

Stock codeselection

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) you want toinclude in the review.

Creation dates

Creation dateselection

This enables you to indicate the creation date(s) you want toinclude in the review.

Due dates

Due date selection This enables you to indicate the due date(s) you want toinclude in the review.



Field Values DescriptionProduct class


This enables you to indicate the product class(es) you want toinclude in the review.

Selection Filtering OptionsThe following options enable you to specify which items from a selection you want to include:


Field Values DescriptionAll Select this to include all the items from the selection.

Range Select this to indicate a range of items from the selection toinclude.


Single Select this to indicate a single item from the selection toinclude.


From You use this field to enter the first item in the range of theselected item to include.

If you indicated that you want to include only a single itemfrom the selection, then you use this field to enter that item.This applies where no field is displayed in which to specify thesingle item.

To You use this field to enter the last item in the range of theselected item to include.


Transfers in for Warehouse ListviewWhen you select the Start Review option, the transactions you selected are displayed in a listview.

Note:GIT transactions which are flagged as being 'In process' are not included in the listview.

If you experienced a problem whilst processing a GIT transfer, you can run the Balance function ofthe Inventory Period End program and select the option: Balance goods in transit to clear the 'inprocess' flag. The GITs will then be displayed in the listview.

The following information is included in the listview:

• Selected

You use this column to select/deselect the GIT references you want to include/exclude as part of thetransfer.

The number of lines you selected to process are displayed at the bottom of the listview.

You can typically use your right mouse button from anywhere in the listview pane to select one of thefollowing options:



• Change Quantity

Select this to change the receipt quantity to effect a partial receipt (see Change Quantity for Line).• Select All Lines

Select this to mark all lines displayed as selected.

You select this option if you want to transfer all displayed lines into the selected warehouse.• Deselect All Lines

Select this to deselect all lines displayed.

You typically select this option if you previously selected all lines, but now only want to include a fewlines in the Transfers IN transaction.

• Reference

This indicates the journal reference number associated with the transaction.• Stock code (see Inventory Query)• Description

This indicates the description for the stock code.• Type

This indicates whether the line is an inventory or a supply chain transfer.• Source

This indicates the warehouse from which the item is being transferred.• Qty transferred

This indicates the quantity which was transferred out of the source warehouse.• Qty received

This indicates the quantity transferred in to the destination warehouse to date.• Qty outstanding

This indicates the difference between the quantity transferred and the quantity received.• Uom

This indicates the unit of measure for the transfer.• Due date• Creation date

This indicates the date on which the transfer out was created.• Product class

This indicates the product class to use for the transaction.• Line• Extracted

Change Quantity for LineThe following options are displayed when you select the Change quantity option from the Line Detailspane or you use your mouse button to select the Change Quantity option from within the listview:

Field Values DescriptionAccept and Close Select this to accept the information you entered and to return

to the previous screen.

If you changed the quantity for a serialized or a lot traceableitem, then when you select the Post option from the mainInventory Movements screen, the GIT Lots and SerialsQuery/select program is displayed. The GIT Lots and Serials



Field Values DescriptionQuery/select program is not displayed when you receipt in thefull quantity.


Quantity changedetails

Warehouse This displays the warehouse into which the item must betransferred.

Source warehouse This displays the warehouse from which the item wastransferred.

Stock code This displays the stock code for which you are changing thequantity.


Long description This indicates the long description defined against the stockcode (Stock Code Maintenance).

Quantityoutstanding

This displays the quantity still outstanding against the transferin (i.e. the quantity of the item which is currently in transit).

If you have not processed any transfers in, then this fielddisplays the quantity originally transferred out from the sourcewarehouse. If you have processed partial receipts for the item,then this field displays the difference between the quantityoriginally transferred out and the quantity already transferredin.

Quantity You use this field to enter the quantity you want to transfer in.

You will be unable to process an over receipt into the targetwarehouse and adjust the quantity in the source warehouse ifthis would cause a negative quantity in the source warehouseand the option: Stock on hand allowed to go negative is setto No for the source warehouse (Inventory Setup - Generaltab).

If you have been denied access to the operator activity: GITunder-receipt of GIT transfers (Operators - Security -Activities), then you will be unable to mark the transactionas complete if the receipt quantity is less than the quantityoutstanding.

Similarly, if you have been denied access to the operatoractivity: GIT over-receipt of GIT transfers (Operators -Security - Activities), then you will be unable to mark thetransaction as complete if the receipt quantity is more than thequantity outstanding.

Bin location You use this field to specify a single bin the location into whichthe stock must be receipted in the target warehouse. This isrequired if the warehouse into which you have transferred



Field Values Descriptionthe item is defined as having multiple bins (InventoryWarehouses).

You can only transfer items from one bin at a time. Forexample: If you wanted to record the transfer of 100 items frombin ABC in warehouse AA, to bins 123 and 456 in warehouseBB, you would have to record the transfer as two transactions.

If the Preference: Use default warehouse bin locationis selected, then the bin defined against the stock code'swarehouse is the default bin location, but this can beoverwritten. If you this preference is not selected, then youmust supply a bin location to be used by default. Again, thiscan be overwritten when processing the transfer in transaction.The bin you ultimately supply must exist unless the Preference:Create bin location if not on file is selected.

Note:Your selection at the option: Allow creation of binswhen processing inventory transactions (InventorySetup) does not apply in this case.

Notation You use this field to enter a narration relevant to the quantitychange.

Transfer complete You use this option to indicate whether or not the transfer iscomplete.

If you receipt the total quantity outstanding then the transferis marked as complete. The in transit quantity for the targetwarehouse is reduced and the on hand quantity is increased bythe receipt quantity.

If you have been denied access to the operator activities:Inventory stock adjustments and Inventory expense issues(Operators - Security tab - Activities), then you will be unableto access this field.

Action back tosource

These options are only available if you process a partial receiptand you select the option: Transfer complete (i.e. the quantitytransferred in to the destination warehouse is less than thequantity transferred out of the source warehouse.

Because the transfer is marked as complete, you will nottransfer additional quantities in to the destination warehouse forthis transaction. These options enable you to specify what todo with the balance of the quantity you have not transferred into the destination warehouse.

Source transaction

Adjustment Select this if you want to transfer the balance of the quantitynot transferred in to the destination warehouse back in to thesource warehouse.

Expense issue Select this if you want to expense the balance of the quantity.Inventory is reduced by the balance of the quantity and itsvalue.



Field Values DescriptionYou would typically expense the balance of the quantity if theitems were damaged in transit and the cost of returning them tothe source warehouse exceeds their value or if the items weresent to the destination warehouse to be used as samples.

Ledger code You use this field to enter the General Ledger code to whichthe expense issue amount must be debited.

This field is only enabled if you selected the option: Expenseissue.



Transfer IN Cost MultiplierThe following options are displayed if a transfer cost multiplier is defined for transfers between thewarehouses you are processing (see Warehouse Move Matrix).

Field Values DescriptionProcessing The following fields are displayed for information purposes:

Reference This indicates the GIT reference you are processing.

Line This indicates the line number on the GIT you are processing.

Stock code This indicates the stock code you are transferring in.

Source warehouse This indicates the warehouse that initiated the transfer.

Apply transfercost multiplier

Select this if you want to apply the transfer cost multiplier to theselected line transfer.

Transfer costmultiplier

This defaults to the transfer multiplier defined in the warehousemove matrix for transfers between the selected source andtarget warehouses (see Warehouse Move Matrix), but can bechanged.


Select Yes if you want to change the transfer cost calculatedby the system.

If you select this option then you can override the default costdisplayed in the Non-merchandise cost field.

Non-merchandisecost

This indicates the transfer cost amount to be processed againstthe item.

Non-merchandise costs are only included in the Last cost ofthe item if you selected the option: Include non-merchandisecosts in last cost (Inventory Setup - General tab).


Save Select this to proceed to the non-merchandise distributionscreen.

Skip Item Select this if you do not want to process any transfer amountagainst this item.



Non-merchandise DistributionThis screen is displayed when you select to apply a transfer cost multiplier.

This enables you to process the transfer costs to the appropriate general ledger code(s).

You will be unable to process the transfer amount(s) to the selected ledger code(s) until the distributionamount is zero.

Refer to Cost Multiplier Calculations for additional information.

Field Value Description

Delete Select this to delete thedistribution line currentlyhighlighted in the listview.

Save and Close Select this to save the informationand to return to the previousscreen.

Close Select tis to return to the previousscreen.

Apply Undistributed Select this to apply theundistributed value to theAmount field of the currentlyhighlighted line.

Reference This indicates the GIT referenceagainst which the transfer costmust be processed.

Ledger code This indicates the ledger code towhich the transfer cost must beprocessed.

This defaults to the ledgercode defined against the GITwarehouse in the GIT warehousematrix (see GIT Receipt withApportionment), but can bechanged.

Amount This field indicates the transferamount to be processed to thisledger code.

Line DetailsThe details displayed in this pane relate to the Goods in Transit line currently highlighted in the listview.

The following information is included in this pane:

• Header Details

• GIT reference (see Browse on GIT References)• Date• Operator

This indicates the code of the SYSPRO operator who processed the Transfer OUT.• Transfer type

This indicates whether the line is an inventory warehouse or a supply chain transfer.



• Source warehouse

This indicates the warehouse from which the item was transferred.• Target warehouse

This indicates the warehouse into which the item must be transferred.• Line Details

• Document• Line completed• Stock code• Revision• Release• Due date• Product class• Stocking uom• Original quantity

This indicates the quantity of the item which was originally transferred out of the source warehouse.• Received quantity

This indicates the quantity of the item currently received into the destination warehouse.• Outstanding quantity

This indicates the quantity of the item currently still in transit (i.e. transferred out of the sourcewarehouse, but not yet transferred into the destination warehouse).

• Original value• Received value• Outstanding value• Change quantity

Select this to change the receipt quantity to effect a partial receipt (see Change Quantity for Line).• Lot/Serials (see GIT Lots and Serials Query/select)• FIFO/LIFO buckets (see Inventory Query of LIFO/FIFO Bins)• Transactions (see GIT Transactions)

Immediate TransfersYou use the Immediate Transfers option to transfer items out of the source warehouse and into thedestination warehouse in one transaction.

You would use this option when the transportation time between the warehouses is short; the transfer hasalready been completed; or if the destination warehouse does not have the facility to record the receipt ofthe transfer.

During immediate transfers, the 'date of last cost change' is updated to the transaction date only if there isa cost difference in the receiving warehouse.

Note:• If multiple bins is installed (Inventory Setup) and you are not using the full goods in transit

transfer facility (Inventory Setup) then you must use this option to transfer ECC items and/ortraceable items.

• Immediate transfers ignore cost multipliers defined against the warehouse (see Warehouses forStock Code).




Field Values DescriptionWarehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse out of which the

item must be transferred.














Bin location You use this field to indicate the bin location in the sourcewarehouse from which the item is being transferred.

This is required if the source warehouse is defined as havingmultiple bins (Inventory Warehouses).


Note:You can only transfer items from one bin at a time.

For example: If you wanted to record the transfer of100 items from bin ABC in warehouse AA, to bins 123



Field Values Descriptionand 456 in warehouse BB, you would have to recordthe transfer as two transactions.



To be able to allocate a lot that is on hold when processing aTransfer Out transaction, the following must apply:

• The activity: GIT transfer of lots on hold must be set toallowed against your operator code.

• You must select the preference: Give warning if lot is onhold.

Note:Lots on hold cannot be allocated if automaticdepletion is applied (Inventory Setup - Depletiontab).

The hold status of a lot that is transferred betweenwarehouses when you process a GIT Transfer Inis retained (i.e. if the lot Transferred In is On Holdin the source warehouse it is marked as On Hold inthe target warehouse).

New warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse into which the itemmust be transferred (i.e. the destination warehouse).

New bin location You use this field to indicate the bin into which the item mustbe transferred in the destination warehouse.

This is required if the destination warehouse is defined ashaving multiple bins (Inventory Warehouses).




Reference You use this field to enter a journal reference that is associatedwith the transaction and which is printed on theInventoryJournal Report.




Field Values DescriptionGIT Query Select this to use the Browse on GIT References program to

view details held against goods in transit reference numbers.


G/L Details






No Destination TransfersYou use the No Destination Transfers option to transfer stock out of a source warehouse, withoutspecifying the destination warehouse details for the item(s) being transferred. This decreases the stockheld in the source warehouse.

This can be used to record stock shrinkage, breakage, theft, etc.

Note:You cannot use this option for items defined as traceable (Stock Code Maintenance).


Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse out of which theitem must be transferred.








Field Values DescriptionThe number of decimals for the quantity is defined against thestock item (Stock Code Maintenance - General tab).









You must indicate the bin location of the warehouse fromwhich stock is being transferred if that warehouse is defined ashaving multiple bins (Inventory Warehouses).




Reference You use this field to enter a journal reference that is associatedwith the transaction and which is printed on theInventoryJournal Report.


GIT Query Select this to use the Browse on GIT References program toview details held against goods in transit reference numbers.


G/L Details



Field Values DescriptionLedger code This indicates the General Ledger account that will be debited

with the transfer value for transfers out and credited with thetransfer value for transfers in.





Physical CountsYou use the Physical Counts option to change the quantity of stock on hand to a counted amount.

The system replaces the quantity on hand with the new quantity counted. Any variance is recorded in themovement file as a stock adjustment.

Note:• You will be unable to select Physical Counts if the following applies:

• the selected warehouse is configured for multiple bins (Inventory Setup).

In that case, you must use the Stock Take System to record any physical changes.• the item is traceable (Stock Code Maintenance).• you selected Previous month 1 or Previous month 2 from the Change Period menu.

If you need to adjust the stock on hand position for a previous month, you must use theAdjustments option.



If you defined a default warehouse at operator or companylevel, then it is displayed here automatically. The operatordefault takes precedence.

Note:Multiple bins cannot be in use in this warehouse(Inventory Setup).






code (Stock Code Maintenance). It enables you to verify thatyou entered the correct stock code.

Quantity This indicates the number of items on hand that you havecounted.

The system replaces the quantity on hand with the newquantity entered. Any variance is recorded in the InventoryMovement file as a stock adjustment.


Bin location You use this field to indicate the bin location in which the itemwas counted.



G/L Details

Ledger code This indicates the ledger account to which the stock countadjustment value is posted. If the stock quantity is reducedthen this account is debited. If stock quantity is increased, thenthis account is credited.




Bin TransfersYou use the Bin Transfers option to record the transfer of items from one bin to another.

Note:• You will be unable to process bin transfers if you have not indicated that multiple bins is required

(Inventory Setup).• The system does not view bin transfers as an inventory movement. Therefore, unless you

selected the option: Record movements for bin transfers (Inventory Setup - Options tab),details are recorded only in the journal file (i.e. details are not recorded in the movement file).

• You will be prevented from processing a bin transfer transaction when either the From bin orTo bin is on hold unless you selected the Preference: Warn if transferring bin on hold. In thatcase, a warning message is displayed if a bin is on hold, but you can elect to continue with thetransfer.









Quantity This indicates the quantity of items you want to transferbetween bins.

Note:You will be unable to post a bin transfer transaction ifthis will cause the bin quantity to go negative and stockis not permitted to go negative (Inventory Setup).








From bin This indicates the bin from which you want to transfer items.This bin must already exist on file.

Lot This indicates the lot number of the stock item that is beingtransferred.




Field Values DescriptionNote:The Lot field is displayed only if the item beingtransferred is defined as a traceable item (Stock CodeMaintenance).

If you want to process a bin transfer when the samelot number is stored in two separate bins, but theexpiry date against the lot number is different in eachbin, then you must select the preference: Warn iftransferring lots with different dates. If this optionis not selected, then you will be unable to process thetransfer.

To bin This indicates the bin to which you want to transfer items.

If the bin does not exist, it is automatically created providing theoption: Allow creation of bins when processing inventorytransactions (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected. Ifthis option is not selected, you must either enter an existing binor use the Inventory Bin Maintenance program to create anew bin.



Expense IssuesYou use the Expense Issues option to record the issue of items from inventory for miscellaneouspurposes.

The quantity entered is subtracted from the quantity on hand and costed at the current inventory cost.









code (Stock Code Maintenance). It enables you to verify thatyou entered the correct stock code.

Quantity This indicates the quantity of items that you want to issue as anexpense transaction.

If you enter a negative issue quantity (to reverse a previouslyissued amount) the negative issue quantity is valued at thecurrent warehouse cost and not at the original issue cost.









Bin location This indicates the bin from which you want to issue the item asan expense transaction.

For a positive issue, you must indicate the bin from which youare going to issue the quantity of the item. You will only be ableto supply a bin that does not exist if the option: Allow creationof bins when processing inventory transactions (InventorySetup - Options tab) is selected and stock is allowed to gonegative in the warehouse. This is not applicable to traceable,ECC controlled or serialized items as these may never gonegative.

For a negative issue, if the bin does not exist, it is notautomatically created, so you must either enter an existing binor use the Inventory Bin Maintenance program to create anew bin.

Lot You use this field to enter the lot number from which the itembeing issued as an expense transaction must be taken.

You can only access this field if the item is defined as traceable(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking tab).



Field Values DescriptionIf you selected the option: Same lot to be used on multiplestock codes (Lot Traceability Setup), then the same lotnumber can be used for different stock codes.

Serial Numbers This option enables you to use the Serial Entry for Receiptsprogram to capture manual and batch serial numbers for anyserialized items being processed.

Note:A maximum of 1000 serial numbers per transaction canbe processed against a single stock code.



G/L Details

Ledger code This indicates the ledger account that will be debited with thevalue of the expense issue. This ledger code would typically beof an expense account type.




Adjust Specific BucketThis screen is displayed when you process a negative expense issue, a negative receipt or a negativeadjustment (i.e. you enter a negative value in the Quantity field) and you are using FIFO or LIFO costingat company level (Inventory Setup) or you are using FIFO costing in the specific warehouse in which thetransaction is being processed (Warehouse Maintenance).

Field Values DescriptionDo you wishto adjust thequantity in aspecific bucket?

Yes Select this to use the FIFO/LIFO Bins for Stock Codeprogram to select the FIFO/LIFO bucket into which the quantitymust be reversed.

This enables you to reverse the issue in the FIFO/LIFO bucketfrom which it was issued.

No Select this if you do not want to specify a specif FIFO/LIFObucket for the reversal.



Field Values DescriptionIf you select this option, then the latest FIFO/LIFO bucket isupdated by default.


BackflushingYou use the Backflushing option to record the manufacture of items without using a Work in Progress job.

The system uses the manufactured item's bill of materials (see Structures and Routings) to determinethe material and labor charges to be included.

Backflushing enables you, in one process, to issue the materials from inventory, apply standard laborcosts, and receive the finished good back into stock. This option is particularly relevant in situationswhere the benefits derived from creating a job to track the activity on the job floor do not justify the cost ofprocessing all the data normally required for a job.

By default, components are issued from the warehouse to use defined against the Bill of Material structure(Structures and Routings).

Before performing the Backflushing transactions, you need to indicate which warehouse you want to issuethe components from when backflushing and the level of backflushing you require.

Note:Backflushing does not support Manufacturing Units of Measure. Backflushing always uses thestocking unit of measure.

Field Values DescriptionWarehouse forComponents

Issue from'warehouse to use'

Select this if you want the system to issue the componentsfrom the warehouse to use assigned to the component (StockCode Maintenance - Descriptive tab).

If you do not select this option, then you can use the field todefine the warehouse from which the component must beissued when backflushing.

Note:• If you select this option, then you must select

the option: Ignore warehouses defined onstructure record. If you select only the option:Issue from 'warehouse to use' and a warehouseis defined against the bill of materials structure forthe component (Structures and Routings), thenthat warehouse is used.

• If you have defined a floorstock warehouse (WIPSetup) then this warehouse is used only if youselect this option.

Warehouse toissue from

You use this field to indicate the specific warehouse from whichyou require components to be issued.

If you selected the option: Multiple binsin use against thewarehouse (Inventory Warehouses), then the componentsare issued from the default bin location defined against thespecific warehouse (Warehouses for Stock Code) you enter



Field Values Descriptionhere. If insufficient stock is available in that bin, a message isdisplayed. If stock is available in other bins, then you need toperform a Bin Transfer to transfer the available stock to thedefault bin defined against the warehouse to issue from.

Note:• If you enter a warehouse to issue from, then

you must select the option: Ignore warehousesdefined on structure record. If you do not selectthe option: Ignore warehouses defined onstructure record and a warehouse is definedagainst the bill of materials structure for thecomponent (Structures and Routings), then thatwarehouse is used.

Ignore warehousesdefined onstructure record

Select this if you do not want to issue the components from thewarehouse to use defined against the bill of materials structurefor the component (Structures and Routings).

If you do not select this option, then the components are issuedfrom the warehouse to use defined against the bill of materialsstructure for the component (Structures and Routings),irrespective of any other Warehouse for components optionsyou selected.

Backflush level

All Select this to process all levels in the bill of material.

First Select this to issue components only from the first level of thebill of material, regardless of the number of levels in the bill.

Exclude comps/ops against abought out part

Select this option to ignore components and operations heldagainst a bought out item.

Depending on your manufacturing process, you may requirebought out items to be made in, in which case you could assigncomponents and/or operations to the bought out item.

This option enables you to indicate whether you want toprocess these components and operations at the time ofbackflushing.

Note:If you select this option and you have stock on handfor the bought out parent item, it will not backflush thecomponents attached to the bought out item.

OK Select this to accept the information you entered and toproceed to the next screen to define the options you require forthe receipting of the finished item into stock.

Cancel Select this to ignore any selections you made and return to theprevious screen.

BackflushingWhen you post a backflushing transaction:



• The cost is calculated using the materials and labor issued for the backflush.• For labor postings to be generated, the Work in Progress module must be installed. If the Work in

Progress module is not installed, then the value of operations (both subcontract and internal) isaccumulated, together with material costs to calculate the transaction value for the receipt of the parentitem. This is the value posted against the receipt journal against the parent item. However, becauseWIP is not installed, no contra entry (issue journal) for labor can be posted for the operations as thelabor journal is not created and the work center efficiency files are not updated.

If the Work in Progress module is installed, then labor journals are created within the Work in Progresssystem if any operations are held against the parent item being backflushed.

• If you are using AB Costing, then when performing a multi-level backflush, the system only issues ABCelements against the parent part or the final part not the components. Therefore the ABC elementsneed to be associated with bringing the element into stock. The system assumes that the cost of thecomponent item has the relative ABC elements against it and does not recalculate it when the parentpart is brought back into stock. When a backflush is performed, the system looks at the componentrequirements based on the sub-assembly requirements and then issues the required componentsbased on this. It does not first carry out the sub-assembly issue and then the parent part issue.Therefore if there are any ABC Elements attached to the sub-assembly these will not be issued whenbackflushing is carried out.

• Inventory journals are created for each material issue.• If a by-product is included as a negative material allocation in a parent item, the by-product is receipted

into stock as a negative issue transaction.• Irrespective of your selection at the setup option: Stock on hand allowed to go negative (Inventory

Setup - General tab), items defined as Floorstock (Stock Code Maintenance) which are stockedin the floorstock warehouse (WIP Setup) will always be allowed to go negative when backflushing,regardless of your warehouse settings or costing method.

• If you are using FIFO/LIFO costing and you enter a negative quantity, you are given the opportunity toprocess the transaction into a specific FIFO/LIFO bucket (see Adjust Specific Bucket).

• If you selected Backflush level - All and backflushing finds no stock for a sub-assembly, then itexplodes through to the sub-assembly's components to issue (i.e. the sub-assembly is treated as aphantom part). That is, the component of the sub-assembly is issued during backflushing (all levels) ifthere is no stock of the sub assembly.


Warehouse This indicates the warehouse in to which the parent part mustbe receipted.


Stock code This indicates the finished part or sub-assembly that you wantto backflush (receive into stock).

Note:• You will be unable to backflush a stock code that

is configured with a Part category of: Kit part orPlanning bill (Stock Code Maintenance).

• You can only backflush a bought out item if youenabled the option: Allow backflush of bought outitems (Inventory Setup).



Field Values DescriptionYou cannot backflush a stock item which is on Full hold andyou are warned if on Partial hold (Stock Code Maintenance).The latter gives you the option to stop or continue with thetransaction.



Quantity You use this field to indicate the quantity of the item you wantto backflush.

If the system encounters sufficient quantity of the componentsto manufacture the parent item, then it reduces stock by therequired amount according to the bill of material structure.

Similarly, if stock on hand is allowed to go negative in thewarehouse(s) from which the backflush is processed, thecomponents are issued and stock is reduced by the requiredamount according to the bill of material structure.

If there is an insufficient quantity of an item and stock on handis not allowed to go negative in the warehouse(s) from whichthe backflush is processed, then the backflushing transactioncannot be completed.

If there is insufficient quantity available of a sub-assembleditem to manufacture the item and you selected to backflushAll levels of the bill, then the system issues the quantity thatis available and continues with the next level of the bill ofmaterial. It issues enough of the components of the sub-assembled item to make up the required quantity of the sub-assembled item. If you selected to backflush only the Firstlevel of the bill of materials and insufficient stock exists for thebackflush, then the transaction cannot be completed, unlessstock on hand is allowed to go negative (the remainder of thelevels is not checked).









Field Values DescriptionYou will be unable to change the release of serialized ECCitems once you have allocated the serial numbers.


Current cost This field displays the current cost per unit of the item.This field cannot be changed when backflushing as it isautomatically calculated using the cost of material and laborissued for the backflush.

Cost uom This indicates the costing unit of measure for the item.

Bin location You use this field to indicate the bin location into which theparent item must be received.

If the bin does not exist, it is automatically created providing theoption: Allow creation of bins when processing inventorytransactions (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected. Ifthis option is not selected, you must either enter an existing binor use the Inventory Bin Maintenance program to create anew bin.

If the default bin against a component is not defined, then thebin is assumed to be the same as the warehouse code.

If multiple bins are not in use for the warehouse from whichthe backflush is being processed, then this field defaults to thedefault bin for the warehouse and cannot be changed.

When processing a negative backflush quantity, the binlocation must exist against the parent item (i.e. the item musthave been issued against the parent item for that specific binlocation).

Lot You use this field to enter the lot number from which the itemmust be backflushed.

You can only access the Lot field if:

• The item is defined as traceable (Stock Code Maintenance- Tracking tab).

• You have not selected the option: Automatic lotnumbering (Lot Traceability Setup).

• You are processing a negative backflushing transaction.

If you selected the option: Same lot to be used on multiplestock codes (Lot Traceability Setup), then the same lotnumber can be used for different stock codes.

Concession A concession is usually required if you selected a traceablestock item. If you do not enter a concession in association witha specific lot number, the system prompts you to either enter aconcession number or continue without one.

Note:If you need to record a concession number againsta lot, then ensure that you enter it during the



Field Values Descriptionbackflushing process as you will be unable to capture itlater.

You can select the preference: Give warning aboutblank concession number entered to display awarning message when you do not enter a concessionnumber.

Lot expiry date This indicates the expiry date of the lot.

Serial Numbers Select this to capture manual and batch serial numbers forany serialized items being received into stock using the SerialEntry for Receipts program.

Use single ABCtype elements

Select this to include pre-production elements in the calculationof costs. These costs are added to the receipt cost entered.Only pre-production elements of cost defined with a calculationmethod of single are applied.

Note:You can only select this option if you enabled theoption: Activity based costing required (Bill ofMaterials Setup).



Non-merchandisedetails

Apply costmultiplier

Select Yes if you want to apply a cost multiplier to thetransaction. This enables you to indicate what portion of thetransaction value comprises non-merchandise costs (e.g.Freight, duty, tax, etc). See Backflushing Cost Multiplier.

Note:You can only select this option if you have configuredyour Inventory Setup options to apply a cost multiplierwhen processing receipts and if a cost multiplier valuegreater than 1 has been assigned to the stock item(Warehouses for Stock Code).

G/L Details

Ledger code You use this field to indicate the ledger account to which thebackflushing transaction must be posted.

Note:You can only access this field if Inventory is linkedto the General Ledger and you have configured yourInventory options (Ledger Code Options) to requestthe ledger code backflushing for transactions.



Field Values DescriptionLedger codedescription


Backflushing OptionsThis screen is displayed when you select the Post option.

Field Values DescriptionOptions You use these options to indicate whether to add the value of

set-up time, startup time or teardown time to the backflushingvalue. This is useful if you backflush an item several times in aday, but you only require these times to be calculated once.

Note:• Irrespective of whether or not you select to include

the set-up, startup and teardown times whenbackflushing, the run time and the fixed and variableoverheads are posted to the General Ledger.

The ledger accounts are determined by the GeneralLedger integration codes defined against the workcenters linked to the operation(s).

• Fixed and variable overheads are calculated usingthe run time and the times selected at this option.

Fixed overheads are calculated as:

Fixed rate x (Run time + Set-up time + Startup time+ Teardown time).

Therefore, if you do not select any of these options,then the Fixed overheads are calculated as: Fixedrate x (Run time).

Similarly, if you select only set-up time, then theFixed overheads are calculated as: Fixed rate x(Run time + Set-up time).

The variable overheads are calculated in the samemanner, but using the variable overhead rate.

• A labor journal is always created, even if thecalculated times are all zero.

Include set-up time Select this to add the value of set-up time to your backflushingvalue.

Include startuptime

Select this to add the value of startup time to your backflushingvalue.

Include teardowntime

Select this to add the value of teardown time to yourbackflushing value.

Job number If the stock item you are backflushing is defined as traceable(Stock Code Maintenance), then you must make an entry inthis field. The entry made is not validated as it is a user definedjob reference field.

An entry can only be made here if the item being backflushedis defined as traceable.



Field Values DescriptionAlternate routingrequired

Select this to indicate a different routing to be used for theissue of materials and operations.

Note:You can only access this field if you enabled the option:Alternate routings required (Bill of Materials Setup).

OK Select this to continue processing.

If labor operations are included in the bill of material structureof the sub-assembly (and the Work in Progress module isinstalled) then the cost of these operations is included in thecost of the backflushed item.

If the Work in Progress module is not installed then laborjournals are not created and work center efficiency files are notupdated.

If Work in Progress is installed then labor journals are created ifany operations are held against the part being backflushed, orif a shortage of a sub-assembly (against which operations areheld) occurs.

A labor journal is always created, even if the calculated timesare all zero.


Backflushing Cost MultiplierThe Cost Multiplier screen is displayed if a cost multiplier value greater than 1 is assigned to the stock itemand you selected Yes at the option: Apply cost multiplier field.

Field Values DescriptionCost multiplier This defaults to the cost multiplier value defined against the

item but can be changed.


Select this if you want to change the cost multiplier valuecalculated by the system.

If you select this option then you can override the default valuedisplayed in the Non-merchandise cost field.

Non-merchandisecost

You use this field to enter the non-merchandise value you wantto apply to the transaction.

You can only enter a value in this field if you selected theoption: Enter non-merchandise cost.Refer to Non-merchandise Distribution.

OK Select this to apply the calculated or entered non-merchandisevalue to the transaction.

Cancel Select this to exit the Cost Multiplier screen without applyingthe non-merchandise value.

Danger:



Field Values DescriptionIf you select this option, then the following message isdisplayed:

Inventory journals have already been posted. Ifyou cancel now, non-merchandise distributionwill not be posted. Do you still wish to cancel thistransaction?If you select Yes, (i.e. you cancel out of the CostMultiplier screen) then the cost multiplier is appliedto the cost of the item in inventory, but the non-merchandise entry for the cost multiplier value isnot posted to the General Ledger. This results in adifference between the item's value in the Inventorymodule and its value in the Inventory control account inthe General Ledger. This difference must be manuallyjournalized using the GL Journal Entry program.

Stock InformationThis window indicates stock information that is displayed while you enter transaction details for an item.


• Warehouse

This indicates the warehouse in which the transaction is being processed.• Stock code

This indicates the code of the stock item being processed.• Stocking uom

This indicates the stocking unit of measure of the stock item.• Stock on hand

Quantity physically in the warehouse.• Stock available

Quantity on hand less allocated to sales orders.

Allocated to sales orders is quantity on back order + sales order to ship quantity. These quantitiesexclude unallocated Scheduled Order back order and ship quantities.

• Stock free

Quantity on hand - sales order ship quantity. This quantity excludes unallocated Scheduled Order shipquantities.

• In transit

Outstanding non-immediate warehouse transfers.• Allocated

Quantity on back order + sales order ship quantity + outstanding materials to be issued to jobs (thisincludes allocations to both confirmed and unconfirmed jobs).

• On order

Quantity of outstanding purchase orders and jobs.• On back order

Sales order back order quantity. This quantity excludes unallocated Scheduled Order back orderquantities.

• In inspection



Quantity of purchased items awaiting inspection (i.e. receipted into inspection but not receipted intostock).

• Cost uom

This indicates the cost unit of measure of the stock item.• Current cost

This indicates the current cost of the stock item.

Recap TotalsThe totals displayed in this pane are updated each time you post a transaction.


• Session details

• Transaction date

This indicates the date on which the transactions were posted.

• Posting period

This indicates the inventory period in which the transactions were posted.

• Hash quantity

This indicates the total number of items processed in all transactions during the current run of theprogram, regardless of the unit of measure (e.g. if 12 units and 13 boxes were processed, then thevalue shown here would be 25.

• Receipts

• Receipts posted

This indicates the number of receipt transactions posted.• Receipts value

This indicates the total value of receipt transactions posted.• Adjustments

• Adjustments posted

This indicates the number of adjustment transactions posted.• Adjustments value

This indicates the total value of adjustment transactions posted.• Expense issues

• Issues posted

This indicates the number of expense issue transactions posted.• Issues value

This indicates the total value of expense issue transactions posted.• Transfers IN

• Transfers in posted

This indicates the number of transfers in transactions posted.• Transfers in value

This indicates the total value of transfers in transactions posted.• Transfers OUT

• Transfers out posted



This indicates the number of transfers out transactions posted.• Transfers out value

This indicates the total value of transfers out transactions posted.• Cost changes

• Cost changes posted

This indicates the number of cost change transactions posted.• Cost changes value

This indicates the total value of cost change transactions posted.• Physical counts

• Physical counts posted

This indicates the number of physical count transactions posted.• Physical counts value

This indicates the total value of physical count transactions posted.• Cost modifications

• Cost modifications posted

This indicates the number of cost modification transactions posted.• Cost modifications value

This indicates the total value of cost modification transactions posted.

List of JournalsThis listview displays journal header information for the transactions posted during the current run of theprogram.


• Journal

This indicates the journal number created for the transaction.• Journal date

This indicates the date on which the transaction was processed.• Warehouse

This indicates the warehouse in which the transaction was processed.• Operator

This indicates the operator who processed the transaction for the journal.

Journal EntriesThis listview displays the journal lines for the journal selected in the list of Journals pane.


• Stock code

This indicates the code of the stock item used for the transaction.• Transaction

This indicates the transaction type.• Quantity

This indicates the transaction quantity.• Value



This indicates the transaction value.

Inventory Transaction TypesThe table lists the transaction types which occur in the Inventory module.

These transaction types are stored in the Inventory Movement files/tables and are printed on the InventoryJournal and Distribution Reports.

REC R - Receipt

ADJ A - Adjustment

ISS I - Issue

PHY P - Physical count

CHG C - Change

MOD M - Modification

TRF T - Transfer

REC G - GRN (Goods Received Note)

REC g - Cost multiplier non-merchandise variance

REC c - GRN cost multiplier entry

BFL B - Backflushing variance

TOT t - TOTAL variance entry

VAR s - Variance caused by standard cost transfer

VAR v - Variance caused by standard cost transfer

VAR a - Variance caused by average cost calculation

ABC X - ABC journal record

ABC x - ABC variance journal

VAR w - WIP automatic write-off variance

GTR z - GIT cost multiplier

GTR z - GIT cost multiplier non-merchandise variance

BIN b - Bin transfer for multiple bins (journal andmovement only)

INS W - WIP inspection

SCR S - WIP inspection scrap

REW O - WIP inspection rework

DSP d - Dispatch note issue

DSP D - Dispatch note reversal

VAR f - FIFO rounding

Inventory Journal StatusFollowing are the possible statuses for inventory journals:

• Status 0 - Not printed• Status 1 - Journal printed• * - Journal in process



Cost Multiplier CalculationsWhen you select the option: Include non-merchandise costs in last cost (Inventory Setup - Optionstab), then you can add the calculated cost multiplier value to the receipt cost of an item when using theInventory Movements program to process a Receipt or a GIT Transfer In.

If you are using the full goods in transit facility (GIT Transfers) and you want to apply a cost multiplierfor items which are transfer supplied, then you must also select the option: Apply cost multiplier whenprocessing receipts (Inventory Setup - Options tab). This enables you to specify the portion of thetransaction value that comprises non-merchandise costs and to store these values in nominated ledgeraccounts.

The cost multiplier is defined against a stock item using the Warehouses for Stock Code program.

The values calculated using a cost multiplier depend on the costing method you defined for Inventory(Inventory Setup - Options tab).

• Using a costing method other than Standard:

Total Transaction value = Quantity x New Cost x Cost Multiplier

Total Merchandise Value = Quantity x New Cost

Total Non-merchandise value = Transaction Value - Merchandise Value• Using Standard Costing:

Total Transaction Value = Quantity x Standard cost

Total Merchandise Value = (Quantity x Standard Cost) / Cost Multiplier

Total Non-merchandise value = Transaction Value - Merchandise Value

Actual Cost AllocationYou use the Actual Cost Allocation program to indicate the cost buckets from which you want to issuelots and/or serials when you are using Actual costing (Inventory Setup - General tab).

This program applies when more than one FIFO bucket is associated with a lot or serialized item.

If you selected to auto deplete cost buckets (Inventory Setup - General tab), then system applies bucketsin FIFO sequence. However, you may still be required to indicate the bucket to use for certain transactions(e.g. a negative backflush).

When only one FIFO bucket is associated with a lot or serialized item, that bucket is automatically usedand the Actual Cost Allocation program is not loaded.

The following types of transactions cause this program to be loaded:

• positive and negative issues• positive and negative adjustments• negative receipts• positive dispatch notes• reducing dispatch notes

Actual Cost Allocation

Field Values DescriptionDelete Select this to delete the allocation line currently highlighted in

the Actual Costing Allocation Details listview.

Save and Close Select this to save the allocations in the listview and to exit theprogram.



Field Values DescriptionThe full quantity issued for the lot/serial is validated againstthe actual cost buckets allocated. If the correct quantity hasbeen allocated, then the actual cost buckets are updated. Thequantity on hand is adjusted according to the transaction andthe last issue date is updated for issues.

When processing a negative issue/dispatch note to a specificbucket, the receipt back into stock cannot exceed the originalquantity received.

Close Select this to exit the program without saving any details.

A warning message is displayed indicating that the allocationof lot/serial buckets is incomplete. If you select to ignore themessage then any actual cost buckets already updated arereversed.

Stock Information

Stock code This indicates the code of the item to be issued.

Description This displays the description of the stock code.

Long description This displays the long description of the stock code.

Warehouse This indicates the warehouse from which the item must beissued.

Rev/Rel This indicates the revision/release of the item if it is ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance).

Lot This indicates the lot from which the item will be issued. Youcan select this to display the Traceability Query program.

Bin This indicates the bin from which the item will be issued.

Actual Costing Allocation DetailsYou use this editable listview to indicate thee actual cost buckets from which you want to issue lots and/serials.

Field Values DescriptionActual costbucket

You use this field to indicate the cost bucket from which youwant to issue the item. You can select the Browse icon todisplay the FIFO buckets available for the selected lot/serial(see FIFO/LIFO Bins for Stock Code).

If you are processing a negative receipt, then the bucket youselect here must be the bucket into which the original receiptwas processed. Similarly, when reversing a positive allocationin Job Issues, only the actual cost bucket(s) used in thepositive issue can be reversed.

Date received This indicates the date on which the item was received into thecost bucket.

Quantity You use this field to indicate the quantity you want to issuefrom the selected cost bucket.



Field Values DescriptionUnit cost This indicates the unit cost of the item in the selected cost

bucket. This is the actual unit cost at which the items will beissued.

Serial Entry for ReceiptsYou use the Serial Entry for Receipts program to assign serial numbers to stock items that are defined asserialized (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).

Manual serial numbers or batch serial numbers are captured, depending on the method of serial trackingdefined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).

The Serial Numbers function is available either at the time of processing the receipt of a serialized itemusing the Inventory Movements program, or when capturing an order for a serialized item. This dependson your selection at the Record serial numbers field against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance -Tracking).

Serial Number Capture

Field Values DescriptionAccept and Close Select this to accept the serial numbers you entered, allocate

them to the items and exit the program.

Cancel Select this to exit the program.

Manual Serials Capture

Field Values DescriptionNew Select this to add a new serial number.

Add Select this to add the serial number you entered to the list ofserial numbers to allocate to the items.

Note:If the serial number already exists against anotherstock code, an error message is displayed unless theoption: Same serial to be used for multiple stock codesis selected(Inventory Setup - Options tab).

Delete Select this to remove the serial number currently highlightedin the List of Manual Serials listview from the list of serialnumbers to allocate.

Range Select this to allocate a range of serial numbers to receipt.

This function only applies if the serial tracking method forthe stock item is set to Manual (Stock Code Maintenance -Tracking).

Remaining serials This indicates the number of items to which serial numbershave not yet been allocated.

Remaining serialsin inspection

This indicates the number of items in inspection to which serialnumbers have not yet been allocated.



Field Values DescriptionSerial number You use this field to indicate the serial number you want to

assign to the transaction.

You cannot use the same serial number in two differentwarehouses for a manual serial item, irrespective of the optionsgoverning serial tracking.

If you are entering a series of serial numbers and you wantto clear this field after each entry, then you must select thepreference: Clear serial number field after entry (InventoryMovements - Preferences). This clears the field after youselect the Add function. If this preference is not selected, thenthe previous serial number you entered remains displayed inthe Serial number field.

Capture intoinspection

Select this if you want to capture all or part of the receiptquantity into inspection.

This option is only enabled for items requiring inspection(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking) and if you arereceipting all or part of the item into inspection (Job Receipts).

Expiry date You use this field to indicate the expiry date you want toallocate to the serial number you entered. If you use the EnterRange function, then the expiry date you supply here is appliedto each of the serials in the range.

The expiry date is checked when any of these serial numbersis sold or issued and you will be prevented from allocating anyserial number that has expired.

Location You use this field to indicate where the serialized items mustbe stored.

If you use the Enter Range function, then the location yousupply here is applied to each of the serials in the range.

If multiple bins are installed in a warehouse (InventoryWarehouses) and only a single bin location is entered againstthe transaction, then this becomes the default location for theserial number.

If a stock item is either traceable or requires inspection, thenwhen you use the Purchase Order Receipts or ShipmentReceipt (Legacy) program to accept the item into inspection,then this field is disabled. You enter the required location whenyou receipt the item into stock from inspection.

Serial Range EntryYou use the Range function to allocate a range of serial numbers to receipt.

If you enabled Manual serial number tracking (Inventory Setup - Numbering tab), then you can createsequential ranges of manual serial numbers either at company or stock code level. These serial numbersare created by combining the values in the Prefix and Next suffix fields defined either at company or stockcode level.



Field Values DescriptionQuantity toreceive

This indicates the number of items for which you want togenerate serial numbers.

Prefix This indicates the character(s) that must be attached to thebeginning of the serial number.

The prefix can only be entered if you defined your serialnumbers to be alphanumeric (Company Setup - Key Typestab).

Although you can enter 15 characters at the prefix field, thetotal number of characters for the serial number cannot exceed20.

If you enabled Manual serial number tracking (InventorySetup - Numbering tab), then this field defaults to the valuedefined in the Prefix field against either the Company or thestock code, but can be changed.

Suffix This indicates the character(s) that must be attached to the endof the serial number.

The suffix can only be entered if you defined your serialnumbers to be alphanumeric (Company Setup - Key Typestab).

The number of numeric characters entered for the suffix mustallow for the total number of serial numbers specified at theQuantity to receive field.

For example: You will be unable to enter a prefix of ABC; asuffix of 1 and a quantity to receive of 11, since only 10 serialnumbers could be added.

Although you can enter 15 characters at the suffix field, thetotal number of characters for the prefix and suffix fieldscombined cannot exceed 20.

If you enabled Manual serial number tracking (InventorySetup - Numbering tab), then this field defaults to the valuedefined in the Next suffix field against either the Company orthe stock code, but can be changed.

The system automatically increments the Next suffix foreach new serial number created in the range, providing thenumber was created using the prefix defined in the Prefix field(Inventory Setup or Stock Code Maintenance).

Starting serialnumber

This indicates the first number that must be used for this rangeof serial numbers.

This field can only be accessed if you are using numeric serialnumbers (Company Setup - Key Types tab).

OK Select this to accept the information you entered and to returnto the previous screen.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen without saving anyinformation you entered.



List of Manual SerialsDetails of the serial numbers you allocated to the items are displayed in this listview. The details changeeach time you select the Add or Delete function from the Manual Serials Capture pane.


• Serial number• Expiry date• Location• Inspection• Count

This is displayed at the bottom of the listview and indicates the number of serials currently displayed inthe listview.

Batch Serials Capture

Field Values DescriptionNew Select this to enter a new serial number.

Add Select this to add the serial number you entered to the list ofserial numbers to allocate to the items.

Note:A warning is displayed if the serial number suppliedalready exists in the current warehouse but you cancontinue.

If the serial number only currently exists in anotherwarehouse, then an error message is displayed unlessthe option: Multiple batch serial receipts allowed isselected (Inventory Setup - Options tab).

If the serial number already exists against another stockcode, then an error message is displayed unless the option:Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes is selected(Inventory Setup - Options tab).

Delete Select this to remove the serial number currently highlighted inthe List of Batch Serials listview from the list of serial numbersallocated.

Remainingquantity

This indicates the number of items to which serial numbershave not yet been allocated.

Remainingquantity ininspection

This indicates the quantity of serial numbers still in inspection.

Serial number This indicates the serial number that must be allocated to thebatch quantity of the items you are receipting.

Quantity This indicates the quantity of items to which you want toallocate the serial number entered in the previous field.

You can distribute quantities over several serial numbers untilthe Remaining batch quantity reaches zero.



Field Values DescriptionCapture quantityinto inspection

Select this if you want to capture all or part of the receiptquantity into inspection.

This option is only enabled for items requiring inspection(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking) and if you arereceipting all or part of the item into inspection.

Quantity ininspection

You use this field to indicate the quantity of the item which youwant to receipt into inspection.

This field is only enabled when you select the Capture quantityinto inspection option.

This defaults to the quantity entered in the Inspection quantityfield (Job Receipts), but can be changed.

Expiry date This indicates the expiry date you want to allocate to the serialnumber entered.

The expiry date is checked when any of these serial numbersis sold or issued and you will be prevented from allocating anyserial number that has expired.

Location You use this field to indicate where the serialized items mustbe stored.

If multiple bins are installed in a warehouse (InventoryWarehouses) and only a single bin location is entered againstthe transaction, then this becomes the default location for theserial number.

If a stock item is either traceable or requires inspection, thenwhen you use the Purchase Order Receipts or ShipmentReceipt (Legacy) program to accept the item into inspection,then this field is disabled. You enter the required location whenyou receipt the item into stock from inspection.

List of Batch Serials

Details of the serial numbers you allocated to the items are displayed in this listview. The details changeeach time you select the Add or Delete function from the Batch Serials Capture pane.


• Serial number• Quantity• Expiry date• Location• Inspection• Quantity in inspection

Effect of Serial Numbers on TransactionsThe following tables indicate how transactions are affected when using manual and batch serial numbers.



Transactions affected by Manual serial numbers

Receipts If you have not selected the setup option:Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes(Inventory Setup - Options tab), then, for a positivereceipt, the serial number must not exist on file. Youmust enter whole numbers.

For a negative receipt, the serial number must existin the relevant warehouse so that it can be creditedwith the stock (i.e. to credit a serial number thathas already been sold, it must be processed as anegative receipt).

Adjustments If you have not selected the setup option:Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes(Inventory Setup - Options tab), then, for a positiveadjustment to increase the quantity of stock onhand, the serial number must not already exist (i.e.a unique serial number must be entered ).

Positive adjustments cannot be made to manuallyserialised items, as by default, each manual serialitem can only be for a quantity of one.

For a negative adjustment to reduce the quantity ofstock on hand, the serial number must already existin the serial number file. Negative adjustments canbe made to both batch and manual serial numbers.

Backflushing For a positive backflush of a serialized item, youmust enter the serial numbers for each of thebackflushed items. If one of the components ofa backflushed item is serialized then you mustindicate the quantity to issue from a batch and thebatch serial number.

The serial number of the component must exist inthe serial number file.

If the stock on hand quantity will become negative,you can either abort or continue the backflush.

For a negative backflush of a serialized item, youmust enter the serial numbers of the backflusheditem and the serial numbers of the components.The serial number of the backflushed items mustexist in the serial tracking file. The serial numbers ofthe components must exist with a zero quantity onhand.

Transfers For a transfer out the serial number must exist andmust be on hand in the warehouse from which it isbeing transferred.

For a transfer in, the serial number must exist andbe in transit.



Physical Count This function does not update serial numbers. Toupdate serial numbers you must use the SerialNumber Maintenance program.

Issues For a positive issue to decrease the quantity ofstock on hand, the serial number must already existin the serial number file.

If you have not selected the setup option:Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes(Inventory Setup - Options tab), then, for anegative issue to increase the quantity of stock onhand, the serial number cannot already exist in theserial number file.

Transactions affected by Batch serial numbers

Receipts For a positive receipt, where the batch numberexists, the quantity received is added to the totalbatch quantity available against that number.

For a negative receipt the serial number must existin the relevant warehouse so that it can be creditedwith the stock.

Adjustments For a positive or negative adjustment you can onlyadjust one batch serial number at a time, and thebatch serial number must exist in the warehousethat you are adjusting.

Backflushing For a positive backflush of a serialized item, youmust enter the serial numbers for each of thebackflushed items. If one of the components ofa backflushed item is serialized then you mustindicate the quantity to issue from a batch andthe batch serial number. The serial number of thecomponent must exist in the serial number file. Ifthe stock on hand quantity will become negative,you can either abort or continue the backflush.

For a negative backflush of a serialized item, youmust enter the serial numbers of the backflusheditem and the serial numbers of the components.The serial number of the backflushed item and thecomponents must exist in the serial number file.

Transfers For a transfer out you can only transfer items fromone batch serial number at a time. The batch serialnumber must exist in the warehouse from whichyou are transferring items.

For a transfer in you can only transfer items intoone batch at a time. The batch number does nothave to exist. If the batch number exists in thedestination warehouse, the items are added tothe existing quantity. You do not have to transferan item in with the same batch number that youtransferred it out.



Physical Count The Physical Count function does not update serialnumbers. To update serial numbers you must usethe Serial Number Maintenance program.

Issues For a positive or negative issue you can only issueone batch serial number at a time, and the batchserial number must exist in the warehouse fromwhich you are issuing items.

Inventory Document PrintYou use the Inventory Document Print program to produce supporting documentation in batch mode forinventory transactions processed using the Inventory Movements program and purchase order receiptsprocessed using the Purchase Order Receipts program.

These documents can either accompany the inventory items in transit or be retained for your own records.

Note:• You will be unable to print documents if you have not defined a document format for the type of

document you want to print. The Define Format function enables you to take on these formats.• You will be unable to print documents for any transaction type against which you have indicated

that no document is required (Inventory Setup - Documents tab).

In addition, if you printed the document on-line (Inventory Movements) then this program willonly allow you to reprint that document.

Printed inventory documents are deleted when you run the Purge function of the InventoryPeriod End program, if they have been held on file for at least the number of months entered atthe Number of months to retain - Documents field.

Inventory Document Print

Field Values DescriptionPrint Select this to print the inventory document selected.

If you enabled the option: Generate next document number(Inventory Document Format) then the next documentnumber is generated automatically when you print thedocument for the first time (i.e. Not a reprint). If this optionis not enabled, then no document number is assigned. ForPurchase order receipts, the document number is the GRNnumber, or the purchase order number if the GRN system isnot installed.

If you enabled the option: New page per transaction (InventoryDocument Format) then each transaction is treated as a newdocument. If this option is not selected, then a new page isgenerated as follows:

• for stock receipts and issues, a new page is generated uponchange of the warehouse.

• for transfers out, a new page is generated upon change ofthe destination warehouse.

• for purchase order receipts, a new page is generated uponchange of the GRN number or the purchase order number.

• when printing purchase order receipt documents on-line, a new document is printed for each line receipted in,



Field Values Descriptionregardless of your selection at the option: New page pertransaction (Inventory Document Format).

• the transaction type for stock receipts will include inspectionitems if this has been configured (Inventory Setup).

If you have not enabled Windows printing and you selected toPreview documents before printing them (see Printing), thenyou can select the E-mail function from the Preview screen(see Send Email).

Alignment Select this to print the selected document type using testcharacters. This enables you to check whether the stationeryis correctly aligned on your printer before printing the actualdocument.

PrinterPreferences

Select this to optionally assign a separate printer for the on-lineprinting of each of your inventory documents.

Save FormValues



See Design Mode.

Report Options

Field Values DescriptionDocuments

Document type This option enables you to indicate the type of document youwant to generate.

Stock receipts Select this to print stock receipt documents for transactionsinvolving the receipt of items into stock.

Issues Select this to print stock issue documents for transactionsinvolving the issue of items from stock.

Transfers out Select this to print transfers out documents for transactionsinvolving the transfer of stock to a different warehouse.

P/order receipts Select this to print purchase order receipt documents fortransactions involving the receipt of items on a purchase order.

Format You use this field to indicate the format you want to apply to thedocument that is printed.

Define format Select this to configure the inventory format applicable to theprinting of your inventory documents using the InventoryDocument Format program.

Reprint Select this to reprint inventory documents according to a rangeof selection criteria.

Reprint options



Field Values DescriptionMonth You use this field to indicate the inventory month for which you

want to reprint your inventory documents.

Year You use this field to indicate the inventory year for which youwant to reprint your inventory documents.

Immediate andno destinationtransfers

This option is only enabled if you selected to reprint Transfersout document types.

Include Select this to include transactions for immediate warehousetransfers and for transfers out with no destination whenreprinting inventory documents.

Exclude Select this to exclude transactions for immediate warehousetransfers and for transfers out with no destination whenreprinting inventory documents.

Only Select this to reprint inventory documents only for all immediatewarehouse transfers and all transfers out with no destination.

If you select this option, then you can use the Documentnumber selection option to define the range of GIT transferdocuments you want to include in the reprint.

Document numberselection

You use this field to indicate the document number(s) for whichyou want to reprint the documents.

Note:You will be unable to access this field if you selectedthe option: Generate next document number(Inventory Document Format).

Stock codes

Stock codeselection

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which youwant to print transaction documents.

Warehouses

Warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which youwant to print transaction documents.

Journals

Journal selection This enables you to indicate the Inventory journal(s) for whichyou want to print transaction documents.

Operators

Operator selection This enables you to indicate the operator(s) for which you wantto print transaction documents.

Jobs

Job selection This enables you to indicate the job(s) for which you want toprint the documents.

Purchase orders



Field Values DescriptionPurchase orderselection

This enables you to indicate the purchase order(s) for whichyou want to print the documents.

Note:This field is displayed only if you selected the option: P/order receipts at the Document type field.

Suppliers

Supplier selection This enables you to indicate the supplier(s) for which you wantto print the documents.

Note:This field is displayed only if you selected the option: P/order receipts at the Document type field.

GRNs

GRN selection This enables you to indicate the GRN(s) for which you want toprint the documents.

Note:You can only access this field if you enabled the option:GRN suspense system required (Purchase OrdersSetup) and you selected the option: P/order receipts atthe Document type field.

Destinationwarehouses

Destinationwarehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the destination warehouse(s) forwhich you want to print the documents.

Note:This field is displayed only if you selected the option:Transfers out at the Document type field.

GIT references

GIT referenceselection

This enables you to indicate the GIT reference(s) for which youwant to print the documents.

Note:This field is displayed only if you selected the option:Transfers out at the Document type field.


These options relate to the information displayed in theInventory Print Totals output pane.


Inventory Print TotalsThe information in this report pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not selectthe option: After processing completed > Close this application.





• No. of documents printed

This indicates the total number of documents generated in the batch (i.e. for the current run of theprogram).

If you are printing one document per page then this corresponds to the number of pages printed.

With standard printing, the page breaks can be controlled by SYSPRO and the number of pages cantherefore be determined. With SRS however, the information is passed to the report and the reportformats it accordingly, so SYSPRO cannot determine the number of page breaks. The count is alwaysbe based on the paging rules in the format and not the paging that SRS finally produces.

• Hash total quantity

This is the total number of items printed on all documents, regardless of the unit of measure (e.g. if 12apples and 13 oranges were include on the documents the value shown here would be 25).

• Total value

This is the total value of the items printed on the documents.• Total mass

This is the total weight of items on the documents printed.

This is determined by the sum of the values defined against each item's Mass per stocking unit (StockCode Maintenance).

• Total volume

This is the total volume occupied by all items on the documents printed.

This is determined by the sum of the values defined against each item's Volume per stocking unit(Stock Code Maintenance).

• Total merchandise value

For purchase orders this field displays the total value (price x quantity), excluding cost multiplier costs,of the documents printed.

For the inventory transactions: receipts, issues and warehouse transfers, this field displays the totalcost x quantity of the documents printed.

• Total non merchandise value

This field displays the total value of cost multiplier costs, if any, of the documents printed.

Inventory On-line DocumentThis screen is displayed when you select the post function from the Inventory Movements and PurchaseOrder Receipts programs. It enables you to print an inventory document online.

You indicate the types of inventory documents you want to print on-line on the Documents tab of theInventory Setup program.

Note:When printing documents online, a document is generated for each transaction line processed.

Field Values DescriptionDocument type This field displays the type of document which will be printed

online.

Document format You use this field to select the format you want to apply to thedocument that is printed.

PreviewDocument



Field Values DescriptionTest Alignment This function enables you to print the selected document type

using test characters. This enables you to check whether thestationery is correctly aligned on your printer before printing theactual document.

Define Format Select this to use the Inventory Document Format program todefine a document format.

Documentnumber allocated

You use this field to enter the document number required forthe document you are printing.

Note:You will be unable to access this field if you haveenabled the option: Generate next document number(Inventory Document Format).

PrinterPreferences

You use this function to optionally assign a separate printer forthe on-line printing of each of your inventory documents.

E-mail Select this to use the Send Email program to email thedocument.

Print Select this to print the document online.

Close Select this to return to the previous screen without printing thedocument.

Default printer DestinationsThis screen is displayed when you select the Printer Preferences function.

Note:The description {Current Print} refers to the default printer that is configured within SYSPRO. Toestablish what the current printer is, press Shift+F6 from within SYSPRO. The highlighted printer isyour current printer.

Field Values DescriptionDefault printerdestinations

Stock receipts setto

This indicates the default printer assigned to the printing ofstock receipt documents.

Issue documentsset to

This indicates the default printer assigned to the printing ofyour stock issue documents.

Transferdocuments set to

This indicates the default printer assigned to the printing ofstock transfer documents.

Purchase orderreceipts set to

This indicates the default printer assigned to the printing ofpurchase order receipt documents.

Set Select this to indicate that the printer currently defined as thedefault printer must be used to print the document on-line.

Clear Select this to remove details of the printer previously assignedto the printing of the document and to use the current printerinstead (i.e. The printer configured within SYSPRO).



Field Values DescriptionClose Select this to accept your preferences and to return to the

previous screen.

Price-Cost Percentage ChangeYou use the Price-Cost Percentage Change program to make global changes to either the selling price orthe inventory cost of your stock items.

You can use the Price History Report program to print an audit trail of changes made using this program.

Note:This program ignores any items that use Actual costing (Inventory Setup - General tab) whenprocessing a cost change or when processing a price change based on cost.

Price/Cost Percentage Change

Field Values DescriptionStart Processing Select this to make the price changes according to your

selections in the Price/Cost Percentage Change Criteria pane.

You are prompted to enter missing information that theprogram requires to complete processing.

In addition, you are prompted to confirm that you want toprocess the changes.

Change Criteria Select this to change the criteria indicated in the Price/CostPercentage Change Criteria pane.

Price/Cost Percentage Change Criteria

Field Values DescriptionChange function

Percentage basedon

Note:The option you select here determines which othercriteria are made available in this pane.

Price code Select this to change prices for existing price codes by aspecific percentage.

Another price code Select this to change prices held against price codes based ona percentage of another price code.

Cost Select this to change prices associated with a price code byadding a percentage to the unit cost of a stock item.

Note:All warehouses with a costing method of FIFO orLIFO are ignored (Inventory Setup or InventoryWarehouses).

Items in warehouses using FIFO or LIFO costing willtherefore not be updated.



Field Values DescriptionInventory cost Select this to make global changes to your inventory costs

Note:• All warehouses with a costing method of FIFO or

LIFO are ignored (Inventory Setup or InventoryWarehouses).

Items in warehouses using FIFO or LIFO costing willtherefore not be updated.

• If Inventory is linked to General Ledger in summaryor detail (General Ledger Integration) then detailsof the ledger codes involved in each cost changetransaction are printed.

• Any changes to the inventory unit costs arerecorded in the inventory journal file. In addition,for each stock code against which you are retainingstock movements (Stock Code Maintenance)changes are recorded in the stock movement file.

Rounding methodoptions

Rounding method

0-5 decimals Select this to indicate that you want the new price/cost to berounded according to a specific number of decimals.

Specified value Select this to enter a specific value according to which youwant the new prices/costs to be rounded.

No. of decimals Select the number of decimals required for rounding. An entryof 0 (zero) indicates that you want the new price to be roundedto a whole integer, while entries of 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 indicate thedecimal to which you want the new prices/costs to be rounded.

Value You use this field to indicate the specific value according towhich you want the new prices/costs to be rounded.

Print options

List changes onprinter

Select this to print a list of all stock codes that were changedduring processing within the current run of the program.

Note:You can print an audit trail of any changes made toeither the price of stocked items or the pricing basisof stocked items using the Price History Reportprogram.

Print prices withoutupdating

Select this if you want to view the effect of the price changesyou entered without actually updating the prices.

When you select this option, the option: List prices on printer isautomatically selected and a report of your intended changes isproduced.

If, after you have checked the report, you are satisfied with theresults, you can re-enter the changes and update the prices.



Field Values DescriptionPercentageinformation

Percentagechange

You use this field to indicate the percentage by which the priceheld against prices codes must change.

If you selected Percentage based on - Another price code, thenan entry of 0.00 here, enables you to copy a price code withoutchanging the actual price.

If you selected Percentage based on - Cost, then an entry of0.00 here enables you to make the price equal to the unit cost.

Increase/decrease This enables you to indicate whether you want to increase ordecrease the price.

Increase Select this to increase prices by the percentage specified.

Decrease Select this to decrease the price by the percentage specified.

Price codes tochange

Price codeselection

All Select this to apply the price changes for all price codes heldon file.

List Select this to apply the price changes to a selective list ofprices codes.

Price code list Select this to enter a list of price codes for which you want tochange prices.

Prince changebased on anotherprice code

Basic price code You use this field to indicate the price code from which theprice change must be calculated.

Price code to beupdated

You use this field to indicate the price code to which the pricechange must be made.

Note:A new price code entry is not created if a zero valueis held against the price code from which the changemust be calculated.

Create price codeif not on file

Select this to create a new price code if your entry at the Pricecode to be updated field is not defined for any of the selectedstock codes.

Commissioncode for changedprice code

Change codeselection



Field Values DescriptionNo code change Select this to indicate that no commission is applicable to the

price code being changed.

Change code Select this to assign a new commission code to the changedprice code.

Commission code You use this field to indicate the commission code that youwant to assign to the changed price code.

Warehouse forcost

Warehouse to usefor cost

You use this field to indicate the warehouse from which thecost of the stock item will be extracted to update prices.


This indicates the description of the warehouse code youselected.

Inventory costpercentagechange

Cost changejournal reference

Select this to optionally enter a reference for the cost changethat you want to print on the Inventory Journal Report report.This reference defaults to 'cost-chg'.

Postinginformation

Period month This indicates the Inventory period to which entries will beposted.

Period year This indicates the Inventory year (within for the period) to whichentries will be posted.

Stock codes

Stock codeselection

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which youwant to change the price assigned to price codes.

Warehouses

Warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which youwant to change the price assigned to price codes.

Note:You can only access the Warehouse selectionfield if you selected the Inventory cost option at thePercentage change function field.

Product classes


This enables you to indicate the product class(es) for whichyou want to change the price assigned to price codes.

Suppliers

Supplier selection This enables you to indicate the supplier(s) for whom you wantto change the price assigned to price codes.


These options relate to the information displayed in the Price/Cost Percentage Change Review output pane.



Field Values DescriptionRefer to After Processing Completed.

Price/Cost Percentage Change ReviewThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.

The results of processing the function you selected are displayed.


Minimum Quantity CalculationYou use the Minimum Quantity Calculation program to calculate the minimum quantity of a stock coderequired and to optionally update the Minimum quantity field held against the warehouse record.

Note:The minimum quantity field held against the warehouse record is only updated if a Lead time isdefined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance ).

You can optionally produce a report listing those items where the minimum quantity exceeds the maximumquantity against the warehouse record.

In principle, the calculation establishes the average quantity of a stock item sold over the last 12 monthsand then multiplies this figure by the number of months required for an order of the stock item to besupplied.

Minimum Quantity Calculation

Field Values DescriptionStart Processing Select this to begin the calculation process.

Note:• The calculation performed by this program is

applicable only to stock codes with a usage historyof two months or more.

• The calculation is not performed for stock itemswhere the current inventory cost is zero.

• The results produced by this program will beinaccurate if there have been fluctuations in thecosting of your stock items over the year.

Change Criteria Select this to change the criteria in the Information pane.

Print Select this to print the information currently displayed in theReport output pane.

Save FormValues



See Design Mode.



Information

Field Values DescriptionStock code

Stock codeselection

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) you want toinclude in the minimum quantity calculation.

Warehouse

Warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for whichyou want to include stock codes in the minimum quantitycalculation.

Product class


This enables you to indicate the product class(es) for whichyou want to include stock codes in the minimum quantitycalculation.

Cycle count

Cycle countselection

This enables you to indicate the cycle count(s) for whichyou want to include stock codes in the minimum quantitycalculation.

Action whereminimum >maximum

This enables you to indicate what action must be taken if theminimum quantity is greater than the maximum quantity againsta selected stock item.

Select action

Update Select this to calculate the minimum quantity of a stock itemrequired and update the Minimum quantity field against thewarehouse.

Note:The minimum quantity field held against the warehouserecord is only updated if a Lead time is defined againstthe stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).

Update and Report Select this to calculate the minimum quantity of a stock itemrequired, and update the Minimum quantity field against thewarehouse. In addition, a report is produced indicating thoseitems where the minimum quantity exceeds the maximumquantity for the warehouse.

Report only Select this to calculate the minimum quantity of a stock itemrequired and to update the Minimum quantity field against thewarehouse if this will not make the minimum quantity morethan the maximum quantity. I.e. If the minimum quantity is notgreater than the maximum quantity, then the update takesplace.

A report is produced which lists those items where theminimum quantity would exceed the maximum quantity for thewarehouse.


These options relate to the information displayed in the Reportoutput pane.



Field Values DescriptionRefer to After Processing Completed.

ReportThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.



Calculation FormulaThe minimum quantity calculation is performed as follows:

((Annual usage value / Unit cost) / Number of months' history) x (Lead time / 30)

• The annual usage value is divided by the unit cost to obtain the Annual usage quantity (i.e. Usagequantity = Annual usage value / unit cost).

• The Annual usage quantity is divided by the number of months’ history to establish an average monthlyusage (i.e. Average monthly usage = Usage quantity / number of months history).

Note:The number of months' history is stored against the warehouse in which the item is stocked.From the time of capturing the item, this number is incremented by 1 after each Inventory monthend, until it reaches a value of 12. This enables the calculation to cater for items that have beenstocked for less than 12 months.

• The lead time held against the stock item is divided by 30 and multiplied by the Average monthly usage(i.e. Inventory minimum quantity = (Lead time / 30) x Average monthly usage).

| Stock Take System | 263


Stock Take System

Stock Take SystemYou use the Stock Take System to selectively count the number of items you have on hand in yourInventory system and to update the live inventory file with these captured quantities.

Note:Although you can continue processing transactions while the stock take is in progress (i.e.performing a stock take does not disrupt the normal daily transaction processing in a company), thisis not recommended.

It is important to note that when you process transactions whilst a stock take is in progress, thequantities captured using the Stock Take Selection program do not change. If items are physicallyissued or receipted, or their cost is changed, then the reconciliation of the Inventory Stock TakeVariance Report report becomes more complicated.

You can capture stock count details using any of the following methods:

• by stock code• by bin location• by stock take ticket number• by importing a stock count file

Stock Take QueryYou use the Stock Take Query program to view details of Inventory stock take information.

Stock take information can be viewed for any warehouse in which a stock take is currently in progress.

Stock Take Query



Include

Items not captured Select this to only display stock items for which no capturedquantity has been entered (i.e. no stock take quantities havebeen entered for the item using the Inventory Stock TakeCapture or Stock Take Import programs).

You can use the Stock Take Uncaptured Stock Quantitiesprogram to generate a report of these items.

Exceptions only Select this to display only items where the Captured quantitydiffers from the Original quantity on hand, by the stock takepercentage or quantity variance specified (Inventory Setup -Options tab).

Note:If you entered zero in the Maximum permitted field(Inventory Setup - Options tab), then no items are



Field Values Descriptiondisplayed in the Stock Codes listview as the variancecheck is not performed.

Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse for which you wantto display the stock take information.

The warehouse you enter must have a stock take currentlyin progress (i.e. you need to have used the Stock TakeSelection program to select stock items from that warehousefor a stock take).

Warehouse DetailsThis pane displays information for the Warehouse you selected to query.

The following information is included:

• Warehouse

This indicates the code of the warehouse for which the information is being displayed.• Warehouse description

This indicates the description for the warehouse code.• Next stock take ticket number

This indicates the next ticket number to use when next you perform a stock take using tickets. This isdefined against the warehouse (see Warehouse Maintenance).

• Nationality

This indicates the nationality code for the country in which the warehouse is located. This is definedagainst the warehouse (Warehouse Maintenance) and only applies if you selected the option: EC VATsystem required (Tax Options - General tab).

• Negative stock allowed

This indicates whether negative stock is allowed against the warehouse.• Multiple bins in use

This indicates whether multiple bins are applicable for the warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab -Warehouses).

• Tickets

Select this to use the Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Ticket Number program to view a list of allthe captured quantities for the warehouse, in ticket number sequence.

This only applies if you generated ticket numbers and selected to capture counted stock quantities byentering the ticket number (Inventory Stock Take Capture).

Stock CodesThis indicates either all stock items included in the stock take or only the exceptions according to yourselection at the Include menu option.


• Stock code

This indicates the code of the stock item.• Bin

This indicates the bin location for the stock item.• Original quantity



This indicates the Inventory value for the stock item at the time the Stock Take Selection program wasrun.

• Captured quantity

This indicates the counted quantity captured against the stock item.• Product class

This indicates the product class defined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).• Unit of measure

This indicates the unit of measure for the count quantity.• Reference

This indicates the reference entered for the stock count capture.• Number of times captured

This indicates the number of times a captured quantity was entered against the stock item.

Stock Code Line DetailsThe information in this pane relates to the line (i.e. the stock code/bin combination) currently highlighted inthe Stock Codes listview.

In addition to the information derived from the stock code (Stock Code Maintenance) the followinginformation is included in this pane:

• Date of last stock count

This indicates the date on which the last stock take was confirmed for the warehouse, providing thestock take was not confirmed into a prior period.

• Unit cost

This indicates the current unit warehouse cost for the item.• Stock take unit cost

This indicates the unit cost of the item as at the time the Stock Take Selection program was run.• Quantities

• Saved quantity

This indicates the inventory quantity of the item as at the time the Stock Take Selection programwas run.


This indicates the counted quantity captured against the stock item.• Variance quantity

This indicates the difference between the Saved quantity and the Captured quantity.• Stock take values

• Stock take saved value

This indicates the total inventory value of the item as at the time the Stock Take Selection programwas run.

This is calculated as the Saved quantity multiplied by Stock take unit cost.• Stock take captured value

This indicates the total captured value of the item.

This is calculated as the Captured quantity multiplied by Stock take unit cost.• Stock take variance value

This indicates the difference between the Stock take saved value and the Stock take captured value.



• Warehouse values

• Warehouse saved value

This indicates the current warehouse value of the item.• Warehouse captured value

This indicates the warehouse value for the captured quantity.• Warehouse variance value

This indicates the difference between the Warehouse saved value and the Warehouse capturedvalue.

Stock Take SelectionYou use the Stock Take Selection program to select the stock codes that you want to include in a stocktake count.

The selection of stock items to count is the first step in the stock take process.

Note:• If you want to take stock of items that are lot traceable or serialized or if you are using multiple

bins, then you should run the Balance function of the Inventory Period End program beforeusing the Stock Take Selection program. This is especially necessary if you have encounterederrors during the processing of lot traceable or serialized items.

In addition, if you intend counting serial numbers and using the serials as the basis of the stocktake, then you should first run the Serial File Balance Report to identify any discrepanciesbetween the on hand quantity for a stock code within the serial tracking system and the on handquantity within the warehouse file. This should be done even if no errors have occurred duringthe processing of serialized items. The discrepancies need to be resolved before processing astock take.

• Stock codes that have been placed on Full or Partial hold (Stock Code Maintenance), are stillincluded in the selection.

• Stock items with a Part category of G - Phantom part or N - Notional part (Stock CodeMaintenance) - Descriptive tab) are excluded from the stock take selection.

After using the Stock Take Selection program to select items for a stock take, you would typically usethe Stock Take Forms program to print a stock take form that enables you to manually enter the quantityof each item that is counted. Alternatively, if you select to generate ticket numbers, then you use theInventory Stock Take Tickets program to print stock take tickets for a selected range of items you arecounting within a warehouse.

Stock Take Selection

Field Values DescriptionStart processing Select this to apply your selections and to begin the stock take.

This function takes a snapshot of the selected inventory at thecurrent time (i.e. the costs and quantities for the selected stockitems are saved). Inventory movements processed againstthe selected stock items after you have run the Stock takeselection are not reflected against the saved quantity.

Print Select this to print the information currently displayed in theSelected Stock Codes Report output pane.



Field Values DescriptionSave FormValues



See Design Mode.

Stock Take Selection

Field Values DescriptionFunction

Select stock codesfor stock take

This indicates that you are processing a stock take selection.

Warehouses

Warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse in which you wantto perform a stock take.

Warehouse You use this field to enter the single warehouse for which youwant to perform the selection.


This displays the description of the warehouse you selected.

List of warehouses This enables you to indicate a list of warehouses in which youwant to perform a stock take.

Note:Although you can count stock in more than onewarehouse at a time, the system treats eachwarehouse as a separate stock count (i.e. you willneed to confirm the stock count in each warehouseseparately).

Options

Include zeroquantities on hand

Select this if you want to include stock codes that have a zeroquantity on hand in the stock take.

Stock codes

Stock codeselection

This enables you to indicate the stock codes you want toinclude in the stock take.

Note:A stock item defined as a kit type K (Kit type) or S (Subtype) (Stock Code Maintenance) is ignored from thestock take.

In addition, any traceable item residing in theinspection warehouse is ignored from the stock take.

Supplier



Field Values DescriptionSupplier selection This enables you to indicate the suppliers for whom you want

to include stock codes in the stock take.

Stock codes are selected for inclusion in the stock takeaccording to the supplier code defined against the stock code(Stock Code Maintenance).

Bin location

Bin locationselection

This enables you to indicate the bin location(s) for which youwant to include stock codes in the stock take.

Note:If you have enabled the option: Multiple bins(Inventory Setup) and the stock item is serialized thenyour bin selection made here is ignored.

Product classoption


This enables you to indicate the product class(es) for whichyou want to include stock items in the stock take.

Cycle countoption


You use this field to indicate the stock items you want toinclude in the stock take, based on the cycle count definedagainst the item. You specify the number of times you want tocount a stock item at the Quantity cycle count field in the StockCode Maintenance program.

Unit of measureoption

Unit of measureselection

This enables you to indicate the units of measures for whichyou want to include stock codes in the stock take.

Warehouse ABCclasses

Warehouse ABCclass selection

You use this field to indicate whether the ABC class must beused to select stock codes for the stock take.

Note:The Stock Take Selection program selects stockitems for the specific warehouse being counted. Ifyou want items to be selected based on the ABCclassification, then you must ensure that:

1. The option: ABC analysis required (Stock CodeMaintenance) is selected against the stock items.

2. The ABC Analysis report is processed for eachspecific warehouse against which a stock take isrequired.

All classes Select this to include all stock items irrespective of their ABCclassification in the stock take.



Field Values DescriptionSelected classes Select this to indicate specific classes of stock items to include

in the stock take.

'A' items Select this to indicate that 'A' class items must be selected forthe stock take.

'B' items Select this to indicate that 'B' class items must be selected forthe stock take.

'C' items Select this to indicate that 'C' class items must be selected forthe stock take.

'D' items Select this to indicate that 'D' class items must be selected forthe stock take.


These options relate to the information displayed in theSelected Stock Codes Report output pane.


Selected Stock Codes ReportThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.

The results of the stock take selection are displayed.


Stock Take UpdateYou use the Stock Take Update program to update items selected in a stock take (using the Stock TakeSelection program) with the latest costs and on hand quantities stored in the inventory warehouse file/table.

Note:• If your costing method is set to FIFO or LIFO (Inventory Setup or Inventory Warehouses),

then the last cost is used. For all other costing methods, the unit costis used (Warehouses forStock Code).

• The update may cause exceptions where none existed before, especially if quantities werealready captured against items. The original quantity on hand could be reduced. You use theInventory Stock Take Variance Report program to print a list of exceptions.

Stock Take Update

Field Values DescriptionStart Processing Select this to update the costs and quantities according to the

selections you made.

The serial numbers that are no longer in the warehouse(s)selected for stock take are removed from the stock takeselection. If a quantity was captured against such a serialnumber (see Inventory Stock Take Capture), then thecaptured quantity is removed from the first available bin withsufficient quantity. This ensures that the quantity capturedbalances to the number of serial numbers captured. A report is



Field Values Descriptionprinted to indicate the deleted serial numbers and the bins fromwhich serial numbers were removed.

The costs and quantities for lot numbers are updated accordingto the bins. If you are not using multiple bins (Inventory Setup- General tab), then all costs and quantities for lot numbers andserial numbers are updated.

Note:The update may cause exceptions where none existedbefore, especially if quantities were already capturedagainst items. The original quantity on hand could bereduced. You use the Inventory Stock Take VarianceReport program to print a list of exceptions.

Print Select this to print the information currently displayed in theSelected Stock Codes Report output pane.

Save FormValues



See Design Mode.

Stock Take Update Quantities and Costs

Field Values DescriptionWarehouseoption

Warehouseselection

This enables you to select the warehouse(s) for which youwant to update the quantities and costs of the items alreadyselected for stock take.

Warehouse You use this field to enter the single warehouse for which youwant to perform the selection.


This displays the description of the warehouse you selected.

Multiple bins

Multiple Binsselection

This enables you to select the bin(s) for which you want toupdate the quantities and costs of items selected for stocktake.

This option is only enabled if you selected the setup option:Multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).

All bins Select this to update the costs and quantities of stock takeitems in all bins that existed when the stock take selection wasmade as well as bins added after the stock take selection.



Field Values DescriptionSelected bins Select this to update the costs and quantities of stock take

items in bins which existed when the stock take selection wasmade. Bins added after the stock take selection are ignored.

Note:Irrespective of whether you select this option, all binsfor serialized items are always selected and updated.This is because serial numbers are not associated withbins.


These options relate to the information displayed in theSelected Stock Codes Report output pane.


Selected Stock Codes ReportThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.

The results of the stock take update are displayed.


Inventory Stock Take TicketsYou use the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program to print stock take tickets for a selected range ofitems you are counting within a warehouse.

If you select to generate ticket numbers, then this enables you to capture stock by entering the ticketnumber. You can define the next ticket number to use using the Inventory Warehouses program.

Before using this program, you must use the Stock Take Selection program to select the stock items youwant to include in the stock take.

Report Options


to print stock take tickets.

Stock codeselection

You use this field to indicate the stock codes for which youwant to print stock take tickets.


You use this field to indicate the product class(es) to use toselect stock codes for printing stock take tickets.

Bin locationselection

You use this field to indicate the bin location(s) to use to selectstock codes for printing stock take tickets.

U/m selection You use this field to indicate the units of measure to use toselect stock codes for printing stock take tickets.

Reprint

Reprint Select this to reprint the tickets or labels.



Field Values DescriptionNote:You cannot select this option if you selected theGenerate ticket numbers option.

Generate ticketnumbers

Select this to capture stock by ticket number without having toenter actual stock codes.

Note:You must select this option if you want to capture countquantities by ticket number using the Inventory StockTake Capture program.

Print options

Number of ticketsper bin

You use this field to indicate how many tickets you want toprint for each bin. Your entry within the Inventory Stock TakeTicket Format program is used as the default, but can bechanged here.

Number of copiesof each ticket

You use this field to indicate how many copies of each ticketyou want to print. Your entry within the Inventory Stock TakeTicket Format program is used as the default, but can bechanged here.

Alignment Select this to print a test document to verify that the informationwill be aligned correctly on the paper.

Print Select this to apply your selections and begin printing stocktake tickets.

The first ticket number that is printed is extracted from thewarehouse record (Warehouse Setup) and each subsequentticket that is printed increments this number by one.

Close Select this to exit the program without printing the tickets.

Stock Take FormsYou use the Stock Take Forms program to print a stock take form that enables you to manually enter thequantity of each item that is counted.

Before you use this program, you must use the Stock Take Selection program to select the stock codesthat you want to include in the stock take count.

Once you have manually entered the counted quantity for each item on the stock take form, you use theInventory Stock Take Capture program to enter these counted quantities into the system.

Report OptionsThe following report options can be selected on this tab page:

Field Values DescriptionReport sequence

Stock code Select this to print the report in stock code sequence.

Bin location Select this to print the report in bin location sequence.




to print the stock take form.

Include in report

Not yet printed Select this to only print stock codes on the report that have notyet been printed.

Note:If you have already used the Inventory Stock TakeTickets program to print stock take tickets, then youmust select the option: All stock codes, when you printthe Stock Take Forms for the first time.

All stock codes Select this to print all stock codes, regardless of whether theyhave been printed before.

You select this option if you have previously printed a StockTake Form or Stock Take Tickets.

SelectionsIn addition to the report options that can be selected, the following selection criteria can be defined:

• Stock code selection

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) that must be selected for printing on the stock take form.• Product class selection

This enables you to indicate the product class(es).• Bin location selection

This enables you to indicate the bin location(s) for which stock items must be included for printing onthe stock take form

• Unit of measure selection

This enables you to indicate the unit(s) of measure for which you want to include stock codes in thereport.

Common Filtering Options

The following options enable you to specify which items from a selection you want to include whengenerating the report.


Field Values DescriptionAll Select this to include all the items from the selection in the

report.

Range Select this to indicate a range of items from the selection toinclude in the report.


Single Select this to indicate a single item from the selection to includein the report.



Field Values DescriptionWhere no field is displayed in which to enter the single item,you use the From field to indicate the item.

List Select this to indicate a list of items from the selection toinclude in the report.

When defining the list, you use the Add function to add items tothe list. These items are then displayed in a listview. Incorrectlyadded items can be removed from the list by highlighting themand selecting the Remove function.

From You use this field to enter the first item in the range of theselected item to include in the report.

If you indicated that you want to include only a single item fromthe selection, then you use this field to enter that item. Thisapplies where no field is displayed in which to indicate thesingle item.

To You use this field to enter the last item in the range of theselected item to include in the report.


Output OptionsThis tab page is displayed for all reports generated using SYSPRO Reporting Services.

Refer to SRS Output Options for details.

Inventory Stock Take CaptureYou use the Inventory Stock Take Capture program to record the results of a stock count performed on aselected range of inventory items.

Once you have captured the counted quantities using this program, you can use the Stock Take by Ticketprogram (if you used the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program) to view the differences between thequantities saved by the Stock Take Selection program and the counted quantities.

Alternatively, if you used the Stock Take Forms program, then you can use the Inventory Stock TakeVariance Report program to view the differences between the saved and counted quantities.

Stock Take Capture


Start Capture Select this to start the capture process.

Import Select this to use the Stock Take Import program toimport stock count data that was captured using a 3rd partyapplication software system.


Import Select this to use the Stock Take Import program toimport stock count data that was captured using a 3rd partyapplication software system.



Field Values DescriptionStart Capture Select this to start the capture process.


Stock TakeCapture

The options on this screen enable you to indicate thepreferences you require for capturing the stock take countquantities.

Stock takecapture options

These options enable you to indicate your preferences forcapturing stock count information. The options you select hereare saved against your operator code.

Capture quantityby

This enables you to indicate how you want to capture thecounted quantities.

Stock code Select this if you want to capture quantities according to aspecific stock code that is entered.

Ticket number Select this if you want to capture quantities according to aspecific ticket number that is entered.

Note:You need to have used the Inventory Stock TakeTickets program together with the report option:Generate ticket numbers before you can capture countquantities by ticket number.

Bin Select this if you want to capture quantities according to aspecific bin location that is entered.


Capture ticketnumbers

Select this if you want to record a stock take ticket number foreach stock quantity captured.

Note:You will be unable to access this option if you selectedto capture quantities by ticket number.

Default capturemethod

This enables you to indicate how the system must interpret thecount quantities you enter.

Increase Select this if you prefer the program to add any new quantitycounted for an item to the quantity previously counted for theitem.

Replace Select this if you prefer the program to replace any previouslycounted quantity for an item, with the new quantity counted.

Note:If you are using ticket numbers, and you want torecapture a counted quantity (i.e. you have done asecond count of an item), then you must enter theoriginal ticket number for the second and subsequentcounts, to replace the previously counted quantity. Ifyou use a different ticket number, then the quantity youenter is added to the quantity already captured.



Field Values DescriptionReferenceoptions

Apply reference Select this if you want to use the comment entered in theCapture reference field as the reference for the stock takecapture transactions.

If you select this preference, then you must enter a reference inthe Capture reference field.

Capture reference You use this field to enter the default reference you require forthe stock take capture transactions.

This reference is printed on the Inventory Journal Reportreport and can be viewed in transaction queries for serial andlot numbers.

You must enter a reference in this field if you selected theoption: Apply reference.

The reference entered in this field can be overridden when youcapture the count quantity for each stock item.

Default uom forstock take capture

You use this field to indicate the default unit of measure inwhich you want to count stock items. The units of measure aredefined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance -Descriptive tab).

Stock quantities are stored in the stock take capture file in thecaptured unit of measure. Serialized or traceable items can becaptured in a unit of measure other than stocked. The capturedquantity is stored in the unit of measure being used, which isconverted back to the stocking unit of measure at the time ofconfirming details of the stock take capture process using theStock Take Confirmation program.

Note:All stock take reports that include the unit of measureas a selection criterion, will print the stocking unit ofmeasure regardless of the selection made at this field.

Stocking Select this if you want to default to counting items based on thestocking unit of measure defined against the stock code.

Alternate Select this if you want to default to counting items using thealternate unit of measure that is defined against the stock code.

Other Select this if you want to default to counting items using theother unit of measure that is defined against the stock code

Browse onselected stockcodes

This option enables you to indicate which stock items aredisplayed when you select to browse on stock items on theStock Take Capture screen.

Select this if you want to display only the stock items currentlyincluded in the stock take when you browse on stock codes(see Stock Codes in Stock Take).



Field Values DescriptionIf you do not select this option, then all stock items currentlydefined are displayed when you browse on stock codes (seeStock Codes).

Quantityvalidation

Batch quantityvalidation

Select this if you want to enter a batch control total for the stocktake.

If the total quantity captured does not match the batch totalentered here, then a warning message is displayed to indicatethe variance when you exit the stock take.

Batch quantity You use this field to indicate the quantity that you want to useas your batch control total.

This control total is specified in either the stocking, alternateor other unit of measure, depending on you selection at theDefault uom for stock take capture option.

Stock Take Quantity Capture by Stock CodeThis screen is displayed if you selected to capture the count quantities by Stock code.

Field Values DescriptionNew Select this to enter a new warehouse for which to capture stock

count details.

Post Select this to post the quantity that was entered.

Any serial number selected with a capture quantity of 1 will bereset to zero. If the capture quantity is zero, then this will beupdated to 1.

Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse for which you wantto capture the counted quantities.

View

View CapturedQuantities

When you select this option, the details of the quantitiescurrently captured for the stock take are displayed ina separate listview pane. See Captured Quantity forWarehouse - Stock Codes.

Note:The information in this listview is updated each timeyou select the Post option.

Therefore, if you are capturing the count quantitiesfor a large number of items, you may want to deselectthis option (to close this listview pane) to speed up thecapture process.

CapturedQuantities byStock

Select this to view the quantities captured for the stock countby stock code (see Captured Quantity for Warehouse -Stock code)



Field Values DescriptionCapturedQuantities byTicket

Select this to view the quantities captured for the stock countby ticket number (see Captured Quantity for Warehouse -Ticket Number).

Captured Quantityby Bin

Select this to view the quantities captured for the stockcount by bin (see Captured Quantity for Warehouse - BinNumber).

Stock code You use this field to indicate the stock item for which you wantto capture the counted quantity.

You can use the browse icon to view stock codes. The stockcodes are displayed according to your selection at the option:Browse on selected stock codes (see Stock Codes in StockTake or Stock Code Maintenance).

Stock Take Quantity Capture by Stk Code

Field Values DescriptionStock takequantity capture

Warehouse This field displays the warehouse for which you are currentlycapturing the stock quantities.


This field displays the description for the warehouse code inthe previous field.

Stock code This field displays the stock code for which you are currentlycapturing the count details.


This field displays the description for the stock code in theprevious field.

Bin You use this field to indicate the bin location of the stock itemfor which you are capturing a stock count.

If you enter a bin location that is not held on file, then you willbe able to indicate that the bin must be created, providing thesetup option: Allow creation of bins when processing inventorytransactions (Inventory Setup - Options tab). The bin will becreated once you have confirmed the stock take using theStock Take Confirmation program. If this setup option is notselected, then you must either enter an existing bin or use theInventory Bin Maintenance program to create a new bin.

For example: You count 100 of an item physically in Bin 2, butwhen you ran the Stock Take Selection program, the 100were in Bin 1 on SYSPRO. You enter 100 for Bin 2 and whenyou select the Stock Take Confirmation program, the systemcreates Bin 2 (if it does not already exist.), and puts the 100counted into Bin 2.

Note:• You will be unable to access this field if you

disabled the option: Multiple bins (InventorySetup).



Field Values Description• You will be unable to access this field when you

capture count quantities by ticket number, as thesystem has already assigned the bin to the ticketnumber.

Ticket number You use this field to indicate the ticket number applicable to theselected stock code or bin in this stock take.

Note:You can only access this field if you enabled the option:Capture ticket numbers on the main stock take capturewindow.

Reference You use this field to indicate a reference that you want toassign to this transaction. This reference is printed on theInventory Journal Report report and can be viewed intransaction queries for serial and lot numbers.

This field defaults to the text you entered at the Reference fieldof the Stock Take Capture screen.

Unit of measure This indicates the unit of measure in which you are capturingdetails of the stock count for the item. The alternate unit ofmeasure can be selected here if one is configured against theitem (Stock Code Maintenance).

Note:You will be unable to access this field if the stock codeis defined as traceable or serialized (Stock CodeMaintenance) as the unit of measure defaults to thestocking unit of measure.

Quantity You use this field to enter the quantity counted of the stockitem.

Capturing method This defaults to your selection on the Stock Take Capturescreen, but can be changed.

Increase Select this to add the quantity entered in the Quantity field toany count quantity previously captured for the item.

Replace Select this to replace any count quantity previously captured forthe item with the quantity entered in the Quantity field.

Revision You use this field to enter the revision number for the stockitem to which the quantity entered in the Quantity field refers.This field is only enabled if the item is defined as ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).

Release You use this field to enter the release number for the stock itemto which the quantity entered in the Quantity field refers. Thisfield is only enabled if the item is defined as ECC controlled(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).

Lot You use this field to indicate the lot number of the item forwhich you are capturing stock count details.



Field Values DescriptionIf you enter a lot number that is not held on file, then you willbe able to indicate that the lot must be created, together withan expiry date. The lot will be created once you have confirmedthe stock take using the Stock Take Confirmation program.

If you selected the option: Same lot to be used on multiplestock codes (Lot Traceability Setup), then you can reuse thesame lot number for different stock codes.

You can use the Lot Maintenance program to create lotrecords as well as view and change details for existing lots.

Lot expiry date This indicates the expiry date for the lot number entered.

Serial number You use this field to indicate the serial number of the item forwhich you are capturing stock count details.

If you enter a serial number that is not held on file, then you willbe able to indicate that the serial must be created. The serialwill be created once you have confirmed the stock take usingthe Stock Take Confirmation program.

You can use the Capture manual serial numbers option toupdate the count quantities of manually serialized items (seeMultiple Serial Number Selection).

You can use the Serial Number Maintenance program tochange header information for serialized items that are held onfile as well as view and change details for existing serials.

Capture manualserial numbers

Select this to view and update quantities for multiple serialnumbers.

See Multiple Serial Number Selection.

Note:This option is enabled only for stock codes defined asmanual serialized items (Stock Code Maintenance)and enables you to indicate several serial numbers thatmust be updated.

If the stock item is both traceable and serialized, thenthe program only displays serial numbers for the lotnumber entered.

Captured total

Total capturedquantity

This indicates the quantity of the item currently captured in thestock count.

Capturedquantities

View captured lots Select this to view the captured quantities for lot numbers (seeCaptured Quantities for Serial Numbers/Lot Numbers/Revision and Releases).

Note:This option is enabled only if the stock item is definedas a traceable item (Stock Code Maintenance).



Field Values DescriptionView capturedserial numbers

Select this to view all captured quantities of serial numbersfor the warehouse/stock code combination (see CapturedQuantities for Serial Numbers/Lot Numbers/Revision andReleases).

Note:This option is enabled only if the stock item is definedas a serialized item (Stock Code Maintenance).

View capturedRevision/Release

Select this to view all captured quantities of ECC controlleditems for the warehouse/stock code combination (seeCaptured Quantities for Serial Numbers/Lot Numbers/Revision and Releases).

Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Stock CodesThe details of the quantities currently captured for the stock take are displayed in this listview.

Note:The information in this listview is updated each time you select the Post option.

Therefore, if you are capturing the count quantities for a large number of items, you may want toclose this listview pane to speed up the capture process.


• Stock code

This indicates the code of the stock item against which the quantity was captured.• Bin

This indicates the bin location against which the quantity was captured.• Captured quantity

This indicates the quantity captured against the stock item.• Unit of measure


This indicates the reference entered for the stock count capture.• No. of times captured

This indicates the number of times a captured quantity was entered against the stock item.

Multiple Serial Number SelectionThis screen is displayed when you select the Capture manual serial numbers option option.

It enables you to view and update multiple serial numbers.

Note:This option is enabled only for stock codes defined as manual serialized items (Stock CodeMaintenance) and enables you to indicate several serial numbers that must be updated.

If the stock item is both traceable and serialized, then only the serial numbers for the lot numberentered are displayed.



Field Values DescriptionPost Select this to post a count quantity of 1 against each serial

number you selected.

Once you have posted a selection, you can deselect theitem(s) you previously selected and use the Post option topost a quantity of zero against each selected serial. (i.e. byselecting and posting and deselecting and posting you cantoggle between capturing a count quantity of 1 or 0 against theserials).

Select All You use this function to select all serials displayed.

Deselect All You use this function to deselect all serials displayed.

Captured Select this to select the serial or serial/lot number combinationfor update.

Serial number This indicates the serial number added.

Lot This indicates the lot number added.

Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Stock codeThis listview is displayed when you select the Captured Quantities by Stock option from the View menu.

It enables you to view a list of all the captured quantities for the warehouse, in stock code sequence.


• Stock code


This indicates the bin location against which the quantity was captured.• Captured quantity



This indicates the reference entered for the stock count capture.• Captured

A tick in this column indicates that a count quantity was captured against the stock item.

Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Ticket NumberThis listview is displayed when you select the Captured Quantities by Ticket option from the View menu.

It enables you to view a list of all the captured quantities for the warehouse, in ticket number sequence.


• Ticket number

This indicates the ticket number against which the count quantity was captured.• Stock code




This indicates the bin location against which the quantity was captured.• Ticket quantity

This indicates the total quantity captured against the ticket number.• Captured quantity

This indicates the total quantity currently captured against the stock item.• Unit of measure




Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Bin NumberThis listview is displayed when you select the Captured Quantities by Bin option from the View menu.

It enables you to view a list of all the captured quantities for the warehouse, in Bin number sequence.


• Bin

This indicates the bin location against which the quantity was captured.• Stock code

This indicates the code of the stock item against which the quantity was captured.• Captured quantity





Refer to Multiple bins for additional information on multiple bins in SYSPRO.

Captured Quantities for Serial Numbers/Lot Numbers/Revision and ReleasesThis listview is displayed when you select the View Captured Serial, View Captured Lots or View CapturedRev/Rel option.

It enables you to view the captured quantities for serial numbers/lot numbers/revisions/releases for thewarehouse/stock code combination.


• Serial

This indicates the serial number for which the count was captured for the stock item.• Lot

This indicates the lot number for which the count was captured for the stock item.• Rev/Rel

This indicates the revision/release for which the count was captured for the stock item.• Bin



This indicates the bin number for which the count was captured for the stock item.• Captured quantity

This indicates the count quantity captured for the stock item.• Reference

This indicates the reference entered for the stock count capture.

Stock Take Quantity Capture by TicketThis screen is displayed if you selected to capture the count quantities by Ticket Number.

Note:You need to have used the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program together with the report option:Generate ticket numbers before you can capture count quantities by ticket number.


count details.



Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse for which you wantto capture the count quantities.

View


When you select this option, the details of the quantitiescurrently captured for the stock take are displayed ina separate listview pane. See Captured Quantity forWarehouse - Ticket Numbers.





CapturedQuantities byTicket




Ticket number You use this field to enter the ticket number for which you wantto capture the count quantity details.



Field Values DescriptionYou can use the Browse icon to view existing ticket numbersgenerated for the stock code for the selected warehouse (seeTicket Numbers for Warehouse).

Next Select this to navigate to the next ticket number, without havingto enter the ticket number.

Stock Take Quantity Capture by Ticket

Field Values DescriptionStock takequantity capture

Warehouse This indicates the warehouse for which you are currentlycapturing the stock quantities.


This indicates the description for the warehouse code.

Ticket number This indicates the ticket number for which you are capturing thecount quantity.



Unit of measure This indicates the unit of measure in which you are capturingdetails of the stock count for the item. The alternate unit ofmeasure can be selected here if one is configured against theitem (Stock Code Maintenance).


Quantity You use this field to indicate the quantity counted of the stockitem.

Capturing method




Release You use this field to enter the release number for the stock itemto which the quantity entered in the Quantity field refers. This



Field Values Descriptionfield is only enabled if the item is defined as ECC controlled(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).


If you enter a lot number that is not held on file, then you willbe able to indicate that the lot must be created, together withan expiry date. The lot will be created once you have confirmedthe stock take using the Stock Take Confirmation program.






You can use the Serial option to capture the count quantitiesof manually serialized items (see Multiple Serial NumberSelection).

You can use the Serial Number Maintenance program tochange header information for serialized items that are held onfile as well as view and change details for existing serials.

Captured total

Stock code This indicates the stock item for which you are capturing thecount quantity.


This indicates the description for the stock code displayed inthe previous field.

Bin This indicates the bin location of the stock item for which youare capturing the count quantity.

When you capture the quantities by ticket number, the ticket isalready allocated to a specific bin. The system automaticallylinks the ticket number, stock code and bin number to thequantity you capture. You are therefore not able to enter a binnumber.


This indicates the total quantity currently captured against theitem.

Capturedquantities



Field Values DescriptionView captured lots Select this to view the captured quantities for lot numbers (see

Captured Quantities for Serial Numbers/Lot Numbers/Revision and Releases).


View capturedserial numbers





Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Ticket NumbersThe details of the quantities currently captured for the stock take are displayed in this listview.




• Ticket number

this indicates the ticket number against which the count quantity was captured.

• Stock code


This indicates the bin location against which the quantity was captured.• Ticket quantity

This indicates the quantity captured against the ticket.• Captured quantity



This indicates the reference entered for the stock count capture.

Stock Take Quantity Capture by BinThis screen is displayed if you selected to capture the count quantities by Bin.




count details.



Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse for which you wantto capture the count quantities.

View


When you select this option, the details of the quantitiescurrently captured for the stock take are displayed ina separate listview pane. See Captured Quantity forWarehouse - Bins.





CapturedQuantities byTicket




Bin You use this field to indicate the bin for which you want tocapture the count quantities.

If you enter a bin location that is not held on file, then you willbe able to indicate that the bin must be created, providing thesetup option: Allow creation of bins when processing inventorytransactions (Inventory Setup - Options tab). The bin will becreated once you have confirmed the stock take using theStock Take Confirmation program. If this setup option is notselected, then you must either enter an existing bin or use theInventory Bin Maintenance program to create a new bin.

Note:• You will be unable to access this field if you

disabled the option: Multiple bins (InventorySetup).

• You will be unable to access this field when youcapture count quantities by ticket number, as the



Field Values Descriptionsystem has already assigned the bin to the ticketnumber.

You can use the browse icon to view stock codes. Thestock codes are displayed according to your selection atthe Preference: Stock code browse type - Selected stockcodes (see Stock Codes in Stock Take or Stock CodeMaintenance).

Next Select this to display the next bin number without having tomanually enter it.

Stock take Quantity Capture by Bin

Field Values DescriptionSerials You use this option to view quantities for multiple serial

numbers (see Multiple Serial Number Selection).

Note:This option is enabled only for stock codes defined asManual serialized items (Stock Code Maintenance)and enables you to indicate several serial numbers thatmust be updated.


Stock takequantity capture

Warehouse This indicates the warehouse for which you are currentlycapturing the stock quantities.


This indicates the description for the warehouse code.

Bin This indicates the bin number for which you are currentlycapturing the count quantities.

Ticket number You use this field to indicate the ticket number applicable to theselected stock code or bin in this stock take.

Note:You can only access this field if you enabled the option:Capture ticket numbers on the main stock take capturewindow.



Unit of measure This indicates the unit of measure in which you are capturingdetails of the stock count for the item. The alternate unit of



Field Values Descriptionmeasure can be selected here if one is configured against theitem (Stock Code Maintenance).


Quantity You use this field to indicate the quantity counted of the stockitem.

Capturing method




Release You use this field to enter the release number for the stock itemto which the quantity entered in the Quantity field refers. Thisfield is only enabled if the item is defined as ECC controlled(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).


If you enter a lot number that is not held on file, then you willbe able to indicate that the lot must be created, together withan expiry date. The lot will be created once you have confirmedthe stock take using the Stock Take Confirmation program.






You can use the Serial option to capture the count quantitiesof manually serialized items (see Multiple Serial NumberSelection).



Field Values DescriptionYou can use the Serial Number Maintenance program tochange header information for serialized items that are held onfile as well as view and change details for existing serials.

Capture manualserial numbers

Select this to view and update quantities for multiple serialnumbers.

See Multiple Serial Number Selection.

Note:This option is enabled only for stock codes defined asmanual serialized items (Stock Code Maintenance)and enables you to indicate several serial numbers thatmust be updated.


Captured total

Stock code This indicates the stock item for which you are capturing thecount quantity.


This indicates the description for the stock code displayed inthe previous field.


This indicates the quantity of the item captured in the stockcount.

Capturedquantities

View captured lots Select this to view the captured quantities for lot numbers (seeCaptured Quantities for Serial Numbers/Lot Numbers/Revision and Releases).


View capturedserial numbers





Captured Quantity for Warehouse - BinsThe details of the quantities currently captured for the stock take are displayed in this listview.






• Bin• Stock code• Quantity captured• Unit of measure• Reference

Stock Codes in Stock TakeYou use the Stock Codes in Stock Take program to view details of stock items currently selected in astock take.

Stock items are selected for a stock take using the Inventory Stock Take Capture program.

The Stock Codes in Stock Take listview is displayed when you select the browse icon at the Stock codefield of the Inventory Stock Take Capture program, if you selected the option: Browse on selected stockcodes in the Inventory Stock Take Capture program.

Stock Codes in Stock Take for Warehouse





ListviewWhen you access the Stock Codes in Stock Take program, details of all stock items currently selected fora stock take in the selected warehouse are displayed in a listview.


• Stock code

This indicates the code of the stock item included in the stock take.• Stock code description

This indicates the description for the stock item.• Bin

This indicates the bin number against which the count quantity was captured.• Captured quantity

This indicates the counted quantity captured against the stock item for the stock take.• Number of times captured

This indicates the number of time a count quantity was captured against the stock item.• Unit of measure



This indicates the unit of measure for the count quantity.

Ticket Numbers for WarehouseYou use the Ticket Numbers for Warehouse program to view details of ticket numbers currently selectedin a stock take.

Ticket numbers for a stock take are created using the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program, if youselect the report option: Generate ticket numbers.

The Ticket Numbers for Warehouse listview is displayed when you select the browse icon at the Ticketnumber field of the Inventory Stock Take Capture program.

Ticket Numbers for Warehouse

ListviewThe following information is included in the listview for existing ticket numbers generated for the stock codefor the selected warehouse:

• Ticket number

This indicates the existing ticket number.• Stock code

This indicates the code of the stock item for the ticket number.• Stock code description

This indicates the description defined against the stock item.• Bin

This indicates the bin number for the stock item.• Quantity

This indicates the count quantity captured for the stock code ticket number combination.• No of times captured

This indicates the number of times a quantity was captured against the stock code ticket numbercombination.

• Unit of measure

This indicates the unit of measure for the count quantity.

Stock Take ImportYou use the Stock Take Import program to import stock count data that was captured using a 3rd partyapplication software system.

The Stock Take Import program can also be accessed by selecting the Import function from theInventory Stock Take Capture program.

Stock Take Import

Field Values DescriptionStart Import Select this to import the flat ASCII file. Data is extracted from

the import file to the stock take file for the warehouse. The



Field Values Descriptionimport file is validated before being imported and the programaborts if any errors are encountered.

Validate Import Select this to validate the contents of the import file withoutactually perform the import.

Note:If you selected the option: Validate returns all recordsbut not the option: Show output in report option, thenthe entire contents of the import file is displayed inthe Stock Take Import Report - HTML pane. The errormessages are displayed in the Stock Take ImportReport pane.

List Import File Select this to list the contents of the import file. The list isdisplayed in the in the Stock take Import Report pane if you didnot select the Show output in report option. You can customizethe design used to render this information using the BrowserQueries and Themes program.

If you selected the Show output in report option, then the filecontents are printed to the printer.

Alternatively, you can select the option: Show output in reportoption, to output the contents of the import file to a printer.

Print Select this to print the information currently displayed in theStock Take Import Report output pane.

Save FormValues



See Design Mode.

Stock Take Import Selection

Field Values DescriptionImport selection

Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse into which youwant to import stock code quantities.

Note:You can only perform the import if a stock take iscurrently in progress for the warehouse.


This indicates the description for the warehouse code youentered.

Import file name You use this field to indicate the file that you want to import,including the full pathname.

Options



Field Values DescriptionCreate non-existent bins

Select this if you want the program to create a bin automaticallyif a stock code/bin number combination specified in the importfile does not exist.

Note:• You need to ensure that the setup option: Allow

creation of bins when processing inventorytransactions (Inventory Setup - Options tab) isselected. If this setup option is not selected, thenbins cannot be created automatically.

• This option is disabled if you have not enabled theoption: Multiple bins (Inventory Setup).

• The default bin location assigned to the stock codeis not overridden.

Create non-existent serial

Select this if you want the program to create serial numbersautomatically if the stock code/serial number combinationspecified in the import file does not exist.

Note:This option is only enabled if you selected the option:Serial tracking system required (Inventory Setup).

Show output inreport

Select this if you want to output the contents of the import file toa printer instead of displaying this on the screen.

Create non-existent lot

Select this if you want the program to create lot numbersautomatically if a stock code/lot number combination specifiedin the import file does not exist.

Note:This option is only enabled if the Lot Traceabilitymodule is installed as part of your license agreement.

Validate returns allrecords

Select this if you want to produce a listing of the import file(including error messages) when you select the Validate Importfunction. Otherwise the system merely indicates the number ofrecords read and the number of errors found.

This listing is rendered in a browser window by default, butyou can select the Show output in report option to output thecontents of the file to a printer destination of your choice.

Ignore recordsfrom otherwarehouses

Select this if you want the program to ignore any line in theimport file that contains a warehouse code other than thewarehouse for which the stock take capture is being performed.

This option is selected by default.

If you deselect this option and the warehouse code in theimport file is blank, or is different to the warehouse codefor which the stock take is being performed, the import failsvalidation and the records are not imported.

You would typically deselect this option if you had an import filewith counted quantities for a single warehouse and you wanted



Field Values Descriptionto ensure that the warehouse field on the import file containedonly the code for that warehouse.

Add ECC entry fornew warehouse

Select this if you want to be able to import revisions/releasesnot previously transacted in the warehouse for which you areimporting the capture. This applies only to ECC controlleditems.

This option is only enabled if Engineering Change Control isinstalled and Lot Traceability is not installed. If you are usingthe Lot Traceability module, then you use the option: Createnon-existent lots to enable the same functionality of importingnew revisions/releases into a warehouse.

Default capturemethod

Increase Select this if you want to add the quantity imported for an itemto any quantity previously counted/imported for the item.

Replace Select this to replace any previously counted/imported quantityfor an item, with the quantity imported.


These options relate to the information displayed in the Reportoutput panes.


Stock Take Import ReportThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.

Messages relating to the import are displayed. When you select to list or validate the import file, errormessages relating to errors found in the file are displayed.


Stock Take Import Report - HTMLThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.

Information relevant to the successful import is displayed. This includes the journal number and thenumber of records imported.

In addition, when you select to list or validate the import file, the file contents are displayed in this pane,providing you did not select the option Show output in report.


File LayoutThe following table indicates the format of the import file that you must define to import stock takequantities.

Note:• When you import quantities for serialized stock items, you must create one line in the import file

for each serial number of the stock item.• Lines are ignored in the import file under the following conditions:



• two or more lines in the import file are for the same manual serialized stock item; the sameserial number has been specified against the lines; the import option: Create non-existentserials is selected. The subsequent lines are ignored.

• two or more lines in the import file are for the same ECC controlled/lot traceable stock item;the lot number against the lines is the same but the revision/release numbers are different;and the import option: Create non-existent lots is selected. The subsequent lines areignored.

If lines are ignored for either of the above reasons, then a List Ignored Lines function isavailable on the Import Complete window. This enables you to print a report indicating whichlines were ignored.

File structure for importing stock take quantities

Field Start Position Field Length Notes

Line type 1 1 This must be thecharacter S to indicate astocked line.

Warehouse 2 2 This indicates thewarehouse in whichthe stock code hasbeen counted. Ifblank, it defaults to thewarehouse entered inthe Inventory StockTake Capture program.Otherwise, it must matchthe warehouse selectedfor the stock take.

Note: If the option:Ignore records fromother warehouses isselected and the importfile contains stock takequantities for multiplewarehouses, then if thisfield is left blank, thequantities are addedto each warehouse forwhich you perform thestock take capture.

Stock code 4 30 (Mandatory) Thisindicates the stockcode. If the stock itemis held in cases andpieces, then the quantitycounted must only referto whole cases (i.e.no decimals must bespecified).

Quantity counted 34 12 (Mandatory) Thisindicates the quantitythat has been counted.



This quantity must bepositive or zero.

If the Unit of measurefield is left blank, thenit is assumed that theCounted quantity isin the stocking unit ofmeasure.

If you enter a unit ofmeasure in the Unitof measure field, thenthe Quantity countedis converted into thestocking unit of measureusing that entry.

Bin location 46 6 If a bin exists againstthe selected warehouse,then the bin numbermust be entered.

Reference 52 9 This can be blank.

Serial number 61 20 If the stock item isserialized, then theserial number must beentered.

Pieces 81 7 This indicates thenumber of broken units.

This applies to stockitems for which Unitquantity processing isrequired (Stock CodeMaintenance - Generaltab). For example, if youcounted 10 full boxesand 3 loose pieces, youenter 10 in the Quantitycounted field and 3 inthis field.

It is possible to entermore pieces than iscontained in one unit.For example if one boxcontains 10 units andyou enter 203 in thisfield, then the systemconverts this to 2 boxesand 3 loose pieces.

Lot 88 10 This indicates the lotnumber.

If you selected theoption: Same lot to be



used on multiple stockcodes (Lot TraceabilitySetup), then you canreuse the same lotnumber for differentstock codes.

Lot expiry 98 8 This indicates the Lotnumber expiry date inthe format CCYYMMDD.

This date is only usedand validated if an expirydate does not existagainst the lot. This dateis not validated if anexpiry date is alreadydefined against the lot(Lot Maintenance)

Version 106 3 This indicates the ECCversion number.

Release 109 3 This indicates the ECCrelease number.

Unit of measure 112 3 This indicates the unit ofmeasure for the Quantitycounted.

You typically enter theunit of measure if theQuantity counted is notin the stocking unit ofmeasure.

When this is left blank,the program assumesthat the Quantitycounted is in thestocking unit of measure.

Stock Take by TicketYou use the Stock Take by Ticket program to print a report of the stock that was counted for each ticketnumber captured.

Note:Before running this program, you should print the Stock Take Uncaptured Stock Quantities reportto establish whether there are any outstanding stock codes still to be counted.





to generate the report.

Tickets by stockcode

Select this if you want to print columns on the report indicatingthe total number of tickets captured for the stock code, the totalsaved quantity and the variance quantity.


• Ticket number

This enables you to indicate the ticket number(s) you want to use to select stock codes for inclusion inthe report.

Common Filtering OptionsThe following options enable you to specify which items from a selection you want to include whengenerating the report.



report.















Report DetailsIf you enabled the option: Generate ticket numbers (Inventory Stock Take Tickets) then all stock codesare printed on the report, including those with a zero captured quantity.

Inventory Stock Take Report By Stock CodeYou use the Inventory Stock Take Report By Stock Code program to print a list of all stock codes thatare to be counted (or which have been counted).

Report OptionsThe following report options can be selected:


to print the report.

Value stock at

Current cost Select this to value stock at the unit cost currently held againstthe warehouse (Warehouses for Stock Code).

Note:If the Costing method is set to FIFO (Inventory Setupor Inventory Warehouses) then the unit cost used isthe last cost of the item when it was receipted.

Original cost Select this to value stock in the stock take file at the unitcost prevailing at the time the stock take selection was run,regardless of any cost changes that may have occurred sincethe stock take was selected.

Only printexception lines

Select this if you want to print stock codes only where thecaptured quantity differs from the original quantity on hand bya specific variance as configured within the Inventory Setupprogram.



You use this field to indicate the stock code(s) that must be selected for printing on the report.• Bin location selection

You use this field to indicate the bin location(s) to use to select stock codes for printing on the report.• Unit of measure selection

You use this field to indicate the unit(s) of measure to use to select stock codes for printing on thereport.

• Product class selection



You use this field to indicate the product class(es) to use to select stock codes for printing on the report.




report.













Report DetailsIf the Costing method is set to FIFO (Inventory Setup or Inventory Warehouses) then the values printedin the Unit cost column are the last costs of the item when it was receipted. For all other costing methods,the unit cost is the unit cost currently held against the warehouse (Warehouses for Stock Code).



Stock Take Uncaptured Stock QuantitiesYou use the Stock Take Uncaptured Stock Quantities program to print a list of stock codes that havenot yet been captured. These are items for which no stock take quantities have been entered using theInventory Stock Take Capture or Stock Take Import programs.




Include zerosaved quantity

Select this to include stock codes with an on hand quantity ofzero at the time of running the stock take selection.



You use this field to indicate the stock code(s) that must be selected for printing on the report.• Bin location selection

You use this field to indicate the bin location(s) to use to select stock codes for printing on the report.• Product class selection

You use this field to indicate the product class(es) to use to select stock codes for printing on the report.• Unit of measure selection

You use this field to indicate the unit(s) of measure to use to select stock codes for printing on thereport.




report.








Field Values DescriptionWhen defining the list, you use the Add function to add items tothe list. These items are then displayed in a listview. Incorrectlyadded items can be removed from the list by highlighting themand selecting the Remove function.







Inventory Stock Take Variance ReportYou use the Inventory Stock Take Variance Report program to generate a list of stock codes indicatingthe variance between the captured and counted quantities.

Before using this program you will have used the Inventory Stock Take Capture program to capture thecounted quantities.

You need to print the Inventory Stock Take Variance Report report immediately prior to using the StockTake Confirmation program to be able to identify the stock items responsible for the variance value whichis ultimately posted to the general ledger.

Note:If you did not generate the Inventory Stock Take Variance Report report immediately prior tousing the Stock Take Confirmation program, you can use the Inventory Movement Reportreport and select to print only the Adjustment transactions types for the date on which the stocktake was confirmed. However, the Inventory Movement Report report will also include any otheradjustments which may have been processed on that date.



Stock code Select this to print the report in stock code sequence.

Bin location Select this to print the report in bin location sequence.






Value stock at

Cost onwarehouse file

Select this to value stock at the unit cost currently held againstthe warehouse.

Note:If you enabled the option: FIFO at the Costing methodfield (Inventory Setup - General tab or ) then the unitcost is the last cost.

If you selected Costing per warehouse (InventorySetup - General tab) and your costing method is set toFIFO or LIFO then the last cost is used. For all othercosting methods against warehouses, the unit cost isused (Warehouses for Stock Code).

Cost on stock takefile

Select this to value stock in the stock take file at the unitcost prevailing at the time the stock take selection was run,regardless of any cost changes that may have occurred sincethe stock take was selected.

If your costing method is set to FIFO or LIFO (Inventory Setupor Inventory Warehouses), then the last cost will have beenused when the Stock Take Selection program was run. For allother costing methods, the unit cost will have been used.

Options

Print stockdescriptions

Select this if you want to print stock descriptions for each stockcode.

Only printexception lines

Select this if you want to print stock codes only where thecaptured quantity differs from the original quantity on hand bya specific variance as configured within the Inventory Setupprogram.

Note:If you select this option, but the setup option: Stocktake variance is set to zero (Inventory Setup - Optionstab), then nothing is printed on the report.

Print lots / Rev/Rel Select this if you want to print lot numbers on the report as wellas revision and release information for ECC-controlled items

Exclude zero lots /Rev/Rel

Select this to exclude the following from the report:

• lots that had a zero balance when you ran the Stock TakeSelection program and currently have a zero balance (i.e. azero quantity was captured against those lots)

• revisions/releases that had a zero balance when you ran theStock Take Selection program and currently have a zerobalance (i.e. a zero quantity was captured against thoserevisions/releases)



Field Values DescriptionInclude if savedquantity is zero

Select this to include stock codes with an on hand quantity ofzero at the time of running the stock take selection.

Include if quantitynot captured

Select this to include stock codes that have not had a quantitycaptured.

Print batch serialnumbers

Select this if you want to print the batch serial number on thereport for each batch serialized item printed.

Print manual serialnumbers

Select this if you want to print the serial numbers on the reportfor each manual serialized item printed.

Exclude zero serialnumbers

Select this to exclude serials that had a zero balance when youran the Stock Take Selection program and currently have azero balance (i.e. a zero quantity was captured against thoseserials)

Print FIFO totalvalue

Select this to project the variance value in terms of FIFOvaluation.

This option is only available if you selected the setup option:FIFO valuation (Inventory Setup).

This option is only available in the SRS version of this report.



You use this field to indicate the stock codes that must be selected for printing on the report.• Product class selection

You use this field to indicate whether the product class must be used to select stock codes for printingon the report.

• Unit of measure selection

You use this field to indicate whether the unit of measure must be used to select stock codes forprinting on the report.

• Bin location selection

You use this field to indicate whether the bin location must be used to select stock codes for printing onthe report.

Refer to Multiple bins for additional information on multiple bins in SYSPRO.




report.




Field Values DescriptionYou indicate this range using the From and To fields.











Report DetailsThe variance value printed at the end of the report represents the difference between the inventory valuefor the selected stock items at the time the Stock Take Selection program was run and the value ofthese stock items at the current time. If you run the Stock Take Confirmation program immediately afterrunning the Inventory Stock Take Variance Report report, then this variance is the amount posted to thegeneral ledger code defined against the Adjustment field of the Inventory Ledger Interface program. If thevariance value is negative, then this represents a stock loss. Similarly if the value is positive, it represents astock gain.

If you selected the option: Only print exception lines above, but the setup option: Stock take variance is setto zero (Inventory Setup - Options tab), then nothing is printed on the report.

Stock Take ConfirmationYou use the Stock Take Confirmation program to confirm details of the stock take capture process and toupdate the live inventory file with the captured quantities.

Note:• Regardless of whether stock is allowed to go negative, the stock take confirmation is aborted if it

will result in a negative on hand quantity for an ECC-controlled item.



• Irrespective of the whether a stock item is on full or partial hold (Stock Code Maintenance), itis updated by the Stock Take Confirmation program (i.e. This program ignores the hold statusplaced on stock items).

Stock Take Confirmation

Field Values DescriptionStart Processing Select this to process the stock take confirmation.

Note:If any errors are encountered, then the entireconfirmation process is cancelled (i.e. none of the stockitems are updated).

If you selected the option: Abort confirmation if exception linesexist, then the confirmation fails if the difference between thesaved and the counted (captured) quantity is greater than thepermissible variance defined against the Stock take varianceoption (Inventory Setup - Options tab). The error: 'Quantitycaptured is outside the acceptable variance' is printed on theStock take Confirmation Error Report.

If you are using FIFO or LIFO costing (Inventory Setup) andthe FIFO/LIFO bucket select by the system has a zero cost,then the Stock Take Confirmation program updates the FIFO/LIFO buckets as follows:

• if you selected the option: Use zero cost bucket for returns(Inventory Setup), then the returned quantity is put into thatbucket and no change is made to the unit cost of the bucket.

• if you have not selected the option: Use zero cost bucketfor returns (Inventory Setup), then a new FIFO/LIFObucket is created with the returned quantity and the currentwarehouse cost.

If you have not allowed stock on hand to go negative(Inventory Setup - General tab), then the confirmationfails if the update would cause the stock on hand value tobecome negative. If the Available quantity in Inventory Query- Warehouse values is less than or equal to zero, then theStock Take Confirmation program cannot confirm a negativeadjustment as this would cause the stock to go negative. Ifthe Available quantity is less than or equal to zero but theQuantity on hand is greater than zero, then it means that stockis allocated to sales orders or incomplete WIP jobs.

An example of this is as follows:

You process a sales order for a quantity of 20. According to thesystem, you have 20 available, so the entire quantity is placedinto the ship field on the order. You perform a stock take, andyou count and capture a quantity of 15. When you attempt toconfirm the stock take, the error: 'Quantity will go negative' isprinted on the report and the confirmation is cancelled.

When you process a sales order, the stock on hand is onlyreduced when the invoice is generated. When you do a stocktake confirmation, the stock on hand is updated immediately.The system does not allow you to sell stock that you do not



Field Values Descriptionhave (i.e. you are trying to sell 20, but only physically have15 in stock). To solve this problem, you need to maintain thesales order and either place 5 on back order, or the entire 20on backorder. The stock take confirmation will then update thestock to 15 as counted and captured.

Print Select this to print the information currently displayed inthe Stock Take Confirmation Error Report and Stock takeConfirmation Report output panes.

Save FormValues



See Design Mode.

The confirmation routineThe first phase of the program scans the stock take master file/table to verify that the stock update can beperformed.

The process aborts if:

• there are missing ledger interface entries• there are missing warehouse records• there are missing bins• stock will go negative as a result of the update but negative stock is not allowed• the difference between the saved and the counted (captured) quantity is greater than the permissible

variance defined against the Stock take variance option (Inventory Setup - Options tab).

The second phase is the update phase, in which the Inventory warehouse file is adjusted, and thedifference between the saved and the captured quantities is added to the month-to-date adjustment field.The current inventory on hand quantity is updated with the difference between the counted stock and theoriginal on hand quantity (stored when the stock take was started) as follows:

• If you selected the capture method Increase (Stock Take Confirmation), then the inventory on handquantity is adjusted by the difference between the stock on hand at the time of registering the stock takeand the actual quantity counted.

• If you selected the capture method Replace, then the inventory on hand quantity is replaced by thecounted (captured) quantity.

If the quantity counted is greater than the original quantity on hand, a positive inventory adjustment isperformed. If the quantity counted is less than the original quantity on hand, a negative adjustment isperformed. These are treated as inventory adjustments.

FIFO records are updated for warehouses where the costing method is set to FIFO (InventoryWarehouses).

If Inventory is linked to General Ledger (General Ledger Integration) then a journal record is created.In addition, the records pertaining to the stock take master file are deleted (including any ticket numberrecords) and the warehouse control record is updated to indicate that a stock take is no longer in progress.

Confirmation Options



Field Values DescriptionWarehouseinformation

Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse for which you wantto confirm details of the stock take capture process.

Option

Abort if exceptionlines exist

Select this to abort the confirmation process if a variancebetween the captured quantity and the saved quantity exceedsa specified value or percentage. This value or percentage isconfigured within the Inventory Setup program.

Note:You can only select this option if a non-zero value isentered at the Maximum permitted field of the Stocktake variance option (Inventory Setup).

Postinginformation

Current month This indicates the period into which the confirmation will beprocessed.

Current year This indicates the year into which the confirmation will beprocessed.

Change Period Select this to use the Change Posting Period program to postto a previous posting period. This can be used to confirm astock take for a previous period, providing that the period isopen. This means that if you perform a stock take over a monthend and confirm the stock take after running the InventoryPeriod End program, you can use the Change Period functionto confirm the stock take for the previous month.

The Inventory module must be linked to the General Ledgerin either detail or summary (General Ledger Integration -General Ledger tab) if you want to change the period in whichthe stock take is confirmed.

Note:If you confirm a stock take into a previous period,then the closing inventory balance for that period ischanged, which changes the opening balance for thefollowing period. This is assuming that a stock takevariance exists. There will therefore be a differencein the balances on inventory reports (such as theInventory Valuation and Inventory Aged Valuation),printed before and after the stock take confirmationwas processed.

The current unit cost (Warehouse cost) is used toprocess the confirmation. When you generate theInventory Stock Take Variance Report report, youcan use the options: Cost on stock take file and Coston warehouse file to view the differences betweenthe costs of the items at the time the stock take was



Field Values Descriptionselected and the costs of the items at the time thestock take was confirmed.

Posting period This indicates the period into which the confirmation will beprocessed.


These options relate to the information displayed in the StockTake Confirmation Error Report and Stock take ConfirmationReport output panes.


Stock take Confirmation Error ReportThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.

Errors encountered during the stock take confirmation process are displayed.

The following columns are included on the error report:

Note:The report only displays the items, bins or lots which cause the stock take confirmation to fail.

For example, if an item has two bins, one of which causes the stock take confirmation to fail, thenonly the details for that bin is included on the report. The same applies to lots.

• Stock code

This indicates the code of the stock item.• Description

This indicates the description of the stock item.• Bin

This indicates the bin location of the item.• Saved quantity

This indicates the quantity on hand according to the system at the time the Stock Take Selection wasgenerated.


This indicates the quantity counted and entered using the Inventory Stock Take Capture program.• Current free quantity

This is the quantity on hand less quantity allocated plus quantity on backorder.• New quantity on hand

This is the quantity that would now be the on hand quantity for the bin or the lot or the stock code if thestock take confirmation had run without errors.

• Error message

The details of any errors encountered in the confirmation of the item are displayed in this column.


Stock Take Confirmation ReportThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.



The details of the journal created for the confirmation are displayed. A message indicating that theconfirmation was completed for the select warehouse is also displayed.

If any errors were encountered during the stock take confirmation, then nothing is displayed in this pane.


Stock Take CancellationYou use the Stock Take Cancellation program to cancel a stock take which is in progress for a specificwarehouse.

Stock Take Cancellation

Field Values DescriptionClose Select this to exit the program without cancelling a stock take.

Start Processing Select this to cancel the stock take for the warehousespecified.

All stock take master records pertaining to the specifiedwarehouse are removed, including any lots and/or serialnumbers.

Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse for which you wantto cancel a stock take.

Warehouse Information

Field Values DescriptionWarehouseinformation

Warehouse This indicates the warehouse code you indicated, in which thestock take must be cancelled.


This indicates the description of the warehouse code.

| Serial Tracking System | 313


Serial Tracking System

Serial Tracking SystemYou use the Serial Number Tracking System to capture and maintain serial numbers for existing stockitems held in the Inventory Control system.

Serial numbers are held on file against each warehouse and can be defined as either a manual or batchnumber. A manual serial number must be unique for each individual item, while a batch serial number candescribe the batch quantity of an item (e.g. 10 000 tablets).

A product defined with batch serial numbering allows the same serial number to be allocated to more thanone individual item per stock code and warehouse.

Serial Number Header MaintenanceYou use the Serial Number Header Maintenance program to maintain header information for serializeditems currently defined.

The Serial Number Maintenance listview displays details of header information for serialized items.

You use the Serial Number Take-On program to capture serial numbers for existing stock items.

Serial Number Header Maintenance




Serial This indicates the serial number for which you are maintainingthe header details.

Edit Multimedia Select this to use the Multimedia program to assignmultimedia objects to the serial header currently displayed.

Serial NumberHeaderMaintenance

Only the Description, Expiry date and Scrap date can bemaintained. All other fields are displayed for informationpurposes only.

Serial number This indicates the serial number for which you are maintainingthe header details.

Serial type This indicates the serial type - Manual or Batch.

Warehouse This indicates the warehouse in which the serialized item isstored.

Wh description This indicates the description for the warehouse code.

Stock code This indicates the stock code to which the serial number isallocated.

Stock description This indicates the description for the stock code.

Location This indicates where the serialized item is stored.



Field Values DescriptionCustomer This indicates the customer who purchased stock items

associated with the selected serial number.

Due date Depending on the current status of the serial, this representsthe date for one of the following transactions:

• Unit in for service• Unit returned to customer• Unit loaned to customer• Unit returned by customer• Warranty details• Unit sent to service depot• Unit received back from service depot

Unit status This indicates the current status of the serial.

The status can be one of the following:

• In service• On loan• At depot

Description This indicates the description of the stock item that has beenassigned to the serial number selected.

Expiry date This indicates the date on which the stock item will expire.

Note:When a serial is sold or issued, any expiry and/or scrapdates entered against the serial number are checked.You will not be able to allocate the serial number if ithas expired or been scrapped.

Scrap date This indicates the date on which the stock item must bescrapped.


Serial Number Take-OnYou use the Serial Number Take-On program to capture serial numbers for existing stock items, as wellas to create sales transactions for serial numbers that have already been sold.

Note:If you selected the setup option: Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes (Inventory Setup -Options tab), then you can capture the same serial number for different stock codes.

Serial Number Take-on







Edit

New Select this to add a new serial number for the selected stockcode.

New Select this icon to add a new serial number for the selectedstock code.


Stock code You use this field to indicate the serialized item for which youwant to capture serial numbers or create sales transactions.

The stock code entered must be defined as a either a batch ormanual serialized item and cannot be a Notional part (StockCode Maintenance).

Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse in which theserialized item is stored.

Note:For a batch serial number you can assign the sameserial number to different warehouses.

Take-on Header

Field Values DescriptionStock Code This indicates the stock code for which you are adding serial

numbers.

Description This indicates the stock code description.

Warehouse This indicates the warehouse in which the stock code resides.

Description This indicates the description of the warehouse.

Serial method This indicates the serial tracking method defined against thestock code (Stock Code Maintenance).

Serial number You use this field to enter the serial number you want to assignto a specified quantity of the stock item.

Description This defaults to the description held against the stock item butyou can enter your own description for the serial number here.

Revision This indicates the current revision of the stock item. This onlyapplies if the item is defined as ECC controlled (Stock CodeMaintenance).



Field Values DescriptionRelease This indicates the current release of the stock item. This only

applies if the item is defined as ECC controlled (Stock CodeMaintenance).

Location This indicates where the serialized item is stored.

Expiry date This indicates the date on which the serial number expires.

Scrap date This indicates the date on which the serial number must bescrapped.


Quantity on hand This indicates the quantity of items on hand for the serialnumber.

For manual serial numbers this quantity must be 1 or 0.

Note:If you enter a value greater than zero here, then youcan optionally create sales transactions for the serialnumber.

Customer This indicates the customer who purchased stock itemsassociated with the selected serial number.

Note:You can only access the Customer field if you arecapturing a manual serial number and quantity of zerois entered at the Qty on hand field.

Customer name This indicates the customer's name.

Notation You use this to enter a journal notation for the transactionwhich can be printed on the Serial Tracking Report.

Take-on TransactionYou can optionally create sales transactions for serial numbers if you use the Serial Number Take-Onprogram and enter an On hand quantity that is greater than 0.

Field Values DescriptionSave Select this icon to save the transaction details you entered.

Customer This indicates the customer who purchased the serial item andagainst whom you are creating the sales transaction.

Name This indicates the name of the customer who purchased theserialized item.

Note:



Field Values DescriptionYou can only access the this field if the customerspecified is not held on file.

Sales date This indicates the date on which the transaction took place.

Quantity This indicates the quantity of serialized items that were sold tothe customer. This cannot exceed the quantity available.

Invoice This indicates the invoice number that you issued to thecustomer for this sales transaction.

Amount This indicates the value of the sales transaction processed.

Transaction PostingYou use the Transaction Posting program to post transactions against specific serial numbers. You canpost a miscellaneous transaction or a standard transaction selected from a table of standard codes.

If you selected the setup option: Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes (Inventory Setup -Options tab), then the same serial number can be allocated to different stock codes. In this case, whenyou enter a serial number which has been allocated to more than one stock code, the Serial NumberMaintenance listview is displayed. This enables you to select the serial number/stock code combination forwhich you want to maintain transactions.

If you enter a serial number which exists in a warehouse to which you do not have access (Operators),then the message: "Serial number not on file or access has been denied" is displayed and you areprompted to enter a different serial number.

Serial Tracking Transaction Posting



Edit

New Select this to enter a new transaction. When you select thisoption, all fields in the Transaction Details and Serial Detailspanes are cleared.

New Select this to enter a new transaction. When you select thisoption, all fields in the Transaction Details and Serial Detailspanes are cleared.

Transaction type

Standard Select this to indicate that you want to post a standardtransaction (i.e. one catered for by the system) against aserialized item.

Miscellaneous Select this to post miscellaneous transactions which do notrelate to any of the standard transaction types provided,against serial numbers.

The transaction quantity entered does not affect the on handquantity against the serial number or the stock code.



Field Values DescriptionFunction This option only applies if you selected to process a Standard

transaction type. It enables you to indicate the type of standardtransaction you want to process.

Take on salestransactions

You use this to assign a serial number to an item that waspreviously sold to a customer, but where the sale has not yetbeen recorded against the serial number.

This function reduces the serial quantity on hand and quantityavailable, but does not affect the Inventory quantity on handand available quantities.

The transaction code for this process is SALES.

Maintenance Select this to record changes or service work performed on aserialized item or a batch of serialized items.

This function does not affect Inventory on hand quantities.

The transaction code for this process is MAINT.

Customer unit infor service

Select this to record that a customer has returned a serializeditem to be serviced.

This function can only be used for Manual serial items.

While a customer unit is in for a service, you will be unable toperform the following transactions:

• SALES (Take on sales transactions)• LOAN (Unit loaned to a customer)• RETURN (Unit returned by customer)• TRA (Transfer between warehouses)• REC (Receive goods in)• MOVE (Change location within warehouse)• ISS (Issue to Work in Progress)• PHY (Adjust quantity on hand)

The transaction code for this process is SRVIN.

Unit returned tocustomer

Select this to record the return to a customer of a unit that wassent in for a service.

This function can only be used for manual serial items.

The transaction code for this process is SRVRET.

Unit loaned to acustomer

Select this to record that a serialized item has been loaned to acustomer.


While a unit is on loan to a customer, you will be unable toperform the following transactions:

• SALES (Take on sales transactions)• SRVIN (Customer unit in for service)• DEPOT (Unit sent to service depot)• DEPRET (Received back from depot)• TRA (Transfer between warehouses)



Field Values Description• REC (Receive goods in)• ISS (Issue to Work in Progress)• PHY (Adjust quantity on hand)

The transaction code for this process is LOAN.

Unit returned bycustomer

Select this to record that a unit on loan to a customer has beenreturned.


The transaction code for this process is RETURN.

Transfer betweenwarehouses

Select this to record the transfer of serialized items betweenwarehouses.

You would typically use this function to record the transferof items if this has not previously been recorded using theInventory Movements program.

This function affects the serial on hand and availablequantities, but not the Inventory on hand and availablequantities.

Note:If you require inventory quantities to be affected by thetransfer of serialized items between warehouses, thenyou must use the Warehouse Transfers function of theInventory Movements program to perform this task.

The transaction code for this process is TRA.

Receive goods in Select this to receipt a quantity against the entered serialnumber.

This function does not affect Inventory quantities, but it doesaffect the on hand and available quantities against the serialnumber.

The transaction code for this process is REC.

Additional notes Select this to assign a comment against a serialized item.

You can delete any additional notes entered against serialitems using the Serial File Purge program. This is done byindicating that you only want to delete serial transactions of thetype NOTE.

The transaction code for this process is NOTE.

Warranty details Select this to record any maintenance that has been performedon an item that is included under the item's warranty.


The transaction code for this process is WARR.

Change locationwithin warehouse

Select this to record that an item has been moved to a newlocation within the same warehouse.

The on hand quantity of all items with the entered serialnumber is moved to the new location.



Field Values DescriptionThe transaction code for this process is MOVE.

Unit sent to servicedepot

Select this to record that you have sent the serial item to theservice depot for maintenance.


While a unit is at the service depot, you will be unable toperform the following transactions:

• SALES (Take on sales transactions)• SRVIN (Customer unit in for service)• TRA (Transfer between warehouses)• REC (Receive goods in)• ISS (Issue to Work in Progress)• PHY (Adjust quantity on hand)• LOAN (Unit loaned to a customer)• MOVE (Change location within warehouse)

The transaction code for this process is DEPOT.

Received backfrom depot

Select this to record that a serial item has been returned fromthe service depot.

This function can only be used for manual serial items that arecurrently residing at the service depot.

The transaction code for this process is DEPRET.

Issue to work inprogress

Select this to record the issue of a serial item to a job.

This function does not affect Inventory quantities or the jobvalue, but it does affect the on hand and available quantities forthe serial item.

The transaction code for this process is ISS.

Adjust quantity onhand

Select this to correct discrepancies between the inventoryquantity on hand and the serial quantity on hand for an item.

This function does not affect Inventory quantities, but it doesaffect the on hand and available quantities for the serial item.

The transaction code for this process is PHY.

Post Select this to post the transaction.

Transaction DetailsNote:Only the fields applicable to the Transaction type and the Function you selected are enabled.

Field Values DescriptionFunction This indicates the Function you selected and only applies to

Standard transaction types.

Transaction code This indicates the code that will be assigned to the transactionselected.



Field Values DescriptionNote:You can only access this field when you select toprocess a Miscellaneous transaction type.

Serial number You use this field to indicate the serial number of the item forwhich you want to post the transaction.

Serial method This indicates whether the serial entered is a Manual or aBatch serial.

Warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse in which theserialized item resides.

Note:You can only access this field for batch serial numbers.This enables you to post a transaction against thewarehouse in which a specific portion of the batch isstocked.

Wh description This indicates the description of the warehouse code.

Stock code This indicates the stock item associated with the serial numberspecified.

Stock description This indicates the description of the stock item.

Location This indicates the physical location of the item.

Customer This indicates the customer associated with the last transactionposted against the serial.

Total receipt qty This indicates the total quantity of stock items assigned to theserial number when it was received into stock.

On hand qty This indicates the quantity of the stock on hand for the serialnumber/stock code combination.

Available qty This indicates the quantity of the serial number/stock codecombination that is available to use.

Due date This indicates the date when the service is expected to becompleted.

Unit status This indicates the current status of the serial.

For a Warranty details transaction, this will indicate either "Atservice depot" or "Out on loan"

For a Unit sent to service depot and Received back from depottransactions, this will indicate either "In for service" or "Atservice depot" or "Out on loan".

For a transaction, this will indicate either

Warning This indicates additional information relative to the transaction.

Serial DetailsNote:Only the fields applicable to the Transaction type and the Function you selected are enabled.



Field Values DescriptionTransaction date You use this field to indicate the date of the transaction. This

defaults to the current system date.

Reference You use this field to indicate a journal reference that you wantto assign to the transaction. This reference can be printed onthe Serial Tracking Report.

Quantity You use this field to indicate the transaction quantity you wantto post.

For a batch serial number you can enter any quantity, providingit does not exceed the quantity available for the batch.

For a manual serial number the value can only be 1 or -1.

Customer You use this field to indicate the code of the customer involvedin the transaction.

Note:You will be unable to access this field if you specified ajob number at the Job field.

Name This indicates the name of the customer specified. If thecustomer supplied is not on file, then this field is enabled toallow the customer's name to be entered.

Supplier You use this field to indicate the code of the supplier involvedin the transaction.

Note:You will be unable to access this field if you specified ajob number at the Job field.

Supplier name This indicates the name of the supplier specified. If the suppliersupplied is not on file, then this field is enabled to allow thesupplier's name to be entered.

Job You use this field to indicate the job number associated withthe transaction or to which you want to issue the serializeditem.

Note:You will be unable to access this field if you specifieda supplier at the Supplier field or if you specified acustomer at the Customer field.

Notation You use this field to indicate the journal notation that you wantto assign to the transaction. This notation is printed on theSerial Tracking Report.

Revision You use this field to indicate the revision level of the unitmaintained or serviced. This notation is printed on the SerialTracking Report.

New location You use this field to indicate the new location for the item.

Target warehouse You use this field to indicate the warehouse to which you wantto transfer the item.



Field Values DescriptionTarget whdescription

This indicates the description of the target warehouse.

Value You use this field to indicate the total value of the transaction.

Due date You use this field to indicate the date on which the servicemust be complete so that the unit can be returned to thecustomer or the date when the customer must return the itemor the date when the unit will be returned from the depot.

New expiry date You use this field to indicate a new expiry date for a manualserial number.

Serial File PurgeYou use the Serial File Purge program to delete serial numbers and/or serial number transactions fromthe serial number file.

Serial File Purge

Field Values DescriptionStart Processing Select this to begin the purge process.

If you select to purge Transactions only, then serials with thefollowing characteristics are bypassed and their transactionsare not purged:

• If a lot number exists against the serial, then its transactionsare not purged unless the lot has been archived.

• If the serial is allocated to an active dispatch note then itstransactions are not purged.

• ECC controlled items use the lot traceable framework evenif they are not lot traceable. Dummy lots are created usingthe revision/release and all transactions performed are doneagainst that dummy lot number.

Therefore, you need to archive the dummy lot numbersusing the Purge and Archiveprogram before you can purgethe serial numbers.

Once a valid serial is found, its transactions are purgedprovided they match the transaction type being purged (ifdefined) and the transaction falls within any transaction datesupplied.

If you select to purge Serial numbers and transactions, thenthe following checks are made against the serial before it ispurged:

• that the on hand quantity is zero• that the available quantity is zero• that the quantity in transit is zero if Goods in Transit is

installed• if it is a manual serial number, it is not in for a service, on

loan or at the service depot.



Field Values Description• if a date has been supplied in the field: Purge serials

created before, then the creation date of the serial must beearlier than this date.

• if a lot number exists against the serial, then it must havebeen archived

• that the serial is not allocated to an active dispatch note

Print Select this to print the information currently displayed in theReport output pane.

Save FormValues



See Design Mode.

Information

Field Values DescriptionProcessingoptions

Function This enables you to indicate the processing function you wantto perform.

Transaction purgeonly

Select this if you want to purge serial transactions, but notserial numbers.

Serial numbersand transactions

Select this if you want to purge serial transactions as well asserial numbers.

Purge serialscreated before

You use this field to indicate the cut-off date according to whichyou want to purge serial numbers.

Serial numbers

Serial numberselection

This enables you to indicate the serial number(s) for which youwant to purge serial transactions and/or serial numbers.

Stock codes

Stock codeselection

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which youwant to purge serial transactions and/or serial numbers.

Warehouses

Warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which youwant to purge serial transactions and/or serial numbers.

Expiry dates

Expiry dateselection

This enables you to indicate the serial expiry date(s) for whichyou want to purge serial transactions and/or serial numbers.

Scrap dates



Field Values DescriptionScrap dateselection

This enables you to indicate the serial scrap date(s) for whichyou want to purge serial transactions and/or serial numbers.

Transaction types These options are disabled when the function: Serial numbersand transactions is selected.

Transaction typeselection

This enables you to indicate specific transaction type for whichyou want to purge serial transactions.

All Select this to delete all transactions types.

Singlemiscellaneous

Select this to delete a specific transaction code. You indicatethis code in the Transaction code field.

Single standard Select this to view a list of standard transaction types and toselect the standard transaction type you want to enter in theType field.

Std transactioncodes

This enables you to indicate the specific standard transactioncode for which you want to purge serial transactions.

You can use the dropdown to view and select the standardtransaction code you require.

This field is enabled when you select the Single standardoption.

Transaction code You use this field to indicate the specific miscellaneoustransaction type for which you want to purge serialtransactions.

This field is enabled when you select the Single miscellaneousoption.

Transaction dates These options are disabled when the function: Serial numbersand transactions is selected.

Transaction dateselection

This enables you to indicate the transaction date(s) for whichyou want to purge serial transactions.







Serial Number MaintenanceYou use the Serial Number Maintenance program to view header details of serialized items currentlydefined.



Header details for serialized items are maintained using the Serial Number Header Maintenanceprogram.

Serial NumbersThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:



Start at Select this to navigate to a specific entry in the listview.




Edit

Change Select this to use the Serial Number Header Maintenanceprogram to maintain the entry currently highlighted in thelistview.

Functions

View Transactions Select this to use the Browse on Serial NumberTransactions program to view details of transactionsprocessed against the highlighted serial number.

View ReservedAllocations

Select this to use the Reserved Serial Allocations for StockCode program to view reserved serials for the highlightedallocation.

Options

Options Select this to indicate selection criteria according to which youwant to display serial numbers in the listview.

Preferences Select this to indicate preferences according to which you wantto display serial numbers in the listview (see Preferences).

Sequence This option enables you to define the order in which you wantto view the information in the listview.

You can select to view information in the listview in one of thefollowing sequences:

• Serial number• Stock code, Warehouse• Stock code, Receipt Date

You can indicate the default sequence you require on thePreferences screen.

When the Serial Number Maintenance program is accessedfrom a program where the stock code already has beenentered (e.g. Inventory Query), the sequence for Serial



Field Values DescriptionNumber Maintenance is set to Stock Code, Warehouse.When you run the Serial Number Maintenance programand simply browse on serials, all the sequencing options areavailable, but if you have already entered a stock code, thenthe sequence options are disabled.


Start at SerialNumber / StockCode

You use this field to enter the serial number or stock code towhich you want to navigate in the listview. The description forthis field changes according to you selection at the Sequencemenu.


OptionsYou use the Options option from the Options menu to indicate selection criteria according to which youwant to display serial numbers in the listview.

Field Values DescriptionApply Options Select this to return to the listview, to display information

according to the options you indicated.

Close Select this to ignore any changes you made and to return tothe listview. The information in the listview remains unchanged.

Stock codes

Stock codeselection

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which youwant to display the information in the listview.

Warehouses

Warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which youwant to include stock items in the listview.

Revision andRelease

This option applies only to ECC controlled stock items (StockCode Maintenance). This option is therefore only enabledwhen the stock codes you selected to include are ECCcontrolled.

Revision andRelease selection

This enables you to indicate the revision and release for whichyou want to include stock items in the listview.

PreferencesThis screen is displayed when you select the Preferences option from the Options menu.

Field Values DescriptionQuantityselection

You can only select one of the following options:

Include if on handzero

Select this if you want to include serial numbers with zero stockon hand.



Field Values DescriptionOnly show quantityfree

Select this if you want to display only serial numbers that havea quantity available.

The quantity free is calculated as: Quantity on hand lessQuantity shipped less Quantity reserved.

You would typically select this option if you needed to reserveserials, as only serials available to reserve would be displayedin the listview.

Service options

Unit in service only Select this to display only serialized items that are beingserviced.

Unit on loan only Select this to display only serialized items that are on loan.

Unit at depot only Select this to display only serialized items that are at the depot.

Transfer date

Return last transferdate

Select this if you want to display the date on which the serialnumber was last transferred into the current warehouse fromanother warehouse.

You would typically want to view this information in caseswhere you want to sell the serialized item from a specificwarehouse based on the date on which it arrived into thatwarehouse rather than the date on which it was manufactured/purchased.

Sequence This enables you to indicate the default order in which youwant to display the information in the listview. This is savedagainst your operator code.

You can still change the sequence for the run of the programusing the Sequence option.

Save Select this to return to the listview, to display informationaccording to the preferences you indicated.

Cancel Select this to ignore any changes you made and to return tothe listview.

Serial Numbers ListviewWhen you select the Serial Number Maintenance program, the header information for serialized itemscurrently defined is displayed in a listview.


• Serial number.

This indicates the serial number assigned to the stock item.• Warehouse

This indicates the warehouse in which the serialized item is stored.• Stock code• Quantity on hand

This indicates the quantity of items on hand for the serial number.



• Quantity available• Type• Description

This indicates the description of the stock item that has been assigned to the serial number selected.• Receipt date• Expiry date

This indicates the date on which the stock item will expire.• Scrap date

This indicates the date on which the stock item must be scrapped.• Location

This indicates where the serialized item is stored.• Quantity received• Lot• Service details• Due date• Customer

This indicates the customer who purchased stock items associated with the selected serial number.• Customer name

This indicates the name of the customer who purchased the serialized item.• Previous warehouse• Revision• Release• Transfer date

This indicates the date on which the serial number was last transferred into the current warehouse fromanother warehouse.

This is useful in cases where you want to sell the serialized item from a specific warehouse based onthe date on which it arrived into that warehouse rather than the date on which it was manufactured/purchased.

This is only displayed if you selected the preference: Transfer date >Return last transfer date (SerialNumber Maintenance).

Browse on Serial Number TransactionsYou use the Browse on Serial Number Transactions program to view details of transactions processedagainst a serial number.

You use the Transaction Posting program to post transactions against specific serial numbers.

The Browse on Serial Number Transactions program can be accessed from the Serial NumberMaintenance program.

If you selected the setup option: Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes (Inventory Setup- Options tab), then the same serial number could have been allocated to different stock codes.Transactions are displayed for each unique stock code/serial number combination.

If you selected the setup option: Require component to parent serial tracking (WIP Setup - Lots andSerials tab), then you can typically use your right mouse button on a highlighted line and select the option:View Parent Serials. This displays the listview of the Component to Parent Serial Tracking Queryprogram.



Transactions for Serial NumberThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:





Field Values DescriptionStart at date You use this field to enter the date to which you want to

navigate in the listview.

OK Select this to navigate to the date you entered in the previousfield.


ListviewWhen you select the Browse on Serial Number Transactions program, the currently defined transactionsfor the serial number are displayed in a listview.


• Date

This indicates the date of the transaction.• Type

This indicates the transaction type (see Transaction Posting)• Notation

This indicates the journal notation assigned to the transaction• Revision level

This indicates the revision level of the unit maintained or serviced. This notation is printed on the SerialTracking Report.

• Reference

This indicates the journal reference assigned to the transaction.• Quantity

This indicates the transaction quantity.• Value

This indicates the total transaction value.

Values are only displayed if you are allowed access to the field: Show costs Inventory/WIP queries(Operators - Security tab) and the following preference is selected and saved against your operatorcode: Display costs (Inventory Query - Preferences).

• Wh

This indicates the warehouse in which the item resides.• Source Wh

This indicates the warehouse from which the item was transferred.



• Job

This indicates the job number associated with the transaction.• Purchase order• Customer/Supplier name

This indicates the customer or supplier associated with the transaction.• Location

This indicates the physical location of the item.

Component to Parent Serial Tracking QueryYou use the Component to Parent Serial Tracking Query program to view all parent serials that acomponent serial was issued to.

This program can be called from the Browse on Serial Number Transactions or Serial Query forMaterial Issues programs.

Component to Parent Serial Tracking QueryYou need to indicate the parent stock code for which you want to view the component information. Onceindicated, you change this information using the Function menu.



Function

Change StockCode/Wh

Select this to indicate a different stock code, warehouseand serial number for which to display the information in thelistview.

Stock code You use this field to enter the stock code for which you want toview the information.

Warehouse You use this field to enter the warehouse for which you want toview the information.

Serial number You use this field to enter the serial number for which you wantto view the information.

Component to Parent DetailsThis pane displays the details of the parent stock code for which the component to parent serial informationis being displayed.

Component to Parent Serial InformationThe parent serials that a component serial was issued to are displayed in this listview.


• Serial number

This displays the serial number of the component• Stock code

This displays the component stock code.



• Warehouse

This displays the warehouse from which the component stock code was issued to the job for the parentpart.

• Job

This indicates the job number to which the component was issued.• Quantity

This indicates the quantity of the component issued to make the parent part.• Parent stock code

This indicates the parent part into which the component was taken.• Parent warehouse

This displays the warehouse into which the parent item was receipted• Lot

This indicates the lot number of the parent item.• Revision

This displays the revision number of the parent item if the parent item is defined as ECC controlled(Stock Code Maintenance).

• Release

This displays the release number of the parent item if the parent item is defined as ECC controlled(Stock Code Maintenance).

• Issue date

This indicates the date on which the component was issued to the job for the parent part.• Issue line

This indicates the transaction line.

Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock CodeYou use the Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock Code program to view serials reserved forcomponent parts.

You reserve serials using the Parent/Lot Serial Reservation program.

The Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the ViewReserved Allocations option from the Functions menu of the Serial Number Maintenance program.

Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock Code


Start at Select this option to enter a job number for which you want toview serial reservation information.

Exit Select this to return to the previous screen.

Include These options enable you to define the serial information youwant to include in the listview.

Show PositiveReservations

Select this to view only positive reservations for allocations inthe listview.



Field Values DescriptionShow NegativeReservations

Select this to view only negative reservations for allocations inthe listview.

Negative allocations are typically associated with by-products.

CompleteReservations

Select this if you want to display serials that are complete.

A reserved serial for a component is set to complete when thereserved quantity is equal to the quantity issued to the job.

Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock CodeThe following information is included in the listview:

• Job

This indicates the job number to which the component item is allocated.• Line

This indicates the line number for the allocation within the bill of materials.• Quantity reserved

This indicates the quantity reserved for the item.• Quantity issued

This indicates the component quantity issued to the job.• Expiry date

This indicates the expiry date for the serial.• Location

This indicates the location defined against the serial.• Lot

This indicates the lot number.• Revision

This indicates the revision number of the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking tab).

• Release

This indicates the release number of the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking tab).

• Stock code

This indicates the component stock code.• Warehouse

This indicates the warehouse in which the serial is reserved.• Serial number

This indicates the serial number reserved for the component.• Type

This indicates the Serial tracking method defined against the parent item (Stock Code Maintenance -Tracking tab).



Component to Parent Tracking QueryYou use the Component to Parent Tracking Query program to trace a serial or lot from the time it waspurchased or manufactured, through to its issue to a job. This enables you to establish the parent item inwhich the component was used.

The program can also be accessed from the WIP Query, WIP Inspection Maintenance and JobReceipts programs.

Component to Parent Tracking QueryThis screen enables you to select the component you want to track and to select whether you want to trackthe serial or lot number of the component back to the parent item.



Function

Change StockCode/Wh

Select this to change your tracking selections.

Tracking option

Serials Select this to trace a serialized component back to the parentpart to which it was issued.

Lots Select this to trace a lot traceable component back to theparent part to which it was issued.

Warehouse You use this field to enter the warehouse from which thecomponent was issued to the job for parent part.

Non stocked Select this to trace lot information for a non-stocked item.

When you select this option, the Warehouse field is disabled.

This option is only enabled when you select Lots at theTracking option.

Stock code You use this field to enter the stock code for the componentyou want to trace.

Serial number You use this field to enter the serial number of the componentyou want to trace.

This option is only enabled when you select Serials at theTracking option.

You can use the Browse icon to display the listview of theSerial Number Maintenance program to select the serialnumber you require.

Lot number You use this field to enter the lot number from which thecomponent was issued to the job for the parent part.

This field is only enabled when you select Lots at the Trackingoption.

You can use the Browse icon to display the listview of the LotMaintenance program to select the lot number you require.



Serial TrackingThe information for the component is displayed in this pane in a Tracking treeview and a Serial informationlistview. The information displayed in the listview is dependent on the node you select in the treeview.

TrackingThe following nodes are displayed in the Tracking treeview:

• Root node - displays the component serial number.

When selected, the information is displayed in the Serial Information listview.

• Description

This column displays the description of the component• Type

This column displays the serial tracking method defined against the component. This is displayed aseither Batch or Manual.

• Receipts - relates to receipt transactions for the component.

When selected, the information is displayed in the Receipts for Serial listview.

• Actual cost

This indicates the actual cost at which the receipt was processed.

This only applies if you are using Actual costing for batch serialized items (Inventory Setup -General tab).

• FIFO bucket

This indicates the FIFO bucket into which the receipt was processed


• Issues - relates to issues of the component to jobs.

When selected, the information is displayed in the Issues for Serial listview.

• Actual cost

This indicates the actual cost at which the issue was processed.


• FIFO bucket

This indicates the FIFO bucket from which the issue was processed


• Sales - relates to sales transactions for the component.

When selected, the information is displayed in the Sales for Serial listview.

• Actual cost

This indicates the actual cost at which the sale was processed.


• FIFO bucket

This indicates the FIFO bucket from which the sale was processed




• Tracked to Job - relates to the job to which the component was issued to manufacture the parent part.

All jobs to which the component was issued are displayed.

When selected, the information is displayed in the Parent Tracking Details for Component Seriallistview.

For each job, the details of the parent serial are displayed. For each parent serial, you can view youdetails of Receipts, Issues and Sales.

Lot TrackingThe information for the component is displayed in a Tracking pane treeview and a Lot Information listview.The information displayed in the listview is dependent on the node you select in the treeview.

TrackingThe following nodes are displayed in the Tracking treeview:

• Root node - displays the component lot number.

When selected, the information is displayed in the Lot Information listview.• Bin - relates to the component bin of the component lot. This node is only displayed if you selected the

setup option: Multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).

When selected, the information is displayed in the Lot Information listview.• Receipts - relates to receipt transactions for the component lot.

When selected, the following information is displayed in the Receipts for Lot listview.

• Actual cost

This indicates the actual cost at which the receipt was processed.

This only applies if you are using Actual costing for lot traceable items (Inventory Setup - Generaltab).

• FIFO bucket

This indicates the FIFO bucket into which the receipt was processed


• Issues - relates to issues of the component lot to jobs.

When selected, the information is displayed in the Issues for Lot listview.

• Actual cost

This indicates the actual cost at which the issue was processed.


• FIFO bucket

This indicates the FIFO bucket from which the issue was processed


• Sales - relates to sales transactions for the component lot.

When selected, the information is displayed in the Sales for Lot listview.

• Actual cost

This indicates the actual cost at which the sale was processed.




• FIFO bucket

This indicates the FIFO bucket from which the sale was processed


• Tracked to Job - relates to the job to which the component lot was issued to manufacture the parentpart.

All jobs to which the component was issued are displayed.

When selected, the information is displayed in the Parent Tracking Details for Component Lot listview.

For each job, the details of the parent lot are displayed. For each parent lot, you can view you details ofReceipts, Issues and Sales.

Serial File Balance ReportYou use the Serial File Balance Report program to print a report listing any discrepancy between theon hand quantity for a stock code within the serial tracking system and the on hand quantity within thewarehouse file.



Include serials withzero on hand

Select this to include serial numbers where the on handquantity is zero.

Include stockitems previouslyserialized

Select this to include previously serialized items which are nolonger serialized.



This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which you want to generate the report.• Warehouse selection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which stock codes must be included on the report.




report.



Field Values DescriptionRange Select this to indicate a range of items from the selection to

include in the report.












Serial Tracking ReportYou use the Serial Tracking Report program to print a report listing details of serialized items held on file.

You can use this report to track the transactions in which specific serial numbers were used.


Field Values DescriptionReport title You use this field to indicate the title you want to print on the

report. This defaults to Serial Tracking Report but can bechanged.

Report type

Detail Select this to print a detailed report of all transactionsprocessed against each serialized item selected for printing.



Field Values DescriptionWhen you select this option, only those serials that havetransactions processed against them (such as receipts) areprinted.

1 line summary Select this to print a single line of details for each serializeditem selected for printing.

If you select this option, then all serials are listed irrespective ofwhether transactions exist against them.

You would typically select this option to easily determine whichserials are both available and on hand, as it is possible tocreate serials without physically having these serials in stock.

2 line summary Select this to print a two line summary for each serialized itemselected for printing.

If you select this option, then all serials are listed irrespective ofwhether transactions exist against them.

Reportsequences

Primary Your selection here enables you to indicate how you wantinformation to be printed on the report.

For example: If your Primary sequence is Stock code, then allthe information on your report is grouped per stock code.

Secondary Your selection here determines what information is listed beloweach primary sequence on the report.

For example: If your Primary sequence is Stock code and yourSecondary sequence is Serial number, then all the informationon your report is grouped per serial number under each stockcode.



This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which you want to include details of serialized itemson the report.

• Rev/Rel.

You use this field to indicate the specific revision and release of the single stock item or which youwant to include details of serialized items on the report.

This option is only enabled if the item is ECC controlled.• Serial number selection

This enables you to indicate the serial number(s) for which you want to print details.• Customer selection

This enables you to indicate the customer(s) for which you want to select serialized items for inclusionon the report.

• Warehouse selection



This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to select serialized items for inclusionon the report.




report.











Additional OptionsThe options on this tab page enable you to indicate selectively which serialized items you want to print onthe report based on various print options and a range of locations, expiry dates and scrap dates.

Field Values DescriptionPrint options

Subtotals for eachstock code

Select this if you want to print separate subtotals for each stockcode.

New page for eachstock code

Select this to print details for each stock code on a new page.



Field Values DescriptionInclude W/h valuesof stock on hand

Select this to include the warehouse values of the on handstock on your report.

Include serials withzero on hand

Select this to include serial numbers that have zero stock onhand.

Print batch serialsfor selectedcustomers

Select this if you want to print batch serials for selectedcustomers.

Note:You will be unable to access this field if you selected toprint All customers at the Customer selection field.

SelectionsIn addition to the options that can be selected, the following selection criteria can be defined:

• Location selection

This enables you to indicate the location(s) according to which you want to select serialized items forinclusion on the report.

• Expiry date selection

This enables you to indicate the expiry date(s) according to which you want to select serialized items forinclusion on the report.

• Scrap date selection

This enables you to indicate the scrap date(s) according to which you want to select serialized items forinclusion on the report.

Service OptionsThe options on this tab page enable you to indicate selectively which serialized items you want to print onthe report based on a range of due dates for items that are in service, on loan or at a service depot.

Field Values DescriptionReport onlyoptions

Items in service Select this if you want to select only those serialized items thatare in for a service for the range of due dates specified.

Items on loan Select this if you want to select only those serialized items thatare on loan for the range of due dates specified.

Items at servicedepot

Select this if you want to select only those serialized items thatare at the service depot for the range of due dates specified.


• Due date selection

This enables you to indicate the due date(s) according to which you want to select serials that are inservice, on loan or at a service depot for inclusion on the report.



Transaction OptionsThe options on this tab page enable you to indicate selectively which serialized items you want to print onthe report, based on the transaction type and a range of transaction dates. You can also specify whetheryou want to print transaction values and totals on the report.

Note:You can only access the options and selections on this tab page if you selected Report type -Detaillon the Report Options tab page.

Field Values DescriptionShow transactionvalues

Select this if you want to print transaction values on the report.

Show transactiontotals

Select this if you want to print transaction totals on the report.

Transaction typeselection

This enables you to indicate the transaction type(s) you want toinclude on the report.

All Select this to include serials for all transaction types.

Single Select this to include serials for a single transaction type.

Type You use this field to indicate the specific transaction type youwant to use to select serialized items for printing on the report.

Standard Select this to include standard transaction types.

Miscellaneous Select this to include miscellaneous transaction types.

Std Type You use this option to indicate the specific transaction typefrom the available list of standard transactions catered forwithin SYSPRO.

One of the following standard transaction types can beselected:

• Sales - Sales• Maint - Maintenance• Srvin - Customer unit in for service• Srvet - Unit returned to customer• Loan - Unit loaned to a customer• Return - Unit returned by customer• Tra - Transfer between warehouses• Rec - Receive goods in• Note - Additional notes• Warr - Warranty details• Move - Change location within warehouse• Depot - Unit sent to service depot• Depret - Received back from depot• Iss - Issue to work in progress• Phy - Adjust quantity on hand

Misc type You use this option to indicate the specific miscellaneoustransaction type.

You can configure your own transaction types using theTransaction Posting program.



Field Values DescriptionInclude allsubsequenttransactions

Select this if you want to print all transactions posted againstthe selected serial numbers with the transaction type specified.

Note:You can only select this option if you specify a singletransaction type according to which serialized itemsmust be printed.


• Transaction date selection

This enables you to indicate the transaction due dates according to which you want to select serializeditems for inclusion on the report.



| GL Integration | 344


GL Integration

Inventory GL IntegrationYou use the Inventory GL Integration program to create General Ledger journals from the transactionjournals which affect Inventory.

While the transaction journals are created automatically when you successfully process a transactionwhich affects Inventory, the corresponding General Ledger journal is created and posted according to yourselections on the General Ledger tab of the General Ledger Integration program. Refer to .

The Inventory GL Integration program can only be accessed if Inventory is linked to the General Ledgereither in detail or in summary (General Ledger Integration).

If a General Ledger account used in this program requires General Ledger analysis (Ledger CodeMaintenance or General Ledger Structure Definition), then the GL Analysis program is displayed whenyou post the transaction, enabling you to enter the analysis details or to select to enter them later (seeGeneral Ledger Integration). General Ledger analysis entries are always distributed in the local currency,irrespective of the currency in which the original transaction is processed.

Inventory GL Integration Update

Field Values DescriptionStart Processing Select this to begin processing according to the Journal options

you selected.

If you did not select the option: Create GL journal for Inventory(General Ledger Integration), then the journals for theGeneral Ledger are created from the Inventory transactionjournals.

Note:• When errors are detected during the creation of

the General Ledger journals from the sub-moduletransaction journals, the journal may or may not becreated depending on the type of error.

Refer to General Ledger Integration ErrorHandling for additional details.

• You can use the Inventory Journals program toidentify the transaction journals for which ledgerjournals have not yet been created.

If, for Inventory, you did not select the option: Create GLjournal, but you did select the option: Post GL journal (GeneralLedger Integration), then once the journals are created theyare automatically posted into the General Ledger. You usethe GL Journal Report program to generate a report of thesejournals.

If you did not select the Post GL journal option, then you needto use the GL Journal Entry program to post the journals oncethey are created.



Field Values DescriptionPrint Select this to print the information currently displayed in the

Report pane.

Save FormValues



See Design Mode.

Missing Ledger CodesWhen the Inventory GL Integration program attempts to create General Ledger journals from theInventory transaction journals and there are missing ledger codes, the following applies:

• When the detail ledger code is missing, the program uses the ledger account defined in InventoryLedger Interface. A message is written to the job logging (Job Logging) to indicate that this ledgeraccount was used.

If the interface ledger account is not defined in Inventory Ledger Interface and you are manuallyrunning the Inventory GL Integration program, then an error message is displayed and a "missingledger code" entry is written to Job Logging. If you are running the program in automatic mode, thenthe error is merely written to Job Logging (no error message is displayed). The journal posting fails.

• When the sub contract ledger code is missing, the program uses the Subcontract operations accountdefined in General Ledger Integration - Inventory tab. A message is written to Job Logging toindicate that this ledger account was used.

If the Subcontract operations account is not defined in General Ledger Integration and you aremanually running the Inventory GL Integration program, then an error message is displayed and a"missing ledger code" entry is written to Job Logging. If you are running the program in automaticmode, then the error is merely written to Job Logging (no error message is displayed). The journalposting fails.

Information

Field Values DescriptionJournal options

Select singlejournal

Select this to process a single journal.

If you do not select this option, then all Inventory journals arecreated, or created and posted.

Ledger year You use this field to indicate the year for which you want toprocess the journal.

Ledger month You use this field to indicate the period for which you want toprocess the journal.

Journal You use this field to indicate the Inventory transaction journalfor which you want to create, or to create and post, the GeneralLedger journal.

You can select the browse icon to use the Inventory Journalsprogram to select the transaction journal you want to process.



Field Values DescriptionAfter processingcomplete




The details of the General Ledger journal(s) created are displayed. These details include:

• the year and period of the journal• the General Ledger journal number created for the transaction


Inventory JournalsYou use the Inventory Journals program to view details of transaction journals created for postings madewhich affect Inventory.

Transaction journals are created automatically whenever you successfully process a transaction whichaffects Inventory. The corresponding ledger journal is created and posted according to your selections forInventory on the General Ledger tab of the General Ledger Integration program. Refer to .

This program can be accessed by selecting the Browse icon from the Journal field of the Inventory GLIntegration program.

Inventory Journals





Year You use this field to indicate the financial year for which youwant to display journals.

Period You use this field to indicate the period(s) within the financialyear indicated for which you want to display journals.

You can select to display all journals for the selected year, arange of periods or a single period.

From period You use this field to indicate the first period in a range ofperiods for which you want to display journals.

If you selected Single at the Period field, then you use this fieldto indicate the single period which you want to display journals.

This field is not enabled when you select All at the Period field.



Field Values DescriptionTo period You use this field to indicate the last period in a range of

periods for which you want to display journals.

This field is only enabled when you select Range at the Periodfield.

Include posted Select this to display transaction journals for which ledgerjournals currently exist (i.e. for which ledger journals werecreated in the General Ledger module).

Go (arrow icon) Select this arrow to display the journals according to yourselections.

ListviewWhen you select the Inventory Journals program, the transaction journals are displayed in a listview.By default, only the transaction journals for which no corresponding GL journals have been created aredisplayed. You use the Include posted option to display all transaction journals.


• Year

This indicates the Inventory year into which the transaction was processed.• Month

This indicates the Inventory month into which the transaction was processed.• Journal

This indicates the Inventory transaction journal number.• Journal date

This indicates the date on which the Inventory transaction journal was created.• Warehouse

This indicates the code of the warehouse for which the transaction was processed.• Warehouse description

This indicates the description of the warehouse for which the transaction was processed.• Goods in transit journal

This indicates whether the transaction relates to a goods in transit transaction.• Posted

This indicates whether a ledger journal exists (i.e. was created) for the transaction journal.

It is possible that the word "Yes" is indicated in this column, but that the GL year, GL period and GLjournal columns contain only zeroes. This means that the system attempted to create a GL journal forthe transaction, but that no GL journal was required (for example, the transaction journal was zero andthe system does not create zero GL journals).

• GL year

This indicates the General Ledger year for the ledger journal.

Zeroes indicate that the General Ledger journal has not yet been created.• GL period

This indicates the General Ledger period for the ledger journal.

Zeroes indicate that the General Ledger journal has not yet been created.• GL journal

This indicates the General Ledger journal number created for the transaction journal.



Zeroes indicate that the General Ledger journal has not yet been created. You need to use theInventory GL Integration program to create the General Ledger journal.

A GL journal number does not indicate that the journal was posted into the General Ledger. It onlyindicates the ledger journal number that was created from the transaction journal and passed to theGeneral Ledger module for processing. Ledger journals are posted according to your selections on theGeneral Ledger tab of the General Ledger Integration program. Refer to .

Inventory Journal ReportYou use Inventory Journal Report program to generate a report of journals created from transactionsprocessed which affect Inventory.

Inventory journals are created by the Inventory GL Integration program.

The Inventory Journal Report serves as an audit trail of transactions posted from within the followingprograms:

• Inventory Movements• Inventory Stock Take Capture• Job Issues• Price-Cost Percentage Change• Transfer BOM Costs to Wh Costs• Purchase Order Receipts• Purchase Order Inspection• PO Receipts With Apportionment• Shipment Receipt (Legacy)• Calculate New Landed CostThis report can be generated at any time and as often as required.

Report Options

Field Values DescriptionReport options

Print summaryjournal

Select this to print an additional page summarizing alltransactions posted for the journal.

Print new page perjournal

Select this to print journals on separate pages.

This option cannot be deselected if you selected the Printsummary journal option.

Print multiple bintransfer

Select this to list all Bin transfer transactions posted in theInventory Movements program.

Note:This option is only applicable if you selected theMultiple bins option is selected (Inventory Setup -General tab).

Reprint Select this to reprint journals that were previously printed.

You can only reprint Inventory journals for as long as you areretaining Inventory journals (Inventory Setup - History tab).



Field Values DescriptionInventory journals are deleted as part of the Purge function ofthe Inventory Period End program.

Journal printoptions

These options are only enabled when you reprint the report.

Show This enables you to indicate the types of journals you want toinclude in the report.

Both Select this to reprint both FIFO journals and standard Inventoryjournals.

FIFO Select this to reprint FIFO journals only.

FIFO or LIFO journals are printed only if you selected theoptions: FIFO valuation and Print FIFO Journals (InventorySetup).

Standard Select this to reprint standard Inventory journals only.

SelectionsIn addition to the report options that can be selected, the following selection criteria can be defined whenyou select to reprint the report:


This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to include journals in the reprintedreport.

• Period selection

This enables you to indicate the

• Month

This enables you to indicate the period, within the year indicated, for which you want to reprintjournals.

• Year

This enables you to indicate the year for which you want to reprint journals.• Journal selection

This enables you to indicate the transaction journal(s) you want to reprint.




report.





Field Values DescriptionSingle Select this to indicate a single item from the selection to include

in the report.










Report DetailsIf you selected the options: FIFO valuation and Print FIFO Journals (Inventory Setup), then two journalsare generated for each transaction; one being the standard journal and the other the FIFO journal. This isirrespective of whether the warehouse in which the transaction occurred uses FIFO costing.

Note:• Issue or Receipt transaction entries for non-stocked items are indicated by two asterisks (**).• A value is printed in the report column: Value Lost Due To Total Entries if rounding errors have

occurred for Receipts or Transfers In transaction types (as a result of entering a cost with abasis of Total).

• A value is printed in the report column: Value Lost Due To Average Costing if rounding errorshave occurred with average costing in use (as a result of entering a cost with a basis of Total).

• A value is printed in the report column: Value Lost Due To Transfers if standard costing is in use.This value reflects an averaged out cost of any stock that is already in transit.

• A value is printed in the report column: Cost of Goods Sold Adjustment if receipts were enteredwhen the quantity on hand was negative. This value reflects the new cost subtracted from theprevious cost and multiplied by the previous quantity on hand.

• A warning is printed in the report column: EXCP if a non-zero cost variance percentage hasbeen defined (Inventory Setup) and a receipt was processed where the percentage changebetween the old and new cost exceeds this cost variance.

In addition, if the stock code had any quantity on backorder, then the one of following messagesis printed in the EXCP report column:



• BO: the stock code has a quantity on back order• COST: the difference in percentage terms between the old and new cost has exceeded the

cost variance defined• BO/C: both the above exceptions apply

• The costing method defined against the warehouse is printed in the heading of each journal.

No detail Inventory journals are created for transactions processed using the WIP Inspection VarianceClosure program. In addition, the Summary Inventory journal page reflects zero values. The reason isthat these transactions are for variance values only and therefore do not affect inventory quantities. Thevariance values are reflected on the General Ledger Distribution report and are posted to the GeneralLedger.

Inventory GL DistributionYou use the Inventory GL Distribution program to generate a report of General Ledger entries createdfor transactions processed which affect Inventory.

This report is generated from the General Ledger journals created by the Inventory GL Integrationprogram.

Note:The Inventory GL Distribution report cannot be generated if your Inventory integration method isdefined as Not linked to G/L - no distribution report (General Ledger Integration).

If you have posted all your Inventory ledger journals to the General Ledger, then you can use this reportas an audit trail of entries posted to the General Ledger and possibly to assist in balancing Inventory to theGeneral Ledger when discrepancies exist.

This report can be run at any time and as often as required.



Report type This enables you to indicate the type of report you want togenerate.

Detail Select this to print a list (in ledger code sequence) of alltransactions posted against each ledger code.

Totals are printed for each ledger code with a distribution totalprinted at the end of the report.

If Inventory is integrated to General Ledger in summary(General Ledger Integration - General Ledger tab ), then youshould print this report in detail for reconciliation purposes.

Summary Select this to print only the total values for each ledger code.

A distribution total is printed at the end of the report.

Reprint Select this to reprint Inventory GL Distribution reportspreviously printed.



Field Values DescriptionWhen you select this option, you can define a range ofselection criteria according to which you want to reprint thereport.

Note:The number of periods for which you can reprintdistribution entries depends on the number ofperiods for which you are retaining Inventory journals(Inventory Setup - History tab).

Entry selection

Journal Select this to reprint the report for a specific range of GeneralLedger journal numbers.

Entries group Select this to reprint the report for a specific range ofdistribution entry groups.

Note:This only applies if you want to reprint ledgerdistribution entries created prior to SYSPRO 6.1.

Prior to SYSPRO 6.1, a new entries group was createdin the General Ledger entries file/table for eachdistribution report printed.

This option enables you to reprint these entries groups.

Current GLperiod

This is displayed for information purposes only and cannot bechanged.

Period This indicates the period that your Inventory module is currentlyin.

Year This displays the year that your Inventory module is currentlyin.

SelectionsIn addition to the report options that can be selected, the following selection criteria can be defined whenyou select to reprint the report:

• Period selection

You can reprint Inventory distribution entries for as long you are retaining Inventory journals (InventorySetup - History tab).

• Period

This enables you to indicate the period(s), within the year(s) indicated, for which you want to reprintthe report.

• Year

This enables you to indicate the year(s) for which you want to reprint the report.• GL journal selection

This enables you to indicate the ledger journal number(s) you want to reprint.

This selection is only enabled when your Entry selection is by Journal.• Ledger entries group selection



This enables you to indicate the entry group(s), within the selected periods and years, for which youwant to reprint the distribution report.

This selection is only enabled when your Entry selection is by Entries group.• Ledger code selection

This enables you to indicate the General Ledger code(s) for which the report must be reprinted.

Only those entries for the General Ledger code(s) you select are printed.




report.















Report DetailsThe distribution report reflects details of the sub-module transactions posted to the GL Journal and aregrouped by the GL journal number.

The term *Multiple* in place of a GL code indicates that, in the sub ledger, a single journal was referencedto more than one control record.

The following transactions types may be listed in the Transaction type column of the report:

REC Receipt

ADJ Adjustment

PHY Physical

CHG Cost Change

ISS Issue

MOD Cost Modification

TRN Transfer

BFL Backflushing variance between the receipt valueand the calculated backflushing value

VAR Variance caused by average costing calculation, orby transfers using standard costing

ABC ABC Costing

TOT Variance arising during processing of a receiptwhere rounding errors have occurred from enteringa cost with a basis of 'total'

Trn typ is blank but Reference is C.G.S This indicates a cost of sales adjustment whichoccurs when:

• you are using Average costing• stock on hand is allowed to go negative• you process the receipt of an item into a

warehouse in which the item has a negativequantity on hand

For example:

You sell an item you do not have (stock on handallowed to go negative) that has a cost of 100.

When you receive stock of the item, the cost of theitem is now 120.

This in effect means that the cost of sales forthe item you sold is understated by 20 (i.e.new cost less old cost = 120 -100 = 20). Thesystem allocates this 20 to the Cost of goods soldadjustment account. The reference for this entry onthe Inventory Journal Report report is C.G.S.

| Period End Processing | 355


Period End Processing

Inventory Period EndYou use the Inventory Period End program to maintain the integrity of the data held in your Inventorymodule, to close the current month and open up a new month for processing your inventory transactionsand to delete inventory information that is no longer required from the system.

This is achieved through the following functions:

• Balance• Month end• Year end• Purge• Reset in-process journal & GIT flags• Balance lots (report only)

Note:It is advisable to take a backup of your data before processing a Month end, a Year end or a Purge.

If the Work in Progress module is installed, then you will be unable to process the following transactions ifthe Inventory and Work in Progress modules are not in the same month and year:

• Job Receipts (Job Receipts)• Backflushing in Inventory movements (Inventory Movements)• Job/Kit Issues (Job Issues)• WIP issue floor stock allocations (WIP Issue Floor Stock Allocations)• WIP Inspection - Accept into stock (WIP Inspection Maintenance)• WIP Inspection - Scrap (WIP Inspection Maintenance)• WIP Inspection - Rework (WIP Inspection Maintenance)

You will be unable to process invoices for customers using the following programs if the Inventory moduleis in an earlier period than the Accounts Receivable module, or the current period of the Inventory andAccounts Receivable modules differ by more than one month:

• Sales Order Entry• Document Print• Dispatch Note Consolidation

Inventory Period End

Field Values DescriptionStart Processing Select this to begin processing the function you selected.

Print Select this to print the information currently displayed in theReport, Warehouse Balance Report, Inventory Balance Reportand the GIT Balance Report output panes.

Save FormValues





Field Values DescriptionSee Design Mode.

Information

Field Values DescriptionControl details

Current monthnumber

This indicates the current month number of your Inventorymodule.

Period end date This indicates the period end date for the current month asdefined on the Periods tab of the Inventory Setup program.

Last period enddate

This indicates the date on which the previous period end wasprocessed.

Processingoptions

Function This enables you to indicate the processing function you wantto perform.

Balance Select this to maintain the integrity of data held in yourInventory module.

You use the Balance function to perform the following tasks:

• Print a report by warehouse summarizing the total on-handinventory values and hash quantities.

• Verify that the quantity on hand held against each binagrees with the total quantity on hand by warehouse (if youare using FIFO costing or multiple bins).

• Ensure that at least one FIFO bucket exists for each stockcode/warehouse combination (if you have changed yourcosting method to FIFO).

• Verify that the total on hand quantity of lots agrees with thetotal on hand quantity of bins and the total quantity on handby warehouse (if you are using multiple bins and lots).

Note:• If your inventory files are shared and you are not

in the shared company, then you will be unableto run the Balance function.

• If you selected the option: Use full goods intransit facility (Inventory Setup - Generaltab) and a goods in transit transaction is inprogress, you will be unable to run a Balancefunction if a Requirements Planning Calculation(Requirements Calculation) is currently inprogress.

Month end only Select this to close the current month and open up a newmonth for processing your inventory transactions.

Note:



Field Values DescriptionIf your inventory files are shared and you are not in theshared company, then you will be unable to run theMonth end function.

Month end andpurge

Select this to close the current month and open up a newmonth for processing your inventory transactions and deleteinventory information that is no longer required from thesystem.

Year end only Select this to perform the final month end of the year and starta new financial year in the Inventory module.

Note:If your inventory files are shared and you are not in theshared company, then you will be unable to run theyear end function.

Year end andpurge

Select this to perform the final month end of the year, start anew financial year in the Inventory module and delete inventoryinformation that is no longer required from the system.

Purge Select this function to delete inventory information that is nolonger required from the system.

Note:If your inventory files are shared, then inventorymovements, inspection information and temporarystock codes are only considered for deletion if you arerunning this function from the 'holding' company.

Reset Select this to reset journal, GIT in transit and stock takeconfirmation flags.

Refer to the Reset options section for details.

Balance lots(report only)

Select this to review lot quantity adjustments recommendedby the system, before allowing the system to update your livesystem.

Typically, when you run the Balance function anddiscrepancies are detected between quantities across lots,warehouses, multiple bins or FIFO buckets, the lot quantitiesare assumed to be correct and the other records are adjustedaccordingly.

This function, however, enables you to view a report of theproposed changes before actually implementing them.

Reset options These options are only enabled when you select to process aBalance or a Reset function.

Reset lowestunprocessedjournal

Select this to locate the earliest Inventory and GRN journalsthat have not been posted.

The Inventory GL Integration program creates and/or postsGeneral Ledger journals from Inventory transaction journalsaccording to your General Ledger Integration settings.The Inventory GL Integration program uses the lowest



Field Values Descriptionunprocessed Inventory journal number as a starting point tocreate/post these General Ledger journals.

Similarly, the Inventory GRN GL Integration program createsand/or posts General Ledger journals from GRN transactionjournals according to your General Ledger Integrationsettings. The Inventory GRN GL Integration program usesthe lowest unprocessed GRN journal number as a startingpoint to create/post these General Ledger journals.

Selecting this option therefore ensures that no Inventory and/or GRN journals are skipped when the General Ledger journalsare created/posted for Inventory and GRNs.

This option is only available when you select to process aBalance function.

Note:This function can also be performed using the GLIntegration Utility program.

Reset in-processjournal

Select this to restore in-process journals to a status thatenables you to print them.

You typically use this function if a power failure occurred duringthe processing of your inventory journals. This would causethe journals to be placed in an in-process status(*) and preventyou from printing them. The Reset in-process journals functioneffectively resets these in-process journals to a status of 0,allowing you to print them.

This is automatically done as part of the Balance function andis therefore not available when you select to process a Balancefunction.

Reset GIT details Select this to reset Goods in Transit flags.

If the GIT Structure Change flag is set to 'P' (in process), thenit is reset to 'Y' (structure validation required). If your inventoryis shared (Company Setup - Options tab), then this flag is onlychecked when the Inventory Period End program is run fromthe company that owns the inventory table/files.

This is automatically done as part of the Balance function andis therefore not available when you select to process a Balancefunction.

Reset stock takeconfirmation

Select this to reset the stock take confirmation in process flagon the warehouse control table/file.

The stock take confirmation in process flag is set whenthe Stock Take Confirmation program is used to confirma stock take for a warehouse. This prevents multipleoperators simultaneously confirming a stock take for the samewarehouse. If the Stock Take Confirmation program is notsuccessfully completed, it is possible that this flag is not reset.This prevents various other stock take functions from beingperformed for the warehouse.



Field Values DescriptionThis is automatically done as part of the Balance function andis therefore not available when you select to process a Balancefunction.

Warehouses

Warehouseselection

Note:If you enabled the option: Disallow single warehouseselection during period end (Inventory Setup) thenthis will disable the Warehouse selection field andprocessing will occur for all warehouses.

All Select this to indicate that you want processing to occur for allwarehouses.

Single Select this to indicate that you want processing to occur for aspecific warehouse.

This option is only enabled when you select either the Balanceor Month end only options.

Note:If you select to process a specific warehouse whenprocessing a month end, then the current month on theInventory Warehouse Control record is incrementedfor the specified warehouse. However, the currentmonth number on the Inventory Control record isnot incremented (i.e. to finalize your month end andincrement your current month number, you must selectto process all warehouses).

Warehouse code You use this field to indicate the specific warehouse for whichyou want processing to occur.

Period endoptions

FIFO valuation Select this to value your inventory according to FIFO binsinstead of the current unit cost. You can only select this optionif you indicated that FIFO valuation is required (InventorySetup or Inventory Warehouses).

Recalc. currentcost from FIFObuckets

Select this to recalculate FIFO costs. The cost is recalculatedby taking the total value of stock at FIFO value and dividing thisby the total quantity. The result is used to update the Unit costfield on the stock warehouse record. This does not affect theGeneral Ledger.

You select this option only if you indicated that FIFO costingis required in at least one warehouse (Inventory Setup orInventory Warehouses) and the option: Recalculate currentcost from FIFO buckets (Inventory Setup) is selected. If youhave only selected the option: FIFO valuation (InventorySetup), but no warehouse is set to use FIFO costing, thenselecting this option does nothing.



Field Values DescriptionNote:You need to select this option before switching fromFIFO to average costing (Inventory Setup).

This option only affects the value of the current cost field on theinventory warehouse record (UnitCost on InvWarehouse) for awarehouse with FIFO costing.

The unit cost field on the warehouse where FIFO costingis in use is the average cost (i.e. it is calculated for a FIFOwarehouse as if the warehouse was using average costing). Itis recalculated each time a receipt is processed for an item, butnot when the item is issued.

The value of the inventory is based on the FIFO buckets, notthe current unit cost held in the warehouse. If you want to getan indication of the value of the warehouse from the unit cost,then you need to select this option. This option allows you torecalculate the unit cost field on the warehouse based on theactual buckets you have in your FIFO warehouse.

For example:

Unit cost is calculated using the average costing method.

Say you have the following quantities on hand at the unit costsshown:

1 at 10 = 10

2 at 15 = 30

3 at 16 = 48

Total FIFO cost is 88 and quantity 6. Therefore the averagecost is 14.66667.

You sell 2, so you now have:

1 at 15 = 15

3 at 16 = 48

Average cost is not recalculated on a sale or issue, so you nowhave a total cost of 63 for 4 items, with an average of 15.75.

Therefore, your average cost in the warehouse does not reflectthe average of the actual FIFO buckets you have. To adjustthis, you select this option to recalculate your warehouse costbased on buckets.

You will be unable to select this option if you have been deniedaccess to the activity: Inventory recalc current cost (FIFO)(Operators).

Recalc. actual costfrom FIFO buckets

If you select this option, then the warehouse cost isrecalculated for each actual costing item by adding up all FIFOcosts and dividing by the quantity on hand in the warehouse.The result is used to update the Unit cost field on the stockwarehouse record. This does not affect the General Ledger.



Field Values DescriptionThis option only affects the value of the current cost field on theinventory warehouse record (UnitCost on InvWarehouse) for astock item which uses Actual costing.

This option only applies if you are using Actual costing(Inventory Setup - General tab) and works in a similar fashionto the Recalc. current cost from FIFO buckets option.

Recalc. actual costoriginal receipt qty

Select this to recalculate and adjust the actual cost bucketoriginal receipt quantities for all Adjustment transactionspreviously processed in the Inventory Movements program.

This option only applies when using Actual costing (InventorySetup - General tab) and running the Balance function.

Remove bins withzero quantity

Select this if you want to delete bins containing a zero quantity.

A bin is only removed if the bin quantity was zero for the pastthree months.

You can only access this field if the option: If the option:Multiple bins in use is selected against the warehouse(s)selected (Inventory Warehouses).

This option is never enabled when you select the Balancefunction.

Delete temporarystock codes

Select this to delete temporary stock codes that meet all criteriafor deletion (see Purge).

This option is only enabled when you select the Purge function.

Balance goods intransit

This option is available only if the full goods in transit system isinstalled (Inventory Setup). In addition, you can only accessthis option if you selected the Balance function.

This option enables you to indicate whether you want to includethe goods in transit details in the balancing routine.

Selecting this resets GIT transactions which are flaggedas being In process and ensures they are displayed in theInventory Movements program. This is useful if an operatorexperienced a system problem whilst processing a GIT and theGIT is still flagged as being 'In process.'

This option is selected automatically when running the monthend or year end functions, but is deselected automatically ifyou select the Ignore balance function option.

Ignore balancefunction

Select this if you want to bypass the balance function that isnormally run when performing a month end or year end.

If you select the option to ignore the balance function, then theBalance goods in transit option is deselected automatically.

Danger:Because the balance function is used to correct an out-of-balance condition detected by the system, bypassing



Field Values Descriptionthis function may result in inaccurate inventory valuesbeing printed on the month end and year end reports.

Excludewarehouse totalsfrom report

This option is only available if you selected the option: Ignorebalance function.

Select this if you do not want the system to calculate theinventory value and hash quantity for each warehouse youselected to process. If you select this option, then the time toprocess the month or year end is reduced, but the warehousetotals are not printed on the report.


These options relate to the information displayed in the Report,Warehouse Balance Report, Inventory Balance Report and theGIT Balance Report output panes.

Note:By default, all output panes are selected for printing.You can, however, selectively indicate the individualoutput panes for which you want to generate reports.

Similarly, you can selectively indicate the individualoutput panes for which you want to email these reports.


Purge details These fields are displayed for information purposes if youselected the Purge only, Month end and purge or Year end andpurge functions.

Refer to Purge for additional information.


Messages relating to the function you selected are displayed.


Warehouse Balance ReportThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.

The Warehouse Balance Report is a summary of the total on-hand inventory values and hash quantities bywarehouse.

The results of the Balance lots (report only) function are also displayed in this pane.

The error message 'Some stock codes were processed where the corresponding warehouse control didnot exist' occurs when there is a record on the InvWarehouse file/table that does not have a correspondingrecord on the InvWhControl file/table. These warehouses will not have a description against them onthe report produced by the Inventory Period End program. To rectify this, you will need to identify thestock items that belong to that warehouse and change the warehouse code. It is unlikely that this will beproblematic, as the on hand quantity for items in that warehouse should be zero. The situation generallyonly arises when data has been converted from older versions of Encore / Award where all the recordswere not necessarily removed when a warehouse was deleted.




Inventory Balance ReportThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.

Errors encountered during the Balance function are displayed in this pane.


GIT Balance ReportThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.

If you selected the Balance goods in transit option, then GIT errors encountered during the Balancefunction are displayed in this pane.

If you selected the setup option: Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup - Generaltab), then when you run the Balance function, the report produced may contain lines with a GIT referencenumber and the comment "Master updated." This occurs if the balance of the Master record for the GITreference does not equal the total values of the Detail records for that GIT reference. The Master recordbalance is then updated.


Period End ReportingYou perform your Month end and Year end reporting after you have completed posting transactions for theprevious month.

Under normal circumstances you will have already started processing information for the current monthbefore you print your month end reports.

Transactions posted to the current month do not affect reports for previous months. To preventtransactions from being posted to previous months while printing your month end reports, you can set theprevious month's status to closed (Inventory Setup) This does not stop you from reporting on the previousmonth. You can re-open and close previous months as often as required.

BalanceThe system performs the following routine for a Balance:

• If you selected the Aged inventory valuation option (Inventory Setup) then the total quantity of theaged valuation buckets is compared to the total on hand quantity for each warehouse. If these figuresdo not balance, the aged valuation buckets are adjusted to match the on hand quantity, commencingfrom the current year.

• The on hand quantity and value for each warehouse is added to the totals printed at the end of thereport.

• If FIFO costing is installed:

• Any bucket with a zero on hand quantity in the current and previous two periods is deleted.• Any bucket with a negative on hand quantity is set to zero.• If you selected the FIFO valuation option, then the warehouse totals are updated by the value and

quantity of the FIFO buckets, and not those of the warehouse.• The FIFO buckets are renumbered• If no FIFO buckets are held on file, a FIFO bucket is created with a bucket number of zero; the

current on hand quantity and cost from the warehouse; and the current system date as the lastreceipt date.



• If the total on hand quantity of the FIFO buckets for a warehouse does not agree with the onhand quantity stored against the warehouse, an error line is printed showing the warehouse onhand quantity; the total FIFO buckets on hand quantity; and the difference between the two. Thewarehouse on hand quantity is updated to match the total of the FIFO buckets.

• If you selected to recalculate the current cost from FIFO buckets, then the total value and quantity ofthe FIFO buckets are accumulated and used to calculate a new unit cost for each inventory item.

• If LIFO costing is installed:

• Any bucket with a zero on hand quantity is deleted.• Any bucket with a negative on hand quantity, is set to zero.• The warehouse totals are updated from the value and quantity of the LIFO buckets, and not those of

the warehouse.• The LIFO buckets are renumbered.• If no LIFO buckets are held on file, a LIFO bucket is created with a bucket number of zero; the

current on hand quantity and cost from the warehouse; and the current system date as the lastreceipt date.

• If the total on hand quantity of the LIFO buckets for a warehouse does not match the on handquantity stored against the warehouse, an error line is printed showing the warehouse on handquantity; the total LIFO buckets on hand quantity; and the difference between the two. Thewarehouse on hand quantity is updated to match the total of the LIFO buckets.

• If Multiple bins is installed:

• If no bins exist for a stock code, a default bin is created. The entire quantity on hand for the stockcode/warehouse is allocated to the default bin and the current system date is set to the last receiptdate.

If multiple bins are installed in the warehouse and a bin location is defined against the stock code'swarehouse, then this bin location is used to generate the default bin. Otherwise, the warehouse codebecomes the bin location.

• If the total on hand quantity of the bins for a warehouse does not match the on hand quantity storedagainst the warehouse, then the bins are adjusted to equal the on hand quantity stored against thewarehouse.

If multiple bins are installed in the warehouse, then an 'adjust' bin is created for the adjustmentquantity. Otherwise, the adjustment is processed against the default bin.

Refer to Multiple bins for additional information.• If Multiple bins and Lot Traceability is installed:

• If no bins exist for a stock code then a default bin is created. The entire quantity on hand for thestock code/warehouse is allocated to the default bin and the current system date is set to the lastreceipt date.

If a bin location is defined against the stock code's warehouse, then this bin location is used togenerate the default bin. Otherwise, the warehouse code becomes the bin location.

• If the total on hand quantity of lots for a warehouse matches the on hand quantity of the bins, butdoes not match the total on hand quantity stored against the warehouse, then the total on handquantity for the warehouse is updated and an adjustment entry is posted to the journal file andmovement file.

• If the total on hand quantity of lots for a warehouse does not match the total on hand quantity ofeither the bins or the total on hand quantity stored against the warehouse, then the quantity storedagainst the bins is set to zero and replaced by the lot quantity. The total on hand quantity for thewarehouse is updated and an adjustment entry is posted to the journal file and movement file.

• You can run the Balance lots (report only) function to review lot quantity adjustments recommendedby the system before updating your live system.

• If Serial Number Tracking is installed



• If the Sales Order module is not installed then the quantity allocated field (held against eachwarehouse) is set to zero and recalculated from any serial numbers in stock that are on loan, in for aservice, or at the service depot.

• If Engineering Change Control (ECC) is used

• An ECC item is treated in exactly the same manner as a lot traceable item, regardless of whetherLot Traceability (Lot Traceability Setup) is installed.

The LotDetail record is the only place that the stock level of a specific ECC revision/release is held.Therefore the report indicates an 'Out of balance lot adjustment', the adjustment is made from theLotDetail record when updating the warehouse(s) to the total of the individual revisions/releases.

• Actual costing

If Actual costing for Lot traceable items is selected (Inventory Setup - General tab), then the balancingof lots is done by balancing to multiple bins if they exist. Bins are updated to match the lot total. Eachlot is balanced to its FIFO buckets and if there is a variance, the FIFO buckets are updated and a FIFOjournal is created. Adjustments are processed to the first or last FIFO bucket according to the FIFO/LIFO options selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab).

For each stock code, the lot total is checked against the warehouse total and the warehouse totalis adjusted to match the lot total if a variance exists. If there are FIFO adjustments, then a normaljournal is created indicating the total value of the FIFO adjustments and the quantity of the warehouseadjustment.

• Goods in Transit detail lines are set to 'complete' if the full quantity transferred has been received andthe GIT line was not set to 'complete' at the time of receipt.

• The 'In process' flag against GITs are cleared if the option: Balance goods in transit is selected.• If you have NOT selected the setup option: Retain last 12 months' opening stock balances (Inventory

Setup - History tab), then any opening balances and costs retained for the last months are deleted.

Month EndThe system performs the following routine for a Month end:

• For each warehouse, the number of months' usage is increased by 1 (the year-to-date usage is usedto establish an items' ABC category). If the year-to-date usage value against each warehouse nowrepresents 13 months, then the value is annualized to represent 12 months' usage. If the quantity soldor issued for the last 12 months does not exceed zero, then the usage value is set to zero.

• The warehouse total quantities and values are updated as outlined in the balance function.• The monthly sales history buckets are rolled one month. The total month-to-date sales and/or issues

are moved to the first history bucket, depending on your selection at the Sales history qty's to includefield (Inventory Setup).

• All month-to-date fields for each warehouse are set to zero.• The opening balance quantity for each warehouse is set to the current on hand quantity.• If you enabled the option: Retain last 12 months opening stock balances (Inventory Setup), then the

monthly quantity and cost buckets are rolled 1 month. The first quantity bucket is set to the current onhand quantity for the warehouse, and the first cost bucket is set to the current cost for the warehouse. Ifyou are using FIFO or LIFO costing, the first cost bucket is calculated as the total value in the bucketsdivided by the on hand quantity for the warehouse.

• If you are using multiple bins and you select the Remove bins with zero quantity field, then bins with azero on hand quantity and zero sales order quantity to ship are deleted. The default bin created by thesystem is never removed.

• If you selected to process a specific warehouse, then the current financial month for the selectedwarehouse is incremented by one. You will be unable to select a specific warehouse if you havedisallowed the selection of a single warehouse for processing during a period end (Inventory Setup).

• If you selected to process all warehouses, then the inventory control record is updated as follows:



• If you enabled the option: Close previous month automatically (Company Setup) then the currentmonth is set to a status of closed. Otherwise the second previous month is set to a status of closed.

• The current system date is moved to the month end date for the current financial month.• The current financial month number is incremented by one.• The current financial month is set to a status of open.• The current financial month and year for all warehouses are set to the current financial month and

year on the inventory control record.

Year EndThe system performs the following routine for a Year end:

• All the steps outlined in the Month end function are processed.• If you selected the Aged inventory valuation option (Inventory Setup) then the aged valuation buckets

are rolled.• The year-to-date sales value is moved to the previous year-to-date sales value.• The total year-to-date quantity sold and/or issued are moved to the previous year-to-date quantity sold,

depending on your selection at the Sales history qty's to include field (Inventory Setup).• All year-to-date fields for each warehouse are set to zero.• The inventory control record is updated as follows:

• The current financial month number is reset to 1.• The current financial year is incremented by 1.• The current year's next journal number; month end dates; and open/closed flags are moved to the

previous year.• The next journal number for the current year is set to 1.• The current year's month end dates are all set to zero.• The first month of the year (which is now the current month) is set to a status of open.• The last three year end dates are rolled.• The current system date is moved to the first year end date.• If multiple companies are sharing the same inventory files (Company Setup) all journal numbers for

the shared companies are reset as part of the year end function in the company that is being shared.

PurgeA purge can be run together with either a month end or year end, or as a separate process.

The system performs the following routine when doing a Purge:

• If Inventory is linked to General Ledger in summary or detail (General Ledger Integration), theninventory and GRN distribution entries are deleted if:

• the General Ledger journals for the transactions have been created (Inventory GL Integration)• they have been posted to the General Ledger (GL Journal Entry)• the ledger year and period against the distribution entry is earlier than the calculated cut-off month

and year, which is based on your entry at the Number of months to retain - Inventory journals field(Inventory Setup - History tab).

If Inventory is not linked to the General Ledger, then all inventory and GRN distribution entries that havebeen printed are deleted.

• If the Full goods in transit facility is in use (Inventory Setup - General tab), then completed goods intransit detail lines are deleted if the period and year in which the transfer was completed is earlier thanthe calculated cut-off month and year, which is based on your entry at the Number of G/L periods toretain - Goods in transit entries (Inventory Setup - History tab).

• If the Inventory Period End option: Delete temporary stock codes is selected, then temporary stockcodes are deleted when all of the following conditions are met:



• the stock code is not on full or partial hold (Stock Code Maintenance)• the stock code is on full or partial hold, but the option: Define Delete Options - On partial or full hold

(Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected• no Blanket purchase order contracts exist for the stock code• the stock code is defined as a kit type S or K item and no sales orders exist against it• no Bill of Landed Costs exists for the stock code• Bill of Landed Costs exist for the stock code, but the option: Define Delete Options - Part of a bill of

Landed cost tracking (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected• no components exist against the stock code• no operations exist against the stock code• the stock code is not in use in a Bill of Materials• no build schedules exist for the stock code• no forecasts exist for the stock code• the stock code is a co-product, but is not used in a Bill of Materials or a job• the stock code is a notional part, but no co-products are attached to it• no customer/stock code cross-references exist against the stock code• customer/stock code cross-references exist against the stock code, but the option: Define Delete

Options - Customer/stock code cross reference (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected• no supplier/stock code cross-references exist against the stock code• supplier/stock code cross-references exist against the stock code, but the option: Define Delete

Options - Supplier/stock code cross reference (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected• no movement has occurred during the current period, previous period 1 or previous period 2 in a

warehouse in which the stock code is stocked• the stock code has not been used in a configuration• the stock has been used in a configuration, but the option: Define Delete Options - Used in a

configuration (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected• the stock is not used in a sales order or purchase order• the stock is used in a sales order or purchase order, but the option: Define Delete Options -

Temporary stock code has sales order details and/or purchase order details (Inventory Setup -Options tab) is selected, provided there is no outstanding quantity against the order.

• the following quantities are zero against all warehouses in which the item is stocked:

• On order quantity• On hand quantity• Quantity allocated to sales orders• Backorder quantity• Quantity allocated to Work in Progress• Quantity in transit• Quantity in inspection• Quantity dispatched but not invoiced

• the opening balance in Previous period 1 and Previous period 2 is zero against all warehouses inwhich the item is stocked

• no stock take is in progress against a warehouse in which the item is stocked• Inventory movements are deleted according to the number of records you are retaining (or the age of

records) for each stock code/warehouse combination.

If you select to retain records by date (Inventory Setup - History tab), then the number of daysbetween the current company date and the transaction date against each movement is compared to themaximum number of days you are retaining records. If a movement record is older than the maximumnumber of days, it is removed.

If you select to retain records by number (Inventory Setup - History tab), then the number of movementrecords is counted for each stock code/warehouse combination. If the number of records exceeds the



maximum number of records you are retaining, then the excess records (starting from the oldest) aredeleted.

• Inventory inspection records are deleted when all of the following conditions are met:

• the record is not for a traceable stock code.• there is zero quantity off-site.• the quantity counted is complete.• the quantity counted is equal to the total of the quantity accepted and scrapped.

• Inventory journals that meet all of the following conditions are deleted:

• the General Ledger journals for the transactions have been created (Inventory GL Integration)• The journal was posted in a financial month and year prior to the cut-off month and year (GL

Journal Entry).• If the Interface module is installed and you selected the Exports required option (Interface System

Setup), then the journal must either have been exported, or the age of the journal (compared tothe current company date) must exceed the number of days that you are retaining records beforeautomatic deletion (Interface System Setup)

• Printed inventory documents are deleted if the transaction posting year and month is earlier than thecalculated cut-off month and year (see Inventory Setup - History tab).

• Price history is deleted if the date of the price change is earlier than the calculated cut-off date. The cut-off date is calculated as the current company date less the number of days or months to Retain historyof price changes (Inventory Setup - History tab).

• FIFO buckets are deleted if they have a zero quantity and the number of days between the currentcompany date and the bucket's last issue date is greater than the days or months specified at the No ofdays to retain buckets with zero quantity option (Inventory Setup - History tab).

• A report containing a summary of the following for each file processed:

• the number of ledger distribution entries deleted• the number of movements deleted• the number of inspection items deleted• the number of inventory document transaction items deleted• the number of inventory journals deleted• the number of goods in transit entries deleted• the number of inventory price history items deleted• the number of temporary stock codes deleted

| Queries | 369


Queries

Inventory QueryYou use the Inventory Query program to view static details held on file against your stock items, as wellas any transactions that have been processed against them.

This program can be run at any time.

Note:You can prevent the unauthorized viewing of stock item costs by denying operators access to thefield: Show costs in Inventory/WIP queries (Operators).

Be careful that you do not deny an operator access to the viewing of costs in this program, whileallowing the same operator the facility to maintain stock codes. In this scenario, the operator wouldstill be able to view details of BOM costs held against the item.

The number of decimals displayed in this query depend on your entry at the following fields:

• Edit quantities using decimals associated with item (Company Setup - Options tab)• Maximum number of decimals (Stock Code Maintenance)

If you are new to this query, then the following information will help you achieve the best results:

• The information shown is always up to date (i.e. the query will reflect the latest information for stockitems that have been captured or maintained).

• If you know the stock code, then you can enter it directly and press the Tab or Enter key to view theinformation.

If you do not know the stock code, then you can use the browse function to locate the code.• You can personalize this query in a number of ways. These include:

• setting preferences that affect what information is displayed. These settings can be retained forfuture use

• configuring property sheets (e.g. the section headed Stock Code Details). This includes being ableto sequence items by dragging them up or down, to show important items first

• configuring the Warehouse Values, Warehouse History and Movements listviews. This includesbeing able to sequence columns by dragging them left or right, sorting columns and changingcolumn widths

• configuring the layout of the panes on the screen, including hiding or displaying panes

Inventory Query



Query

Multiple Bins Select this to view bins for the stock item (see Multiple Binsfor Stock Code).

Note:This function is available only if you enabled the option:Multiple bins (Inventory Setup).

| Queries | 370


Field Values DescriptionRefer to Multiple bins for additional information on multiplebins in SYSPRO.

FIFO/LIFOBuckets

Select this to view FIFO or LIFO buckets for this item (seeFIFO/LIFO Bins for Stock Code).

Note:This function is available only you enabled the option:FIFO valuation at the FIFO Valuation field, or youselected FIFO at the Costing method field (InventorySetup or Inventory Warehouses).

or

You enabled the option: LIFO costing at the Costingmethod field (Inventory Setup).

Lots Select this to view lot traceability details for the stock item (seeLot Maintenance).

Note:This function is available only if the stock codeis defined as a traceable item (Stock CodeMaintenance).

Reserved ParentLots

Select this to use the Parent Lot Reservations for StockCode program to view reserved lot information for the stockitem.

Note:This option is only enabled if the stock code isdefined as a lot traceable parent item (Stock CodeMaintenance - Tracking).

Serial Tracking Select this to use the Serial Number Maintenance program toview serial number tracking information for the stock item.

Note:This option is only enabled if the stock code is definedas a serialized item (Stock Code Maintenance -Tracking).

Reserved ParentSerials

Select this to use the Parent Serial Reservations for StockCode program to view reserved serial information for the stockitem.

Note:This option is only enabled if the stock code is definedas a serialized parent item (Stock Code Maintenance- Tracking).

Alternate StockCodes

Select this to view and maintain alternate stock codes thathave been assigned to the stock item (see Alternate StockCodes).

| Queries | 371


Field Values DescriptionGoods in Transit Select this to use the Goods in Transit Details for Stock

Code program to view the Goods in Transit details for theselected stock item.

Note:This option is available only if you enabled the option:Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (InventorySetup).

Movements Select this to view a detailed history of sales and inventorymovements processed against the stock item (see InventoryMovements for Stock Code).

Customer Stock X-Ref

Select this to view and maintain any stock code interchangedetails held on file for a specific customer, or all customers.

You establish an interchange using the Customer StockCodes program (Accounts Receivable).

This enables you to selectively link customers to specificSYSPRO stock codes. When the customer's stock code isentered during processing within the Sales Order Entryprogram, the system automatically extracts the SYSPRO stockcode.

Note:Against the customer you must enable the option:Stock code interchange required (AR CustomerMaintenance).

Supplier StockCode X-Ref

Select this to view and maintain a cross-reference between aSYSPRO stock code and a supplier catalogue number.

ATP Select this to view the available to promise details for aparticular stock code/warehouse combination.

You can view details of the individual supply and demand thataffects the available to promise for the stock item, as well astime fence calculations that were performed (see InventoryATP Query and ATP Calculation Examples).

Cost Analysis Select this to view costs in a specific unit of measure.Cumulative costs can be viewed by value, percentage markup,or percent profit margin.

ReturnMerchandise

Select this to view RMA transaction details processed againstthe stock item (see RMA for Stock Code).

Sales

Sales Orders Select this to view outstanding customer orders that have beenplaced for the stock item.

Forecast Select this to view and maintain forecasts for the stock item.

Dispatch Select this to browse on dispatch notes for an order (seeDispatch Notes).

| Queries | 372


Field Values DescriptionPricing Select this to view and maintain the price codes and prices

assigned to the stock item.

Quantity Breaks Select this to view and maintain the quantity discount breaksassigned to the stock item.

Note:This function is available only if the pricing methoddefined for the stock item is defined as quantitydiscounted (Stock Code Maintenance).

Goods in Transit(Sales)

Select this to view the Goods in Transit details for the selectedstock item.

Note:This option is available only if you enabled the option:Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (InventorySetup).

Purchasing

Purchase Orders Select this to view purchase orders that have been placedagainst the stock item.

Blanket P/Orders Select this to view blanket purchase orders that have beenplaced against the stock item (see Inventory Browse on BPOby Stock Code).

Requisitions Select this to view requisition details captured for the stock itemusing the Requisition Query for Stock Code program.

Inspection Select this to use the Goods in Inspection for Stock Codeprogram to view inspection details for this item.

Note:This function is available only if the item has beendefined as requiring inspection (Stock CodeMaintenance).

Foreign Prices Select this to view and maintain foreign price details for thestock item.

Alternate Suppliers Select this to view and maintain alternate supplier details forthe stock item.

LCT Routes Select this to view all the shipping routes defined for the item.

Production

Work in Progress Select this to view information regarding work in progress jobsfor the stock item.

Although completed jobs are excluded from this function bydefault, you can use the Include menu to indicate that you wantto view details for completed jobs.

Allocations Select this to view material allocations of the stock item to jobs.

| Queries | 373


Field Values DescriptionAlthough completed allocations for jobs are excluded from thisfunction by default, you can use the Include menu to indicatethat you want to view details for completed allocations.

ECC Quantities Select this to view quantities per revision/release perwarehouse for the stock item (see Browse on ECC Rev/Rel).This function is available only for ECC-controlled items wherethe stock control level is set to Revision or Release (Bill ofMaterials Setup).

Note:The description Revision/Release is the defaultdescription assigned to this function. You can changethe wording of these fields from the User defined tabsection of the Bill of Materials Setup program.

ECC History Select this to display all the revisions/releases for the stockitem you are querying (see ECC Revision/Releases).

Select View Stock Information from the Function menu to viewstock information for each revision/release.

This function is available only for ECC-controlled items wherethe stock control level is set to Revision or Release (Bill ofMaterials Setup).

Where Used Select this to query where a specific component stock itemis used in the manufacturing process (see Browse onComponent Where-used).

If you have enabled the option: Alternate routings required (Billof Materials Setup), then you can change the route.

Structure &Routing

Select this to view all operations and materials attached to thestock item (see Structures and Routings).

Structure Select this to view all materials attached to the stock item (seeBrowse on Structures).

Routing Select this to view all operations attached to the stock item(see Browse on Operations).

Co-products Select this to use the BOM Co-products program to view andmaintain co-products attached to a notional part.

This option is only enabled when the item you are querying isdefined as a Notional part (Stock Code Maintenance).

Build Schedule Select this to view and maintain build schedules for the stockitem.

Note:This function is available only for MPS and Statisticalitems.

WIP Inspection Select this to view details of items that are in WIP inspectionusing the WIP Inspection Maintenance program.

| Queries | 374


Field Values DescriptionThis option is only available if you selected the setup option:Work in Progress inspection required (WIP Setup - General1 tab) and the stock item you are querying is made-in anddefined as traceable or inspection required (Stock CodeMaintenance - Tracking).

MaterialRequirements

Select this to use the Requirements Planning Query programto view the results of the Requirements Calculation for thestock item.

CompanyCalendar

Select this to view and maintain the company calendar (seeCompany Calendar).

Stock code You use this field to enter the stock code you want to query.

Find Select this to use the Generic Find program to locate an itemaccording to search criteria.

Play You use this function to view any multimedia objects that havebeen assigned to the item.

Edit You use this function to maintain multimedia objects for theitem (see Multimedia ).

Bitmaps Select this to view bitmap images assigned to your stock items.

Notes Select this to view and maintain various text notations againstthe stock item. A tick alongside any of the notations indicatesthat text has been assigned to the item.

Notations are stored in the Inventory Narrations Detail file(INVNAD - CISAM/InvNarrations - SQL) and can be includedon a report defined using the Create Report program.

The text is determined by the narration class as follows:

• T - Technical spec• S - S/order additional text• P - P/order additional text• W - Job narrations• I - Inspection text• D - Dangerous goods handling

Note:You can prevent the unauthorized editing of thesenotational fields using the Fields function located on theSecurity tab of the Operators program.

TechnicalSpecification

Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technicalinformation text.

This text can be printed on the GRN documents, inspectiondocuments and factory documents.

Sales Order AddText

Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technicalinformation text that can be retrieved onto a sales order andprinted on sales order documents.

| Queries | 375


Field Values DescriptionP/Order Add Text Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technical

information text that can be retrieved into a purchase order andprinted on purchase order documents.

Job Narrations Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technicalinformation text that can be printed on factory documentationand viewed using the WIP Query program.

Inspection Text Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technicalinformation text that can be printed on the GRN document,inspection document and factory documentation.

Dangerous GoodsHandling

Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technicalinformation text that can be retrieved into a sales order/purchase order and printed on sales order/purchase orderdocuments.

In addition, you can be notified during Sales Order Entrywhen dangerous goods text is held against a stock item beingprocessed.

Note:The facility to be notified of dangerous goods text heldagainst a stock item does not apply to credit notes,debit notes or quick entry orders. In addition, this doesnot apply to components generated from kit sales or toitems generated using the Product Configurator.

Notation List Select this to selectively print stock code notes assigned to thestock code (see Notation List).

Stock Code DetailsDetails that can be viewed in this pane include the following:

• Stock code

• Stock Code Quick View• Stock Code Setup (see Stock Code Maintenance)• Multimedia

• Description

This describes the stock code and is displayed throughout the system whenever the stock code isentered. You can use it to verify that the correct item has been entered.

• Long description

This is an additional description assigned to a stock code which can be printed on reports and inventorydocuments.

• Date of supersession

If the stock code's supercession date is before the current system date, then the supercession date isdisplayed in red.

• Units of measure:

• Other unit of measure

This is only displayed if the stock item is not set to use Unit quantity processing (Stock CodeMaintenance). The Other unit of measure cannot be defined if Unit quantity processing is required.

• Cost unit of measure (see Cost Unit of Measure)

| Queries | 376


• Product class (see Product Classes)

If you define product classes using the Product Classes program, without defining a branch code forthe product class, then the product class description is displayed. If, however, you selected to viewproduct classes by branch and defined the product class against a specific branch, then the productclass description is not displayed. The reason is that you could define different descriptions for a singleproduct class in the different branches.

The product class description is retrieved from the SALPDS file/table.• ABC classification

This is displayed if you selected the option: ABC analysis required (Stock Code Maintenance) andyou processed ABC Analysis report for ALL warehouses. This classification therefore indicates theclassification for the stock item based on the usage of the stock item in all warehouses (i.e. across theentire company).

• Queries

The following queries can be selected from this option:

• Movements (see Inventory Movements for Stock Code)• Customer stock x-ref (see Customer Stock Codes)• Supplier stock x-ref (see Supplier/Stock Code Details)• ATP (see Inventory ATP Query)• Cost analysis• Approved manufacturers (see Approved Manufacturers Parts)• Multiple bins (see Multiple Bins for Stock Code)• FIFO/LIFO Buckets (see FIFO/LIFO Bins for Stock Code)• Lots (see Lot Maintenance)• Reserved parent lots (see Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code)• Serials (see Serial Number Maintenance)• Reserved parent serials (see Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code)• Goods in transit (see Goods in Transit Details for Stock Code)• Alternate stock codes (see Alternate Stock Codes)• Customer price query (see Customer Price Query)

DistributionDetails that can be viewed in this pane include the following:

• Tax information:

• Tax code (see Tax Codes)• Supplier

• Query (see Supplier Query)• Supplier Setup (see Stock Code Maintenance)

• Service charges (see Service Charges)

If a service charge is attached to this stock item, then you can use the Service Charge Maintenanceprogram to query the details of the service charge.

• Queries

• Forecast - see Forecast Maintenance.• Dispatch Query - see Dispatch Notes.• Quantity breaks - see Stock Code Quantity Discounts.• Goods in Transit (Sales) - see Goods in Transit Details for Stock Code.• RMA Query - see RMA for Stock Code.• Blanket Purchase Order - see Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code.

| Queries | 377


• Requisitions - see Requisition Query for Stock Code.• Inspection - see Goods in Inspection for Stock Code.• Sales orders

This enables you to use the Sales Orders for Stock Code program to view details of customerorders for the stock item.

• Purchase Orders - see Purchase Orders for Stock Code.• Pricing - see Pricing for a Stock Code.• Foreign Prices - see Foreign Purchase Prices.• Alternate Suppliers - see Alternate Suppliers.• LCT Routes - see LCT Route Query.• Supplier's Contracts - see Blanket P/O Browse on Contracts.

ProductionDetails that can be viewed in this pane include the following:

• Work in Progress (see Work in Progress for Stock Code)• Structure & routing (see Structures and Routings)• Allocations (see Allocations for Stock Code)• Quotations (see Quotation Query by Stock Code)• Warehouse to use:

• Warehouse (seeInventory Warehouses)• Bill of materials:

These costs are updated when you change the costs associated with the specific item (manual cost) orwhen the cost implosion is run and changes in the cost of an item are rolled up to the parent part.

• Sub contract cost

Sub contract costs are only displayed separately from material costs if you selected the option: Splitsubcontract operation costs from material costs (Bill of Materials Setup - General tab).

• Low level code

This indicates the low level code for the stock item and is calculated when the Low Level CodeCalculation program is run.

The level code for a parent item is 0, for the sub-assembly it is 1 and for the component it is 2. Thisnumbering is recursive down to a maximum of 15 levels.

If the item is a top level parent or the Low Level Code Calculation has not yet been run, then noinformation is displayed in this field.

• Queries

Note:You will be unable to access the Where Used, Structure and Routing queries if you have notbeen granted access to the activity: BOM Access to Structure and Routings (Operators -Security tab).

• ECC Quantities - see Browse on ECC Rev/Rel.• ECC History - see ECC Revision/Releases.• Where Used - see Browse on Component Where-used.• Structure - see Browse on Structures.• Routing - see Browse on Operations.• Build Schedules - see Build Schedule Maintenance.• WIP Inspection - see WIP Inspection Maintenance.• Material requirements - see Requirements Planning Query.

| Queries | 378


Warehouse ValuesYou use the options in the Warehouse Values Selection pane to indicate your preferences for this tab (seeWarehouse Values Selection).

You can switch the Smart Link on the listviews on and off by pressing Alt + Shift + F7.

Details that can be viewed in this listview include the following:

• Available

The quantity available is the quantity on hand less the quantity allocated to sales orders for the itemin the selected warehouse. The quantity allocated to sales orders is the order quantity and includesquantities on backorder.


• Unallocated

Calculated as: (quantity on hand - allocated to sales orders - allocated to work in progress)• On hand

This indicates the quantity of the item physically in the warehouse. This includes quantities on hold.• In inspection

This indicates the quantity of purchased items awaiting inspection (i.e. receipted into inspection but notreceipted into stock).

• In transit

This indicates the outstanding non-immediate warehouse transfers shown against the targetwarehouse.

• On order

This indicates the quantity of outstanding purchase orders, made-in jobs and supply chain transfers.• Allocated to sales orders

Calculated as: (quantity on back order + sales order ship quantity).

These quantities exclude unallocated scheduled order back order and ship quantities.

Note that the ship quantities for credit notes are NOT included in the sales order ship quantity. Creditnote quantities are never included in the allocations as these quantities are only available once thecredit has been fully processed.

• On back order

This indicates the sales order back order quantity. This quantity excludes unallocated scheduled orderback order quantities.

• Allocated to WIP

This indicates the outstanding materials to be issued to jobs.

This includes allocations to both confirmed and unconfirmed jobs.• Future free

Calculated as: (quantity on hand + quantity in inspection + quantity in transit + quantity on order -allocated to sales orders - allocated to work in progress).

• ABC class

This is displayed if you selected the option: ABC analysis required (Stock Code Maintenance) and youprocessed ABC Analysis report for this specific warehouse. This classification therefore indicates theclassification for the stock item based on the usage of the stock item in this specific warehouse only.

| Queries | 379


• Dispatched not invoiced

This indicates goods delivered on a dispatch note, but not yet invoiced.• Landed cost multiplier

This indicates the value of the cost multiplier defined against the warehouse for this stock item(Warehouses for Stock Code).

• RMA inspection

This indicates the total quantity currently in inspection as a result of RMA receipts.• YTD usage value

This is an annualized figure and is always based on the last 12 periods usage. It is not cleared at yearend.

The YTD usage value is increased in the period by all sales as the invoices are processed (i.e. at thecost used at the time the invoice was processed). Similarly issues update this value at the time of theissue.

Thus, during a month this figure is the last calculated usage from the month-end process plus anymovements that have taken place during the month.

The year to date usage value is updated perpetually. It is updated during the month by programs suchas Document Print, which takes the cost value of the stocked lines as they are invoiced, and adds thisto the YtdUsageValue field.

It is updated for each warehouse as follows when the Month end or Year end function of the InventoryPeriod End program is run:

• The number of months usage field is increased by 1• If the year to date usage value against the warehouse now represents 13 months, then the value is

annualized to represent 12 months usage.• If the quantity sold or issued for the last 12 months is less than zero, then the usage value is set to

zero.

At the Inventory month end you will now have a figure that represents 13 months information, as it ismultiplied by 13 and divided by 12 to give the annualized value

The ABC Analysis program uses the usage value to classify stock items into A, B, C or D class items.

An example starting with a new stock code is as follows:

Month 1 Sales = 100 Total = 100 Month end - noaction

ABC report calcsas 100 / 1 * 12 =1200









| Queries | 380









ABC report calcsas 1040 /9 * 12 =1387






ABC report uses1390

Year end - noaction

Month 1 of thenext year

Sales = 150 Total = 1540 Month endcalculation - 1540 /13 * 12 = 1422

ABC report uses1422

Month 2 of thenext year

Sales = 110 Total = 1650 Month endcalculation - 1650 /13 * 12 = 1523

ABC report uses1523

The Annual usage value = Usage brought forward from previous period end plus ((quantity issued xcost) + (quantity sold x cost) for the current period to date). The cost at the time the transaction wasprocessed is used, not the current cost.

The annual usage value of a stock item is used to determine its classification. This value is the totalcost of sales and issues of an item over the past 12 months.

The program calculates the total inventory usage value by accumulating the annual usage value foreach warehouse. It then calculates the annual usage value for each stock item.

The annual usage value (A.u.v) is increased in a period by the sales values as invoices are processed.The cost used at the time that the invoice was processed is used. Similarly, the total inventory usage isupdated when the item is issued. Therefore, during a specific period, the YTD usage is the usage as atthe previous period end, plus the usage from movements that have occurred during the current period.

For each month end after the 12th month, the usage value is annualized by dividing the value by 13 andmultiplying by 12. If the annual usage value of a stock item is based on less than 12 months history,then the value is divided by the number of months that the item has been held on file, and multiplied by12 to give an annual usage value.

Warehouse Value DetailsThe information displayed in this pane relates to the currently highlighted line in the Warehouse Valueslistview.

| Queries | 381


Details that can be viewed in this listview include the following:

• Qty on hand

This indicates the quantity of the item physically in the warehouse. This includes quantities on hold.• Qty on backorder

This indicates the sales order back order quantity. This quantity excludes unallocated scheduled orderback order quantities.

• Qty allocated to S/O

Calculated as: (quantity on back order + sales order ship quantity).

These quantities exclude unallocated scheduled order back order and ship quantities.

Note that the ship quantities for credit notes are NOT included in the sales order ship quantity. Creditnote quantities are never included in the allocations as these quantities are only available once thecredit has been fully processed.

• Qty available

The quantity available is the quantity on hand less the quantity allocated to sales orders for the itemin the selected warehouse. The quantity allocated to sales orders is the order quantity and includesquantities on backorder.


• Qty in inspection

This indicates the quantity of purchased items awaiting inspection (i.e. receipted into inspection but notreceipted into stock).

• Qty on order

This indicates the quantity of outstanding purchase orders, made-in jobs and supply chain transfers.• Qty allocated to WIP

This indicates the quantity of materials (components) and labor allocated to the job. This is displayedregardless of whether the job is confirmed or not.

• Future free

Calculated as: (quantity on hand + quantity in inspection + quantity in transit + quantity on order -allocated to sales orders - allocated to work in progress).

• Quantity dispatched not invoiced

This indicates goods delivered on a dispatch note, but not yet invoiced.• Graphs (see Graphs)

• Sales History Graph

Select this to graphically represent a history of sales/issues of the item for a specific warehouse.• Closing Balances Graph

Select this to graphically represent a history of closing balance figures for the item for a specificwarehouse.

• Costs

• Method

This indicates the costing method defined against the warehouse (if costing is defined bywarehouse) or against the company (see Inventory Setup - General tab)

• Last cost entered

| Queries | 382


This indicates the last cost at which the item was received into the selected warehouse. Thisincludes non-merchandise costs if you selected the option: Include non-merchandise costs in lastcost (Inventory Setup - Options tab and/or Purchase Orders Setup - General tab).

• Current

This indicates the current unit cost of the item in the selected warehouse. This cost includes non-merchandise costs if you selected the option: Include non-merchandise costs in last cost (InventorySetup - Options tab and/or Purchase Orders Setup - General tab).

• Last non-merchandise

This indicates the unit non-merchandise value of the last receipt for the item.

• Company

This indicates the company for which the values are being displayed.

This is only displayed if you selected the Multiple Company Values option.

Warehouse Values SelectionThe options in this pane enable you to indicate your preferences for the listview on the Warehouse Valuestab.

Field Values DescriptionRefreshWarehouseValues

Select this to redisplay the information on the WarehouseValues tab to reflect changes you made to the options in thispane.

This function is only enabled when you make a change to theselections.

Autoload Values

Load PreviousForm Values

Select this to set all selections as they were when last you ranthis program. This option overrides any default form values.

Save Form Valuesas Default

Select this to save your selections in this pane as your defaultpreferences for your operator code for all companies to whichyou have access.

Save Form Valuesfor this Company

Select this to save your selections in this pane as the defaultpreferences for the current SYSPRO company only.

Remove DefaultForm Values

Select this to remove all settings you applied to your operatorcode (for all companies) when you used the Save Form Valuesas Default option.

All selections in the pane are restored to the form's defaultpreference selections.

This option is only enabled once you select the Save FormValues as Default option.

Remove CompanyForm Values

Select this to remove all settings you applied to the SYSPROcompany when you used the Save Form Values for thisCompany option.


| Queries | 383


Field Values DescriptionThis option is only enabled once you select the Save FormValues for this Company option.

Warehouses

Combinewarehouses

Select this to accumulate the values held in all selectedwarehouses for the stock item.

Note:This option applies to the Warehouse Values tab only.

Warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate which warehouse(s) you want toview as well as the specific information you want to display.

List of warehouses Select this to define a list of warehouses for which you want todisplay the information.

Multiple CompanyValues

Select this to view Warehouse Values for multiple companies.


• you selected the option: Show warehouse values formultiple companies (Inventory Setup - Browse tab) AND

• your inventory is shared (Company Setup - Options tab)

Include This enables you to select the items you want to view in thequery based on various criteria related to the items.

Items with the following criteria can be selected/deselected forinclusion in the query:

• On hand > zero• Zero on hand• On hand < zero• On hand < safety• On hand < re-order• On hand < minimum• On hand > maximum• Stock in inspection• Stock on order• Zero stock on order• Stock in transit• Future free > maximum• Future free < minimum

Only those items that meet the criteria you selected aredisplayed in the query.

Warehouse HistoryYou use the options in the Warehouse History Selection pane to indicate your preferences for this tab (seeWarehouse History Selection).

Warehouse History - ListviewDetails that can be viewed in this pane relate to the currently highlighted line in the Warehouse Historylistview and include the following:

| Queries | 384


• Company

This indicates the company for which the values are being displayed.

This is only displayed if you selected the Multiple Company Values option.• Warehouse (see Inventory Warehouses)• Graphs (see Graphs)

• Sales History Graph

Select this to graphically represent a history of sales/issues of the item for a specific warehouse.• Closing Balances Graph

Select this to graphically represent a history of closing balance figures for the item for a specificwarehouse.

Warehouse History SelectionThe options in this pane enable you to indicate your preferences for the listview on the Warehouse Historytab.

Field Values DescriptionRefreshWarehouseHistory

Select this to redisplay the information on the WarehouseHistory tab to reflect changes you made to the options in thispane.


Autoload Values




Select this to save your selections in this pane as your defaultpreferences for your operator code.


Select this to save your selections in this pane as the defaultpreferences for the current SYSPRO company.


Select this to remove all settings you applied to your operatorcode when you used the Save Form Values as Default option.






This option is only enabled once you select the Save FormValues for this Company option.

Warehouses

| Queries | 385


Field Values DescriptionCombinewarehouses

Select this to accumulate the values held in all selectedwarehouses for the stock item.

Note:This option applies to the Warehouse History tab only.

Warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate which warehouse(s) you want toview as well as the specific information you want to display.

List of warehouses Select this to define a list of warehouses for which you want todisplay the information.

Multiple companyvalues

Select this to view Warehouse History for multiple companies.


• you selected the option: Show warehouse values formultiple companies (Inventory Setup - Browse tab) AND

• your inventory is shared (Company Setup - Options tab)

MovementsYou use the options in the Movements Selection pane to indicate your preferences for this tab (seeMovements Selection).

Movements are displayed within each warehouse. This is irrespective of your selection at the Combinewarehouses option (see Warehouse Values Selection and Warehouse History Selection).

Field Values DescriptionMore lines Select this to display the next set of lines as per your selection

at the Rows option.

This option is not enabled when you select to display all rows.

View journals Select this to view information on the inventory journals for theline currently highlighted in the Movements listview.

Rows You use this option to indicate the number of rows you want todisplay in the listview.

Movements ListviewDetails that can be viewed in this listview include the following:

• Date

For Purchase Order receipts, this reflects the calendar date of the movement and not the start datewhen the Purchase Order Receipts program was loaded to process the receipt, unless the operatormanually changed the date when processing the receipt.

• Unit cost

This indicates the cost that was used to post the transaction, except when FIFO costing is used. In thiscase, the cost is not displayed as more than one FIFO bucket may have been used for the transaction.

• Unit price/New cost

The Unit price is the price expressed in terms of the stocking unit of measure for the item.

The New cost is the warehouse cost after the transaction was processed. For Standard costing, theUnit cost and the New cost will be the same. For other costing methods, these two values may or maynot differ

| Queries | 386


• New wh

This column displays the destination warehouse for GIT (Goods in Transit) transfers.

Movements SelectionThe options in this pane enable you to indicate your preferences for the listview on the Movements tab.

Field Values DescriptionRefreshMovements

Select this to redisplay the information on the Movements tabto reflect changes you made to the options in this pane.


Autoload Values















Movementsselection

Movements display These options refer to the warehouse order in which themovements are displayed in the Movements listview.

Irrespective of the order you select the movements aredisplayed within each warehouse in the following order:

Earliest year, then earliest period, then earliest transaction dateand lastly earliest transaction time.

Earliestmovements first

Select this to view the stock movements from the firstwarehouse to the last warehouse in altphabetic/numericsequence.

| Queries | 387


Field Values DescriptionLatest movementsfirst

Select this to view the stock movements in reverse keysequence, which is from the last warehouse to the firstwarehouse in altphabetic/numeric sequence.

If you restricted the number of rows to display, the highestwarehouse in alphabetica/numerical order is displayed first.Only by selecting the More Lines option will the additionalmovements be displayed.

Warehouses

Warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which youwant to display information in the Movements tab listview.

Movement dates This enables you to indicate the date(s) for which you want todisplay movements in the Movements tab listview.

One of the following options can be selected:

• All• Today• Today & yesterday• This week• Range• Single

From movementdate

You use this field to indicate the first date in a range of datesfor which you want to display movements.

If you selected to display movements for a single day then youenter that day in this field.

When you select to display movements for Today, Today andYesterday or This week, then you can optionally change thedefault date displayed.

To movement date You use this field to indicate the last date in a range of datesfor which you want to display movements.

When you select to display movements for Today, Today andYesterday or This week, then you can optionally change thedefault date displayed.

Inventorytransactionvalues

Transaction valueselection

This enables you to indicate the value(s) for which you want todisplay movements in the Movements tab listview.

From transactionvalue

You use this field to indicate the lowest (or the single) value ina range of values for which you want to display movements.

To transactionvalue

You use this field to indicate the highest value in a range ofvalues for which you want to display movements.

Options

Customer You use this field to indicate a single customer for whom youwant to display movements.

| Queries | 388


Field Values DescriptionSupplier You use this field to indicate a single supplier for whom you

want to display movements.

Salesperson You use this field to indicate a single salesperson for whomyou want to display movements.

Purchase order You use this field to indicate a single purchase order for whichyou want to display movements.

Sales order You use this field to indicate a single sales order for which youwant to display movements.

Sales movements This option enables you to select the types of sales movementsyou want to view for each item in the Stock Movements listviewof the query.

The following types of sales movements can be selected/deselected for inclusion in the query:

• Credit notes• Debit notes• Invoices• Dispatch notes

Inventorymovements

This option enables you to select the types of inventorymovements you want to view for each item in the StockMovements listview of the query.

inventory movements are processed using the InventoryMovements program.

The following types of inventory movements can be selected/deselected for inclusion in the query:

• Issues• Transfers• Receipts• Physical• Adjustments• Changes• Modifications• Bin transfers

Only those inventory movements selected are displayed in thequery.

NotesThe first three lines of each Note type are displayed in this section. You can view and edit the notes bytypically using your right mouse button to select the first line of text.

User DefinedDetails of your user defined fields are displayed in this pane. See User Defined.

| Queries | 389


Custom FormThis pane displays view details of any custom form data that has been assigned to the item (CustomForm Design).

• Custom Form Data Entry

Select this to use the Custom Form Entry program to enter custom form data against the stock item.

Goods in Inspection for Stock CodeYou use the Goods in Inspection for Stock Code program to view inspection transactions processed forstock items defined as requiring inspection (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).

You can access the Goods in Inspection for Stock Code program from the Inventory Query program byselecting the Inspection option from the P/O Line Information pane.

Goods in Inspection for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:




Find Select this to locate items according to extensive searchcriteria.


Options

Options Select this to indicate the items you want to include in thelistview.

Include

InspectionComplete

Select this to include information on items where the inspectionphase is complete.

Counted Complete Select this to include information on items where the countphase is complete.

Zero Qty inInspection

Select this to include information on items where there is a zeroquantity in inspection.

Sequence

GRN Numbers Select this to display the information in the listview in GRNnumber sequence.

Warehouse Select this to display the information in the listview inWarehouse code sequence.

Matched Codes Select this to display only those GRNs that were found whenyou used the Find option from the File menu.

This option is only enabled when you successfully used theFind option to list GRNs matching a specific pattern.

| Queries | 390



Field Values DescriptionStart at GRN/warehouse

You use this field to enter the GRN number or warehouse towhich you want to navigate in the listview. This depends onyour selection at the sequence menu.

OK Select this to navigate to the GRN or warehouse you entered inthe previous field.


OptionsThis screen is displayed when you select the Options option from the Options menu.


This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which youwant to display Goods in Inspection details in the listview.

Revision/Release You use this option to indicate the revisions/release for whichyou want to view information for the stock item.

This option is only enabled if the stock item is ECC-controlled(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking) and the stock controllevel is set to Revision or Release (Bill of Materials Setup -Engineering Change Control tab).

The wording for this option defaults to the text defined againstthe User defined fields on the Engineering Change Control tabof the Bill of Materials Setup program.

Rev/Rel This indicates the single revision/release for which you want toinclude transactions in the listview.


Cancel Select this to ignore any selections you changed and to returnto the listview.

ListviewWhen you select the Goods in Inspection for Stock Code program, the inspection transactions currentlydefined for the selected stock code are displayed in a listview.


• GRN• Wh• Lot• Supplier• Exp date• Rec date• On hold• P/order• Delivery note

| Queries | 391


• On-site qty• Off-site qty• Qty advised• Qty counted• Cnt comp• Qty inspected• Ins comp• Qty accepted• Qty scrapped• Certificate• Narration• Rev• Rel• Rejected qty

Inspection Transactions for GRNYou can view the specific transactions that were processed against the item in inspection by highlightingthe line and typically using your right mouse button to select the Transaction option.

This information displayed in this listview will have been captured using the Purchase Order Inspectionprogram.

The following transaction information can be viewed:

• GRN

This indicates the Goods Received Note number.• Lot

This indicates the lot number.• Transaction date

This indicates the date of the transaction.• Type

This indicates the transaction type.

Advised - indicates that the item was receipted into inspection.

Counted - indicates that the item was counted.

Inspected - indicates that the item was inspected.

Accepted - indicates that the item was receipted into stock.

Rejected - indicates that the item was rejected.

Scrapped - indicates that the item was scrapped.• Qty

This indicates the transaction quantity.• Concession

This indicates the concession number if entered against the transaction.• Document

This indicates the document number entered for the transaction.• Scrap code

This indicates the scrap code.• Narration

| Queries | 392


This displays the narration attached to the transaction.

HoldYou can place a specific GRN on hold by highlighting the GRN line and typically using your right mousebutton to select the option: Hold GRN.

If you defined a password against the option: Inventory Place GRN on hold when in Inspection (PasswordSetup), then you are requested to enter the password before continuing.

Field Values DescriptionOK Select this to place the GRN on hold.

This prevents the item from being accepted into stock using thePurchase Order Inspection program.

Cancel Select this to return to the listview without placing the GRN onhold.

Allocations for Stock CodeYou use the Allocations for Stock Code program to view all material allocations of the stock codes tojobs.

The program can be accessed by selecting the Allocations option from the Production pane of theInventory Query program.

Allocations for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:




Options

Options Select this to indicate additional options according to which youwant to display information in the listview.

Include

CompletedAllocations

Completed jobs or completed allocations for jobs are excludedfrom the listview by default.

Select this to include details of completed allocations in thelistview.

Query

Job Query Select this to use the WIP Query program to view detailedinformation for the job currently highlighted in the listview.

Sequence

Warehouse Select this to display the information in the listview inwarehouse sequence.

| Queries | 393


Field Values DescriptionJob Select this to display the information in the listview in job

number sequence.


Field Values DescriptionStart at job You use this field to enter the job number to which you want to


OK Select this to navigate to the job number you entered in theprevious field.



Field Values DescriptionRevision/Release This enables you to view information for all or a single revision/

release of the stock item. The options are available only ifthe item is ECC-controlled and the stock control level is byRevision or Release (Bill of Materials Setup - EngineeringChange Control tab).

The wording for these fields defaults to the text defined againstthe User-defined fields in Bill of Materials Setup.

All Select this to include details for all revisions/releases for thestock item.

Single Select this to include details for a single revision/release of thestock item.

Rev You use this field to enter the revision for which you want toview the details.

This field is only enabled if you select to include details for asingle revision/release.

Rel You use this field to enter the revision for which you want toview the details.

OK Select this to accept your selections. The listview displaysdetails for the stock item based on the revision/release youselected.


ListviewWhen you select the Allocations for Stock Code program, the currently defined are displayed in alistview.


| Queries | 394


• Job• Wh• Cost

You will be unable to view costs if the field: Show costs in Inventory/WIP is set to Denied (Operators -Security tab).

• Quantity required• Quantity issued• Completed job• Date required

This indicates the date by which the material is required for the manufacture of the parent part. This isbased either on the operation to which it is assigned, or a number of days before the delivery date ofthe job.

• Rev• Rel

RMA for Stock CodeYou use the RMA for Stock Code program to view RMA information for a selected stock item.

The RMA for Stock Code program can be selected from the Inventory Query program by selectingReturn Merchandise from the Query menu.

RMA for Stock CodeYou can typically use you right mouse button to select an RMA line and then select the Query option toview additional RMA information using the RMA Query program.

The information displayed in this listview includes:

• RMA number

This indicates the RMA number for the returned item.• Line number

This indicates the RMA line number within the RMA number.• Type

This indicates the RMA type for the line.

With the exception of the Defective out of warranty type, these RMA types are for documentationpurposes only, and can be printed on the RMA Document Print and Outstanding Authorizationsprograms.

• Tax code

This indicates the tax code defined against the RMA line.• Status

This indicates the status of the RMA (see RMA Statuses).• Action

This indicates the action associated with the receipt process.

Refer to Receipt Actions and Associated Effects for additional information on the effects of thevarious receipt actions.

• Problem code

This indicates the problem code associated with the RMA line. It enables you to identify recurringproblems with items returned by a customer.

| Queries | 395


• Uom

This indicates the unit of measure to which the quantity received relates.• Quantity authorized

This indicates the original quantity entered at the time of capturing the RMA Issue.• Quantity received

This indicates the quantity of the stock item returned by the customer.• Receiving warehouse

This indicates the code of the warehouse into which the returned item was received.• Receiving price

This indicates the price at which the returned item was received.• Purchase date

This indicates the date on which the item was purchased.• Issue date

This indicates the date on which the RMA was issued.• Received date

This indicates the date on which the item was received.• Return date

This indicates the date by which the goods should be returned.• Cross shipment

This indicates whether or not a cross shipment exists for the item against this RMA.• Original warehouse

This indicates the original warehouse in which the item was stocked.

Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock CodeYou use the Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code program to view blanket purchase orders thathave been placed against a stock item.

All contracts and detail lines are displayed for the stock code.

The Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the Purchasing >Blanket P/Orders option from the Query menu of the Inventory Query program.

Blanket Purchase Orders for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:






| Queries | 396


Field Values DescriptionStart at contract You use this field to enter the contract to which you want to


OK Select this to navigate to the contract you entered in theprevious field.


ListviewWhen you select the Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code program, the blanket purchase orderscurrently defined against the stock item are displayed in a listview.


• Contract

This indicates the contract reference captured against the contract using the Blanket P/O ContractMaintenance program.

• Supplier

This indicates the code of the supplier associated with the contract.• Line

This indicates the contract line number.• Wh• Minimum quantity• Total quantity• Ordered quantity• Received quantity• Uom• Last receipt date• Price• Price uom• Pcl• Complete

This column indicates whether or not the contract line is complete.

A BPO contract line is automatically marked as complete when the total contract quantity has beenboth ordered and received. Alternatively, a BPO contract line can manually be set to complete using theBlanket P/O Contract Maintenance program.

Requisition Query for Stock CodeYou use the Requisition Query for Stock Code program to view purchase order requisition informationfor a selected stock item.

You can also view additional information for any requisition line displayed in the listview of the RequisitionQuery for Stock Code program, by highlighting the required requisition line and typically using your rightmouse button to display and select the Zoom option (see Requisition Query Details).

The Requisition Query for Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the Purchasing >Requisitions option from the Query menu of the Inventory Query program.

| Queries | 397


RequisitionsThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:



Options

Preferences Select this to configure default options you want to apply whenviewing requisition information in the listview.

Options Select this to indicate the requisitions you want to display in thelistview according to the originator, holder and/or warehouse.

Functions

Routings Select this to use the Requisition Query Details programto view additional requisition information for the currentlyhighlighted purchase order requisition line.


Field Values DescriptionView requisitionsin status

This enables you to selectively indicate the requisitions youwant to view based on their status.

For example, if you do not want to include cancelledrequisitions in the listview, you would deselect the Cancelledoption.

The following statuses can be selected/deselected:

• Normal• Approved• Cancelled• Purchase order created• Received into stock and acknowledged• Received into stock but not acknowledged• Received into inspection and acknowledged• Received into inspection bit not acknowledged• On hold

Select All Select this if you want to view requisitions in all statuses listed.

Deselect All Select this to deselect all requisition statuses listed.

Save Select this to save your selections against you operator code.

The preferences you selected are saved until the next time youchange them.

Close Select this to save the preferences for the current run of theprogram only.

| Queries | 398



Field Values DescriptionOriginatorselection

This enables you to indicate the requisition originator(s) forwhom you want to display requisitions in the listview.

Holder selection This enables you to indicate the requisition holder(s) for whomyou want to display requisitions in the listview.

Warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which youwant to display requisitions in the listview.


The listview displays those requisitions for the options youselected.

Cancel Select this to ignore any selections you made and to return tothe listview.

ListviewWhen you select the Requisition Query for Stock Code program, the purchase order requisition currentlydefined against the stock item are displayed in a listview.


You can sort the listview by any of these columns by typically using your right mouse button to click on thecolumn heading.

• Requisition

This indicates the requisition number.• Line

This indicates the requisition line number.• Status

This indicates the current status of the requisition (see Statuses).• Description• Supplier

This indicates the supplier entered against the requisition line.• User name

This indicates the name of the originator who originated the requisition.• Date due

This indicates the date on which the items are required.• Quantity

This indicates the requisition quantity for the line.• Price

This indicates the unit price of the item.• Extended value• Stock code

This indicates the stock code on the requisition line.• Stock code description

| Queries | 399


This field indicates the default stock code description, if a valid stock code was entered.

For non-stocked items, the description is entered manually.

The following columns can be added to the listview by typically using your right mouse button in anycolumn header and selecting the Field Chooser option:

• Bpo

This indicates whether a blanket purchase order was used to approve the requisition.• Capex number

This indicates the capex number relevant to the item.• Catalogue number

This indicates the supplier's catalogue number or stock code reference.• Date raised

This indicates the date on which the requisition was created.• Discount

This indicates the discount applicable to the requisition line.• Hier• Hierarchy• Holder

This indicates the requisition user who is currently holding the requisition line.• Job

This indicates the job number if the requisition line relates to a Work in Progress job.• Ledger code

This indicates the General Ledger code for a non-stocked item• Ledger code description

This indicates the description defined against the ledger code.• Operation

This indicates the sub-contract operation for the item. This only applies if the requisition line is for anon-stocked item and the item relates to a Work in Progress job.

• Order uom

This indicates the unit of measure for the order quantity.

This defaults from the stock code setup (Stock Code Maintenance). This can be the stocking oralternate unit of measure as defined against the stock code.

• Originator

This indicates the requisition user code of the person who originated the requisition.• Price uom

This indicates the unit of measure for the price.• Product class

This indicates the product class relevant to the item.• Purchase order

This indicates the purchase order number.• Purchase order line

This indicates the purchase order line number.• Reason

This indicates the reason entered against the requisition line.

| Queries | 400


• Routing narrative

This indicates the route note entered against the requisition line.• User def 1• User def 2• Warehouse

This indicates the warehouse for which the item is being requisitioned.

Requisition Query DetailsYou use the Requisition Query Details program to view information for a specific purchase orderrequisition line.

The Requisition Query Details program can be accessed from the Routing field of the RequisitionQuery program or by selecting the Requisition option from the Functions menu of the PO Browse on POLines program.

Requisition Query Details



DetailsThe following information is included for the selected requisition line:

• Stock code• Description• Rev/Rel• Due date• Order qty• Order uom• Warehouse• Reason• Supplier• Price• Price uom• Discount• Status• Job• Operation• Product class• Ledger code• Ledger description• Commitments

Select this to use the program GL Commitment Status Query to view commitment value information.

This function is only enabled if you are querying a non-stocked item and the setup option: Commitmentaccount required is selected (General Ledger Setup - Commitments tab).

• Capex number• Extended value

| Queries | 401


This is the Quantity multiplied by the Price less the discount(s).• Asset capex• Asset capex line

RoutingsThe following information is included in this listview:

• Routed to

This indicates the requisition user to whom the requisition line was routed.• Route note

This indicates the route note added to the requisition line when it was routed using the RequisitionEntry program.

• Last receipt/routed to date

This indicates the date on which the requisition line was last routed.• Qty received to date

This indicates the quantity received to date against the purchase order created from the requisition line.• Qty outstanding

This indicates the quantity which is still outstanding against the purchase order for the requisition line.This is calculated as the difference between the quantity ordered and the quantity received on thepurchase order line.

• Routing operator

This indicates the operator name of the requisition user who routed the line.• Routing user

This indicates the requisition user who routed the line.• Approving operator

This indicates the operator name of the requisition user who approved the requisition

GL Commitment Status QueryYou use the GL Commitment Status Query program to view the current available budget for a selectedgeneral ledger code.

Commitment values can be viewed by selecting the Commitments option from the Requisition Entry,Purchase Order Entry and Requisition Query Details programs.

Note:Commitment accounting relates to services and non-stocked items only.

Commitment Values

Field Values DescriptionLedger code This indicates the ledger code and ledger code description to

which the values displayed relate.

Transaction This indicates information for the current transaction type.Typically the transaction type (Purchase Order or Requisition),the transaction period and transaction date are displayed.

Unallocated This indicates the value for the transaction that could not beallocated against a particular period.

| Queries | 402


Field Values DescriptionTypically, this would occur when a due date is entered for anon-stocked item which is later than the end of the followingfinancial year. The system is then unable to allocate the valueto a particular period as the date is too far into the future. Whenthe year end function of the GL Period End program is run, thesystem will attempt to allocate the values to a particular periodproviding that their due dates are not beyond the followingfinancial year end.

The text for this field defaults to 'Unallocated,' but is replacedby whatever text you define against the setup option:Unallocated text (General Ledger Setup - Commitments tab).

Commitmentstatus

The following values are displayed for the current period, forthe Year to date and for the entire year (Annual).

Uncommitted This indicates the uncommitted values for the ledger code.

These values typically come from unapproved requisitions.

Committed This indicates the committed values for the ledger code.

These values typically come from purchase orders andapproved requisitions.

Total commitment This field displays the sum of the values displayed in theUncommitted and Committed fields.

Actual This field displays the actual balances held against the ledgercode. These balance can also be viewed using the GL Queryprogram.

Total This indicates the sum of the values displayed in the Totalcommitment and Actual fields.

Budget This indicates the budget values defined against the ledgercode (see Ledger Code Maintenance).

Available This indicates the difference between the Budget value and theActual value.


Notation ListYou use the Notation List program to selectively print stock code notes assigned to a specific stock code.

Alternatively, a report of inventory notations can be generated using the Inventory Notations program.

You can access the Notation List program by selecting the Notation List option from the Notes menu ofthe Inventory Query program.

Notation List

Field Values DescriptionNotation types

| Queries | 403


Field Values DescriptionDangerous goodshandling text

Select this to print dangerous goods handling text held againstthe stock item.

Inspection text Select this to print inspection text held against the stock item.

Purchase orderadditional text

Select this to print purchase order additional text held againstthe stock item.

Technicalspecification

Select this to print technical specification text held against thestock item.

Job narrations Select this to print job narrations text held against the stockitem.

Select All Select this function to print the text for all notation types heldagainst the stock item.

Deselect All Select this function to deselect all notation types held againstthe stock item.

Print Select this function to commence printing.


Sales Orders for Stock CodeYou use the Sales Orders for Stock Code program to view customer orders that have been placed for astock item.

The browse on sales orders by stock code can be run from within the following SYSPRO programs:

• Inventory Query• Sales Order Entry• Quick Entry• Quotation Entry• Purchase Order Entry• Blanket P/O Create Purchase Orders

Sales Orders for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:



Options

Change Company Select this to view sales orders for a different company.

Note:• This option is enabled only if multiple companies are

sharing the same inventory files (Company Setup -Options tab).

• You will be unable to view any lot numbers, serialnumbers, dispatch notes or bins when viewing salesorders for a different company.

| Queries | 404


Field Values Description• Any operator security access defined against

warehouses or Accounts Receivable branches(where browses are being filtered) is applied whenviewing sales orders for another company.

Functions

Lot Numbers Select this to use the Lot, Bin, Serial Allocations program toview any lot allocations made for the currently highlighted salesorder line.

Note:This option is disabled if you are viewing sales ordersfor a different company.

Serial Numbers Select this to use the Lot, Bin, Serial Allocations program toview any serial number allocations for the currently highlightedsales order line

Note:• This option is disabled if you are viewing sales

orders for a different company• This option is disabled if the stock item is traceable,

as the serials are inextricably linked to the lotnumber and are therefore queried via the lotnumber.

• You will be unable to view serial information againsta completed sales order. The reason is that theserials are now defined against the invoice, and nolonger against the sales order.

Dispatch Notes Select this to use the Dispatch Notes program to view anydispatch notes created for the currently highlighted sales orderline.

Note:This option is disabled if you are viewing sales ordersfor a different company.

Bins Select this to use the Lot, Bin, Serial Allocations program toview any bin allocations for the currently highlighted sales orderline

Note:• This option is disabled if you are viewing sales

orders for a different company.• This option is disabled if the stock item is traceable,

as the bins are inextricably linked to the lot numberand are therefore queried via the lot number.

ReservedAllocations

Select this to use the Lot, Bin, Serial Allocations program toview any lots, bins and serials allocated to reserved stock.

Stock is placed in reserve using the Sales Order Entryprogram. If lot, bin and serial information was entered at that

| Queries | 405


Field Values Descriptiontime (see S/O Reserve or Ship Stock), then that information isdisplayed.

Change CompanyThis screen is displayed when you select the Change Company option from the Options menu,

Note:You will be unable to view any lot numbers, serial numbers, dispatch notes or bins when viewingsales orders for a different company.

Any operator security access defined against warehouses or Accounts Receivable branches (wherebrowses are being filtered) is applied when viewing sales orders for another company.

Field Values DescriptionDisplay salesorders forcompany

You use this to indicate the company for which you want toview sales orders for the selected stock code.

OK Select this to accept the company you entered and to return tothe listview.

Cancel Select this to return to the listview without changing thecompany.

Sales OrdersNote:The options in the Sales Order Selection pane enable you to indicate your preferences fordisplaying sales orders in the Sales Orders listview (see Sales Order Selection).

Field Values DescriptionMore lines Select this to display the next set of rows according to the

number of rows you selected to display at the Rows option.

This function is only enabled when there are more rows todisplay and is not enabled when you select to display All rows.

Rows This enables you to indicate the number of rows you want todisplay in the listview.

This is useful if you have a large amount of data. Filtering thenumber of rows to display, as opposed displaying all rows,means that the data is loaded more quickly in the listview.

ListviewWhen you select the Sales Orders for Stock Code program, the sales orders currently defined aredisplayed in a listview.


• Sales order

This indicates the sales order number.• Status

This indicates the current status of the sales order (see Status Codes).

| Queries | 406


• Ship date• Order quantity

This indicates the quantity of the stock item ordered.• Unit of measure

This indicates the unit of measure for the order quantity.• Warehouse

This indicates the warehouse from which the item must be shipped.• Ship quantity

This indicates the quantity of the stock item shipped.• Backorder quantity

This indicates the quantity of the stock item currently on backorder.• Customer

This indicates the code of the customer for the sales order.• Customer name

This indicates the name of the customer for the sales order.• Purchase order number

This indicates the Purchase Order number created for insufficient stock (see Insufficient Stock/BackOrder).This is only displayed until the Purchase Order is receipted. Once the purchase order receipt has beencompleted and the order updated, there is no longer a link from the sales order to the purchase order.

• Price

This indicates the price of the item.• Price unit of measure

This indicates the unit of measure for the price.• Allocated

This indicates whether the Inventory module has raised allocations to reserve stock for the transaction.

When sales orders are created, Inventory allocations are done to reserve stock. Items with noallocations are:

• Unallocated scheduled order back order and ship quantities• Forward orders

• Bom kit type• Rev

This indicates the revision of the item. This only applies if the item is defined as ECC controlled (StockCode Maintenance).

• Rel

This indicates the release of the item. This only applies if the item is defined as ECC controlled (StockCode Maintenance).

• Request date

This indicates when the customer expects delivery of the merchandise• Date entered

This represents the date on which the order was processed in SYSPRO.• Date ordered

This represents the date on which the customer placed the order.

| Queries | 407


Sales Order SelectionThe options on this pane enable you to indicate your preferences for displaying sales orders in the SalesOrders listview.

Field Values DescriptionRefresh SalesOrders

Select this to redisplay the information in the Sales Orderslistview to reflect changes you made to the options in this pane.


Autoload Values















Customers

Customer selection This enables you to display orders for all customers or aspecific customer.

You will be unable to access the Customer selection field ifviewing sales orders for a different company or if you selectedto view supply chain transfers only.

Display options

Supply chaintransfers only

Select this if you want to display only orders that weregenerated from supply chain transfers.

Include completedsales order lines

Select this to view completed order lines for sales orders thatare not yet complete (i.e. Excluding orders in a status of <9>).

Include completedsales orders

Select this to include order lines for orders that are complete(i.e. Orders that are in a status of <9>).

| Queries | 408


Field Values DescriptionEngineeringchange controls

ECC selection This enables you to indicate whether you want to display salesorders for all or a single revision/release of the stock item.

This is available only if the item is ECC-controlled and thestock control level is by Revision or Release (Bill of MaterialsSetup - Engineering Change Control tab).

The wording displayed for these fields defaults to Revision/Release, but is replaced by whatever wording you haveassigned to these user-defined fields (Bill of Materials Setup).

Revision You use this field to indicate the single revision for which youwant to display sales orders in the listview.

Release You use this field to indicate the single release for which youwant to display sales orders in the listview.

Purchase Orders for Stock CodeYou use the Purchase Orders for Stock Code program to view outstanding purchase orders that havebeen placed for the stock item.

The browse on purchase orders by stock code can be run from within the following SYSPRO programs:

• Inventory Query• Sales Order Entry• Quick Entry• Quotation Entry• Purchase Order Entry• Blanket P/O Create Purchase Orders• Job Issues• LCT Consignment Maintenance

Purchase Orders for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:


Select Select this to use the currently highlighted purchase order inthe order field of another program.


Zoom Select this to view Landed Cost Tracking details for thepurchase order.

This option is only enabled when the purchase order line islinked to the Landed Cost Tracking system.


Options

| Queries | 409


Field Values DescriptionOptions Select this to define listview display options.

Change Company Select this to change the company for which you are viewingpurchase order lines for stock codes.

Functions

History Select this to use the P/O Browse on Order Lines Historyprogram to view any receipt history for the highlighted orderline.

Note:This option is disabled if you are viewing orders for adifferent company.

Requisitions This enables you to view any requisitions processed for thehighlighted order line using the Requisition Query Detailsprogram.

Note:This option is disabled if you are viewing orders for adifferent company.

StartThe Start screen is displayed when you select the Start at option from the File menu.

Field Values DescriptionStart at purchaseorder

You use this field to enter the purchase order you want tonavigate to in the listview.

OK Select this to navigate to the purchase order code entered inthe previous field.

Cancel Select this to return to the listview without navigating to adifferent purchase order.

Zoom on LCT DetailsThe Zoom on LCT Details screen is displayed when you select the Zoom option from the File menu if thepurchase order line is linked to the Landed Cost Tracking system.

The following details are displayed on this screen:

• Vessel• Departure date• Estimated arrival date• Route• Shipment reference

You use the Close function to return to the previous screen.

OptionsThe Options screen is displayed when you select Options from the Options menu.

| Queries | 410


Field Values DescriptionSupplierselection

You will be unable to access the Supplier selection field ifviewing orders for a different company.

All Select this to display all supplier orders.

Single Select this to display orders for a single supplier.

You indicate this supplier in the Supplier field below.

Supplier This indicates the single supplier for whom you want to viewthe purchase orders.

This field is only enabled if you selected to view orders for asingle supplier.

Include zeroquantityoutstanding lines

Select this if you want to display order lines with a zero quantityoutstanding.

Includecompleted p/order lines

Select this if you want to display completed purchase orderlines (i.e. Lines for orders that are in status <9>).

You can only include completed purchase order lines if youselected the option to include zero quantity outstanding lines.

Revision/Release You can view information for a single revision/release of thestock item.

This is available only if the item is ECC-controlled and thestock control level is by Revision or Release (Bill of MaterialsSetup - Engineering Change Control tab).


All Select this to view information for all revisions and releases.

Single Select this to view information for a single revision/release.

You indicate this revision/release in the Rev/Rel field below.

Rev/Rel This indicates the single revision/release for which you want toview the purchase orders.

This field is only enabled if you selected to view orders for asingle revision/release.



Change CompanyAccessed from the Options menu, this enables you to view orders for a different company.

Note:

| Queries | 411


This option is enabled only if multiple companies are sharing the same inventory files (CompanySetup - Options tab).

You will be unable to view any history or requisition details when viewing orders for a differentcompany.

Any operator security access defined against warehouses or Accounts Payable branches (wherebrowses are being filtered) is applied when viewing orders for another company.

Field Values DescriptionDisplay p/ordersfor company

You use this to indicate the company for which you want toview purchase orders for the selected stock code.

OK Select this to accept the company you entered.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen without changingthe company.

Purchase Orders for Stock Code ListviewThe following information is included in this listview:

• Purchase order

This indicates the purchase order number.• Status

This indicates the current status of the purchase order. Refer to Status Codes for a list of possibleorder statuses.

• Due date

This indicates the latest due date of the line.• Date entered• O/s quantity

This indicates the quantity outstanding against the purchase order line.

If you have not selected the options: Include zero quantity outstanding lines and Include completed p/order lines, and there is a quantity in this column for completed purchase orders, then you need to usethe Purchase Order Purge program and only select the option: Validate inventory on order quantity.This will validate quantities on order by resetting the fields to zero and updating them with quantitiesheld against your purchase order records.

• P/o quantity

This indicates the original purchase order quantity.• Uom

This indicates the unit of measure applicable to the quantity ordered.• Wh

This indicates the warehouse for which the purchase order line was raised.• Job

This indicates the job number associated with the purchase order line, if applicable.• Req

This indicates the purchase order requisition number for the purchase order.• LCT• Price

This indicates the unit price of the item.• Price uom

| Queries | 412


This indicates the unit of measure applicable to the price.• Supplier

This indicates the supplier code against which the order was raised.• Supplier name

This indicates the supplier name against which the order was raised.• Memo• Foreign price• Currency

This indicates the currency for the order line. This is the currency defined against the supplier (APSupplier Maintenance).

• Rev

This indicates the revision number for an ECC-controlled stock item.• Rel

This indicates the release number for an ECC-controlled stock item.• Line

This indicates the purchase order line number.• Supplier's catalogue

This indicates the supplier's catalogue number (as defined within the Supplier/Stock Code Detailsprogram).

• Original due date

This indicates the original due date of the line.• MRP change date

This indicates whether MRP can reschedule the due date of the order.• Date of last receipt

This indicates the date on which a purchase order receipt was last processed against the order line.• Received qty

This indicates the quantity of the line received to date.• Discount

This indicates the discount value applicable to the order line.• Order value - local• Order value - foreign• Outstanding value - local• Outstanding value - foreign

Browse on ECC Rev/RelYou use the Browse on ECC Rev/Rel program to view the quantities for the revisions and/or releases forthe stock item you are querying.

The Browse on ECC Rev/Rel program can be accessed from the Inventory Query program by selectingthe Production > ECC Quantities option from the Query menu and then selecting the Revision/Releaseoption. You can only access the Revision/Release option for items defined as ECC controlled (Stock CodeMaintenance - Tracking).

Note:

| Queries | 413


The words: Rev, Rel, Revision and Release are the default words used throughout the Browse onECC Rev/Rel program. These words are replaced by whatever wording you have assigned to theseuser defined fields (see Bill of Materials Setup - Control tab).

Revision/Release for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:





Options

Show ZeroQuantities

Select this to display the revisions/releases with zero quantitiesin the listview.

This option is deselected by default.

Functions

View Transactions Select this to use the Browse on Lot Transactions programto view the transactions for the currently highlighted revision/release.



You use this field to enter the warehouse code to which youwant to navigate in the listview.

Start at revision You use this field to enter the revision number to which youwant to navigate in the listview.

OK Select this to navigate to the warehouse/revision you entered.


ListviewWhen you select the Browse on ECC Rev/Rel program, the revisions/releases for the selected stock itemare displayed in a listview.


• Revision• Release• Current• Wh• Bin• On hand• Quantity free

| Queries | 414


• Ship quantity• In transit• Last transaction• Date received

P/O Browse on Order Lines HistoryYou use the P/O Browse on Order Lines History program to view purchase order receipt history for aspecific purchase order line.

This program can be accessed by selecting the History option from the Functions menu of the PurchaseOrders for Stock Code or PO Browse on PO Lines programs.

Detailed History for Purchase Order



Detailed History for Purchase OrderThe following information is displayed in the listview:

• Journal


This indicates the date on which the transaction was processed.• Quantity received

This indicates the quantity received against the purchase order line.• Date received

This indicates the date on which the quantity was received.• Reference

This indicates the reference for the receipt.• Reject

This applies if a negative receipt was processed. It indicates the reason code for reversing the receipt.• Exchange rate

This indicates the rate of exchange used to convert the purchase order to the local currency.• Delivery method

This indicates the method used to deliver the items to you and is used in Inventory Optimisation.

Work in Progress for Stock CodeYou use the Work in Progress for Stock Code program to view work in progress jobs for the stock item.

This inventory browse on work in progress for stock code can be run from within the following SYSPROprograms:

• Inventory Query• Sales Order Entry• Quick Entry

| Queries | 415


• Quotation Entry• Purchase Order Entry• Blanket P/O Create Purchase Orders• Job Issues• Estimates• Structures and Routings• ECC Change Orders (Where Used function)

Work in Progress for Stock CodeThe following information is displayed in this listview:




Options

Options Select this to configure listview display options.

Change Company Select this to change the company for which the jobs aredisplayed.

Include This option enables you to indicate the jobs to include or fromthe listview.

Completed Jobs Select this if you want to include information for completed jobsin the listview.

Notional Jobs Select this if you want to include information for notional jobs inthe listview.

This option is not enabled if the stock item is a co-productwhich only exists as a parent part for a notional item.

Co-products Jobs Select this if you want to include information for co-product jobsin the listview.

This option is not enabled if the stock item is a co-productwhich exists only as a parent item for a made-in job.

If the stock item is a co-product and it exists as both a parentpart for a notional item and as the parent part for a made-injob on a different route, then both the Notional Jobs and Co-product Jobs options are enabled for selection.

Query

Job Query Select this to use the WIP Query program to view additionalinformation on the jobs.

Note:This option is disabled if you are viewing work inprogress jobs for a different company.

StartThis screen is displayed when you select the Start at option from the File menu.

| Queries | 416


Field Values DescriptionStart at job You use this field to enter the job to which you want to navigate

in the listview.

OK Select this to navigate to the job you selected.

Cancel Select this to return to the listview without navigating to anotherjob.

OptionsThis screen is displayed when you select Options from the Options menu.

Field Values DescriptionRevision/Release This is available only if the item is ECC-controlled and the

stock control level is by Revision or Release (Bill of MaterialsSetup - Engineering Change Control tab).


All Select this to view information for all revisions and releases

Single Select this to view information for a single revision/release.

You indicate this revision/release in the Rev/Rel field below.

Rev/Rel This indicates the single revision/release for which you want toview the work in progress information.

This field is only enabled if you selected to view information fora single revision/release.



Change CompanyThis screen is displayed when you select the Change Company option from the options menu.

This enables you to view work in progress jobs for a different company.

Note:This option is enabled only if multiple companies are sharing the same inventory files (CompanySetup - Options tab).

You will be unable to access the job query function when viewing work in progress jobs for adifferent company.

Any operator security access defined against Accounts Receivable branches (where browses arebeing filtered) is applied when viewing jobs for another company.

Any operator security access defined against warehouses or job classifications (where browses arebeing filtered) is applied when viewing jobs for another company.

| Queries | 417


Field Values DescriptionDisplay WIP forcompany

You use this to indicate the company for which you want toview work in progress information for the selected stock code.

OK Select this to accept the company you entered.

Cancel Select this to return to the previous screen without changingthe company.

Work in Progress for Stock CodeWhen you select the Work in Progress for Stock Code program, jobs for the selected stock code aredisplayed in a listview.

By default, only active jobs are displayed. You use the Include > Completed Jobs option to display detailsof completed jobs.


• Job• Wh• Outstanding quantity• Start date• Delivery date• Complete• Rev• Rel• Scheduled start date• Scheduled start time• Scheduled end date• Scheduled end time• Scheduled flag

Inventory Movements for Stock CodeYou use the Inventory Movements for Stock Code program to view a detailed history of sales and/orinventory movements processed against a stock item.

This program can be accessed by selecting the Movements option from the Query menu of the InventoryQuery program.

Inventory Movements for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:



Find Select this to use the Generic Find program to locate items inthe listview based on extensive search criteria.


Options

| Queries | 418


Field Values DescriptionOptions Select this to indicate a specific supplier or customer for which

you want to display movements in the listview.

Include .

Include Select this to indicate which Sales or Inventory movements youwant to include in the listview.

By default, all Inventory movements and all Sales movementsare included.

Sequence

Select this to display the movements in the listview in financialperiod within financial year sequence.

Select this to display the movements in the listview intransaction date sequence.

Select this to display the movements in the listview startingfrom the earliest date.

Select this to display the movements in the listview startingfrom the latest date.

Start Financial Period/MonthThese options are displayed when you select the Start At option from the File menu, if you selected theSequence: Financial prd/year.

Field Values DescriptionPeriod You use this field to enter the year and period for which you

want to navigate to movements in the listview.

Establish Period/Year by Date

Select this to enter a date and allow the system to establish therelative year and period for you.

OK Select this to navigate to the movements for the year andperiod selected.


Start Transaction DateThis screen is displayed when you select the Establish Period/Year by Date option from the Start FinancialPeriod/Month screen or if you selected the sequence: Transaction date.

Field Values DescriptionStart at date You use this field to enter the date for which you want

to navigate to movements in the listview. The systemautomatically calculates the relevant year and period for theentered date.

OK Select this to return to the Start Financial Period/Monthscreen. The year and period relative to the date you entered isdisplayed in the Period field.

Cancel Select this to ignore any date you entered and to return to theprevious screen.

| Queries | 419


FindThis screen is displayed when you select the Find option from the File menu.

Field Values DescriptionFind selection

Inventorymovements

Select this to search Inventory movements for the item youwant to locate.

Sales movements Select this to search Sales movements for the item you want tolocate.

OK Select this to use the Generic Find program to locate items inthe listview based on extensive search criteria.

Cancel Select this to ignore any changes you and and to return to theprevious screen.


Field Values DescriptionSupplierselection

All Select this to display Inventory movements for all suppliers inthe listview.

Single Select this to display Inventory movements for a single supplierin the listview.

Supplier You use this field to indicate the single supplier for whom youwant to display Inventory movements in the listview.

Customerselection

All Select this to display Sales movements for all customers in thelistview.

Single Select this to display Sales movements for a single customer inthe listview.

Customer You use this field to indicate the single customer for whom youwant to display Sales movements in the listview.

OK Select this to return to the listview and only display movementsfor the selected customer/supplier.


Movements for Stock CodeThe following details can be viewed in the listview:

• Date

This indicates the date on which the transaction was processed.• Type

This indicates whether the transaction movement is sales-related or inventory-related.

| Queries | 420


• Wh

This indicates the warehouse for which the transaction was processed.• Period

This indicates the financial period in which the transaction was processed.• Ref/invoice

This indicates the reference defined against the transaction.• Trn type

This indicates the specific type of sales or inventory transaction processed.

Table 3: Sales-related transactions

Deb Debit note

Cre Credit note

Inv Invoice

IBT Inter-branch transfer

DsP Movements generated via Dispatch Notes

DsI IBT movements generated via Dispatch Notes

Table 4: Inventory-related transactions

Iss Issues

Tra Transfers

Rec Receipts

Phy Physical

Adj Adjustments

Chg Changes

Mod Modifications

BFL Backflushing

Bin Tra Bin Transfer• Quantity

This indicates the transaction quantity.• Transaction value

This indiactes the value of the transaction.• Customer/supplier

This indicates the code of the supplier or customer for whom the transaction was processed.• Name

This indicates the name of the supplier or customer for whom the transaction was processed.• Customer purchase order

This indicates the code of the customer's purchase order number for the transaction.• Job/p/order

This indicates the job or purchase order associated with the transaction.• Branch

| Queries | 421


This indicates the Accounts Receivable branch for a sales movement transaction.• Salesperson

This indicates the salesperson associated with a sales movement transaction.• Area

This indicates the geographic area associated with a sales movement transaction.• Unit cost

No values are displayed in this column if the Costing method defined against the warehouse is FIFO(Inventory Warehouses), or if you have not selected Costing per warehouse and the Costing methoddefined against the company is FIFO or LIFO (Inventory Setup - General tab).

• Unit price/New cost

No values are displayed in this column if the Costing method defined against the warehouse is FIFO(Inventory Warehouses), or if you have not selected Costing per warehouse and the Costing methoddefined against the company is FIFO or LIFO (Inventory Setup - General tab).

• New wh

This indicates the warehouse into which the item was transferred. This is displayed for an Inventorytransfer type movement.

• Sale amount

This indicates the sale amount for a sales movement transaction.• Bin location

This indicates the bin location for the transaction.• Dsp note/Doc no

This indicates the dispatch note number or the Inventory document generated for the transaction.• Order type

This indicates the sales order type used for a sales movement transaction. See Order Types.• Sales order

This indicates the sales order number for a sales movement transaction.• Jnl/Reg no.

This indicates the journal or register number generated by the transaction.• Ledger code

This indicates the General Ledger code used for the transaction.• Revision

This indicates the revision number of an ECC controlled item processed in the transaction.• Release

This indicates the release number of an ECC controlled item processed in the transaction.• From bin

Note:• You can prevent the unauthorized viewing of transaction values by denying operators access to

the field: Show costs in Inventory/WIP queries (Operators).• Bin transfer transactions are only displayed if the option: Record movements for bin transfers is

selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab).

Quotation Query by Stock CodeYou use the Quotation Query by Stock Code program to view quotation information for a selected stockitem.

| Queries | 422


The program can be accessed by selecting the Quotations option from the Production pane of theInventory Query program.

Quotation Query by Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:



Stock code You use this field to indicate the stock code for which you wantto view the quotation information.

ListviewWhen you select the Quotation Query by Stock Code program, the quotations currently defined for theselected stock code are displayed in a listview.

ECC Revision/ReleasesYou use the ECC Revision/Releases program to view revision and release information for ECC controlleditems.

You can access this program by:

• selecting the Production option from the Query menu of the Inventory Query program and selectingthe ECC History option

• selecting the Change Rev/Rel option from the Forecast Maintenance program• selecting the Revision or Release option from the Material Allocation Maintenance program

Note:Revision/Release is the default wording, but this is replaced by whatever wording you assigned tothese user-defined fields (Bill of Materials Setup - Control tab).

Engineering change control tracking information (revisions/releases) for an item is only retained from thetime the item is set to be ECC controlled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).

Revision/Release for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:





Function

View StockInformation

Select this to view stock information for the currentlyhighlighted revision/release line using the ECC StockQuantities program.

| Queries | 423



Field Values DescriptionStart at revision You use this field to enter the revision to which you want to


OK Select this to navigate to the revision you entered in theprevious field.


ListviewWhen you select the ECC Revision/Releases program, the revisoons/release for the selected stock codeare displayed in a listview.


• Revision• Release• Current• Date• ECO• Jobs held• Purchases held• Sales held• Material allocs held

ECC Stock QuantitiesYou use the ECC Stock Quantities program to view stock information for a specific release of an ECCcontrolled item.

You access this program by selecting the View Stock Information option from the Function menu of theECC Revision/Releases program.

Note:Revision/Release and Rev/Rel is the default wording, but this is replaced by whatever wording youassigned to these user-defined fields (Bill of Materials Setup - Control tab).

Stock Information for Rev/Rel

Field Values DescriptionClose Select this to exit the program.

Stock Information for Rev/RelThe following information is included in this listview:

• Warehouse• Available• Unallocated• Quantity on hand• Quantity in inspection

| Queries | 424


• Quantity on order• Allocated to sales orders• Quantity on back order• Allocated to WIP• GIT quantity• Dispatched not invoiced

Parent Serial Reservations for Stock CodeYou use the Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code program view serial reservation information for aserialized parent in item.

You use the Parent/Lot Serial Reservation program to reserve serials for parent parts.

The Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the ReservedParent Serials option from the Query menu of the Inventory Query program.

Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code




Include

Include CompletedSerials

Select this to include details for completed serials in thelistview.



You use this field to enter the warehouse to which you want tonavigate in the listview.

OK Select this to navigate to the warehouse you entered in theprevious field.


ListviewWhen you select the Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code program, the serials currently reservedfor the stock item are displayed in a listview.


• Job

This indicates the job number for the parent item.• Serial

This indicates the serial number reserved for the parent item.• Expiry date

| Queries | 425


This indicates the expiry date for the serial.• Warehouse

This indicates the warehouse in which the serial is reserved.• Location

This indicates the location defined against the serial.• Lot

This indicates the lot number.• Inspection

This indicates the quantity in inspection for the parent item for the serial.• Scrapped

This indicates the quantity scrapped for the parent item for the serial.• Reworked

This indicates the quantity reworked for the parent item for the serial.• Received

This indicates the quantity receipted for the parent item for the serial.• Stock code

This indicates the stock code of the parent item.• Co-product line• Revision

This indicates the revision number of the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking tab).

• Release

This indicates the release number of the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking tab).

• Serial type

This indicates the Serial tracking method defined against the parent item (Stock Code Maintenance -Tracking tab).

• Complete

This indicates whether the reserved serial is complete.

A reserved serial for a parent part is set to complete when the quantity receipted into stock plus thequantity scrapped plus the quantity reworked is equal to the quantity reserved.

• Quantity reserved

This indicates the quantity reserved for the item.

Parent Lot Reservations for Stock CodeYou use the Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code program to view lot reservation information for a lottraceable parent item.

You use the Parent/Lot Serial Reservation program to reserve lots for parent parts.

The Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the ReservedParent Lots option from the Query menu of the Inventory Query program.

Parent Lot Reservations for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:

| Queries | 426





Include

Complete Lots Select this if you want to display details of completed lots in thelistview.



You use this field to enter the warehouse in which the lot youwant to view is reserved.

OK Select this to display the lots for the warehouse you entered inthe previous field.


Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code ListviewThe following information is included in this listview:

• Job

This indicates the job number for the parent item against which the lot is reserved.• Lot

This indicates the lot number that is reserved.• Concession

This indicates the concession number defined against the lot.• Expiry date

This indicates the expiry date for the lot.• Warehouse

This indicates the warehouse in which the lot is reserved.• Quantity reserved

This indicates the quantity reserved for the item.• Inspection

This indicates the quantity of the item currently in inspection.• Scrapped

This indicates the quantity of the item currently scrapped.• Reworked

This indicates the quantity of the item currently being reworked.• Received

This indicates the quantity of the item currently receipted into stock.• Lot exists

A 'Y' in this column indicates that the lot number exists in the Lot Master table/file.

| Queries | 427


If this column is blank, it indicates that the lot was created as a reservation only.• Stock code

This displays the stock code of the parent item.• Co-product line

• Revision

This indicates the revision number for the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).

• Release

This indicates the release number for the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECCcontrolled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).

• Complete

This indicates whether the lot is complete.

Inventory Journal ZoomYou use the Inventory Journal Zoom program to view information relating to an inventory journal.

Inventory journals are created to record inventory transactions created in the Inventory Control, Work inProgress or Purchase Order modules.

Zoom on Inventory JournalYou can use the Zoom icon from the Inventory Journal Zoom program to view the details for the selectedjournal line entry.

Inventory Journal DetailsThe following information is included in this pane by default:

• Journal number• Journal date• Stock code• Warehouse• Description• Reference• Quantity• Unit of measure• Journal ledger code• Product class• Transaction• Notation• Transaction value• Previous unit cost• New unit cost

Inventory Journal ZoomYou use the Inventory Journal Zoom program to view information relating to inventory journals.

Inventory journals are created to record inventory transactions created in the Inventory Control, Work inProgress or Purchase Order modules.

| Queries | 428


You can access the Inventory Journal Zoom program by selecting the View Journals option from theMovements listview of the Inventory Query program. Alternatively, you can use your left mouse buttonon an Inventory related transaction line in the Details listview of the GL Query program and select theInventory Journal option.

Inventory Journal Summary DetailsThe following information is included in this pane:

• Journal number


This indicates the date on which the transaction was processed.• Month number

This indicates the period and year in which the transaction was processed.• Warehouse

This indicates the warehouse in which the transaction was processed.• Operator

This indicates the operator who processed the transaction for the journal.• Ledger codes

• Warehouse control• Non-stocked control• Cost of goods sold control• Sub-contract operations control• Warehouse variance control• Purchase price variance control

Inventory Journal Summary Entries

Field Values DescriptionZoom Select this icon to use the Inventory Journal Zoom program

to view the details for the selected line entry.

Show FifoJournals

Select this to display the corresponding FIFO journal(s) for theline(s) currently displayed in the listview.

ListviewDetails of the line entries for the selected journal are displayed in this listview.


• Entry• Stock Code• Transaction• Quantity• Value• FIFO journal

This indicates whether the detail line is the FIFO journal. When you select to Show FIFO Journals, then'Yes' is displayed in this column to indicate which line is the FIFO journal line.

| Queries | 429


Browse on OperationsYou use the Browse on Operations program to view routing details of operations assigned to a stockcode.

Stock Code for Operations BrowseWhen you select the Browse on Operations program, you need to define the parent item for which youwant to view the operation information.

Once the operation information for the selected parent item is displayed you can use the Change StockCode option to enter a different parent item.



Stock code You use this field to enter the stock code for which you want toview the operations.

The following message is displayed when you enter astock code which is defined as a co-product (Stock CodeMaintenance - Descriptive tab) and is attached to the bill ofmaterials via a notional part (BOM Co-products):

"The stock code entered is a co-product. Do you wish to viewthe operations for the notional part?"

If you select OK, then the operations linked to the notional partare displayed.

If you select Cancel, then you can enter a new stock code.

Route You use this field to indicate the specific routing for which youwant to view operation information.

When you select a route and the stock code you entered is aco-product attached to the bill of materials via a notional part,then you are prompted to view the operations for the notionalpart.

Note:You can only select a specific routing to view if youhave enabled the option: Alternate routings required(Bill of Materials Setup).

Play Select this to use the Multimedia program to view anymultimedia objects assigned to the structure.

Edit Select this to use the Multimedia program to maintainmultimedia objects for the structure.

Graph Select this to view a graphic representation of operationsdefined for the structure.

Stock Code Details

| Queries | 430


Field Values DescriptionStock code This indicates the code of the item for which you are viewing

the operations.

If the stock code you entered is a co-product and you selectedto display the operations for the notional part, the code of theco-product and not the notional part is displayed in this field.

Rev/Rel You use this field to enter the revision and release of the parentcode for which you want to view the operations. You can onlyenter this information if the parent item is ECC-controlled(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking tab).

Stock Code InformationThe following information defined against the stock item (see Stock Code Maintenance) is included in thispane:

• Description• Long description• Economic batch quantity• Part category

OperationsOnce you have entered and accepted a valid parent stock item, the operation details are displayed in alistview.


• Operation• Work center• Operation type• Queue• Run time• Setup time• Time uom• Rate• Machine• Elapsed time• ET fixed• Move• Move matrix• Milestone• Supplier• Work center description• What-if rate• Startup time• Startup quantity• Teardown time• Wait time• Capacity required• Capacity uom• Max operators• Max PU's

| Queries | 431


• Std narration• No of pieces• Inspection• Minor set-up• Minor set-up time• Toolset• Toolset quantity• Toolset consumption• Narration first line• Lead time• Offsite time• Dock to stock• P/order stock code• Quantity per• P/order uom• Subcontract value• Subcontract what-if• Planner• Buyer• Revision• Release• Parent uom• Block/rate quantity• Operation yield qty• Transfer qty• Time taken• Stock run time• Stock startup qty• Stock block/rate qty• Stock operation yield qty• Stock transfer qty• Stock time taken• Dynamic move

Customer Price QueryYou use the Customer Price Query program to view customer pricing information.

This query enables you to obtain the best price and alternatives for a specific stock item for a specificcustomer without having to use the Sales Order Entry or Quotation Entry programs. This enables you toimprove customer service and save time.

The results of the query are displayed according to the information you enter and the preferences youdefined.

Customer Price Query



| Queries | 432



Preferences Select this to configure options that will determine the level ofdetail you want to view within the query.

Customer You use this field to enter the code of the customer for whomyou want to view pricing information.

Stock code You use this field to enter the code of the stock item for whichyou want to view pricing information.

Quantity You use this field to enter the quantity to use for the query.

This defaults to your entry at the Quantity to use field in thePreferences, but can be changed.

The quantity you enter here is used for the current run of thequery only.

This field is only enabled after you have entered an validcustomer and stock code.


Field Values DescriptionPrice Preferences The options on this tab enable you to define options related to

pricing.

ContractPreferences

The options on this tab enable you to define options related tocustomer contracts.

TPM Preferences The options on this tab enable you to define options related totrade promotions.

Save Preferences Select this to save the configurations against your operatorcode.

Note:the Promotion date options (Promotions tab)are savedfor the current run of the program only.

Close Select this to return to the previous screen. If you have notselected the Save Preferences function, then the configurationsare saved for the current run of the program only.

Price PreferencesThe following options can be selected from the Price Preferences tab:

Field Values DescriptionQuantity to use You use this field to enter the default quantity to use for the

query.

This quantity is saved for future queries. You can howeverindicate the quantity to use for individual queries in the Quantityfield on the main query screen.

This quantity cannot be negative or zero.

| Queries | 433


Field Values DescriptionDefault unit ofmeasure

This option enables you to define the unit of measure for thequantity to use and for the quantity for the best price.

The following units of measure can be selected:

• Stocking unit of measure• Alternate unit of measure• Other unit of measure

Contract PreferencesThe following options can be selected from the Contract Preferences tab:

Field Values DescriptionDays forinclusion incontracts

Include allcontracts

Select this to include all contracts in the query.

If you deselect this option, then you can enter the dates forwhich contracts must be included.

Expiry - daysbefore

You use this field to enter the expiry date (expiry date up to ndays before today) up to which you want to include contracts inthe listview.

Starting - daysahead

You use this field to enter the starting date (starting date withinn days of today) from which you want to include contracts.

Warehouse touse for costs

This option enables you to define the warehouse from whichthe cost of the item must be displayed.

The gross profit percentage for the prices are based on thecost in the selected warehouse.

Operator default Select this to use the default warehouse defined against youroperator code (Operators - Defaults tab).

Customerwarehouse

Select this to use the default warehouse defined against thecustomer (Customers - General 2 tab).

Inventorydistributionwarehouse

Select this to use the default distribution warehouse definedagainst the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance - Descriptivetab).

Inventorywarehouse to use

Select this to use the default warehouse to use defined againstthe stock item (Stock Code Maintenance - Sales tab).

Specificwarehouse

Select this to specify the warehouse to use.

TPM PreferencesThe following options can be selected from the TPM Preferences tab:

Field Values DescriptionPromotionselections

| Queries | 434


Field Values DescriptionInclude globaltrade promotions

Select this to include global promotions in the query.

Include unqualifiedpromotions

Select this to include promotions the customer did not qualifyfor.

This is useful if, for example, you defined a 'Buy 5 get 1 free'promotion. The customer orders a quantity of 4, therefore thepromotion does not apply. If you display these unqualifiedpromotions, then you can inform the customer that the orderwould qualify for the promotion if the order quantity wasincreased to 5.

Promotion dateoptions

This enables you to indicate the promotion start and end datesfor which you want to include promotions in the query.

If you do not define these dates, then all promotions, whichhave not expired at the time of running the query, are included.

Note:The dates you enter are saved for the current run of theprogram only.

Start date You use this field to enter the promotion start date for whichyou want to include promotions in the query.

Expiry date You use this field to enter the promotion end date for which youwant to include promotions in the query.

Best Price DetailsThis pane displays details of the best price for the customer/stock code combination.

Note:Only contracts that have not yet expired are considered when calculating the best price.


Field Values DescriptionQuantity forquery

This displays the quantity entered at the Quantity to use fielddefined against your Preferences. This indicates the quantity ofthe stock item on which the query is based if a contract with aPricing method of Quantity discountbreaks (Contract Prices)is in force or the stock code's pricing method is Quantitydiscounted.

Unit of measurefor query

This indicates the unit of measure on which the query isbased. This defaults to the stocking unit of measure but can bechanged using the Preferences option from the Options menu.

Best price This indicates the best price found for the customer/stock itemcombination.

Note:• This excludes line discounts. The best price

including line discounts is displayed in the Priceafter line discount field.

| Queries | 435


Field Values Description• This excludes Trade promotions pricing. You can

use the Show Captions option to display the Priceafter TP discount and Price after TP pricingfields, which include trade promotions.

The best price is determined as follows:

• If contracts exist for the customer, the lowest contract priceis displayed as the best price.

Only contracts that have not yet expired are consideredwhen calculating the best price.

• If there are no contracts, then the best price is determinedby applying the appropriate price and discount combinationbased on the customer's automatic pricing information andthe stock code's pricing information.

The price displayed is the actual price that will be used inthe sales order. The discount information is also displayed.It does not actually apply the discount to the price anddisplay the result.

• If an auto price code is defined for a customer and nocontract exists, then the auto price code is used if this is thebest price.

• If automatic pricing is not defined for the customer, or thepricing information for the automatic pricing code againstthe customer is not defined against the stock item, then thelist price is displayed as the best price.

The last price paid and all price codes available for thestock item are displayed, thereby giving you the informationto make the appropriate pricing decision.

Pricing unit ofmeasure

This indicates the unit of measure on which the price is based.

Price code This indicates the price code for the best price.

Price after TPdiscount

This indicates the price after applying trade promotionsdiscounts.

This field can be displayed using the Show Captions option.

Price after TPpricing

This indicates the price using trade promotions pricing. Notethat this is the price before discount.

This field can be displayed using the Show Captions option.

Discount details

Discount value 1-3 This indicates the discount percentages applied to the price.

Discount value This indicates the discount value less unit discount value if thecontract method is Coded. Nothing is displayed in this field forany other types of contracts.

Price after linediscount

This indicates the best price after applying customer or pricecode line discount. This excludes any Trade Promotions pricingand is not applicable if a contract has been used as the bestprice from the contract is already the net price.

| Queries | 436


Field Values DescriptionThis field can be displayed using the Show Captions option.

Contract details Contracts are defined and maintained using the ContractPrices program.

Contract numberused

This indicates the sales contract number for the best price.

Start date This indicates the date on which the contract became effective.

Expiry date This indicates the date on which the contract will no longerbe valid. An entry of 00/00/00 indicates that there is no expirydate.

Pricing method This indicates the pricing method defined against the contract.

Gross profitpercent

This indicates the gross profit percentage for the price, basedon the cost in the selected warehouse.

This is calculated as: ((Unit cost/Contract price) x 100) - 100

Stock Code DetailsThe following information is included in this pane:

Field Values DescriptionStock codedetails

Stock code This indicates the stock code of the item you are querying.

The following queries can be accessed from this field bytypically using your left mouse button:

• Stock Code Quick View• Query (see Inventory Query)• Stock Code Setup (see Stock Code Maintenance)• Multimedia - select this to view multimedia objects attached

to the stock item (see Multimedia)

Description This indicates the description for the stock code displayed inthe previous field.


Warehouse This indicates the warehouse on which the costs are based.This is the warehouse selected at the Warehouse to use forcosts preference (see Contract Preferences).


• Warehouse Code Quick View• Warehouses (see Inventory Warehouses)

Unit cost This indicates the unit cost of the item in the warehouseselected in the Preferences.

| Queries | 437


Field Values DescriptionCosting unit ofmeasure

This indicates the costing unit of measure defined against thestock item.

List price This indicates the List price defined against the stock item(Stock Code Maintenance - Sales Details).

List price unit ofmeasure

This indicates the unit of measure defined against the List pricecode for the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance - SalesDetails).

Pricing category This indicates the pricing category defined against the stockitem (Stock Code Maintenance - Sales Details).

It is only used with Extended pricing. It is used to establish theprice or discount code (depending on the pricing method) to beapplied to the stock code by finding the corresponding entry inthe customer's price category/code table.

Pricing method This indicates the pricing method defined against the stockitem (Stock Code Maintenance - Sales Details).

Refer to Pricing and Discounts for additional information.

Customer details

Customer This indicates the customer for whom you are processing thequery.


• Customer Quick View• Query (see Customer Query)• Customer setup (see Customers)• Multimedia - select this to view multimedia objects attached

to the customer (see Multimedia)

Customer branch This indicates the branch defined against the customer (ARCustomer Maintenance - Customer Details).


• Customer Branch Quick View• Query (see AR Branches)• Multimedia - select this to view multimedia objects attached

to the customer branch (see Multimedia)

Geographic area This indicates the geographic area defined against thecustomer (AR Customer Maintenance - Customer Details).


• Query (see Geographic Areas)• Multimedia - select this to view multimedia objects attached

to the geographic area (see Multimedia)

Currency This indicates the currency defined against the customer (ARCustomer Maintenance - Customer Details).

| Queries | 438


Field Values DescriptionThe following queries can be accessed from this field bytypically using your left mouse button:

• Currency Quick View• Query (see Currencies)• Multimedia - select this to view multimedia objects attached

to the currency (see Multimedia)

Auto price code This indicates the auto price code defined against the customer(AR Customer Maintenance - General Details).

It is used to establish the price (or discount code) applicable tothe sale of a specific stock code to the customer, depending onwhether the inventory pricing method is coded or discounted.

Customerdiscount details

This displays the discount details defined against the customer(AR Customer Maintenance - General Details).

Qty/Value discount This indicates whether quantity/value discounts are applicablefor the customer. These are order discount breaks assignedwhen processing sales orders for the customer. Thesediscounts are applied to the total value or total quantity of asales order processed for the customer.

Invoice discountcode

This indicates the automatic discount that is applicable to eachinvoice processed for the customer. A blank entry indicates thatautomatic invoice discount is not required for the customer.

Product classdiscount

This indicates whether product class discounts are applied tothe customer.

These discounts are applied to the order line value or orderline quantity of sales orders processed for the customer. Allcommon product classes for an order are accumulated; thetotal of each product class is compared to the discount breaktables; and the discount applied to each line accordingly.

Line discount code This indicates the line discount code defined against thecustomer.

It indicates the automatic discount applicable to each salesorder line processed for the customer. If blank, it indicates thatautomatic line discount for the customer is not required.

Last Price PaidThe details in this pane are only displayed if you selected the option: Customer/stock code cross-ref.required (AR Customer Maintenance - General Details).

The last two sales details of any stock item sold to the customer are displayed.

Price Category/Code TableThis table is defined against the customer (AR Customer Maintenance) and is used together with theExtended pricing method. The pricing method is defined in Sales Order Setup.

| Queries | 439


Inventory PricesThe information in this listview relates to the inventory prices for the stock item. Details are only displayedwhere the stock item's coded prices and quantity discount breaks are defined in the customer's currency.


• Inventory price code (see Pricing for a Stock Code)

Inventory Qty DiscountsThese details are only displayed for stock items which are quantity discounted.

Customer ContractsInformation is only displayed in this listview for contract customers.

Your selections on the Contract Preferences tab of the Preferences screen determine which contracts arelisted for the customer/stock code combination.


• Expiry date

This indicates the expiry date of the contract. Only contracts that have not yet expired are consideredwhen selecting the best price.

• Contract method

This indicates the Pricing method defined against the contract (see Contract Prices).

Contract DetailsThe information displayed in this pane relates to the currently highlighted line in the Customer Contractslistview.


• Quantity discounted

These fields are only populated if the contract method is Q - quantity discount breaks.

Up to five quantity/price code combinations defined against the contract are displayed.

Order DiscountsThis tab displays the order level discount break information for the customer where these are applicable.


• Type

This indicates whether the discounts are based on quantity or value.• Discount 1 - 3

This indicates the discount percentages applied.• Unit of measure

This indicates the unit of measure for a quantity type discount.

Product Class DiscountsThis tab displays the product class discount details for the customer where these are applicable.


• Product class

This indicates the product class to which the order discount breaks apply.

| Queries | 440


• Discount 1- 3

This indicates the discount break percentages.

Service ChargesThis tab displays the service charges attached to the selected stock code.


• Code

This indicates the service charge code.• Description

This indicates the description for the service charge code.• Calculation type

This indicates how the service charge is calculated (see Service Charge Maintenance).• Product class

This indicates the product class to use for the service charge.• Value/Price

This indicates the value if the service charge calculation type is Fixed.• Prompt

This indicates the wording displayed for this charge code if this is a user-defined miscellaneous chargecode.

• Returnable item

This indicates the returnable item's stock code for a returnable items service charge.• Quantity factor

This indicates the factor to apply to the order quantity before calculating the value of the charge line.• Method

This indicates whether the order quantity must be multiplied or divided by the Quantity factor specified.• Currency

This indicates the currency assigned to the service charge code. This only applies if you selected theoption: Foreign currency sales required (Accounts Receivable Setup - General tab).

• Minimum quantity

This indicates the minimum order quantity for which the charge must be raised.• Minimum charge

This indicates the minimum service charge value to be invoiced to the customer for the service chargecode.

• Maximum charge

This indicates the maximum service charge value to be invoiced to the customer for the service chargecode.

• Fixed percent

This indicates the fixed percentage assign to the charge code. This only applies if the Calculation typeis Fixed percent.

Trade PromotionsThis indicates trade promotions applicable to the customer/stock code combination.

The promotions included are based on the preferences you indicated.


| Queries | 441


• Promotion code

This indicates the code of the promotion.• Description

This indicates the description attached to the promotion code.• Start date

This indicates the date from which the promotion can be applied.• Expiry date

This indicates the last date on which the promotion can be applied.• Promotion type

This indicates the type of promotion (see Promotion Code Maintenance).• Basis

This indicates the threshold type for the promotion.• Qualifies

This indicates whether the customer qualifies for the promotion.• Promotion value

This indicates the value applicable to the promotion.• Free goods quantity

This indicates the free goods applicable to this promotion.• Unit promotion value

This indicates the unit value of the promotion.

This is only displayed for accruals and off invoice promotion types. Free goods are excluded.

This column can be accessed from the Field Chooser.

TPM PricesThis pane displays the price breaks against Trade Promotions pricing. This is only applies if the customeris a Trade promotions customer and Trade promotions pricing applies (AR Customer Maintenance) andTrade promotion pricing applies to the Stock code (Stock Code Maintenance).

The quantity of the customer/stock code combination is not used in TPM pricing lookup, so all price breaksare displayed. Only the Quantity basis is used and Mass and Volume are ignored in the search for theprice.

The order in which TPM pricing is searched is by:

• Area - checked against the customer's geographic area• Product Group - although multiple buying groups may exist, only the first one against the customer is

considered.• Customer Class - checked against the customer's customer class• All - general with no specific requirements or special instructions

As soon as a price is found in one of these, it is displayed and search stops. If more than one price type isdefined against the stock code, then the price and quantity for the last one are displayed.

Inventory at a GlanceYou use theInventory at a Glance program to view your current Inventory Control posting period as wellas the next document numbers and the next inventory journal number that will be used by the system.

| Queries | 442


The inventory values displayed include negative values owing to a negative on hand quantity only if youselected the setup option: Negative quantity on hand to be included in Inventory Valuation (InventorySetup - Options tab). This decreases the total value of inventory.

Inventory at a Glance

Field Values DescriptionInventoryValuation

Select this to display your inventory warehouse values for thecurrent and previous two months.

Note:You can also run an Inventory valuation using theInventory Valuation program.

Print Select this to print the information currently displayed in theInventory Valuation At A Glanceoutput pane.

Save FormValues



See Design Mode.

Valuation Criteria

Field Values DescriptionValuation options

Valuation option These options enable you to indicate the basis for the inventoryvaluation calculation.

FIFO Select this to calculate the inventory values according to theFIFO costs held in each FIFO bucket.

The value of the bucket is established by multiplying stock inthe bucket by the cost held within the bucket.

The value of all buckets on hand is accumulated to give thetotal value for that warehouse's stock code.

This applies to all items, including Actual costing > Lottraceable and Actual Costing > Batch serial items (InventorySetup - General tab).

This option is only applies if you selected the FIFO valuationoption (Inventory Setup - General tab).

LIFO Select this to calculate the inventory values according to theLIFO costs held in each LIFO bucket.



| Queries | 443


Field Values DescriptionThis option is only available if your Costing method is set toLIFO (Inventory Setup - General tab).

Current cost Select this to value the inventory at the current cost.

Select this to value your inventory at the unit cost currently heldagainst the warehouse (Warehouses for Stock Code). If yourcosting method is set to FIFO (Inventory Setup or InventoryWarehouses if you selected costing per warehouse), the unitcost is the last cost.

Last cost Select this to value your inventory according to the last costthat was entered when you processed a receipt of the item intostock.

Warehouse costingmethod

Select this to value your inventory according to costing methoddefined against each warehouse.

If you selected Actual Costing > Lot traceable and/or Actualcosting > Batch serials (Inventory Setup - General tab), thenthose items are valued using FIFO valuation, regardless of thewarehouse or company costing method.

You can only select this option if you selected the option:Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab).

Company costingmethod

This indicates the costing method defined for the company(Inventory Setup - General tab) and is displayed forinformation purposes.

Posting period

Posting month This indicates the financial period that your Inventory module iscurrently in.

Posting year This indicates the financial year that your Inventory module iscurrently in.

Next inventoryjournal numbers

Current year This indicates the next journal number that will be allocatedto inventory transactions if you process them into the currentyear.

Previous year This indicates the next journal number that will be allocated toinventory transactions if you process them into the previousyear.

Numbering

Next transfer outdocument

This is the number that will be assigned to the next documentprinted to record the transfer of items between warehousesusing the Inventory Movements program.

Note:This number is assigned only if the option to generatethe next document number is enabled for yourTransfers out document format.

| Queries | 444


Field Values DescriptionNext issuedocument

This is the number that will be assigned to the next documentprinted to record the issue of items for miscellaneous purposesusing the Inventory Movements program.

Note:This number is assigned only if the option to generatethe next document number is enabled for your Issuedocument format.

Next stock receiptdocument

This is the number that will be assigned to the next documentprinted to record the receipt into stock of an item using theInventory Movements program.

Note:This number is assigned only if the option to generatethe next document number is enabled for your Stockreceipts document format.


These options relate to the information displayed in theInventory Valuation At A Glance output pane.


Inventory Valuation At A GlanceThe information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select theoption: After processing completed > Close this application.


The following information is displayed in this pane for each warehouse:

• Warehouse

This indicates the warehouse code.• Description

This indicates the description for the warehouse code.• Current month

This indicates the current Inventory balances for the current month to date for the warehouse.• Previous month 1

This indicates the closing Inventory balance for the previous month for the warehouse.• Previous month 2

This indicates the closing Inventory balances for the month before last for the warehouse.• Warehouse costing method

This indicates the costing method defined against the warehouse.

This is only displayed if you selected the option: Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup - Generaltab) and you assigned different costing methods to your warehouses.

| Browses | 445


Browses

Inventory WarehousesYou use the Inventory Warehouses program to view information on warehouses required for your stockitems.

The Warehouse Maintenance program, accessed from the Inventory Warehouses program, enablesyou to maintain these warehouses.

Once the warehouses are created, you use the Warehouses for Stock Code program to link stock itemsto these warehouses.

Warehouse MaintenanceThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:


Select Select this to use the currently highlighted warehouse inthe warehouse field of another program. This option isonly enabled when theInventory Warehouses program isaccessed from another program.

Start At Select this to navigate to a specific warehouse in the listview.

List Select this to use the List of Warehouses program togenerate a report of the warehouses currently held on file.


Edit

Add Select this to use the Warehouse Maintenance program toadd a new warehouse.

Change Select this to use the Warehouse Maintenance program tomaintain the details of the warehouse currently highlighted inthe listview.

Delete Select this to delete the warehouse currently highlighted in thelistview.



Options

Confirm Deletions Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirm thedeletion of the selected warehouse. If you do not select thisoption, then the selected warehouse is deleted immediatelyproviding no balances or outstanding transactions exist againstthe warehouse.

Sequence

| Browses | 446


Field Values DescriptionWarehouse Select this to view the warehouses in the listview according to

the warehouse code.

Description Select this to view the warehouses in the listview according tothe description for the warehouse.



Depending on the sequence in which you are browsingwarehouses, you will enter either the warehouse or thewarehouse description in this field.

Your entry here indicates the point from which you want to startviewing warehouses in the listview.

OK Select this to navigate to the warehouse you selected.

Cancel Select this to return to the listview without navigating to anotherwarehouse.

Warehouses ListviewWhen you select the Inventory Warehouses program, the warehouses currently defined are displayed ina listview.


• Warehouse

This indicates the code allocated to the warehouse.• Description

This indicates the description for the warehouse.• Multiple bins

This indicates whether multiple bins are used in the warehouse.• Costing level

When you are using Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup), you can define the costing method touse against each warehouse, or you can use the costing method defined against the company.

This indicates the costing level defined for the warehouse (i.e. whether the costing method against thewarehouse or the costing method against the company is used for this warehouse).

• Costing method

This indicates the costing method applicable to the warehouse. This determines how the inventory isvalued for the warehouse.

The costing methods are indicated as follows:

• A = average costing• S - standard costing• F - FIFO costing• I - LIFO costing• L - last cost

| Browses | 447


Suppliers for Stock CodeYou use the Suppliers for Stock Code program to view the currently defined links between approvedSYSPRO suppliers and the part numbers of approved manufacturers.

The Suppliers for Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the Add Suppliers option from theEdit menu of the Approved Manufacturers Parts program.

You use the Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance program to link approved SYSPROsuppliers to the part numbers of approved manufacturers.

Suppliers for Stock CodeThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:


Select Select this to use the entry currently highlighted in the listviewin the corresponding field of another program. This option isonly enabled when the Approved Manufacturers program isaccessed from another program.

Start at Select this to navigate to a specific supplier in the listview.


Edit

Add Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer's SupplierMaintenance program to add a new supplier to the partnumber.

Change Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer's SupplierMaintenance program to maintain the details for the supplier/part number link.

Delete Select this to delete the link between the supplier currentlyhighlighted in the listview and the part number.

Options

Confirm Deletions Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirm thedeletion of a supplier/part number link. If you do not select thisoption, then the link is deleted immediately.

StartThese options are displayed when you select the Start at option from the File menu.

Field Values DescriptionStart at supplier You use this field to enter the code of the supplier to which you

want to navigate in the listview.



| Browses | 448


Suppliers for Stock Code ListviewWhen you select the Add Suppliers option from the Edit menu of the Approved Manufacturers Partsprogram, a listview displays the suppliers already linked to the manufacturer's part number you highlightedin the listview of the Approved Manufacturers Parts program.

The following information is included in the Suppliers for Stock Code listview:

• Supplier

This column displays the approved SYSPRO supplier for the manufacturer's part number.• Description

This column displays the SYSPRO supplier's name.• Details

This column displays the first line of the detail notes assigned to the SYSPRO supplier of themanufacturer 's part number.

• Preferred

This column indicates whether or not the current manufacturer part number/SYSPRO supplier link is thepreferred combination for purchasing purposes.

Note:This is currently documentary only.

Approved ManufacturersYou use the Approved Manufacturers program to view details of approved manufacturers currentlydefined.

Approved manufacturers are maintained using the Approved Manufacturer Maintenance program.

Approved ManufacturersThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:


Select Select this to use the manufacturer currently highlighted inthe listview in the manufacturer field of another program. Thisoption is only enabled when the Approved Manufacturersprogram is accessed from another program.

Start at Select this to navigate to a specific manufacturer in the listview.

Play Select this to view any multimedia objects defined against themanufacturer currently highlighted in the listview.


Edit

Add Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer Maintenanceprogram to add a new manufacturer.

Change Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer Maintenanceprogram to maintain the details for the manufacturer currentlyhighlighted in the listview.

| Browses | 449


Field Values DescriptionDelete Select this to delete the manufacturer currently highlighted in

the listview.

Options

Confirm Deletions Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirm thedeletion of a manufacturer. If you do not select this option, thenthe manufacturer is deleted immediately.


Field Values DescriptionManufacturer You use this field to enter the manufacturer you want to

navigate to in the listview.

OK Select this to navigate to the manufacturer entered in theprevious field.

Cancel Select this to return to the listview without navigating to aspecific manufacturer.

Approved Manufacturers ListviewWhen you select the Approved Manufacturers program, a listview displays the approved manufacturersalready defined.


• Manufacturer

This column displays the code assigned to the approved manufacturer• Manufacturer name

This column displays the name assigned to the manufacturer code.• Detail

This column displays the first line of the detail notes assigned to the manufacturer code.

Approved Manufacturers PartsYou use the Approved Manufacturers Parts program to view details of approved manufacturers' partnumbers currently defined.

You use the Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance program to define details of approvedmanufacturers' part numbers and to link these part numbers to your SYSPRO stock codes.

Approved Manufacturer's Part NumbersThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:


Select Select this to use the manufacturer part currently highlightedin the listview in the part field of another program. This optionis only enabled when the Approved Manufacturers Partsprogram is accessed from another program.

| Browses | 450


Field Values DescriptionStart at Select this to navigate to a specific manufacturer's part in the

listview.



Edit

Add Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer Part NumberMaintenance program to add a new manufacturer's part.

Change Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer Part NumberMaintenance program to maintain the details for themanufacturer's part currently highlighted in the listview.

Delete Select this to delete the manufacturer's part currentlyhighlighted in the listview.

Add Suppliers Select this to use the Suppliers for Stock Code program tolink the parts to SYSPRO suppliers.

Options

Confirm Deletions Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirm thedeletion of a manufacturer. If you do not select this option, thenthe manufacturer is deleted immediately.

Sequence Select this to indicate the sequence in which you want todisplay the information in the listview.

One of the following sequences can be selected:

• Stock code (i.e. the SYSPRO stock code)• Manufacturer• Manufacturer part number


Field Values DescriptionStart atstock code /manufacturer /manufacturer partnumber

You use this field to enter the item to which you want tonavigate in the listview. You either enter the stock code or themanufacturer or the manufacturer part number depending onyour selection at the Sequence menu.



Approved Manufacturer's Part Numbers ListviewWhen you select the Approved Manufacturers Parts program, a listview displays the manufacturer's partnumbers already define for each manufacturer.

The following information is included in the listview of manufacturer's part numbers:

| Browses | 451


• Stock code

This column displays the SYSPRO stock code that is linked to the manufacturer's part number.• Stock code description• Stock code long description• Manufacturer

This column displays the manufacturer of the part number linked to the SYSPRO stock code.• Manufacturer part number

This column displays the manufacturer's part number.• Part number details

This column displays the first line of the detail notes assigned to the manufacturer 's part number.• Preferred

This column indicates whether or not the current manufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock code link isthe preferred combination for purchasing purposes.

'I' indicates that the link is inactive. 'A' indicates that the link is active.


• Status

This column indicates whether or not the current manufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock code link isactive for purchasing purposes.


• Revision number

This column displays the revision number for the manufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock codecombination.


• Effective date

This column displays the date from which the manufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock codecombination can be used for purchasing purposes.


Cost Unit of MeasureYou use the Cost Unit of Measure program to view details of currently defined unit of measure conversionfactors for stocked items where the unit of measure in which the item is stocked is not the same as the unitof measure in which the item is costed.

Unit of measure conversion factors are maintained using the Unit of Measure Maintenance program.

Inventory Cost Unit of MeasureThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:


| Browses | 452


Field Values DescriptionSelect Select this to use the unit of measure currently highlighted in

the listview in the unit of measure field of another program.This option is only enabled when the Cost Unit of Measureprogram is accessed from another program.

Start at Select this to navigate to a specific unit of measure in thelistview.

List Select this to use the List of Inventory Costs Um programto generate a report of all inventory cost units of measurecurrently defined on file.


Edit

Add Select this to add a new cost unit of measure.

Change Select this to maintain the currently highlighted cost unit ofmeasure.

Danger:Changing the cost unit of measure affects yourInventory valuation for those units of measure definedagainst stock items. Refer to for details.

Delete Select this to delete the currently highlighted cost unit ofmeasure.

Options

Confirm Deletions Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirmthe deletion of a cost unit of measure before performing thedeletion process. If you do not select this option, then the unitof measure is deleted immediately you select to delete it.


Field Values DescriptionStart at stock u/m You use this field to enter the stock unit of measure to which

you want to navigate in the listview.

Start at cost u/m You use this field to enter the cost unit of measure to which youwant to navigate in the listview.

OK Select this to return to the listview at the unit of measure youentered.

Close Select this to return to the listview without navigating to aspecific unit of measure.

ListviewWhen you select the Cost Unit of Measure program, the inventory cost units of measure currently definedare displayed in a listview.


• Stock u/m

| Browses | 453


This indicates the stocking unit of measure.• Cost u/m

This indicates the costing unit of measure.• Conversion factor

This indicates the factor to use to convert the stocking unit of measure to the cost unit of measure.• Multiply/Divide

This indicates whether the conversion factor is multiplied or divided to convert the stocking unit ofmeasure to the cost unit of measure.

Pricing for a Stock CodeYou use the Pricing for a Stock Code program to view details of coded prices and quantity discountbreaks assigned to selected stock items.

You use the Stock Code Price Maintenance program to maintain coded prices and quantity discountbreaks against stock items.

Pricing for Stock CodeThis listview is displayed once you have entered and accepted a valid SYSPRO stock code.

The following options can be selected from the listview menu:





Edit

Add Select this to use the Stock Code Price Maintenanceprogram to add a new price for the stock item.

Change Select this to use the Stock Code Price Maintenanceprogram to maintain the entry currently highlighted in thelistview.


Options

Confirm Deletions Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirm thedeletion of a when you select to delete it. If you do not selectthis option, then the code is deleted without warning.

Functions

Quantity Discounts Select this to use the Stock Code Quantity Discountsprogram to assign price codes to selected stock items basedon the sale of specific quantities of that item.

Stock code You use this field to indicate the stock code for which you wantto view and/or maintain pricing.

| Browses | 454



Field Values DescriptionStart at pricecode

You use this field to enter the price code to which you want tonavigate in the listview.

OK Select this to navigate to the code you entered in the previousfield.


Pricing for Stock Code ListviewThis listview displays the price codes already defined for the selected stock code.


• Price code

This indicates the price code.• Price

This indicate the selling price associated with the price code.• Uom

This indicates the unit of measure for the price basis.• Basis

This indicates the unit of measure on which the price is based.• Commission

This indicates the commission code assigned to the price code.• Currency

This indicates the currency applicable to the price.

Browse on GIT ReferencesYou use the Browse on GIT References program to view details held against goods in transit referencenumbers.

These transactions originate in the Inventory Movements program (i.e. warehouse transfers) and theSales Order Entry program (i.e. supply chain transfers).

You can edit the due date of a transaction line as well as drill down to the detail lines for a reference andthe transactions posted for each line.

Goods in Transit ReferencesThe following options can be selected from the listview menu:




| Browses | 455


Field Values DescriptionExit Select this to exit the program.

Edit

Change Due Date Select this to maintain the due date of the transfer. This optionis not available if the transaction is complete (see Edit DueDate).

Sequence Select this to indicate the order in which you want to displaythe transactions in the listview. One of the following can beselected:

• Reference (i.e. the GIT reference)• Source warehouse• Target warehouse

Functions

Query Reference Select this to use the GIT Reference Query program toview details of the GIT reference currently highlighted on thelistview.


Change Select this to maintain the due date of the transfer. This optionis not available if the transaction is complete.

Start atReference /SourceWarehouse /TargetWarehouse

Depending on the sequence in which you are displaying theinformation in the listview, you use this field to enter the GITreference or Source warehouse or Target warehouse to whichyou want to navigate in the listview.

Once you have entered the reference or warehouse code, youselect the Start at arrow icon to navigate to that entry.

Edit Due DateThis screen is displayed when you select the Change Due Date option from the Edit menu or the Changeicon from the toolbar.

Field Values DescriptionEdit due date

Reference This indicates the transaction reference associated.

Source wh This indicates the warehouse out of which the item is beingtransferred.

Target wh This indicates the warehouse to which the item is beingtransferred.

Due date This indicates the expected delivery date, but can be changed.The due date is calculated using the transaction date plus thewarehouse lead time defined for the item (Warehouses forStock Code). The lead time is the number of days it takes tomove the stock item from the source warehouse to the targetwarehouse.

Complete This indicates whether or not the transfer is complete.

| Browses | 456


Field Values DescriptionSave Select this to save your change.

Cancel Select this to ignore any change you made and to return to thelistview.

ListviewWhen you select the Browse on GIT References program, the currently defined GIT references aredisplayed in a listview.

Only the transfers you selected to include from the Goods in Transit Selection pane are displayed.

Note:If the option: Filter reports and browses is selected (Operators - Security tab), then the GITreferences for source warehouses to which you have been denied access are not displayed. Inaddition, if the option: Apply operator access control to destination warehouse on transfers OUT isselected (Inventory Setup - Options tab), then GIT references for target warehouses to which youhave been denied are not displayed.


• Reference

This indicates the reference associated with the Goods in Transit transaction.• Source warehouse

This indicates the warehouse out of which the item is being transferred.• Target warehouse

This indicates the warehouse to which the item is being transferred.• Creation Date

This indicates the date on which the initial transfer out was created.• Transfer value

This indicates the value of the item(s) being transferred.• Receipt value

This indicates the value of receipts made against the GIT reference.• Outstanding value

This indicates the value not yet receipted. This value is zero when the GIT reference is complete.• Complete

This indicates whether or not the transfer is complete. If it is complete, then the goods transferred outwere receipted in and the Outstanding value should be zero.

• Transfer type

This indicates whether the transaction originated in the Inventory Movements program as aWarehouse transfers or in the Sales Order Entry program as a Supply chain transfer.

• Control account

This indicates the General Ledger account that will be debited with the transfer value for transfers outand credited with the transfer value for transfers in.

• Operator

This indicates the code of the operator who processed the transaction.

Goods in Transit SelectionThis pane enables you to indicate which Goods in Transit references you want to display in the listview.

| Browses | 457


Field Values DescriptionRefreshReferences

Select this to refresh the listview and to only display thetransactions you selected to view. Your selections are valid forthe current run of the program only.

This function is only available after you make a change to theselections.

Include

Warehousetransfers

Select this to list warehouse transfers originating from theInventory Movements program in the listview.

Supply chaintransfers

Select this to list supply chain transfers originating in the SalesOrder Entry program in the listview.

Completedtransfers

Select this to list completed transfers in the listview.

Sourcewarehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the source warehouse(s) for whichyou want to display transactions in the listview.

Target warehouseselection

This enables you to indicate the target warehouse(s) for whichyou want to display transactions in the listview.

Transfer values This enables you to indicate the transfer value(s) for which youwant to display transactions in the listview.


| Reports | 458


Reports

SRS Output OptionsWithin SYSPRO, reports may be generated using SYSPRO Reporting Services (or SRS).

To enable you to produce professional-looking reports quickly and with minimal effort, Output options areprovided when you generate a report using SYSPRO Reporting Services (SRS).

Output OptionsThe options on this tab page enable you to define the output destination(s) of the report once it has beencompiled. Multiple output destinations can be selected for the report. For example, you may select tosimultaneously email, print and export the report.

Note:This tab page is displayed only when you generate a report using SYSPRO Reporting Services.

Field Values DescriptionReport Theme This option enables you to select the theme you want to apply

to the report.

A theme changes the look of the report, without changing itscontents.

Both standard and user defined themes are displayed forselection.

You will be unable to define a report theme if the option:Disable theme selection is selected (SYSPRO ReportingServices).

Refer to Themes for additional information on themes.

Email report Select this if you want to email the report.

Email Options Select this to use the Send Email program to define theparameters for emailing the report.

The Office Automation and Messaging module is not requiredfor emailing documents from SYSPRO Reporting services.

This function is only enabled when you select the Email reportoption.

Export report Select this to export (save) the currently displayed report in aspecific location.

Instead of selecting this option, you can select the Previewreport option and export the report from the Report Previewscreen.

Export Options Select this to define the parameters for exporting/saving thereport.

This function is only enabled when you select the Export reportoption.

| Reports | 459


Field Values DescriptionPrint report Select this to output the report to a printer.

Printer Options Select this to define the parameters for printing the report.

You can define the default paper size to use for your specificreports using the Default printing paper size option (see SRSOptions).

This function is only enabled when you select the Print reportoption.

Preview report Select this to display the report on the screen.

Note:All output options you selected are processed beforethe report preview screen is displayed.

If you selected the Print Preview option from the File menu ofSYSPRO's main menu (SYSPRO Menu System), then thisoption is selected by default, but can be deselected.

Save reportoptions

Select this to save the options you selected on the tab pagesas the default selections for future runs of the report.

For example, if you always generate a Cash Book Print for onespecific bank only and you always want to print the report, thenyou can save these selections using this option. When nextyou select to generate this report, the selections on all the tabpages default to those you saved.

Clear Form Select this to reset all the options on all the tab pages to theSYSPRO default selections.

Archive report Select this to save the report in the SYSPRO Reporting Servicearchive.

Reports are archived in your SYSPRO ..\base folder in thereportarchive sub folder. This destination cannot be changed.

Archived reports can be retrieved by selecting the ReportArchive option from the View menu of the SYSPRO ReportingServices program. Access rights for retrieving archived reportsare defined against your operator using the activities: SRSView operator group archived items and SRS View all archiveditems (Operators - Security tab - Activities).

This option is selected by default if the setup option: Alwaysarchive report is selected (SYSPRO Reporting Services). Ifthe setup option: Disable archive report is selected (SYSPROReporting Services) then this option is disabled.

Process Select this to generate the report according to the reportselections you made and the output options you defined.

This function is only enabled once you select at least onereport option or if you selected the Print Preview option fromthe File menu of SYSPRO's main menu (SYSPRO MenuSystem).

| Reports | 460


Field Values DescriptionClose Select this to ignore any selections you made and to exit the

program without generating the report.

Export OptionsThe Export Options screen is displayed when you select the Export Options function.

Field Values DescriptionExport options

Export as This option enables you to select the format in which the reportmust be exported (saved).

Export formats can be categorized as page-based formats andrecord-based formats.

Depending on the format you select, the layout (object position,object size and relationships between these attributes andother objects) and formatting (font style, text color, textalignment, background color, etc) may not be perfectlypreserved. Generally, page-based formats preserve theseproperties as closely as possible.

With record-based formats, the emphasis is on data rather thanlayout and formatting. Some record-based formats are onlydata-exchange formats, for example Adobe Acrobat (PDF).

Crystal Report(RPT)

Select this to export the report in Crystal Report (RPT) format.

This format exports (saves) your report with the current datawithout modifying the original report.

Adobe Acrobat(PDF)

Select this to export the report in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) format.

This is a page-based format. The exported documents areintended for printing and redistribution. Acrobat format willexport both layout and formatting in a manner that is consistentwith how the report looks on the Preview tab.

Acrobat format embeds the TrueType fonts that appear in thedocument. (Non-TrueType fonts are not supported.)

This export format does not support Microsoft font-linkingtechnology, which is used to provide support for someextended character sets such as Chinese HKCS. Therefore,the fonts used in the report must contain all of the requiredglyphs. The following URI types are supported for hyperlinks:“http:”, “https:” and “mailto:”.

HTML 4.0 Select this to export the report in HTML 4.0 format.

You would typically select this option if you wanted to create areport in SRS which you want to publish on a website or emailto a recipient. An HTML page per report page is generated inthe directory you specify. Once published or emailed, the reportcan be viewed without requiring SYSPRO programs.

This is a page-based format.

This format preserves the layout and formatting of the report byusing DHTML.

| Reports | 461


Field Values DescriptionAll the images in the report are saved externally and ahyperlink is inserted in the exported HTML output. Therefore,this export format generates more than one file in the output.

Microsoft Excel(XLS)

Select this to export the report in Microsoft Excel (XLS) format.

This is a page-based format.

This format converts your report contents into Excel cellson a page-by-page basis. Contents from multiple pages areexported to the same Excel worksheet. If a worksheet becomesfull and there is more data to export, the export programcreates multiple worksheets to accommodate the data. Ifa report object covers more than one cell, then the exportprogram merges cells to represent a report object.

Microsoft Excel has a limit of 256 columns in a worksheet;therefore, any report object (or part thereof) that is added tocells beyond 256 columns is not exported.

This export format retains most of the formatting, but it doesnot export line and box objects from your report.

Microsoft Word(RTF)

Select this to export the report in Microsoft Word (RTF) format.

This is a page-based, exact format that produces an RTF (RichText Format) file.

The exported file contains text and drawing objects torepresent report objects. Individual objects are placed in textframes.

This format is intended for use in applications such as fill-outforms where the space for entering text is reserved as emptytext objects.

Almost all of the formatting is retained in this export format.Text objects cannot, however, be placed outside the left edgeof the page. Therefore, if you have text objects in your reportthat are placed before the left edge of the printable area, theywill be pushed right. (This is most noticeable in reports withwide pages.)

Text (TXT) Select this to export the report to a plain text file.

Export destination You use this field to enter the location in which the report mustbe saved.

You need to specify the full pathname and the file name towhich the report must be exported. The filename cannotcontain any characters that are reserved characters to XML,such as: ' : & ' > <.

OK Select this to save your entries and to return to the previousscreen.

Cancel Select this to ignore any entries you made and to return to theprevious screen.

| Reports | 462


Report PreviewThe Report Preview screen is displayed when you select the Preview report option.

Field Values DescriptionEmail Select this to email the report.

Stop Select this to stop the process of displaying the report on thescreen.

Export to Excel Select this to export the report to an Excel spreadsheet.

Export to Text Select this to export the contents of the report as a text file.When you select this option, the report contents are displayedin a Notepad editor.

Select Expert This enables you to apply a selection formula to the reportto filter the data in the report without re-running the reportfrom scratch. This, in effect, enables you to specify your ownselection criteria for the report.

You can use this to make the report easier to read by onlydisplaying certain records in the report. For example recordsfor a specific date.

Note:This option is not available for archived and scheduledreports.

Record Select this to specify criteria for displaying records in the report.

Group Select this to specify criteria for displaying group data in thereport.

Saved Data This applies to reports previously exported or reports whichyou designed and saved the data against using the Save datareport option.

If you select this option, then it displays the report with thesaved data. Any changes made to the database after the reportwas saved do not affect the report (i.e. the program does notrefer to the database when generating the report).

Clear all selectionformulas

Select this to clear any selection formulas you previouslyspecified in the current run of the program using the SelectExpert option.

Refresh Select this to re-query the database and to re-display thereport on the screen at the selected page. For example, ifyou preview a report and scroll down to Page 10 and selectRefresh, then the report is refreshed and remains on Page 10.

This only applies when generating a report that extracts datadirectly from a database; not when using a business object toextract the data.

In addition, if you highlight a parameter you defined using theCrystal 2008 Report Designer and select the Refresh icon, theparameter prompt is displayed and can be changed.

Export to CSV Select this to export the report to a CSV type text file. CSV isan acronym for Comma-Separated Values.

| Reports | 463


Field Values DescriptionEach record in the file is typically a single line and each field inthe record is delimited by a specific delimiter (e.g. a comma).See Export Report to CSV format.A CSV file can be directly imported into most database orspreadsheet programs.

Export Report Select this icon to export (save) the currently displayed reportin a specific location.

The default file type created is Crystal Reports (*.rpt), but thiscan be changed.

When you export a single document, the default file nameis created using the document type and the key field (e.g.customer number, invoice number, quotation number,purchase order number, etc). When you export a batch ofdocuments, the last document number or key field is used as areference in the file name.

Print Report Select this icon to output the report to a printer.

Toggle ParameterPanel

When you defined parameters against a report using theCrystal 2008 Report Designer, you can use this option to viewthe parameters and parameter values entered for the report.

Toggle GroupTree

When you generate a grouped report (for example theInventory Valuation report), then you can select this icon todisplay the values of the primary key sequence used in thereport in a treeview. From the treeview, you can select the itemyou want to navigate to in the report.

Zoom Select this icon to change the size of the report displayed onthe screen. This has no effect on the size in which the report isprinted.

Close CurrentView (x)

Select this icon to close the currently displayed tab. This onlyapplies to reports that contain sub-reports and does not applyto the Preview tab.

Export Report to CSV formatThis screen is displayed when you select the Export to CSV option.

Field Values DescriptionExport to CSV Select this to export the report to the File name specified and

according to the options you indicated.

Close Select this to return to the previous screen without exportingthe report.

CSV exportoptions

Delimiter This enables you to indicate the delimiter character to use towrap around each field in the record. This defaults to " (doublequotes).

| Reports | 464


Field Values DescriptionSeparator This enables you to indicate the delimiter character to use to

separate the fields or columns in a record. This defaults to ,(comma).

Tab Select this to use a Tab as the delimiter for separatingthe fields in each record. When you select this option, theSeparator field is disabled.

Mode

Standard mode Select this if you want to be able to indicate what to do with thepage and group sections of the report when exported.

Legacy mode Select this to export the report to the file to resemble the rptformat of the report.

File name You use this field to indicate the name of the file to which youwant to export the report.

Report sections

Report and pagesections

This refers the Report and Page headers and footers definedagainst the report (see Design Pane).

Export Select this to write all report headers and footers and pageheaders and footers to the export file.

Do not export Select this if you do not want to write any Report headers andfooters or Page headers and footers to the export file.

Isolate report orpage sections

Select this to write all Report headers and footers and Pageheaders and footers to the export file, but to isolate them in thefile.

This creates a bigger file and it resembles the rpt version of thereport where everything is more spaced out and easier to read.

If you don't select this option, then the Report and Pageheaders and footers are included in each record of the file.

Group sections

Group sections This refers the Group headers and footers defined against thereport (see Design Pane).

Export Select this to write all Group headers and footers to the exportfile.

Do not export Select this if you do not want to write any Group headers andfooters to the export file.

Isolate groupsections

Select this to write all Group headers and footers to the exportfile, but to isolate them in the file.

This creates a bigger file and it resembles the rpt version of thereport where everything is more spaced out and easier to read.

If you don't select this option, then the Group headers andfooters are included in each record of the file.

| Reports | 465


Inventory ValuationYou use the Inventory Valuation program to print a report indicating the value of stock held in eachwarehouse and, optionally, in each bin location. This value can be based on either the current cost, the lastcost, or FIFO costs.

The report serves as the Trial Balance of the Inventory module. The Inventory Valuation report totals,(when printed for all warehouses and stock codes), must equal the total of the Inventory control account(s)in the General Ledger.


Field Values DescriptionValuation at:

Current month Select this to print the valuations as of the current month.

Previous month 1 Select this to print the valuations as of the previous month 1.

Previous month 2 Select this to print the valuations as of the previous month 2.

Sequence You use this field to indicate the sequence in which you want toprint the report. Available sequences include:

• stock code• description• supplier• product class

Report type Note:This field is available only if you selected FIFO or LIFOat the Valuation cost based on field.

Detail Select this to print a detailed report that includes a costbreakdown by bin location.

Summary Select this to print a summary report that indicates the totalvalue held in each warehouse.

Valuation costbased on

Current Select this to value your inventory at the unit cost currently heldagainst the warehouse (Warehouses for Stock Code). If yourcosting method is set to FIFO (Inventory Setup or InventoryWarehouses, if you selected costing per warehouse), then theunit cost is the average cost of the FIFO buckets. The reason isthat different costs can exist in different FIFO buckets.

FIFO The description for this field is FIFO if your Costing methodis set to FIFO and LIFO if your costing method is set to LIFO(Inventory Setup - General tab).

Select this to value your inventory according to the FIFO/LIFOcosts held in each FIFO/LIFO bucket.


| Reports | 466


Field Values DescriptionThe value of all buckets on hand is accumulated to give thetotal value for that warehouse's stock code.

Note:This option is enabled only if you indicated that FIFO orLIFO valuation is required (Inventory Setup).

Last cost Select this to value your inventory according to the last costthat was entered when you processed a receipt of the item intostock.

LIFO Select this to value your inventory according to the LIFO costsheld in each LIFO bucket.



Note:This option is only displayed if your company Costingmethod is set to LIFO (Inventory Setup - General tab).

Warehouse cost Select this to value your inventory according to costing methoddefined against the warehouse.

You can only select this option if you selected the option:Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab).

Print warehouseswith zero value

If you want to print warehouses with a zero quantity only, thenyou select this option and select the option: Print warehouseswith zero quantity and non-zero cost.

If you want to print only warehouses with a zero cost, then youdeselect this option and select the option: Print warehouseswith quantity on hand and zero cost.

No Select this if you do not want to print warehouses with a zerovalue.

Warehouses can have a zero value due to the cost or thequantity or both being zero.

This option is available in the SRS version of the report.

Yes Select this to list those warehouses that have a zero value ofthe selected stock items.

Warehouses can have a zero value due to the cost or thequantity or both being zero.

If you want to print warehouses where both the cost and thequantity are zero, or where either the cost or the quantity arezero, then you select this option.

This option is available in the SRS version of the report.

| Reports | 467


Field Values DescriptionWarehouses withqty on hand andzero cost

Select this if you want to include stock items with a non-zeroquantity on hand but with a zero unit cost in the report.

This does not change the total inventory value for thewarehouse. (The total value for the warehouse is calculatedas the cost multiplied by the quantity for each stock item in thewarehouse). You would select this option if you wanted to printthese items even though they do not affect the total inventoryvalue for the warehouse(s) you selected.

Warehouses withzero qty and non-zero cost

Select this if you want to include stock items with a zeroquantity on hand but with a unit cost value.

This does not change the total inventory value for thewarehouse. (The total value for the warehouse is calculatedas the cost multiplied by the quantity for each stock item in thewarehouse). You would select this option if you wanted to printthese items even though they do not affect the total inventoryvalue for the warehouse(s) you selected.

Multiple binsoption

Multiple bins - printtotals only

Select this if you do not want to list the totals for each individualbin for the stock item on the report.

If a default bin is defined against the stock item, then thedefault bin number is listed on the report together with one totalfor the quantity on hand and one total value for all the bins. Ifno default bin is defined, then the total quantity and value areprinted but no bin number is listed.

If you do not select this option, then the bin number, quantityon hand and value for each bin defined against the stock itemis printed on the report. The total quantity and value are alsoprinted.

Note:This option only applies if Multiple bins are requiredfor the company (Inventory Setup) or against thewarehouse(s) you selected to include in the report(Warehouse Maintenance).

Include zero bins Select this if you want to print details of bins with a zeroquantity on the report.

This option is only available in the SRS version of the report.

Check warehousefor negative value

This option only applies when:

• you selected the report option: Multiple bins - print totalsonly

and• the setup option: Negative quantity on hand to be included

in Inventory Valuation is not selected (Inventory Setup -Options tab)

| Reports | 468


Field Values DescriptionWhen you select this option, if the total on hand in thewarehouse is negative, then the total value of bins is zero forthe stock code/warehouse total. If you do not select this option,then the total value of the bins for a warehouse includes onlythe total of any positive bins.

This option is only available in the SRS version of the report.

Print product classdescription

Select this to print the descriptions of the product classes onthe report.

You use the Product Classes program to define productclasses and their descriptions, which updates the SALPDSfile/table. The SALPDS file/table is used for the product classdescriptions in this report. If, however, you defined productclasses by branch, then the product class descriptions are notprinted on the report.

Note:This option applies only if you selected to print thereport in product class sequence.

If you are printing the SRS version of the report andyou select to print the report in product class sequence,then the product class description is automaticallyprinted.

Print mass forwarehouse

Select this if you want to print the total mass per warehouse forthe selected stock items on the report.

If you select the option: Multiple bins - print totals only, then thisoption is disabled and the total mass is printed by default.

This option is not available in the SRS version of the report asthe total mass is printed by default.



This option enables you to indicate the stock codes that you want to include in the valuation.• Warehouse selection

This option enables you to indicate the range of warehouses you want to include in the valuation report.




report.

| Reports | 469


Field Values DescriptionRange Select this to indicate a range of items from the selection to











Additional OptionsThe options on this tab page enable you to indicate additional options according to which you want togenerate the report.

Field Values DescriptionCycle countselection

You use this field

All Select this to include all stock items in the valuation, regardlessof the number of times they have been counted.

Single Select this to include only those stock items that have beencounted for the number of times you specify at the Cycle countfield.

Cycle count You use tis field to enter the cycle count for which you wantto include items in the report. This field is only enabled if youselected Single at the Cycle count selection option.

Print ECC itemsonly

Print quantity onhand by Rel/Rev

Select this to print only the on hand quantities of ECC-controlled items. The on hand quantities per revision and/orrelease per warehouse are printed.

| Reports | 470


Field Values DescriptionNote:• This option is available only for ECC-controlled

items (Stock Code Maintenance) and where thestock control level is set to Revision or Release (Billof Materials Setup).

• This option is not available if you selected FIFO atthe Valuation cost based on field.

• The wording Rev/Rel is the default, but is replacedby whatever wording you have assigned to theseuser-defined fields (Bill of Materials Setup).

Print zero quantityRel/Rev

Select this to include on the report any ECC-controlled itemswith a zero on hand quantity.

Note:• This option is available only for ECC-controlled

items (Stock Code Maintenance) and where thestock control level is set to Revision or Release (Billof Materials Setup).

• This option is not available if you selected FIFO atthe Valuation cost based on field.

• The wording Rev/Rel is the default, but is replacedby whatever wording you have assigned to theseuser-defined fields (Bill of Materials Setup).


• Supplier selection

This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the report. The defaultsupplier is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Replenishmenttab).


This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of products classes in the report.The product class is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program(Descriptive tab).

If a specific product class is entered, then only stock items belonging to that product class are includedin the valuation.



Report DetailsThe Last Receipt date, Last Issue date and Total Mass are printed only if you selected the setup option:Multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).

The value reflected at the Total mass column is calculated by multiplying the warehouse quantity on handof the item by the mass per stocking unit configured for the item. To obtain meaningful values, ensure thatthe unit of measure configured for each item is in the appropriate weight.

| Reports | 471


If you generate the report for the same stock items in the same warehouses using Current cost and thenusing FIFO cost, then the report values will differ if any issues, adjustments or transactions between receipttransactions were processed. If only receipt transactions were processed on the stock item, then theCurrent and FIFO values should be the same. The reason for this is that the Current Warehouse Cost fieldis only updated when a receipt transaction is processed.

If you are using multiple bins, then there are two options for printing the quantity on hand. If you select theoption Multiple bins - print totals only, then the quantity is taken from the warehouse. If you do not selectthe option Multiple bins - print totals only, then the quantity is taken from each individual bin and totalled.The mass is always calculated from the stock warehouse as it is defined at stock code level, not at binlevel.

Balancing Inventory Valuation to the General LedgerWhen the Inventory Valuation report is processed for all stock items and all warehouses and yourInventory module is linked to the General Ledger, then the current inventory value total on the reportshould equal the total of the Inventory control account(s) in your General Ledger.

If this is not the case, then you can check that:

• no normal, standard or recurring journals were processed to the General Ledger inventory controlaccounts. Only journals from the sub-modules should appear in these accounts. If other journal typesexist, then they need to be reversed.

• If the option: Create GL journal is not selected for Inventory (General Ledger Integration), then runthe Inventory GL Integration program to ensure that all the General Ledger journals for transactionsprocessed are created.

• If the option: Post GL journal is not selected for Inventory (General Ledger Integration), then use theGL Journal Entry program to post the journals into the General Ledger.

• one or more units of measure were not changed (Cost Unit of Measure). This only applies if yourinventory costs are held in a unit of measure other than stocked (Inventory Setup). Refer to foradditional details.

Inventory Aged ValuationYou use the Inventory Aged Valuation program to print a report indicating the value of your inventoryitems aged over the last five years.

You can also define obsolescence percentages according to which you can offset the depreciation of yourstock against tax.

An accountant will want to avoid overstating assets (i.e. stock) and to reduce tax liability by accruing forpotential obsolescent stock. This report can form the basis for (and act as supporting documentation to) ajournal which would be manually entered in the General Ledger.

Note:• You can only access this program if you enabled the option: Aged inventory valuation required

(Inventory Setup).• The Balance function of the Inventory Period End program ensures that the quantity on hand is

equal to the sum of the six yearly buckets (i.e. current and five prior years).• The Inventory Initial Aged Valuation program enables you to capture balances for prior years.• If stock on hand is allowed to go negative (Inventory Setup) then only the current year's bucket

may go negative.

In addition, the current year's bucket can only go negative if all other buckets are zero.


| Reports | 472


Field Values DescriptionSequence This option enables you to select the order in which the report

must be generated.

This option is only enabled if you select to print a detailedreport.

The following sequences are available:

• Stock code• Description• Supplier• Product class• Warehouse

Print options

Prior years Your selection at this option affects the number of columnsprinted on the report. The total of all years and the total of thecurrent year are always printed.

2 Select this to print the current year's total in its individualcolumn and to accumulate the values for years 2, 3, 4 and 5 asone value in the Year 2 column.

3 Select this to print the current and previous year's totals inindividual columns and to accumulate the values for years 3, 4and 5 as one value in the Year 3 column.

4 Select this to print the current and last 2 year's totals inindividual columns and to accumulate the values for years 4and 5 as one value in the Year 4 column.

Report option 5 Select this if you want to print each year's information inindividual columns.

Detail Select this to print a report showing details of all selected stockitems, as well as a summary page of warehouse totals.

Summary Select this to print only a summary page of warehouse totals.

Other Options Select this to specify additional selection criteria according towhich you want to print this report.

Print Select this to generate the report.




This enables you to indicate the stock codes that you want to include stock items in the valuation.• Warehouse selection

This enables you to indicate the range of warehouses for which you want to include stock items in thevaluation report.


| Reports | 473





This enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the report. The default supplier isdefined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Replenishment tab).




report.











Other OptionsThis screen is displayed when you select the Other Options function.

| Reports | 474



Include items withzero quantity onhand

Select this to include items with zero quantity on hand.

Include items withqty on hand lessthan zero

Select this to include items with a quantity on hand that is lessthan zero.

Include values Select this to print the unit cost and value of your stock itemson the report. Otherwise only the quantity of each stock item isprinted.

The unit cost that is printed is taken from the current unit costof the stock item, while the value of the stock item is derivedfrom the quantity of each column multiplied by the cost.

If FIFO costing is installed (Inventory Setup) then the coststhat are printed when selecting the Include values option arebased on the last cost.

Percentagerequired forobsolescence

You can only select this option if you selected the Includevalues option. You use the Percentages function to indicate theobsolescence percentages required.

Consolidatewarehouseinformation

Select this to consolidate all warehouse values into onewarehouse. Otherwise the values for each warehouse isprinted on a separate line. The consolidated warehouse isidentified by the characters - -.

Percentages Select this to enter obsolescence percentages for each prioryear that you selected to print an aged valuation.

Close Select this to accept your selections and to return to theprevious screen.

Percentages for Each YearYou use the Percentages function to enter obsolescence percentages for each prior year that you selectedto print an aged valuation.

The value printed in each column is multiplied by the percentage entered here for that year and is printedas an obsolescence amount.

Inventory Movement ReportYou use the Inventory Movement Report program to generate a report of sales and/or inventorytransactions for a selected range of stock items. Inventory movement transactions are processed using theInventory Movements program.

The amount of data available is dependent on the length of time that movement records are retained(Inventory Setup - History tab).

The report can be generated to print details of selected or all sales and/or inventory transactions for:

• a selected period• a single warehouse or range of warehouses• a single stock code or range of stock codes

| Reports | 475


• a single supplier or range of suppliers• a single product class or a range of product classes• a single customer or range of customers• a single salesperson or range of salespersons• a single buyer or all buyers

You can also indicate a range of dates according to which transactions must be selected for printing.


Field Values DescriptionSequence This enables you to indicate the sequence in which you want to

print the report.


• Stock code• Description• Supplier• Product class

Print options

Print warehousedetails

Select this to print totals for individual warehouses togetherwith an accumulated total of all warehouses for eachstock code. If you do not select this option, then only theaccumulated warehouse totals for each stock code is printed.

Note:If you are running on an SQL server-based system,the optimized SQL version of the report does not printwarehouse details for which there are no movements.

Only print itemswith MTD activity

Select this to print only those stock codes against which anymonth-to-date activity has been recorded in at least onewarehouse.

Note:If you select this option, then details for the stockitems selected are printed if any month-to-date activityoccurred against the selected stock item, irrespectiveof the Movement Options you selected to include. Thismeans that the month-to-date activity is not restrictedto the movement type you selected to include.

Subtotals required Select this option if you want to include warehouse totals, stocktotals and sales movement totals on the report.

Calculate FIFO/LIFO unit costs

Select this option if you want the system to calculate and printFIFO/LIFO unit costs based on the transaction value (i.e.Dividing the value by the quantity). The new cost remainsblank.

Note:

| Reports | 476


Field Values DescriptionThis option only applies if your costing method is setto either FIFO or LIFO costing (Inventory Setup orInventory Warehouses).

Movement totalsrequired

Select this if you want to print totals for each individualmovement type you select using the Movement Options.

The total quantity and transaction value are printed for eachmovement type.



This enables you to indicate the stock item(s) you want to include in the report.• Warehouse selection

This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to include stock items on the report.• Supplier selection

This enables you to select stock items for printing based on the supplier of the items. The supplier foran item is defined against the item (see Stock Code Maintenance - Replenishment tab).

This option enables you to select only those stock items that are supplied by the suppliers you selecthere.


This enables you to indicate the product class(es) for which you want to include stock items on thereport.

• Buyer selection

This enables you to indicate the buyer(s) for which you want to include stock items on the report.• Cycle count selection

This enables you to indicate the Cycle count(s) for which you want to include stock items on the report.




report.





| Reports | 477


Field Values DescriptionList Select this to indicate a list of items from the selection to







Movement OptionsThe following options can be selected on this tab page:

Field Values DescriptionMovements toprint

Inventorymovements

Select this if you want to print inventory movements on thereport. Inventory transaction types are indicated on the reportas follows:

• REC (receipt)• ADJ (adjustment)• ISS (issue)• PHY (physical)• CHG (cost change)• MOD (cost modification)• TRA (transfer, where OUT indicates a negative transfer, and

IN indicates a positive transfer)

Sales movements Select this if you want to print sales movements on the report.Sales transaction types are indicated on the report as follows:

• INV (invoice)• CR (credit note)• DR (debit note)• DSP (invoice generated via Dispatch Notes)• DSI (IBT invoice generated via Dispatch Notes)

Inventorymovements

This enables you to indicate the specific type of inventorymovements you want to print.

The following can be selected:

• Receipts

| Reports | 478


Field Values Description• Adjustments• Issues• Physical• Cost changes• Cost modifications

You can only access this option if you selected to printinventory movements.

SelectionsIn addition to the movement options that can be selected, the following selection criteria can be defined:

• Date selection

This enables you to indicate the date(s) according to which transactions must be selected for printing.• Customer selection

This enables you to indicate the customer(s) for which sales transactions must be included in the report.

Note:You can only access this selection if you selected to print sales movements.

• Salesperson selection

This enables you to indicate the salesperson(s) for which sales transactions must be included in thereport.

Note:You can only access this selection if you selected to print sales movements.

Other OptionsThe following options can be selected on this tab page:

Field Values DescriptionABC classselection

This enables you to select a stock item according to its ABCclassification. At lease one ABC class selection must be made.

Make to orderitems

Include Select this to include made to order items in the report.

Exclude Select this to exclude made to order items from the report.

Only Select this to only include made to order items in the report.

MPS items This option enables you to indicate whether you want to includeor exclude Master Production Schedule (MPS) items.

Include Select this to include MPS items in the report.

Exclude Select this to exclude MPS items from the report.

Only Select this to only include MPS items in the report.

Statistical items This option enables you to indicate whether you want to includeor exclude statistical items.

| Reports | 479


Field Values DescriptionNote:This is not relevant if you selected Only at the MPSitems and/or Made to order items fields.

Include Select this to include statistical items in the report.

Exclude Select this to exclude statistical items from the report.

Only Select this to only include statistical items in the report.

This is not relevant if you are including MPS and/or Make toorder items.



Report DetailsDetails of bin transfers are printed for transfers within the same warehouse if you selected the option:Record movements for bin transfers (Inventory Setup - Options tab). This only applies if you are usingmultiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).

Note:• The unit cost is not printed on the report if your costing method is set to either FIFO or LIFO

(Inventory Setup or Inventory Warehouses).• If you are running on an SQL server-based system, the optimized SQL version of the report

does not print warehouse details for which there are no movements.

For receipts, the value in the New Cost column indicates the new average cost calculated by the systemaccording to the receipt processed for the item. The value in the Entered Cost column indicates the receiptcost entered at the time of processing the receipt for the item.

Kardex ReportYou use the Kardex Report program to print a report listing the movement of selected stock items over aspecified period of time.

Typically, you would use this report to reconcile discrepancies encountered during a stock take.

This report is the equivalent of the stock ledger and should be printed at least every month and retained.

Note:• You will be unable to access this program if you have not enabled the option: Retain last 12

months’ opening stock balances (Inventory Setup).• Stock items against which you have not selected the option: Retain stock movements (Stock

Code Maintenance - General tab) are not included in the report.• The information used by this report is updated each time you run the Month End function of the

Inventory Period End program.

However, if you have performed a month end for a single warehouse, then reports for the currentperiod will only reflect opening and closing stock balances for that warehouse. Until you run amonth end for all warehouses, an imbalance will exist if any transactions are processed for thatwarehouse.

| Reports | 480


• The Kardex report is processed in date order. If your Costing method is set to Average(Inventory Setup - General tab) and you backdate a receipt, for example, then the average costof the item being receipted is not recalculated.

• The Kardex Report is merely a movement report and should not be used to balance inventoryvalues to your General Ledger control accounts. The Inventory Valuation report should beused for balancing the General Ledger inventory control accounts.

Report Options

Field Values DescriptionSequence This option enables you to select the sequence in which you

want the report printed.

You can select to print the report in one of the followingsequences:

• Stock code• Description• Supplier• Product class• Warehouse

Part category This option enables you to select which stock items to includein the report based on their part category (see Stock CodeMaintenance - Descriptive tab).

Note:Items defined as Notional parts (Stock CodeMaintenance - Descriptive tab) are not included in thereport.

You can select 'All' to include all stock items irrespective oftheir part category or alternatively, only those items with thefollowing part categories:

• Made in• Bought out• Subcontracted• Phantom part• Planning bill• Co-product• By-product

Stock codeselection

Stock items are excluded from the report if you are notretaining stock movements for the item, or no movements havebeen recorded for the item over the specified time period andthe stock on hand in the selected warehouse is zero.

Stock items for which no movements have been recorded, butwhere there is a non-zero quantity on hand, are listed with anopening balance and a closing balance equal to the stock onhand.

All Select this to include movements for all stock items in thereport.

| Reports | 481


Field Values DescriptionRange Select this to include movements for a range of stock items in

the report.

Single Select this to include movements for a single stock item in thereport.

You indicate this stock item in the From field below.

From This indicates the first stock item in a range of stock items youwant to include in the report.

If you selected to generate the report or a single stock item,then you enter that stock item code in this field.

To This indicates the last stock item in a range of stock items youwant to include in the report.

This field is only enabled if you selected to include a range ofstock items in the report.


This option enables you to include stock items for a selectionof products classes in the report. The product class is definedagainst the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenanceprogram (Descriptive tab).

If a specific product class is entered, then only stock itemsbelonging to that product class are included in the report.

All Select this to include stock items for all product classes.

Range Select this to include stock items for a range of productclasses.

You indicate this range using the From and To fields below.

Single Select this to include stock items for a single product classonly.

You indicate this product class in the From field below.

From This indicates the first product class in a range of productclasses for which you want to include stock items in the report.

If you indicated that you want to include stock items for a singleproduct class, then you enter that product class in this field.

To This indicates the last product class in a range of productclasses for which you want to include stock items in the report.

This option is only available if you selected to include stockitems for a range of product classes.

Warehouseselection

This option enables you to indicate the range of warehousesyou want to include in the report.

All Select this to include all warehouses in the report.

| Reports | 482


Field Values DescriptionRange Select this if you want to include a range of warehouses in the

report.

You indicate this range in the From and To fields below.

Single Select this if you want to print the report for a singlewarehouse.

You indicate this warehouse code in the From field below.

From This indicates the first warehouse in a range of warehousesyou want to include in the report.

If you indicated that you want to generate the report for a singlewarehouse, then you indicate that warehouse code in this field.

To This indicates the last warehouse in a range of warehousesyou want to include in the report.

This option is only available if you selected to generate thereport for a range of warehouses.

Ledger period This option enables you to define the ledger period and year forwhich you want to generate the report.

Note:Even if you selected the option: Retain last 12 months'opening stock balances (Inventory Setup - tab), thesystem automatically saves opening stock balancesafter running the Month end option of the InventoryPeriod End program. This means that the system canonly retain balances as far back as the first month endrun.

You cannot request opening stock balances exceedingthe number of months for which you have retainedbalances (Inventory Setup - History tab).

Current G/Lperiod

This field displays the current period and year of you GeneralLedger and cannot be changed.

Month This field enables you to select the period for which you want togenerate the report.

Year This field enables you to select the period for which you want togenerate the report.

Include MPSitems

This option enables you to select whether to include itemsdefined as MPS items in the report (see Stock CodeMaintenance - Production tab).

Yes Select this if you want to include MPS items in the report.

No Select this if you do not want to include MPS items in thereport.

| Reports | 483


Field Values DescriptionOnly Select this if you want to generate the report for MPS items

only.

Include statisticalparts

You will be unable to access this field if you selected to onlyinclude MPS items.

In addition, you will be unable to only include statistical parts ifyou selected to include MPS items.

Stock items are defined as statistical items using the programStock Code Maintenance (Production tab).

Yes Select this if you want to include Statistical parts in the report.

No Select this if you do not want to include Statistical parts in thereport.

Only Select this if you want to generate the report for Statisticalparts.

Print options

Print movementdetails

Select this to print movement transactions from the specifiedperiod up to and including the current period.

Print warehousesummary only

Select this if you want to print a summary report of totals bywarehouse, excluding the detail transactions processed for theselected stock codes.

Note:This option is enabled only if you selected to printthe report in warehouse sequence and you have notselected to print movement details.

Print productclass totals

This option is enabled only if you selected to print the report inproduct class sequence.

Print details forselection periodonly

Select this to print the opening balance of the previous periodand movement transactions for the period specified.

Print Rev/Rel Select this to print the revision/release per warehouse for ECC-controlled items. The Revision/Release information is printedonce for each change in the Release and/or Release version.

The wording for this field (as well as the column headings onthe report) defaults to the text defined against the User definedfields: Revision and Release (Bill of Materials Setup).

Note:The Print Revision/Release option is available underthe following conditions:

• Engineering Change Control is installed (CompanySetup)

| Reports | 484


Field Values Description• The stock control level is set to Revision or Release

(Bill of Materials Setup)• You select the Print movement details option.

Other Options Select this function to print a selective range of stock codesaccording to their Buyer, Cycle count and Supplier.

View Months Select this function to view the current and previous yearmonthly open and closed indicators of your Inventory system(View Inventory Periods).

Print Select this function to print the report.

Stock items with no movements (for the selected period) andwhose stock on hand for the requested warehouse is zero areexcluded from the report.

Stock items with no movements (for the selected period) andwhose stock on hand for the requested warehouse is not zeroare printed with the opening balance and closing balance equalto the stock on hand.

The transactions printed on the Kardex report are printed indate sequence.

In cases where multiple transactions have occurred on thesame date, all the inventory transactions are printed first,followed by the sales movements. While in most cases thiswill not affect the report, a transaction type of PHY (physicalstock adjustment) may cause a running quantity balanceto be adjusted to an incorrect figure. For this reason, werecommend that either this type of transaction is not used(the ADJ transaction type can be used instead) or you ensurethat the date of the PHY transaction is unique (i.e. no othertransactions take place on the same date as the PHY entry).

Totals are accumulated for each stock code and warehouseaccording to the transaction types processed against them.These totals are printed upon change of each warehousefor a stock code, or upon change of each product class (ifprinting the report in product class sequence). The totals are asummary of the transactions processed, indicating the openingbalance of the warehouse, the transaction totals for eachtransaction type and the closing balance (quantity and value)for that warehouse.

The results of the Kardex report will not match other inventorystatistics if you did not enter transactions in the same datesequence that the transactions occurred. For example, theKardex report costs transactions differently if you enter areceipt today before you record an issue from yesterday.

The following information is printed for each warehouse:

• Stock code, Description, Long description• Warehouse, Product Class, Supplier, Supplier Name• Opening Balance of the warehouse• Month end date (this is blank for new warehouses)

| Reports | 485


Field Values Description• Quantity balance• Value and Unit Cost• Type of transaction:

• O/B: opening balance• REC: receipt• CHG: cost change• ISS: issue• ADJ: adjustment• MOD: cost modification• TRA: transfer• PHY: physical stock adjustment• Inv: invoice• Cr: credit note• Dr: debit note• IBT: inter-branch transfer• Dsp: invoice generated via Dispatch Notes• DsI: IBT invoice generated via Dispatch Notes

• Entry date• Reference• Bin number• Transaction quantity• Transaction value

Transaction quantities and values are listed under either aQTY IN column or a QTY OUT column depending on thetransaction type and whether the value/quantity is positiveor negative.

• Accumulated quantity balance and value• Unit cost per transaction (this is blank if your Costing

method is set to FIFO (Inventory Setup - General tab)).

Details of bin transfers are printed for transfers within the samewarehouse if you selected the option: Record movements forbin transfers (Inventory Setup - Options tab). This only appliesif you are using multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).

Other Options

Field Values DescriptionBuyer selection You use this field to select stock items to include in the report

according to the buyer defined against the items (see StockCode Maintenance - Replenishment tab).

All Select this to include stock items for all buyer codes in thereport.

Single Select this to include stock items for a single buyer code in thereport.

You indicate this buyer code in the Buyer field below.

| Reports | 486


Field Values DescriptionBuyer This indicates the single buyer code for which you want to

include stock items in the report.


You use this field to select stock items to include in the reportaccording to the number of times the stock item has beencounted during the year.

All Select this to include all stock items in the report, regardless ofthe number of times they have been counted.

Single Select this to include only those stock items that have beencounted for the number of times you specify at the Cycle countfield.

Cycle count You use this field to enter the cycle count if you selected toinclude stock items for a single cycle count.

Supplierselection

This option enables you to include stock items for a selection ofsuppliers in the report. The default supplier is defined againstthe stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program(Replenishment tab).

All Select this to include stock items purchased from all suppliersin the report.

Single Select this to include stock items purchased from a singlesupplier only.

You indicate this supplier code in the Supplier field below.

Supplier This indicates the single supplier for which you want to includestock items in the report.

Kardex Report CalculationWhen the Kardex report is generated, the quantities and total values of the movements are taken directlyfrom the Inventory Movements file. These are the quantities and values of the movements as recordedby various programs such as the Inventory Movements, Purchase Order Receipts, Purchase OrderInspection ,Stock Take Confirmation, etc. The movement values are NOT calculated as being the costmultiplied by the quantity.

The opening balance is taken from the Warehouse record(s).

For each line, the movements from the Inventory Movements file are added or subtracted from the openingbalance for both the quantity and cost value to give a calculated closing balance. This is the total lineprinted at the end of the movements.

This calculated closing balance is checked against the closing balance from the warehouse record(s) anddifferences are printed on a rounding line. It is therefore possible for the rounding line to contain a smallrounding error caused by a genuine rounding difference in the calculation.

If the rounding line contains larger values, then this usually indicates that a movement was not writtento the Inventory Movement file or a processing problem occurred. One reason could be incompletetransactions due to the loss of client connectivity in a client/server environment.

| Reports | 487


The correct inventory valuation is always produced by the Inventory Valuation report. Differencesbetween the totals on the Kardex Report and Inventory Valuation reports could be caused by Monthends (Inventory Period End) being run for single warehouses rather than all warehouses or due to theoption: Retain stock movements (Stock Code Maintenance - General tab) not being selected for all stockitems.

Inventory Price ListYou use the Inventory Price List program to print a list of prices for your inventory items based on codedprices, quantity discount breaks or foreign prices that have been assigned to your stock codes.

This listing can be used by salespersons to look up sales prices when they are negotiating without accessto the computer system.


Field Values DescriptionReport sequence This option enables you to select the order in which the report

must be generated.



Price methodselection

Coded Select this to print the pricing information defined against pricecodes that have been assigned to stock items.

Quantity Select this to print the quantity discount breaks applicable toeach stock code selected.

Foreign Select this to print a list of foreign prices and currenciesapplicable to each stock code selected.



This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) that you want to include in the report.• Supplier selection

This enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the report. The default supplier isdefined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Replenishment tab).

• Price category selection

This enables you to indicate the price category(ies) you want to include in the report.• Product class selection


| Reports | 488


If a specific product class is entered, then only stock items belonging to that product class are includedin the report.

• Currency selection

This enables you to indicate the currency(ies) you want to include in the report.• Price code selection

This enables you to indicate the price code(s) you want to include in the report.




report.













| Reports | 489


Price History ReportYou use the Price History Report program to print a report listing any changes that have been made toeither the price of a stock item or the price basis of an item.

This report serves as an audit trail of changes made using either the Price-Cost Percentage Changeprogram or the Pricing for a Stock Code program.

Note:Details of price changes are printed only if you have enabled the option: Retain history of pricechanges (Inventory Setup).

The volume of information printed is determined by the number of days you are retaining pricehistory changes. In addition, because pricing history is deleted only when you run the Purgefunction of the Inventory Period End program, the date when you last ran a purge can affect thevolume of information available to print.


Field Values DescriptionReport sequence You use this field to indicate the sequence in which you want to

print the report. You can select one of the following sequences:

• Price code, Stock code• Stock code, Price code• Date, Time


• Price code selection

You use this field to indicate the price code(s) that must be included as a selection criterion whenprinting the report.

• Date selection

You use this field to indicate a range of dates that must be included as a selection criterion whenprinting the report.

• Operator selection

You use this field to indicate the operator(s) that must be included as a selection criterion when printingthe report.


You use this field to indicate a range of stock codes that must be included as a selection criterion whenprinting the report.



| Reports | 490



report.













Report DetailsThe report includes details of the Date and Time changes were made, as well as the Operator responsiblefor the changes.

The Price basis column indicates the unit of measure against which the price change was made for thestock item, where S indicates the stocking unit of measure, A indicates the alternate unit of measure, andO indicates the other unit of measure. These units of measure are configured against the stock item (StockCode Maintenance).

ABC AnalysisYou use the ABC Analysis program to print a list of stock items in descending order of usage value, basedon the value of stock used over the last 12 months.

The report indicates what your most and least used items are, enabling you to determine what quantities ofselected stock items should be included in your inventory.

| Reports | 491


This technique is also known as Pareto Analysis (80/20 rule) where concentration on the A class items canachieve greater results from less effort.

Note:If the quantity sold or issued for the last 12 months does not exceed zero, then the usage value isset to zero by the Month end function of the Inventory Period End program.



Although you can base your ABC analysis on the usage in asingle warehouse, this will not accurately reflect the annualusage value for the same stock items that are held in differentwarehouses.

All Select this to base the ABC analysis on the usage of the stockitems in all warehouses (i.e. across the entire company).

Single Select this to base the ABC analysis on the usage of the stockitems in a single warehouse.

You indicate this warehouse on the Warehouse field below.

Note:If you want to select items for a stock count based ontheir ABC classification, then you need to run the ABCAnalysis report for each individual warehouse in whichthe stock take is being performed.

Warehouse You use this field to indicate the single warehouse on whichyou want to base the usage for the ABC analysis report.

This field is only enabled when you select to base the usage ona single warehouse.

Print options

Print 'A' classitems

Select this to include your A class items for printing.

Based on the 80/95 default, stock items are included in class Auntil the sum of items equals 80% of the annual usage value ofyour entire inventory.

Print 'B' classitems

Select this to include your B class items for printing.

Based on the 80/95 default, stock items are included in classB until the sum of class A and class B items equals 95% of theannual usage value.

Print 'C' classitems

Select this to include your C class items for printing.

Based on the 80/95 default all other stock items having a non-zero cost that do not fall into classes A and B are assigned toclass C.

Print 'D' classitems

Select this to include your D class items for printing.

| Reports | 492


Field Values DescriptionAny stock item that has not been used or sold in the last year isassigned to class D.



Report DetailsThe Annual usage value = Usage brought forward from previous period end plus ((quantity issued x cost) +(quantity sold x cost) for the current period to date). The cost at the time the transaction was processed isused, not the current cost.

The annual usage value of a stock item is used to determine its classification. This value is the total cost ofsales and issues of an item over the past 12 months.

The program calculates the total inventory usage value by accumulating the annual usage value for eachwarehouse. It then calculates the annual usage value for each stock item.

The annual usage value (A.u.v) is increased in a period by the sales values as invoices are processed. Thecost used at the time that the invoice was processed is used. Similarly, the total inventory usage is updatedwhen the item is issued. Therefore, during a specific period, the YTD usage is the usage as at the previousperiod end, plus the usage from movements that have occurred during the current period. The current costat the time of generating the report is therefore irrelevant.

For each month end after the 12th month, the usage value is annualized by dividing the value by 13 andmultiplying by 12. If the annual usage value of a stock item is based on less than 12 months history, thenthe value is divided by the number of months that the item has been held on file, and multiplied by 12 togive an annual usage value.

See Warehouse Values for an example of a YTD usage value calculation.

ClassificationsYou indicate whether you want to use ABC analysis by selecting the ABC analysis required option (StockCode Maintenance) for each individual stock item.

Once the annual usage value has been established, the program classifies each stock item into one of fourcategories: A, B, C and D.

The breaks between the categories are defined at the option: Percentage breaks for ABC analysis(Inventory Setup). The default A/B percentage break is 80 and the B/C percentage break is 95.

Based on these defaults, stock items are included in class A until the sum of items equals 80% of theannual usage value of your entire inventory.

Stock items are included in class B until the sum of class A and class B items equals 95% of the annualusage value.

All other stock items having a non-zero cost that do not fall into classes A and B are assigned to class Cand any stock item that has not been used or sold in the last year is assigned to class D.

Warehouse ActivityYou use the Warehouse Activity program to generate a selective list of stock items based on the activityrecorded against the items over a period of time.

| Reports | 493




Stock code Select this if you want the report to be generated in order ofstock codes.

Description Select this if you want the report to be generated in order ofstock code descriptions.

Product class Select this if you want the report to be generated in order ofproduct classes.

Supplier Select this if you want the report to be generated in order ofsuppliers.

Stock value Select this to generate inactive stock in descending stockvalue.

Note:• When you select this option, the value generated in

the Total cost field for each stock item is the total ofthe quantity multiplied by the unit cost for the item inALL warehouses. This is irrespective of the range ofwarehouses for which you selected to generate thereport. The report is generated in descending orderof this total cost.

• Cost values are only generated on the report whenthis option is selected.

User definedsequence

Select this to generated the report in a user-defined sequence.

If you select this option, then at the time of generating thereport you will be required to enter the name of the tag-file tobe used.

A tag file is created using a text editor and enables you to printreports in a sequence not catered for by the system (see Tagfiles).

Note:This option is not available in the SRS version of thereport.

Stock options Refer to Stock Options for details on the effects of selecting ordeselecting these options.

Report on stockitems

All stock items Select this to generate a selective list of stock codes,regardless of the amount of activity recorded against them.

Any monthlyactivity

Select this to generate a selective list of stock codes againstwhich any month-to-date activity has been recorded.

| Reports | 494


Field Values DescriptionInactive stockitems

Select this to generate a selective list of stock items againstwhich no activity has been recorded since a specified cut-offdate.

No activity since You use this field to indicate the cut-off date according to whichstock items must be selected for generating. Stock items areselected if there has been no activity since this date.

This option is only enabled when you select the option: Inactivestock items.

Include zeroquantity on hand

Select this if you want to include stock items where thewarehouse quantity on hand is zero.

Include stockadjustments

Select this to indicate whether you want to include inactivestock against which adjustments have been processed.

This option is not available if you selected the option: All stockitems.

Show allwarehouses

Select this to list all warehouses in which the stock itemresides, if at least one warehouse matches your selectioncriteria (i.e. warehouses that do not match the selection criteria,but in which the stock item is held, are also listed).

Do not select this option if you only want to list warehouses inwhich a stock item resides that matches the selection criteria.

Note:This option does not override your Warehouseselection (Report Filters tab). Stock items arelisted only for the warehouses you indicated at theWarehouse selection option.

ABC classselection

You use this option to select stock items based on the ABCclassification assigned to them (Stock Code Maintenance).

Ensure that you have run the ABC Analysis program to assigneach stock item to its correct class.

Stock OptionsThe following table indicates the effect of selecting/deselecting the various Stock options:

Stock Options Selection All stock items Any monthlyactivity

Inactive stock items

Report Type Report includes allstock items.

Report includesstock items againstwhich any month-to-date sales orother activity hasbeen recorded.

Report includesstock items againstwhich no activityhas been recordedsince a specifiedcut-off date.


Selected Quantity on hand isnot checked.

Quantity on hand isnot checked.

Quantity on hand isnot checked.


Deselected Excludeswarehouses with

Excludeswarehouses with

Excludeswarehouses with

| Reports | 495


zero quantity onhand.

zero quantity onhand, unless someactivity is recorded.

zero quantity onhand.


Selected Not applicable. Includeswarehousesagainst which onlyadjustments wererecorded.

Ignoresadjustments.


Deselected Not applicable. Ignoresadjustments.

Excludeswarehousesagainst whichadjustments wererecorded.

Show allwarehouses

Selected A stock item islisted in all selectedwarehouses if itmeets the criteriain at least onewarehouse.

A stock item islisted in all selectedwarehouses if itmeets the criteriain at least onewarehouse.

A stock item islisted in all selectedwarehouses if itmeets the criteriain at least onewarehouse.

Show allwarehouses

Deselected A stock itemis listed onlyin the selectedwarehouse(s) inwhich it meets thecriteria.

A stock itemis listed onlyin the selectedwarehouse(s) inwhich it meets thecriteria.

A stock itemis listed onlyin the selectedwarehouse(s) inwhich it meets thecriteria.

Report FiltersThe options on this tab page enable you to indicate additional criteria according to which the report mustbe generated.




This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to include stock codes in the report.• Supplier selection

This enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the report. The default supplier isdefined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Replenishment).


This enables you to include stock items for a selection of products classes in the report. The productclass is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Stock CodeDetails).


• Cycle count selection

This enables you to include stock items based on the cycle count number assigned to the stock items(Stock Code Maintenance - Replenishment).

| Reports | 496





report.













Stock Take ExceptionYou use the Stock Take Exception program to print a selective list of stock items according to a cut-offdate when last a stock count was performed.

You typically use this program in a situation where you are not running a full stock take, but merelycounting and checking stock.

The program is designed to work in two phases. In the first phase, you run the Perpetual stock optionto update the last stock count date for the selected stock items with the current system date. When

| Reports | 497


you perform and confirm a stock take, the Stock Take Confirmation program updates the count date.However, if you merely counted and checked the stock, but did not use the Stock Take Confirmationprogram, then you can use the Perpetual stock option to update the count date.

Once the count dates have been updated, you can re-run the report using the Cycle count variance option,which is the second phase. This enables you to print a selective list of stock items where the last stockcount date is prior to a specific Stock check date which you enter. This enables you to check when a countwas last done for the stock items selected.

You would normally use the Stock Take Exception program in conjunction with a manual or offline systemof count cycles.


Field Values DescriptionSequence

Stock code Select this to generate the report in order of stock codes.

Description Select this if you want the report to be printed in order of stockcode descriptions.

Supplier Select this if you want the report to be printed in order ofsuppliers.

Product class Select this if you want the report to be printed in order ofproduct classes.


Select this to print the report in a user-defined sequence.

If you select this option, then at the time of printing the reportyou will be required to enter the name of the tag-file to be used.


Note:This option is not available when using SYSPROReporting Services.

Report type

Perpetual stock Select this to update the last stock count date for selectivestock items with the current system date.

Cycle countvariance

Select this to print a selective list of stock items where the laststock count date is prior to the entered Stock check date fieldbelow.

Stock check date You use this field to enter the stock check date to use with theCycle count variance option.

ABC classselection

You use this field to select stock items based on the ABCclassification assigned to them (Stock Code Maintenance).


| Reports | 498




This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) you want to include in the report.• Supplier selection

This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the report.

The default supplier is defined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).• Cycle count selection

This enables you to select stock items based on the cycle count number assigned to the stock code(Stock Code Maintenance).


This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to include stock items in the report.• Product class selection

This enables you to indicates the product class(es) for which you want to include stock items in thereport.

The product class is defined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).





report.








| Reports | 499


Field Values DescriptionIf you indicated that you want to include only a single item fromthe selection, then you use this field to enter that item. Thisapplies where no field is displayed in which to indicate thesingle item.





Warehouse ExceptionYou use the Warehouse Exception program to print a selective list of stock items based on variouswarehouse indicators.

This report can be run at any time.

This report is useful when the Requirements Planning module is not installed, because it indicates theamount of stock on order with your supplier or in transit to the selected warehouse(s) as well as theamount of stock for which you have customer orders.

Minimum, maximum and safety stock level quantities defined for your stocked items (Warehouses forStock Code) are indicated on the report so that you can take them into account when considering thequantities you need to order from your supplier / factory.



Stock code Select this to generate the report in order of stock codes.

Description Select this if you want the report to be generated in order ofstock code descriptions.

Product class Select this if you want the report to be generated in order ofproduct classes.

Supplier Select this if you want the report to be generated in order ofsuppliers.





| Reports | 500


Field Values DescriptionNote:This option is not available in the SRS format of thereport.

Include options

Available less thanzero

Select this to include stock items that have a Quantity Availableless than zero.

This enables you to identify those items where the availablequantity is negative. This situation occurs when there isinsufficient stock on hand to satisfy your customer ordersimmediately because the quantity on hand is less than thequantity allocated to sales orders.

Available equalszero

Select this to include stock items that have a zero QuantityAvailable.

This enables you to identify those items where the availablequantity is zero. This situation occurs when you have allocatedall the stock on hand to sales orders (i.e. the quantity allocatedto sales orders equals the quantity on hand).

Available greaterthan zero

Select this to include stock items that have a Quantity Availablegreater than zero.

This enables you to identify those items where the availablequantity is greater than zero. This situation occurs when youhave more stock on hand than the quantity allocated to salesorders.

On purchase order Select this to include stock items for which there is at least oneoutstanding purchase order.

On back order Select this to include stock items for which there is at least onesales order on backorder.

This enables you to identify those items for which there is aquantity on back order for your customer. This situation occurseither when you have insufficient stock on hand to ship to yourcustomers or when the quantity ordered is automatically placedon back order at the time of creating the sales order.

Goods in transit Select this to include stock items for which there is at least onegoods in transit transaction which has not been receipted in tothe receiving warehouse.

Select this option to identify those items for which there is aquantity in transit to the selected warehouse. This situationoccurs when stock is transferred from one warehouse toanother.

Available less thanminimum

Select this to include stock items if the Quantity Available isless than the Minimum quantity defined for the stock item.

This enables you to identify those items for which the quantityavailable is less than the quantity allocated to sales orders

| Reports | 501


Field Values Descriptionand is less than the quantity on hand and below the minimumquantity for the selected warehouse.

If the Minimum quantity is zero against the stock code(Warehouses for Stock Code), then the item is not includedin the report. This is because the system considers a value ofzero to indicate that the minimum quantity is not defined.

Available less thansafety

Select this to include stock items if the Quantity Available isless than the Safety stock level defined for the stock item.

This enables you to identify those items for which the quantityavailable is less than the safety stock level defined for theselected warehouse. This situation occurs when the quantityallocated to sales orders is less than the quantity on hand andbelow the safety stock level for the selected warehouse.

If the Safety stock level is zero against the stock code(Warehouses for Stock Code), then the item is not includedin the report. This is because the system considers a value ofzero to indicate that the safety stock level is not defined.

Available greaterthan maximum

Select this to include stock items if the Quantity Available isgreater than the Maximum quantity defined for the stock item.

This enables you to identify those items for which thequantity available is greater than that defined for the selectedwarehouse. This situation occurs when the quantity allocatedto sales orders is less than the quantity on hand and above themaximum quantity for the selected warehouse.

If you indicated that the Maximum quantity of an item requiredto be stocked in a warehouse at any point in time is zero(Warehouses for Stock Code) then that item is not selectedfor printing if you select this option.

In transitconversion cleared

Select this to print details of any warehouse transfers clearedduring the conversion process to Goods in Transit transfers.

Select All Select this to set all Include options to selected.

Deselect All Select this to set all Include options to deselected.

Because most of the options are selected by default, you canuse this option to deselect all the Include options and thenselect only those you require.

Notifications This option is only available in the SRS version of the report.

Show multipleexceptionmessages

By default, if a stock item matches more than one of theexceptions selected for inclusion, then only the first exceptionencountered is listed on the report.

Select this to indicate all exception messages for each stockitem on the report and not only the first exception encountered.

ABC classselection

You use this field to select stock items based on the ABCclassification assigned to them (Stock Code Maintenance).

| Reports | 502


Field Values DescriptionEnsure that you have run the ABC Analysis program to assigneach stock item to its correct class.

Report FiltersThe options on this tab page enable you to indicate additional criteria according to which you want togenerate the report.




This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to include stock items in the report.• Supplier selection

This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the report. Thedefault supplier is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program(Replenishment).


This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of products classes in the report. Theproduct class is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (StockCode Details).





report.






When defining the list, you use the Add function to add items tothe list. These items are then displayed in a listview. Incorrectly

| Reports | 503


Field Values Descriptionadded items can be removed from the list by highlighting themand selecting the Remove function.







Report DetailsIf a stock item matches more than one of the exceptions selected for inclusion, then only the first exceptionencountered is listed on the report. However, if you select the option Notifications - Show all exceptionmessages, then all exception messages are printed against the item.

The following exception messages may be printed:

Exception Message

Available less than zero Avail<0

Available equals zero Avail=0

Available greater than zero Avail>0

On purchase order On order

On back order On B/order

Goods in transit In transit

Available less than minimum Below min.

Available less than safety Below safe

Available above maximum Above max.

Superseded Clearing StockYou use the Superseded Clearing Stock program to print a list of all clearing stock items and/or stockitems which have reached their supersession date by the specified cut-off date.


| Reports | 504



Sequence This option enables you to indicate the order in which you wantto generate the information on the report.

Stock code Select this to print the report in stock code order.

Description Select this to print the report in stock code description order.

Supplier Select this to print the report in order of

Select this to print the report in supplier code order.

Product class Select this to print the report in product class order.





This option is not available when you are generating the reportusing SYSPRO Reporting Services.

Include

Clearing stock Select this to include stock codes that have been assigneda status of Clear (Stock Code Maintenance - Stock CodeDetails).

Clearing stock refers to stock codes that have been assigned astatus of Clear (Stock Code Maintenance) and indicates thatthe item must be sold or cleared as a matter of urgency.

Superseded stock Select this to include stock codes that have been assigned asupersession date (Stock Code Maintenance) after which theitem should no longer be available for resale.

Stock on hold Select this to include stock codes that have been placed onhold (see Stock Code Maintenance).

Print details forstock on hold

Select this to print details for stock items which are on hold.This option is only enabled if you selected to include stock onhold.

Print alternatestock codes

Select this to print any substitute stock items that have beendefined (Alternate Stock Codes).

Supersession date You use this field to select the supercession date if youselected to include Superseded stock.

ABC codeselection

You use this option to select stock items based on the ABCclassification assigned to them (Stock Code Maintenance).


| Reports | 505




This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) you want to include in the report.• Supplier selection

This enables you to indicate the supplier(s) for whom you want to include stock items in the report. Thedefault supplier is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program.


This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of products classes in the report. Theproduct class is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (StockCode Details).





report.










| Reports | 506


Field Values DescriptionThis field is only enabled if you selected the Range option.



Purchasing Work SheetYou use the Purchasing Work Sheet program to produce a report which can be used as a tool to assistyou in deciding which stock items must be purchased.

This decision can be based on the calculation of free stock or future free stock, together with the variouscriteria selected.


Field Values DescriptionSequence You use this field to indicate the sequence in which you want to

print the report.

Available sequences include:


Part category You use this field to indicate the part categories for which youwant to print the report.

Part categories are defined against stock items on theDescriptive tab of the Stock Code Maintenance program.

Available options include:

• All

Note:Items defined as Notional parts (Stock CodeMaintenance - Descriptive tab) are not included inthe report.

• Made in• Bought out• Sub contracted• Phantom part• Co-product• By-product

Report options

Detailed Select this to print the details of each selected warehouse.

| Reports | 507


Field Values DescriptionThe information printed for a detailed report is based on thecalculation applied to each warehouse. Only if the calculatedvalues fall within the specified criteria are details of thatwarehouse printed.

Summary Select this to print a summary of the value of all warehousesselected per stock code.

The information printed for a summary report is based on thecalculation applied to the totals of all the warehouses for agiven stock item. Only if the calculated values fall within thespecified criteria are details of that warehouse printed.






This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) you want to include in the report.• Stock code selection

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) that you want to include in the report.• Supplier selection

This enables you to indicate the supplier(s) for which you want to include stock items in the report.

The default supplier is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program(Replenishment tab).

• Buyer selection

This enables you to indicate the buyer(s) for which you want to include stock items in the report.

The default buyer is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program(Replenishment tab).




report.



| Reports | 508


Field Values DescriptionSingle Select this to indicate a single item from the selection to include

in the report.








CriteriaThe following criteria can be defined on this tab page:

Field Values DescriptionInclude MPSitems

This option enables you to define th stock items to be includedbased on their MPS status.

A stock item is defined as an MPS item on the Production tabof the Stock Code Maintenance program.

Yes Select this to include stock items defined as MPS items in thereport.

No Select this to exclude stock items defined as MPS items in thereport.

Only Select this to include only stock items defined as MPS items inthe report.

Include statisticalparts

Statistical parts are items which have been excluded from thecumulative lead time calculation. As a result, if you are usingMaterial Requirements Planning (MRP) you will not obtainadequate forward warning of the need to purchase these items.

This report should be used to make purchases based on theirindependent historical demand profile rather than rely onMRP’s dependency-driven forecast.

Yes Select this to include stock items defined as statistical items inthe report.

| Reports | 509


Field Values DescriptionNo Select this to exclude stock items defined as statistical items in

the report.

Only Select this to include only stock items defined as statisticalitems in the report.

Calculation Calculations can be applied to the accumulated values fromall warehouses, or the values held against each individualwarehouse.

If printing a detailed report, then the calculation is applied toeach warehouse and details for the warehouse are only printedfor those warehouses matching the selection criteria.

If printing a summary report, then the calculation is applied tothe totals of all warehouses for a given stock code and onlythose stock codes matching the selection criteria are printed.

Criteria

All Select this to include all stock codes.

Below minimum Select this to include only those stock codes where the quantityon hand is below minimum.

Below safety Select this to include only those stock codes where the quantityon hand is below the safety stock level.

Above maximum Select this to include stock codes where the quantity on hand isabove maximum.

Based on

Free stock Select this if you want the calculation to be based on freestock.

Free stock calculation:

Quantity on hand - sales order allocations - WIP allocations +quantity in inspection

This option is only enabled if you do not select the Criteria as'All'.

Future free stock Select this if you want the calculation to be based on future freestock.

Future free stock calculation:

Quantity on hand - sales order allocations - WIP allocations +quantity in inspection + quantity on order + quantity in transit

This option is only enabled if you do not select the Criteria as'All'.

Buying rule You use this field to select the buying rules of the stock itemsyou want to include in the report.

Buying rules are defined against stock items in the Batchingrule field on the Replenishment tab of the Stock CodeMaintenance program.

| Reports | 510


Field Values DescriptionYou can select to include items for all or a single buying rule inthe report.

ABC code This option enables you to enter the ABC classification code ofthe items you want to include in the report.

You can select to include items for all or a single ABC code inthe report.



Report DetailsThe header fields M-12 through to M-01 indicate the last 12 months’ sales/issue quantities, where M-12indicates the quantity sold 12 months ago and M-01 indicates the quantity sold last month.

Inventory Goods in InspectionYou use the Inventory Goods in Inspection program to print a list of all goods that are in inspection, on-site and off-site.

The report is generated in GRN within stock code within warehouse sequence. Subtotaling occurs uponchange of stock code/warehouse combination.

The report can be used as a mechanism to perform a stock take of goods in inspection. This is particularlyuseful for MRP users as the Requirements Calculation program regards these quantities as being instock. In addition, the report can be used to supplement the purchase commitment (i.e. Cash flow). Sincetwo-tier inspection reduces the purchase order (but does not increase stock/GRN suspense until thegoods are inspected and accepted) any goods in inspection should be viewed as an impending liability/commitment on a par with outstanding purchase orders.



Include non-stocked items

Select this to include non-stocked items in the report.

Include serialnumbers

Select this to print serial numbers receipted into inspection forserialized items.

Include revisionrelease

Select this to print the revision/release per GRN for ECC-controlled items.

The wording for this field (as well as the column headingson the report) defaults to the text defined against the User-defined fields: Revision and Release (Bill of Materials Setup -Engineering Change Control tab).

| Reports | 511


Field Values DescriptionThe Include Revision/Release option is available only ifEngineering Change Control is installed (Company Setup -Registration tab).

In addition, the stock control level must be set to Revisionor Release (Bill of Materials Setup - Engineering ChangeControl tab).

New page perwarehouse

Select this to print the details for each warehouse on aseparate page.




This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) you want to include in the report.




report.









| Reports | 512


Field Values DescriptionTo You use this field to enter the last item in the range of the

selected item to include in the report.




Report DetailsThe values printed on the report are calculated as follows:

• On-site qty:

base quantity - (quantity accepted into stock + quantity scrapped + quantity rejected)

Where:

Base quantity is the higher of quantity advised or quantity counted. The quantity counted is always usedif the quantity counted flag has been checked.

• Total quantity:


Where:

Off-site quantity indicates goods that have been returned to the supplier.• Committed value:


For foreign currency purchase prices, the calculation of the commitment value takes account ofconversion factors.

• Rej qty.

This is the number of items rejected but not yet returned to the supplier.• Off-site qty.

This is the number of items rejected and returned to the supplier.

Goods in Inspection OffsiteYou use the Goods in Inspection Offsite program to print a list of all goods that are in inspection and off-site (goods that have been returned to the supplier).

The report is generated in GRN within stock code within supplier sequence. Subtotalling occurs uponchange of stock code/supplier combination. The report can be used as a mechanism to perform a stocktake of goods in inspection which have been recorded as returned to the supplier. This is particularly usefulfor MRP users as the Requirements Calculation program regards these quantities as being in stock.



| Reports | 513


Field Values DescriptionInclude non-stocked items

Select this to include non-stocked items in the report.

Include serialnumbers

Select this to include serial numbers for the serialized item inthe report.

New page persupplier

Select this to print the details for each supplier on a separatepage.



This enables you to indicate the supplier(s) for whom you want to print the report.• Stock code selection

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which you want to generate the report.




report.










| Reports | 514


Field Values DescriptionThis field is only enabled if you selected the Range option.



Inventory Amendment JournalYou use the Inventory Amendment Journal program to produce a list of all stock items that have beenadded, updated, or deleted using the Stock Code Maintenance program.

Note:You can only run this program if you enabled the option: Amendment journals required (InventorySetup).



Reprint Select this to only print journals that have been previouslyprinted.

Print additions Select this to print details of stock items added to the file.

Note:You can only select this option if you enabled theoption: Yes, with additions at the Amendment journalsrequired field (Inventory Setup).

Print changes Select this to print details of changes made to existing items

Print deletions Select this to print details of items that have been deleted.

Delete journal fileafter report

Select this to delete the journal file once the report has run.

Note:If you select this option then you will be unable toreprint journals.



List of BuyersYou use the List of Buyers program to print a selective range of buyers held on file.

| Reports | 515


Buyers are configured using the Buyers program and assigned to stock items using the Stock CodeMaintenance program. Buyers who are assigned to stock items in the Inventory module are responsiblefor the purchase of these items.

Report Options

SelectionsYou can define the following selection criteria according to which the report must be generated:

• Buyer selection

You use this field to indicate a selective range of buyers for which you want to generate the report.




report.












| Reports | 516



List of Inventory Costs UmYou use the List of Inventory Costs Um program to generate a report of inventory cost units of measurecurrently defined.

Inventory costs units of measure are maintained using the Cost Unit of Measure program.

List of Inventory Cost Units of MeasureThis screen is displayed when you select the List option from the File menu of the Cost Unit of Measureprogram.

Field Values DescriptionPrint Select this to generate a report of all inventory cost units of

measure currently held on file.

Close Select this to return to the previous screen without generatingthe report.



Inventory NotationsYou use the Inventory Notations program to generate a list of inventory notations currently defined.

Inventory notations are maintained using the Notes menu of the Inventory Query program.


Field Values DescriptionSequence

Notation type Select this to generate the report in notation type sequence.

If you select this sequence then each notation type selectedis printed together with the stock item(s) against which thatnotation is defined.

Stock code Select this to generate the report in stock code sequence.

If you select this sequence then each stock item selected islisted together with the notation type(s) defined against it.

Include notationtype

This option enables you to indicate the types of notations youwant to include in th report.

The following notation types can be included in the report:

• Dangerous goods handling text• Inspection text• Purchase order additional text

| Reports | 517


Field Values Description• Sales order additional text• Technical specification• Job narrations



Inventory notations are defined against specific stock items.

This selection option enables you to define the stock item(s) for which you want to generate the report.




report.











| Reports | 518




List of PlannersYou use the List of Planners program to print a selective range of planners held on file.

A planner indicates the person in a company responsible for planning the manufacture of made-in stockitems. Planners are assigned to stock items within the Inventory module.

Planners can be used as a selection criterion in various Requirements Planning reports. For example: Ifyou have a number of planners within a planning department (each responsible for a different product line)you can generate reports selectively by planner.

Report Options


• Planner selection

You use this field to indicate a selective range of planners you want to print.




report.








| Reports | 519


Field Values DescriptionIf you indicated that you want to include only a single item fromthe selection, then you use this field to enter that item. Thisapplies where no field is displayed in which to indicate thesingle item.





List of WarehousesYou use the List of Warehouses program to print a list of all warehouses held on file..

Warehouses are maintained using the Inventory Warehouses program.

Report Options



You use this field to indicate the warehouse(s) that must be included as a selection criterion whenprinting the report.


Note:

Not all of these options may be available for each selection.


report.






| Reports | 520


Field Values DescriptionWhen defining the list, you use the Add function to add items tothe list. These items are then displayed in a listview. Incorrectlyadded items can be removed from the list by highlighting themand selecting the Remove function.







Inventory Label PrintYou use the Inventory Label Print program to print up to 9999 labels for each stock code selected.


Field Values DescriptionLabel sequence

Stock code Select this if you want the labels to be printed in order of stockcodes.

Description Select this if you want the labels to be printed in order of stockcode descriptions.

Supplier Select this if you want the labels to be printed in order ofsuppliers.

Product class Select this if you want the labels to be printed in order ofproduct classes.


Select this to print the labels in a user-defined sequence.



Warehouse toprint

You use this field to indicate the warehouse for which you wantto generate labels.

| Reports | 521


Field Values DescriptionLabels to print You use this field to indicate the number of labels you want to

generate for each stock code selected.

Other Options Select this to print labels selectively for stock codes accordingto their ABC classification, Product class and Cycle count.

Alignment Select this to print a test label enabling you to verify that thelabels are correctly aligned in your printed.

Print Select this to print your labels.

Close Select this to exit the program without printing any labels.



This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which you want to print labels.• Supplier selection

This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the label print. The defaultsupplier is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program.




report.








If you indicated that you want to include only a single item fromthe selection, then you use this field to enter that item. This

| Reports | 522


Field Values Descriptionapplies where no field is displayed in which to indicate thesingle item.



User Defined SequenceThis screen is displayed when you select the Print function and you selected the Label sequence > Userdefined sequence option.

Field Values DescriptionTag-file name You use this field to indicate the name of the file that contains

the list of stock codes for which you want to print labels.

OK Select this to use the tag file indicated to generate the labels.


Other OptionsThis screen is displayed when you select the Options function to indicate additional selection criteriaaccording to which you want to print your labels.

Field Values DescriptionABC class You use this field to select stock items based on the ABC

classification assigned to them (Stock Code Maintenance).



This option enables you to include stock items for a selection ofproducts classes in the label print. The product class is definedagainst the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenanceprogram (Descriptive tab).

If a specific product class is entered, then only stock itemsbelonging to that product class are included in the label print.


You use this field to select stock items based on the cyclecount number that you have assigned them (Stock CodeMaintenance).

Close Select this to accept your selections and to return to theprevious screen.